Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout4.261 Original Contract1 1 1 1 1 PROJECT MANUAL FOR: PORT ANGELES PLBLIC LIBRARY 1 1 1 1 1 BID PACKAGE February 24, 1997 1 e OVI4'M W edge/ Set No: Z ADDENDUM #2 03/20/97 To Contract Documents for: PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Notice to Bidders: You are hereby notified of the following changes and additions to the contract documents for this project. This addendum may apply to any or all contracts and subcontracts. Pre -Bid Site Inspection Attendees March 19. 1997 Bruce Berkimer Bruck Lindquist Sean Coleman Stan Birkedahl Brad Howell Bob Bukowski Greg Parrish Roger Goettling Bob Schmitt Walt Dalrymple Gordon Edwards Jerry Mann Chet Decker Kurt Bruch Ted Simpson Chuck Parrish Lynn Bruch George Stratton Stuart J. Bonney Numberous clarification requests came up at the pre-bid meeting. The following list of clarifications includes these items: Bidders were then given a tour of the existing Service Center facilities as well as the (2) on -site residences to be removed. CLARIFICATIONS: James Robinson Company Wade Perrow Company Bruch Bruch Construction John Korsmo Construction Lugo Construction, Inc. Lumpkin General Contractor Primo Construction Goettling Construction Schmitt's Sheet Metal Aldergrove Construction, Inc. Aldergrove Construction, Inc. Angeles Electric W.B. Dennis Co./Rocket Mechanical Horizon Excavating/Utilities Angeles Electric Primo Construction Bruch Bruch Construction North Olympic Library Lindberg Architects (360)377 -0066 (206)851 -9309 (360)452 -5388 (206)582 -6712 (206)838 -7655 (206)329 -1129 (360)683 -5447 (360)452 -5581 (360)457 -6452 (360)457 -2067 (360)457 -2067 (360)452 -9264 (360)457 -4242 (360)452 -9976 (360)452 -9264 (360)683 -5447 (360)452 -5388 (360)457 -4464 (360)452 -6116 Daily Work Hours to be within the hours of 7AM IOPM. Ordinaces prohibit work beyond these hours. Weekend work hours between 7AM 1 OPM allowed on Saturday only. (2) week reqd. flushing period for H.V.A.C. can occur after Substanial Completion, thus not subject to liquidated damages clause. Contract will be awarded following P.A. City Council Meeting of Tuesday, April 1, 1997. Columns in Entry and along Grid B are per structural but `jacketed' in 12 "x 12" chamfered concrete to a height of 6" above finished ceiling. The concrete stain applicator that developed the control sample is: Paul West CMS Company (206) 481 -8632 Prime Subcontractors (Mechanical Electrical) need not be bonded as they are under the umbrella of the General Contractors bonding for the Construction Contract. The existing Service Center roofing material need be removed only as necessary to allow bearing of new construction directly onto existing T &G decking. The only Chair Rail location is on the north wall between Grids B C. Numberous questions arose in regard to the Fire Sprinkler design. These clarifications are addressed in attachment #11. PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES Section 07533_ Single -ply Membrane Roofing; Page 07533 -1, line 27, add the following; Wind Resistce Uplift: Provide membrane, fasteners and installation methods as necessary to meet FM I -90 rating. Section 09220. Portland Cement Plasters Page 09220 -3, line 28, add the following; Additional Materials for Exterior Soffits Control Joints: Galvanized Steel, USG #093, or approved. Soffit Base Coat Acrylic based product for mixing with portland cement plaster: "Primus Adhesive" as manufactured by Dryvit, or approved. Reinforcing Meshy Balanced, open -weave treated glass fiber, weighing 5.7 oz. per sq. yd. Page 09220 -5, line 6, Delete and replace with the following: At Exterior Soffits, apply control joints, base coat, mesh and finish coat to taped and sanded gypsum substrate: Install control joints at a max. spacing of 20'. Verify final layout with Architect. Apply soffit base coat to a thickness of 1/16 Embed reinforcing mesh immediately following base coat application. Overlap joints in substrate by a minimum of 8 Apply finish coat per mnfr. after base coat has dried. Section 16400 Electrical Distribution Page 16400 -1, line 11 12, change to read as follows: Utility Company charges will be paid by the Contractor. Contact City Light of Port Angeles for estimate of Contractor costs related to installation of primary power. DRAWING CHANGES Sheet A -05 Exterior Elevations: Add downspouts Front Canopy per revision Drawing R -7 Sheet A -13 Reflected Ceiling Plan;. Northernmost Ceiling Area (between grids C D) noted as: "EXPOSED ACOUSTICAL METAL DECKING" should be noted as: "VAULTED G.W.B." Detail 18 -A14 indication in this area is correct, however, note following change to Sheet A -14. Sheet A -14 Details: Detail 1 -A14; Delete this detail in its entirety and substitute Drawing R -9 in its place. Detail 2 -A14 Delete this detail in its entirety and substitute Drawing R -10 in its place. Detail 18 -A14 is incorrect. Substitute attached Revision Drawing R -8 in its place. Sheet C -2 Site Utilities Add the following note to the existing water line in Peabody Street: "Existing 8 inch A.C." Add the following note to the existing sanitary sewer pipe in Lauridsen Blvd.: "Existing 21" Sanitary Sewer (material unknown)" Change the indication of the domestic water line running from the main to the building from: "2 1/2 inch" to... "3 inch HDPE (pressure class 200). Also add the following notes in regard to the water service: Provide bushings down to 2" meter and the 2 1/2" backflow preventer. Provide HDPE fittings as needed with same pressure rating requirements as the pipe. Sheet C -3 Civil Grading Plan: Add the contour 227 at the swale along the north property line. See attached drawing R -6. Sheet E -4 Electrical Schedules Lighting Fixture Schedule, Fixture F -3 (152) Pendant Mounted 4' 2 lamp fluorescent change to read: Fixture F -3 (152) Pendant Mounted 4' 3 lamp fluorescent PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION APPROVALS Section 04200, Unit Masonry: Interstate Brick Section 07190, Water Repellents: Chem -Trete BSM -40VOC Section 07410, Metal Roofing: Fabral "Slim Seal 816" and NCI "Verti -Ioc 18" Section 07533, Single -ply Roofing: Carlisle "Sure Weld" and Stevens "Hi -Tuff EP" Section 07820, Skylight Structures: Skywall Translucent Systems Section 09220, Portland Cement Plaster Parex. Inc., Acrylic Finishes Section 09255, Gypsum Board Assemblies: Scafco, and Knorr Section 10522, Fire Extinguishers Cabinets: JL Industries Fire Extinguishers Cabinet Model 5EW/ Ambassador 1817F1 Section 10900, Misc. Specialties: Access Doors: JL Industries Model TM FD Corner Guards: IPC Model 150 160D Roof Hatch: Laneairie Model RHA3844 Note: The following Section 15 substitutions are approved for bidding, subject to all requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Equipment is to provide the same performance, including acoustical performance, and have the same dimensions and weights as the equipment used for the basis of the design. Section 15100, Valves Section 15400, Hot Water Circ. Pump Backflow Preventer Section 15930, Grilles and Diffusers Zone Terminal Boxes Red White Grundfos Pump Ames Company Tuttle Bailey Tuttle Bailey Section 16500, Fixture Schedule: F1 Metalux 2P3GX- 332S361- 120V -M1 M2RNT81LL120V F2 Metalux MC -232A 125- 120V- M2RNT81 LL 1 20V F3 Linear P6121- B- 2- ET8- 120V- PBL- B24- BW -NO -4' F6 Halo L650P F6 Halo L700P L270P F7 Metalux SS- 232- 120V- M2RNT81LL120V F8 Sure -liter UNH- 1- SGW -DH F8A Sure -lites CC -3 -WH F9 Failsafe MTS- 32- IK12- 120V- M2RNT81LL120V F10 Metalux WS- 232A- 120V- M2RNT81LL120V F i l Dabbco 733 W 13 -RFR FRESNEL F12 Devine SECH2O- A- 250HPS -MT -D3 -DBZ -BOAS F12 McGraw Edison SSS5A25SFM*1 F13 Devine SECH2O- B- 250HPS -MT -D3 -DBZ -BOAS F13 McGraw Edison SSS5A25SFM *2 F14 Lumark HPNW- PC- 70- 120V -LL F15 McGraw Edison BR20071294BZ -LL ATTACHMENTS Clarifications regarding Fire Sprinklers Revision Drawing R -6 Revision Drawing R -7 Revision Drawing R -8 Revision Drawing R -9 Revision Drawing R -10 END OF ADDENDUM #2 (1) page (1) page (1) page (1) page (1) page (1) page 23 25 SS is 5 'vn, IN S tA G �P� 2 1- 5 PER STRUCTURAL 8" 'ZEE' FURRING PER DETAIL 1 -404 SACK -TO -BACK w/ 51/2" LT. GA. STUDS 624" oc. 51/2" STD. K SUSPENDED (LING 9' -8" AFF. BRACING g NOMINAL 8' -O" oz. DETAIL SCALE: 1" 1 -0" r DETAIL 18 —A14 REVISION DRAWING #8 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #2 5 Df YWALL 5 /e" IRRYWALL BULLNOSE CORNERS SFDET006.DUJ NOTE. KALWALL SEALING TAPE TYPICAL ALL JOINTS FLASHING TO MATCI- METAL ROOFING 24ga METAL ROOF ING BUILDING FELT i, 7 3" STEEL DE NG PER STRUCTURAL 0 DETAIL 1 SCALE: 3" 1' -0" DETAIL 1 -A14 REVISION DRAWING #9 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #2 2 KALWALL PANEL C5x6.1 CHANNEL 1" RIGID INSULATION o/ lUSxiO BEAM TOP CHORD OF STEEL TRUSS PER STRUCTURAL KALDETOIDU.. 1 /y" E),T 4" R 3" S PER 2 KALWALL PANEL TURN UP PANS FLASHING= TO MATCH METAL ROOFING 24ga METAL ROOFING BUILDING FELT NEOPRENE CLOSURE TRUSS BRACING B SCALE: 3" 1' -0" DETAIL 2 -A14 REVISION DRAWING #10 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #2 NOTE: KALWALL SEALING TAPE CAL ALL JOINTS C5x6.1 CHANNEL INSULATION I, WSxlO BEAM KALDETO2DWG This letter is in response to the questions asked by the Dennis Company, Port Angeles, in a March 19 letter to Lindberg Architects These questions arose at the project walkthrough on March 19 1 Are the design requirements for the sprinkler system established by the Czty Fire Marshal or by the Insuring Agency? The City Fire Marshal is the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and interprets the Code requirements for the system. We have been informed that there will not be an Insuring Agency review of the system design. 2 What is the i, zard classification? The building is to be designed as an Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy, with Large Stack Areas, as designated by the Fire Marshal, designed as an Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy. If the Fire Marshal so agrees, the majority of the Library may be designed as a Light Hazard Occupancy, as is permitted by NFPA 13. 3. What is the Iodation of the innccated flow information? Fire flow information listed in the specifications was provided by the Port angel es Fire Department as:tested for hydrant 41-4 at the Location of Peabody and Blvd. NE, tested on April 9, 1993. 4. Specifications include both weer alarm bells and electric bell,. .tore both required? The alarm bell utilized may be either a water alarm bell or an electric bell, as approved by the Fire Marshal 5. Are flexible connections required above and below each halve? No Flexible connections beyond NFPA 13 requirements are not necessary. 6. Must the air c mpressor be tank mounted? Yes. The air compressor is to be a tank mounted unit 7 Must the Interior pig system be flushed? Yes the entire system is to be flushed. 8. Must sprinkler system .shop drawings be 1/4" 1' -0 "scale? No. Shop drawings at 118" scale are acceptable as brig as they are clear and understandable. EXHIBIT #11 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #2 ADDENDUM #1 To Contract Documents for. PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Notice to Bidders: You are hereby notified of the following changes and additions to the contract documents for this project. This addendum may apply to any or all contracts and subcontracts: CLARIFICATIONS: Mandatory pre -bid site inspection will be held at .11:043 am, March D, 1997 at the North Olympic Library System Service Center, 2210 South Peabody, Port Angeles, WA. Contractor is to pay for all municipal Permits and Fees (building permit and plan check $18,556.00) (other fees additional) Data Cabling described on drawing E -2 is to run from each floor, wall, or raceway mounted data outlet shown on the plan to the terminal board designated for each (with additional cable at locations specifically noted as requiring more than one run). PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES: information for Bidders and Checklist; Paragraph 5,change "shall be completed within .3_61 working days after" to read "shall be completed within M5 CALENDAR days after $upplementary conditions 00800; Page 35, paragraph 11.1.2, Clarification of Item 2. If Contractor's comprehensive general liability policy (Item 2) does not exclude coverage for contractural liability (Item 3), then contractor need not satisfy duplicate liability limits and the higher limit would be required. If Contractor's comprehensive general liability policy excludes coverage for contractural liability, then he must carry both policies (Item 2 and Item 3) to the limits specified. Section 02711. Foundation Drainage; Page 02711 -1, delete Line 52 and replace with: "Extend system to daylight into swales at or above elevation 228.0. Do not connect to storm drain system 3/13/97 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #1, PAGE 1 1111111111111 1111111!:* gill 1111 111 runN111144;11 11111111111 Illliiiii ..:iiiu.1 111811111 111111111111 c 1 SCALE: 1 /8" 1' -0" IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIQu ..11111111111I11111q tI! II11R:!U.. 1111. :91111111111111111111111111111! _i!ri lIIlII111111Ii:1! STEEL 1111 1 =9i 111111111111111 1 ON C CT TO STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM PARTIAL SOUTH ELEVATION REVISION DRAWING #7 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 04200. Unit Masnnrv, Page 04200 -1: Line 37, add the sentence: "Provide 1" chamfer at rowlock course bricks Page 04200 -1: Delete Line 49 replace with Type FBS Page 04200 -1. Line 53: Delete and replace with Color: As selected by Architect from Standard Color line /group 'C' Page 04200 -2. line 48, delete and replace with the following: Ties: Refer to drawing sheet A -9 Page 04200 -2. line 4, add the following: Provide Units with integral water repellent admixture: "DRY- BLOCK by W.R.Grace, or approved. Section 07410. Metal Roofing: Page 07410 -1. line 54, add the following: Snow Clips: Clear plastic snowguards for adhesive application, "Model 15 by Zaleski Snow Guards (203) 225 -1614, "Snow Jack" as distributed by BHP, Inc, or approved. Section 09650. Resilient Floor Coverings: Rage 09650 -1. line 48 change the phrase "low VOC" to "Non -VOC" Section 09653. Resilient Wall Base: Page 09653 -1. line 43, change the phrase "low VOC" to "Non -VOC" Section 09680. Carpet: Wage 09680 -2. line 50, insert the following: Carpet 5: Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial Style/ Pattern: Scepter 50391 Color: Prestige 91413 Construction: Tufted cut pile age Fib: 100% Monsanto LXI Type 6.6 Nylon Dye Method: Beck dyed pile Height: .344 Stiches ner inch: 11.7 Pile Weight: 42 oz primary Backing: Polypropylene Secondary Backing: Action Bac Warranty: 10 Year wear warranty Representative: Jim Harding (800) 424 -7429 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #1, PAGE 2 Carpet 6: Manufacturer: Bentley Style/ Pattern; Camden Hill III Color: CH38B -6687 Diazo Yom: Monsanto Ultron VIP Nylon Page 09680 -2. line 53, change the phrase "low VOC" to "Non -VOC" Page 09680 -3. line 36, insert the following: "Refer to pattern diagrams this section for custom border areas" Add new o ge 09680 -4 enclosed DRAWING CHANGES: Sheet A3. Floor Plaq Clarification; The counter below the slotwall in the Lobby shows differently on Sheets A -03 and A -11. A -11 is the correct configuration. The counter in room #109 shows different lengths on Sheets A -03 and A -12. A -3 is the correct dimension. Key to Symbols: Second Hatch Pattem example, delete the word "Existing" Relocate the wall between rooms #127 and 128 (including door #31, the ladder and the lockers) 18" to the West. Delete designations for carpet patterns and borders (refer to new project manual page 09680 -4) Sheet A4. Roof P1aa Incorporate reyisions outlined on revision drawing R -1 (enclosed) Sheet A9. Wall Sections and Detaibb Add new Detail 5 A9 (enclosed on revision drawing R -2) Sheet Al2. Interior ElevationZ Add zeneral not "Plastic laminate colors not designated are to selected by the Architect from domestic manufacturers" Sheet A13. Ceiling Plaq Relocate the wall between rooms #127 and 128 (including the roof hatch) 18" to the West Sheet A14 Details Detail 24 A14 Modify as outlined on revision drawing R -5 (enclosed) Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #1, PAGE 3 1 Sheet C-4. Storm Drainage Plan Dra Structure Table: DMH #2: Change Invert in (S) from 234.00 to 227.85 Pipe #5: Change slope from 1% to 16% CB #13: Change designation to CB #12 Sheet C-R. Civil Details Detail 4 /C8: Add note: "Application rate for vegetation is to be .5 lb 100 square feet. Method is by hand spreading lightly broom raking into top of biofilter bed mixture." ,Sheet E -4. Riser Diagram: Change 1" C.O. for TV located between TTB and TTB1 to 2 Change 1" C.O. located between TTB and Northland cable point of service to 2 1 rification: TV CO. P.O.S. is power pole at NE comer of project site (designated PP on Sheet C -1). Sheet S3 Roof Framing Plan Incorporate revisions outlined on revision drawing R -3 (enclosed) Plate girders designated 'PG1' on: Grid C between Grids 2 and 4 Grid C between Grids 4 and 5 Grid D between Grids 2 and 4 shall be positively cambered upward in a circular shape to a height of 3/4" at the center of each span. The plate girder on Grid D between Grids 4 and 5 now designated 'PG 1' shall be redesignated PG2'. PG2 flanges and web shall be fabricated of ASTM A572 Fy 50 KSI steel and be positively cambered upward in a circular shape to a height of 1" at the center of span. Fill in member size for beam on grid E between grid 5 and south wall of the buildingto read "W14 x 26" Spacing at open web joists spanning from grid 5 to the south wall of the building between grid E and grid F, now shown as 5 equal spaces of 7' -6" shall be changed to be (starting from grid E): 7' -6 7' -6 7' -6 8' -0 7' -0 Sheet S6 Details Detail 2 S6 Modify as outlined on revision drawing R-4 (enclosed) Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #1, PAGE 4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION APPROVALS: Section 10900, Miscellaneous specialties: Bike Rack: Creative Pipe, Inc Attachments: New project manual page 09680 -4 Revision Drawing R -1 Revision Drawing R -2 Revision Drawing R 3 Revision Drawing R-4 Revision Drawing R -5 Addendum #1 (Landscape) Addendum #1 (Mechanical) Addendum #1 (Electrical) Port Angeles Public Library END OF ADDENDUM #1 1 page 1 page 1 page 1 page 1 page 1 page 4 pages 5 pages 1 page Addendum #1, PAGE 5 LVd°31 -01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 T —s£ GE_W4L_ 4 PADS gA M E'51✓ wA- L.i4 wA`c' Cotes -1 tG-•� V ..1�. A w. -04/. OVEFFL SNOW If tl 5ERvIct aGGESS POOR ti! f i I i 3 t i b SNOU1 {P5 Lt t��t OVERFLOW 1,1 PARTIAL ROOF PLAN REVISION DRAWING R -1 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #1 ASV F55, vrizucTu F mow. r4-. i 1 1, -t 1 Is k Wit i N 4 0 5F acL PVz S,RGVAl. c.--OrtrAZTED FILL. FS?. 'beeC\ICATIO14 MI I I NM MI MN MI NM MI MI gcT TO s PL../ t iN101 t.00 F(LPtMUtJ G P1-A44 S..3 /7/ /7/ D -61-) PlEckl. of it NI erS 5EE tEctt o tee i +!J 4 5. -Pro:0s NW.. ,(4.) 'toes ti/ GiegaA up- c car k r wtt D -Au. cots:. b T A; K/�fCY> 0 's, ELO ALL GJ ►J tJ rt 1 1 1 j t Ira 5C Cow "LA'. vauxtte ',.rte 1 i 7..' 0 :t. L...,./V-:,----.----,:. W...t;?..'‘.1-1,4ii czett4 ..t.tol'Ez tikodtFtcpsot.t ckkit.4,e', iekklc...c,m). t;,-irs .-1,--c$1'.. .:4-fi' /t,c). OFUETAU' PARTIAL MODIFICATION R.4 R VISIO DRA es Public Library Addendum #1 Port Angel f1/2x 24 "x STEEL iv 0 BASE C r' STRUCTURAL 4" CHAMFER Iwo CONCRETE QLNT,4 SEE FRUCTURAL FLOOR SLAB ELEv, am) II soar 2' -a" DETAIL Y REVISION DRAWING R -5 Port Angeles Public Library Addendum #1 PARTIAL MODIFICATION OF DETAIL 24 /A14 (Two locations at southernmost entry canopy plinths) (n-p. 3/16V 0 JG:NG E GERRARD McN EAL Incorporated P.S. Land',apL ArLhtteiture L rhan I)L,it n Planning, ADDENDUM #1 (LANDSCAPE) To Contract Documents for: PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Notice to Bidders: You are hereby notified of the following changes and additions to the contract documents for this project. This addendum may apply to any or all contracts and subcontracts: DRAWING CLARIFICATIONS /ADDITIONS /CHANGES: Sheet L -2 Planting Plan Clarification: Plant Schedule: Betula jacquemontii Himalayan Birch Addition: Plant Schedule: 23 103rd ANrenue N.E Belle\ ue. WA 95004 -5689 206 454 57:3 FAX 4 ;4 4685 10' -12' ht. B full, multi trunk, 3 trunk maximum, 1" cal. each trunk minimum 0 Arbutus unedo `Compacta' 21 -42" ht. Full to ground; Strawberry Tree and spread hardened growth Changes: Plant material change at planter along Chase Street, see attached plan. Drainage swale seeded along Lauridsen Boulevard, see attached plan. Da, id McNeal, FASLA Theodore X'. Wall 11I. ASLA Len Zukier, ASLA Associate. Arthur Seidel, ASLA Craig Leuis, ASLA 3/13/97 ADDENDUM #1 1 1 PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Page Two 1 1 1 1 1 1-11 IA-} 1 VI 1 un 1 4 1 0 D.Mc NEAL GE RR 3/13/9 HRUBS MO MN 111111 MO gill M N N NM I MI MN r MI Mill IIMI w w J r JON G E J A N GERRARD McNEAL ADDENDUM #1 (LANDSCAPE) PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Page Four 3/13/97 PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Addendum No. 1 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS SHEET M -1 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SCHEDULE 1. Chanue the model number from Trane "SAHFC70" to "SXHFC70 with a horizontal discharge supply fan arrangement SHEET M -3 FLOOR PLAN PLLT BIN G 1. At the existing Service Center Building, in the vicinity of Coordinates F to G, add the following notes: "DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. All existing plumbing fixtures, water heaters and plumbing piping are to be removed. Piping is to be capped concealed below the finished floor or above future ceilings. Piping within walls that are to be removed must be removed. 2. Plumbing systems are to be removed in phases corresponding to the construction phases, so that fixtures which are to remain in service during Phase 1 construction will remain servicable. Tf this phasing requires temporary piping connections, these connections shall be installed, located in a manner which will not interfere with Phase 1 construction. 3. After the existing plumbing systems are no longer in service, the existing sanitary sewer and cold water supply piping connections are to be capped and removed from within the building area. The locations of the capped piping are to be noted on the As -Built drawings In Book Drop 122, add a 2" floor drain F.D. -1, in the location corresponding to the location shown on the foundation Plan, 1. Add a general note, as follows: "NOTE: The exact locations for the air conditioning unit and heat pumps are to be confirmed, to coordinate with the framing and with service clearance requirements." Page 1 3. In Staff Room 127, add a 1/2" C.W. connection to a refrigerator to be installed East of the counter, noted as "REFR, P-8." SHEET M -4 FLOOR PLAN HVAC PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Addendum No. 1 MECHANICAL 2, Install ductwork in the vicinity of the Roof Hatch, near Coordinates 6 -F, to clear the Roof Hatch and allow maxitnurn access to the Roof Hatch. 3. Add Return Grille sizes as follows Support Services 132, the Return Grille on West wall is to be 36" x 16 Support Services 132, the Return Grille on South wall is to be 36" x 20 Administration 147, the Return Grille on the West wall is to be 36" x 14 Administration 147, the Return Grille near the Northeast corner is to be 36" x 14 Administration 147, the Return Grille near the Southeast corner is to be 24" x 14 Ceiling return grilles, in general, are to be 24" x 24 Return grilles for air quantities less than 300 cfm may be 12" x 12 4. For Roof Drain, P -9, and Overflow Roof Drain connections, see Detail 9/ M -6. SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 15140 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 1 Page 15140 -4, Line 37, Add the following to the description of Base B 1: "Bases shall include seismic restraints SECTION 1 5780 PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 1. Page 15780 -2, Line 1, Add the following: "The air conditioning unit curb, vibration mounts and mounting shall be as shown on Detail MD -1, attached to this addendum." Page 2 2 Page 15780 -3, Line 25, Add the following: "The heat pump curb, vibration mounts and mounting shall be as shown on Detail MD -2, attached to this addendum." 3. Page 15780 -4, Line 42, Add the following: "Condensate drain traps shall be constructed with a threaded drain plug at the bottom of the trap so that the trap can be drained in freezing weather." PORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY Addendum No. 1 MECHANICAL EOUIPMENT APPROVALS Page 3 The following equipment is approved for bidding, subject to all requirements of the Plans and Specifications. Equipment is to provide the same performance, including acoustical performance, and have the same dimensions and weights as the equipment used for the basis of design. SPECIFICATION EQUIPMENT MANUF ACTURER SECTION 15100 Valves Hammond 15400 Water Heater Bradford White 15975 DDC Controls Delta Honeywell CONTINUOUS NEOPRENE SPONGE ISOLATION AND WEATHER PAD EXTRUDED ALUMINUM RAIL TOP AND BOTTOM ALUMINUM WEATHER SHIELD 1/16' THICK NYLON REINFORCED NEOPRENE WEATHER SEAL NAILER (BY MECH.) Wieland Lindgren INSULATION WEATHER UNIT CURB (BY MECH.) COVER (BY MECH.) RIGID MEC INSULATION WIND RESTRAINT N NOT TO SCALE ACU -1 ACU -1 K4OUNTNG PORT ANGELES LIBRARY SPRING SKETCH N0. MD -1 tiliaanCERO 8=g1r P 'Wulaad Lindgren CONTINUOUS HEAT PUMP SPONGE ISOLATION AND WEATHER PAD INSULATION WEATHER COVER (BY MECH.) 4 4 .4 NOT TO SCALE t\ PORT ANGELES LIBRARY NAILER (BY MECH.) UNIT CURB (BY MECH.) RIGID INSULATION (BY MECH.) BY GENERAL ROOF X HEAT PUMP MOUNTNG SKETCH NO. MD -2 n.\ ()A 70_nI\ a ('en■ nwn\ AAn_9_CU nwr. 03/13/97 3:39 om ENGINEERED ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC., 612 t3ELLE UE WAY NE STE 4201, BELLEVUE. WA 98004 PHONE (206) 454-5440 FAX (206) 454-3467 PROJECT MEMORANDUM PROJECT: PORT ANGELES LIBRARY TELCON CONFERENCE MEMO CONST REPORT X TRANSMITTAL SUBJECT: ROSS JAMIESON THE LEWIS ARCHITECTS 2800 NORTHUP WAY NE, STE 100 BELLEVUE, WA 98004 ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM Please include the following items in the Addendum: NUMBER: 95084 DATE 3/13/97 TIME BY R W BECKER PLACE 1. Drawing E I Site Plan Provide trench for Utility Co. Primary conductors. Trench to be 48" deep by 24" wide in accordance with the Utility Co. requirements. Allow 150 lineal feet in the bid. 2. Drawing El Roof Plan Revise Fixture Type F15 at the roof access to be Type F14. 3. Drawing E3 Lighting Plan In the Work Rm. (Grid Line E/5) Revise Fixture Type F 4 Down Light to be Type F9 Under Shelf Fluorescent. In the Public Restrooms the Hex Symbol S designates a ceiling mounted Occupancy Sensor. Connect the Occupancy Sensor to control the down stream lights after the first switched light fixture. Verify connection with Engineer. Fixture Type F3 mounting to be 13'9" except where shown in Architectural Section #1 on Drawing A-07. 4. Drawing E4 Riser Diagram Add 800 Amp 3 -Pole, Enclosed, Lockable, Weather Proof Circuit Breaker, Main Service Disconnect switch directly above the C/T can. Device to be rated for 30,000 AFC. 30 kVA Dry Transformer for existing Service can be floor mounted adjacent to the Panel as shown on the Riser Diagram. 5. Specification SECTION 16720 Fire Alarm. Add Voice Communication System Audiosone #AU387M1 -DMR 40 Watt, 70 Volt, electronically supervised with prerecorded message announcements as approved by the Fire Department. Revise Horn/Strobe units to be Speaker /Strobes with 5 Watt, 70 Volt speakers. Include (4) Additional Speaker /Strobe units to be located as directed by the Fire Department; allow 100 ft of cable for each unit. Activation of the Fire Alarm System shall immediately initiate the prerecorded message announcements. a5ri.doc 1 1 1 PART 1- BID DOCUMENTS CONDITIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS FORT ANGELES PUBLIC LIBRARY February 24, 1997 MOM SECTION TITLE PAGES ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 1 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS CHECKLIST 1 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5 00130 PRE -BID SITE INSPECTION 1 00300 BID FORMS 3 00410 BID BOND FORM 2 00420 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION FORM 2 00430 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS 2 00480 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 2 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 8 00510 ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR RETAINED PERCENTAGE 2 00610 PERFORMANCE PAYMENT BOND 2 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS (AIA A201) 38 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 24 00820 ADDITIONAL ARTICLES 8 Certificate of Non Segregated Facilities Public Works Policies and Procedures Resolution #7 -91 D.C.V.R. Process Flow Chart_ Contract Change Omer D.C.V.R. Log 00830 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 13 DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY AND SEQUENCE OF WORK 1 01020 ALLOWANCES 1 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 2 01030 ALTERNATES 1 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 2 01045 C[TITING AND PATCHING 2 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 2 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DFFINTTIONS 2 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 2 01300 SUBMITTALS 3 01400 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 2 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 5 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2 01631 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 2 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 3 01740 WARRANTIES 1 Page 1 of 4 ER SECTION TITLE PAGES DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3 02110 SITE CLEARING 1 02200 EARTHWORK 4 02511 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVING -3-- 02520 CONCRETE PAVING 3 02711 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 2 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 14 02900 LANDSCAPING 14 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03300 CAST N PLACE CONCRETE 03355 SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES DIVISION 4 MASONRY Page 2 of 4 SOILS REPORT (For information only) 13 04200 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 4 2 3 DIVISION S METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 2 05210 STEEL JOISTS 2 05310 STEEL DECK 2 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 2 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 3 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 4 06185 GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER 2 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 2 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 3 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 1 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 2 07311 COMPOSITION SHINGLE ROOFING (Alternate #I) 1 07410 METAL ROOFING 2 07533 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 3 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 1 07820 SKYLIGHT STRUCTURES 2 07901 JOINT SEALANTS 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MIAMI SECTION TITLE PAGES DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS FRAMES 3 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES STOREFRONTS 4 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 2 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 12 08800 GLAZING 3 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 5 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 6 09310 CERAMIC TILE 2 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 2 09650 RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS 2 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 2 09680 CARPETING 3 09900 PAINTING 7 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 2 10425 SIGNS 2 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CABINETS 2 10651 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 2 10800 TOILET BATH ACCESSORIES 2 10900 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 1 DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT 11900 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12511 WINDOW BLINDS 2 12620 SEAT CUSHIONS 1 12690 FLOOR MATS 1 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used 1 Page 3 of 4 MIME& SECTION TITLE DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL 15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 11 15050 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 10 15100 PIPE, VALVES ACCESSORIES 9 15140 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 10 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 6 15 300 FIRE PROTECTION 8 15400 PLUMBING 8 15780 PACKAGED HEATING COOLING EQUIPMENT 4 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 2 15890 DUCTWORK 7 15930 AIR TERMINALS, GRILLES DIFFUSERS 3 15975 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 27 15990 TESTING, ADUSTING BALANCING 5 DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL Page 4 of 4 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3 16100 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 5 16400 DISTRIBUTION 3 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2 16710 TELEPHONE DATA 1 16720 FIRE ALARM 2 16770 PUBLIC ADDRESS 1 16780 TV SYSTEM 1 PAGES December 7, 1993 TO: Primo Construction, Inc. 970 Carlsborg Road Sequim, WA 98382 CITY OF PORT ANGELES NOTICE OF AWARD PROJECT Description: To construct a 29,000 square foot branch library and to remodel portions of the existing 5,000 square foot NOLS Service Center. The Owner has considered the bid submitted by you for the above described work in response to its Advertisement for Bids dated March 25, 1997. cc: City Clerk PW-407 02B(11/95J You are hereby notified that your bid has been accepted for items in the amount of $3,476,800.00. You are required, as stated in the Information for Bidders, to execute the contract and furnish the required Contractor's Performance and Payment Bond and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this notice to you. If you fail to execute said contract and to furnish said bonds within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, said Owner will be entitled to consider all you rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of your bid as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your bid bond. The Owner will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to the Owner. Dated this 3rd day of April, 1997. CITY OF ANIEk' S By L PL_�R Jack itt(s, P.!'., Di of Public Works ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged this /7114 day of A Pry_f. 997. URE Print Name L /2 c• '-1 V. %A j rz J S+•+ Title !ICE- PRESIb IT Please return original to the City of Port Angeles Public Works Department. N PROJECTS \94- 19LIB1PROJMGTWOTPROCE WPD 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS New Port Angeles Public Library and N.O.L.S. Service Center Remodel 94 -19 City of Port Angeles Sealed bids will be received by the office of the City Clerk at 321 East Fifth Street, P. 0. Box 1150, Port Angeles, Washington 98362, until 2:30 PM (PST) on MARCH 25. 1997 and not later, and will then and there be opened and publicly read at that time in the City Council Chambers for the construction of the improvements. To construct a 29,000 square foot branch library and to remodel portions of the existing 5,000 square foot NOLS Service Center. Detailed plans and specifications (Project Manual) may be obtained on February 26th from the office of Lindberg Architects, 319 South Peabody Street, Suite B, Port Angeles, WA 98362, (360)452 -6116 and Lewis Architects, 2800 Northrup Way, Suite 100, Bellevue, WA 98004, (206) 827 -5602, upon payment of a non refundable fee of 100.00. Made payable to the City of Port Angeles. Informational copies of maps, plans and specifications are also on file for inspection in the office of the City Engineer Phone 360- 417 48051 Plans are available for viewing at the following Plan Centers: AGC Plan Service, Seattle Chapter, 1200 Westlake, #310, Seattle, WA; Dodge Scan, 315 North Tower, 100 West Harrison Place, Seattle, WA; and Tacoma Chapter AGC, 3820 South Pine, Tacoma, WA. Questions during bidding shall be directed to Lindberg Architects. Bidders shall be qualified for the type of work proposed. A Bidder's Construction Experience Form is included in the Project Manual. All bids shall be submitted on the prescribed Bid Forms and in the manner as stated in this advertisement and in the Project Manual and said bids shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of cashier's check, postal money order, or a surety bond to the City of Port Angeles in the amount of five percent (5 of the total amount of the base bid. If a surety bond is used, said bond shall be issued by a surety authorized and registered to issue said bonds in the State of Washington. The bond shall specify the surety's name and address and shall include a power of attorney appointing the signatory of the bond as the person authorized to execute it. Should the successful bidder fail to enter into such contract and furnish satisfactory performance bond within the time stated in the specifications, the bid deposit shall be forfeited to the City of Port Angeles. Faxed bids and/or surety bonds shall not be accepted. Minority and women owned businesses shall be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation, shall not be discriminated against on the grounds of sex, race, color, age, national origin or handicap in consideration of an award of any contract or subcontract, and shall be actively solicited for participation in this project by direct mailing of the invitation to bid to such businesses as have contacted the City for such notification. Further, all bidders are directed to solicit and consider minority and women owned businesses as potential subcontractors and material suppliers for this project. The City of Port Angeles reserves the right to accept the bids and award contracts to responsible bidders which are in the best interest of the City, to postpone the acceptance of bids and the award of the contracts for a period not to exceed thirty (30) days, or to reject any and all bids received and further advertise for bids. When awarded contracts, the successful bidder shall promptly execute contracts and shall fumish bonds of faithful performance of the contracts in the full amount of the contract prices. Bids must be submitted in a sealed envelope with the outside clearly marked with the bid opening date and time, the project name and number as it appears in this advertisement and the name and address of the bidder. Bids shall be addressed to the City Clerk, City of Port Angeles, 321 East Fifth Street, P. 0. Box 1150, Port Angeles, Washington 98362. Jack N. Pitts, P.E. Director of Public Works Publish: Peninsula Daily News Daily Journal of Commerce I File: N:\ PROJECTS194 .191CORRESPIBIDAD.WPO Sealed bids will be received by the City of Port Angeles (herein called "Owner'), at 321 East Fifth Street, Port Angeles, Washington 98362, until the time and date as stated in the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS or as amended through addendum, and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud Each bid shall be received by the Owner in the manner set forth in the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope, so marked as to indicate its contents without being opened, and addressed in conformance with the instructions of the ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Each bid shall be submitted on the required bid form contained in the project manual and shall be submitted attached to the project manual with which it was originally bound All blank spaces for bid pnces must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, and the bid form must be fully completed and executed when submitted. Only one copy of the bid form is required. BIDS WILL NOT BE READ if detached from the project manual with which they were onginally bound, nor shall any of the accompanying papers be detached therefrom, but the entire package (project manual without the plans), including addendums, must be unbroken, in good order, and enclosed in a sealed envelope, endorsed with the name of the work. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of a cashier's check, postal money order, or surety bond to the City of Port Angeles for a sum of not less than 5% of the amount of the bid, and no bid will be considered unless accompanied by such bid deposit. The Owner may waive any informalities or minor defects or reject any and all bids Any bid may be withdrawn pnor to the scheduled time for the opening of bids or authonzed postponement thereof Any bid received after the time and date specified shall not be considered. No bidder will be permitted to withdraw its bid between the closing time for receipt of bids and the execution of contract, unless the award is delayed for a period exceeding thirty (30) calendar days. A conditional or qualified bid will not be accepted. The bid award will be made to the lowest responsible bidder. The work embraced in the project manual shall be under the supervision of the City of Port Angeles Public Works Department, subject to the acceptance and approval of the City Council. It shall be begun within ten (10) calendar days after notice to proceed from the Director of Public Works and shall be completed within 365 working days after the date of such notice. See Section 00 800 Supplementary Conditions for liquidated damages. The Owner may make such investigations as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request The Owner reserves the nght to reject any bid, rf the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. The party to whom the contract is awarded will be required to execute the contract and obtain the performance and payment bond within ten (10) calendar days from the date the notice of award is delivered to the bidder. Such bond(s) shall be on the form provided by the Owner, specify the name and address of the surety, and shall include a power of attorney appointing the signatory of the bond(s) as the person authorized to execute rt (them). INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS AND CHECKLIST The notice of award will be accompanied by the necessary contract and bond forms In case of failure of the bidder to execute the contract, the Owner may, at its option, consider the bidder in default, in which case the bid bond accompanying the bid shall become the property of the Owner The Owner, within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of acceptable performance bond, payment bond, and contract signed by the party to whom the contract was awarded, shall sign the contract and return to such party an executed duplicate of the contract Should the Owner not execute the contract within such penod, the bidder may, by written notice, withdraw its signed contract. Such notice of withdrawal shall be effective upon receipt of the notice by the Owner The notice to proceed shall be issued within ten (10) calendar days of the execution of the contract by the Owner. Should there be reasons why the notice to proceed cannot be issued within such period, the time may be extended by mutual agreement between the Owner and contractor. If the notice to proceed has not been issued within the ten (10) calendar day period or within the penod mutually agreed upon, the contractor may terminate the contract wrthout further liability on the part of either party. All applicable laws, ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the contract throughout. PW-407_07 [11195] CHECKLIST 1 Has a bid deposit in the form of a surety bond in the proper form, postal money order, or cashiers check been enclosed with your bid? 2. Is the amount of the bid deposit at least five percent (5 of the total amount of the bid? 3. Have the bid forms been properly signed? 4. Do the written amounts of the bid forms agree with the amounts shown in figures? 5. Have you bid on all items? 6 Has the non collusion affidavit been properly executed? 7. Have you shown your contractor's state license number on the bid form? 8. Have you listed all sub contractors that you will use for the project? 9. Have you filled out the bidder's construction experience form? The following forms are to be executed after the contract is awarded: A Contract To be executed by the successful bidder and the City. B Performance bond To be executed on the form provided by Owner, by the successful bidder and its surety company. To include name and address of surety and power of attorney of sianatory C. Insurance certificate(s). 1 D I V I S I O N 0 0 B I D D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 00 100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Examination of Site and Conditions: a. The bidder is required to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans and specifications and contract forms before submitting a proposal. It is mutually agreed that submission of a bid shall be considered prima facie evidence that the bidder has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work as scheduled, or as at any time altered as stipulated in the General Conditions of the hereinafter mentioned Standard Specifications; and as to the character, quality and quantities of work to be performed and material to be furnished, and as to the requirements of the plans, specifications, supplemental specifications, special provisions, contract, and addenda thereto. b. No statement made by any officer, agent or employee of the City of Port Angeles and /or the Architect in relation to the physical conditions pertaining to the site of the work will be binding on the City of Port Angeles and /or the Architect. c. The failure or omission of any bidder to examine any form, instrument or document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect to this bid. 2. Pronosal Sums: a. The sum of money shown on the proposal covering all work included in base bid contract documents, together with any addenda thereto and /or for unit prices called for, or for any alternates called for, shall include all items of labor, material, equipment, overhead and compensation to complete all of the work under each particular heading. 3. Laws and Reculations: a. The bidder is assumed to be familiar with all Federal, State, County, and Municipal laws, regulations, and ordinances, which in any manner affect those or have jurisdiction over those engaged or employed in the work or the materials or equipment used in the proposed construction, or which in any way affect the conduct of the work, and no pleas of misunderstanding will be considered on account of ignorance thereof. If the bidder, or contractor, shall discover any provision in the plans, specifications, or contract which is contrary to or inconsistent with any law or regulation, he shall forthwith report it to the Architect in writing. 4. Bid and Performance: a. All bids must be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of a Surety Bond of a Surety company licensed to do business in Clallam County, Postal Money Order, or Cashier's Check in the amount equal to 5W of the amount of the base bid plus alternates proposed as evidence of good faith. In the event of failure of the successful bidder to enter into the contract and to furnish specified bonds within 10 days after notice of award of bid, exclusive of the day of notice, the amount of the bid deposit will be forfeited to the City of Port Angeles as liquidated damages. b. The Owner reserves the right to hold the bid guarantees of all bidders until the successful bidder has entered into the contract and furnished the required bonds, or for a period of 60 days, whichever is the shorter time. c. A 100% performance bond and labor and material payment bond furnished by a surety acceptable to the City of Port Angeles will be required of the successful bidder prior to execution of the contract. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00100 /1 5. Addenda and Interpretations: a. No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre -bid documents will be made to any bidder orally. b. Every request for such interpretation should be addressed to the Lindberg Architects, (360)452 -6116, and to be given consideration must be received at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instruction will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if issued, will be mailed not later than three (3) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive such addenda shall not release the bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the contract documents. 6. Fillina in Bid Forms: a. The bidder shall submit his proposal on the forms enclosed still attached to the project manual. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, either in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. Each bid shall be accompanied by Bid Bond, Bidders Construction Experience, List of Proposed Subcontractors, Non Collusion Affidavit, and Certificate of Non Segregated Facilities. If the proposal is made by a partnership, it shall contain the names of each partner and shall be signed in the firm name, followed by the signature of the person signing. If the proposal is made by a corporation, it shall be signed by the name of the corporation, followed by the written signature of the officer signing, and the printed or typewritten designation of the office he holds in the corporation. The address of the bidder shall be typed or printed on the proposal. 7. Submission of Proposal: a. Each proposal, still attached to the specifications, shall be completely sealed intact in a separate package, properly addressed to the Port Angeles City Clerk, Port Angeles City Hall, P. 0. Box 1150, 321 East Fifth Street, Port Angeles, WA 98362, with the name of the bidder and the project written on the outside of the package. b. Bids will be received at the time and place stated in the advertisement for bids. The advertisement for bids in the specifications provides that a fee or deposit for plans and specifications will be required from each bidder. c. The Owner, the City of Port Angeles, reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive formalities in the bidding process. 8. Prohibition of Alterations: a. Except as otherwise provided herein, proposals which are incomplete, or which are conditioned in any way, or which contain erasures, alterations, or items not called for in the proposal, or which are not in conformity to the law, may be rejected. b. The proposal form invites bids on definite plans and specifications. Only the amounts and information asked for on the proposal form furnished will be considered as the bid. Each bidder shall bid upon the work exactly as specified and as provided in the proposal form. c. No oral or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered. d. Any bidder may modify his bid by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the City Clerk Prior to the closing time, and provided further, the City Clerk is satisfied that a written confirmation of the telegraphic modification over the signature of the bidder is postmarked prior to the closing time. The telegraphic communication should not reveal the bid price but should provide the addition or subtraction or other modifications so that the final prices or terms will not be known by the Owner until the sealed bid is opened. If written confirmation is not received within two (2) Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00100/2 working days from the closing time, no consideration will be given to the telegraphic modification. 9. Withdrawal of Proposal: a. At any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals, any bidder may withdraw his proposal, either personally or by telegraphic or written request. After the scheduled closing time for the receipt of proposals or before the award of the contract, no bidder will be permitted to withdraw his proposal unless said award is delayed for a period exceeding sixty (60) days. 10. Method of Award Lowest Responsible Bidder: a. It is the intent of the Owner to award the Contract to a qualified Contractor submitting the lowest bid within the funds available for work included in the Base Bid and any or all alternates selected in any order enumerated in Section 01 030. 11. Execution of Contract: a. The successful bidder will be required within ten days after receiving a notice of award and properly prepared contract documents, to execute said contract. Simultaneously with his delivery of the executed contract, the Contractor shall furnish surety bond or bonds, as required by these specifications, as surety for faithful performance of this contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this contract and furnishing materials in connection with this contract, as specified in the General Conditions included herein, and the surety on such bond or bonds shall be duly authorized by a surety company satisfactory to the City. Before signing of the contract, the Contractor will be required to furnish a certificate showing satisfactory proof of carriage of the required insurance. 12. Contract Documents: a. The construction contract shall be executed upon AIA A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor including General and Supplemental Conditions. b. Additional forms used in the prosecution of the work shall be but not limited to: 1) Change Order City Resolution 7 -91 2) Application and Certificate for Payment AIA G702 Copies of the above forms are available upon request from the Architect. 13. Contracts and Performance Bonds: a. Signatures 1) Proprietorship: Execution by the contractor shall be in the correct name. If a sole proprietorship (even though the words "and Company" appear), the person shall name himself as owner. Example: John Doe dba /John Doe Company. 2) Partnership: If the contractor is a partnership the managing partner shall sign, describing himself as such. 3) Corporation: If the contractor is a corporation, a signature for the corporation by the president or his equivalent and by the secretary or his equivalent, describing themselves as such, plus imprint of the seal, will be required. If the corporation has a resolution or copy of by -laws authorizing some other signature, the resolution or copy of the by -laws shall be with the offer. Where contract requires a performance bond, the persons signing for the corporation must sign both the contract agreement and bond, describing themselves as such on both documents. The seal for the bonding company is required on the performance bond. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00100/3 b. Attorney -In -Fact- 1) The surety shall be bound by an attorney -in -fact, resident in Clallam County preferable, but certainly in the State of Washington. 2) The seal of the bonding company is required on all performance bonds. 14. Title 82 RCW: a. Before payment by the contractor of any taxes to the Department of Revenue for or on account of any materials or work involved in this contract, the parties shall determine the amount which may be claimed due under the provisions of Title 82 R.C.W. and such sum shall be withheld by the City from the contract price to be paid by the City directly to said Department if found to be due by final determination of the courts of the State of Washington. b. Base Bid and Alternate bids shall not include any Washington State and Local sales taxes. 15. Completeness of Documents: a. The bidder shall verify that all documents supplied by the Owner, and upon which the bidder is basing his bid, are full and complete with no missing pages, sheets, or unintentional blank spaces. Submittal of a bid indicates the bidder has verified he has obtained all Owner supplied bidding documents. No claim for additional work due to missing bid information will be allowed. 16. Substitutions and Approval Prior to Receipt of Bids: a. Bids must be based upon the specific articles and materials named in the Contract Documents, or their approved equals and be in accordance with Section 01 630, Substitutions and Product Options. b. During the bidding period, written requests for approval of substitutions by prime bidders will be considered if received by Lindberg Architect, 319 South Peabody, Suite B, Port Angeles, WA 98362 not later than ten (10) days prior to the scheduled date of bid opening. Such requests shall be accompanied by complete descriptions, technical data, and documentary evidence that the proposed substitution is equal to, or better than, those articles or materials specified. The Architect reserves the right to request that samples be submitted and satisfactory demonstrations be made for the proposed substitutions prior to approval. c. Approval of proposed substitutions will be made by addenda, mailed to all bidders. Proposed substitutions not so listed shall be considered having been rejected. 17. Termination Prior to Contract Sianing: a. The bidders are advised that the City reserves the right to choose not to award the contract up to the time the City signs the contract document, including after the Notice of Award has been issued. Such termination shall occur if in the best interests of the City, including, but not limited to, the continuation of or commencement of legal action with respect to any applicable permits for this project. In submitting the bid, the bidder agrees such termination will not result in any claims or causes of action for costs or damages by the bidder against the City. 18. Oualifications of biddina: a. The Contractor covenants that he is registered and licensed as required by the laws of the State of Washington. The Owner may take such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligation of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00100/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. The Owner at his discretion may determine that a bidder is not responsible and reject his proposal for any of the following reasons. 1) More than one proposal on the same project from a bidder under the same or different names. 2) Evidence of collusion with any other bidder, or bidders. 3) If a bidder is not qualified for the work involved or to the extent of his bid. 4) Unsatisfactory performance record, judged from the standpoint of conduct of work, workmanship, or progress as shown by past or current work for the Owner. 5) Uncompleted work, whether for the Owner or otherwise, which might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of the work bid upon. 6) Failure to pay or settle bills for labor or materials on any former or current contracts. 7) Any other inability, financial or otherwise, to perform the work. 8) A bidder is not licensed and authorized to do business in the State of Washington. 9) For any other reasons deemed proper as determined from a pre -award survey of bidder's capability to perform. 19. Suonlementary Conditions: a. Supplementary Conditions are used to amend or abridge the General Conditions. 20. Prevailina Waaes: a. The Contractor shall pay the prevailing wages for the specific type of construction as determined by the State of Washington or Federal Prevailing Wages, whichever is higher, in the city or county where the work is being performed. 21. Hours of Labor: a. All work under this Contract shall be performed pursuant to public policy of the State of Washington, as set forth in Chapter 49.28, revised Code of Washington, as amended requiring that public work be performed in work days of not more than eight (8) hours each, except in extraordinary emergency. The provisions of said Chapter 49.28 R.C.W. as amended, are by reference incorporated and made a part hereof. Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 49.28.050 and 40.28.060 R.C.W. the Owner may cancel the Agreement in case the work is not performed in accordance with said policy. 22. Discrimination: a. Discrimination in all phases of employment is prohibited by Title VII of the Civil Rights At of 1964, Presidential Executive Order 11246, as amended by Executive Order 11375, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination, Chapter 49.60 R.C.W., and by Gubernatorial Executive Orders 66 -1 and 70 -01, among other laws and regulations. 23. Additional Bidder Information: a. See accompanying City of Port Angeles "Information for Bidders and Checklist END OF SECTION 00 100 Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00100/5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 130 PRE -BID SITE INSPECTION Bidders shall attend a mandatory pre -bid site inspection with the Architect and Owner's Representative, to be held at the Project site. Representatives from all interested firms will meet and be directed on a tour of the affected facility. Bidders will be notified by mail of the date and time. Minutes from this meeting will be issued as addenda and will become a part of the Contract Documents. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library END OP SECTION 00 130 00130/6 1 00 300 BID FORMS COPY 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remodel of North Olympic Library System Service Center and Construction of New Port Angeles Public Library Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Port Angeles 321 East Fifth Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 The bidder, in compliance with your invitation for Bids for the North Olympic Library System Service Center and Port Angeles Public Library, Port Angeles, Washington, having examined the specifications, drawings, related documents and the site of the proposed Work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the work of the proposed project including the availability of material and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and incidentals, and to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the Work required under the Contract Documents, of which this proposal is a part. Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this contract immediately upon receipt of written notice to proceed and to fully complete work as described in Contract Documents. 1. Base Bid: a. For the Base Bid as defined in the Project Manual, the following sum of: TA r e2 u;' df n l)(& one, -f oii, G j Ve A the, re Do llars 3 ��C� Sdd.oQ) 2. Alternate Bids: Undersigned proposes to perform additions or substitutions to the Base Bids called for in the following alternates, in accordance with Section 01 030. Alternate No. and Title Alternate No. 1 Composition Roofing Provide composition roofing as detail and specified in lieu of the metal roofing detailed and specified. Provide 1/2" CDX Plywood underlayment in lieu of exterior gypsum sheathing. Deduct OA/ £rek1 Tl7 0U 4 P? TOTAL CONSTRUCTION AMOUNT AFTER ALTERNATES: Dollars n? $0 QD 14/ct) Alternate No. 2 Variable Speed Mechanical Unit Drives Provide variable speed drives as specified in the Mechanical Work. Add f i f ert 0064.h pt_ T 1' P P. Dollars J S 3 J Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00300/7 Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 3. Overhead Profit: a. The undersigned agrees that all of the above named Base Bid and Alternate Bids include all Contractor's overhead and profit or fee. 4 Sales Tax: a. one of the above bid prices shall include State and /or Local Sales Tax. 7. Bid Security: a. The bid security is attached in the sum of FIVE. PER nli v F PY 5 Right of Resection: a. Bidder agrees that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. Bidder agrees that any or all Alternates may be taken in any order. 6. Procedure: a. The undersigned agrees that if he is notified of the acceptance of this bid within 60 days of the date set for opening bids, or any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, he will execute a Contract for the above work, for a compensation computed from the sums stipulated in the Form of Bid, in the standard form of agreement noted in the specifications and to furnish insurance, performance and payment bonds as stipulated in Section 00 600. 81D Dollars b. The Undersigned agrees that the bid security accompanying this bid shall be left in escrow with the Owner, that the amount of the bid security is the measure of damages which the Owner will sustain by the failure of the Undersigned to execute the contract within 10 days after written notice of the award of -the contract to him, the amount of the bid security shall be paid to the Owner. If this bid is not accepted within 60 days after the time set for opening bids, or if the Undersigned delivers said contract and bonds as instructed, then the bid security shall be returned to the bidder or become void. 00300/8 8. Addenda: a. Receipt of Addenda numbered 1 throughout a is hereby acknowledged, and all costs of the work therefore have been included in the Form of Proposal. Bidder: fkl M€ cic si iz r1 c»-. WC. Street Address: x'`10 C.ARL5& R 0AO Telephone and City: S BY: .IA./ IN 92 (3c,0) LI -LI-1 Lff COPY State of Was inggfi Contractor's License No.: PRJ Me i.133P'7 Contractor's License Expiration Date: k ,2o /97 Give State of Incorporation: WA 544 1 hl<..TO hl If bidder is a partnership, give full names of all partners. If bidder is a corporation, Affix Corporate Seal: Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library END OF SECTION 00 300 00300/9 00 400 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00 410 BID BOND 1. See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works "Bid Bond Form 2. THIS FORM MUST ACCOMPANY EACH BID WITHOUT ALTERATION. END SECTION 00 410 Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00410/10 i$erewith find deposit in the farts of a cashiers the postal money order or bid bond in the amount of which amount is not lass $hia five (5 percent of the total bid. ,Iow ALL MEOW THESE PRESENTS: T CONSTRUCTION, INC. in e CITY OF PORT ANGELES as the Principal and the Surety bind RIWY severalty. byte= presents. TB condltlon Of this obi ationn Is such that If die Obligee shall make any award to the PrinCipai for NEW PORT LIC LIBRARY AND N.O.L.S SERVICE CENTER REMODEL 94 -19 to E rniablgee f. this wlth forfeit to the Il i gilgee, se and veld; 1 SIGNED, 1 1 1 1 t i of the bid made by with the tams of or Surat approved by the penal amount of erve It shall be and penalty and Ggtddated SEALED AND DATED V received return ofideposit In the sum of B BID BOND FORM SIGN HERE BID BONO AMWEST SURETY INSURANCE COfI are held and firmly bound irl the penal stun ofFTIIF PFR carc_RF am Dollars, for the payment elves their heirs, cutors, administrators, successors and assigns. Principal, and the bid and award ObQgoe; or If the deposit spedlled In In bull force and the omount alibis of MARCH PRIMO CON 4 i By: Principal AMWEST SURE Y I cipal shall duly stake and enter into a contract with shall give bond for the faithful performance shall, in case of fa0ure so to do, pay and advertisement for bids, then this obligation shall and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to nd. ION, INC. Geraldine C. ANCE COMPANY g 97 ay'a- �lrr�t Stewart, Attorney -in -Fact C *mil( BOND NO. 0000676181 ANGELES 00 420 BIDDERS QUALIFICATION FORM 1. See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works "Bidder's Construction Experience 2. THIS FORM MUST ACCOMPANY EACH BID WITHOUT ALTERATION. END SECTION 00 420 Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00430/11 a 1 pOR7,k, Date: 3 /as 5 7 PW -407 09 (11/931 BIDDER'S CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and .4 comprehensive. If necessary, add separate sheets for items marked 1 Name of bidder: PR 1 Ana �.d� s 2 i o �rcC, 2 Permanent main office address: 976 CAZLSBOR‘ koAt. SEZ.?(Ai UJA y838� 3. When organized: 1 4 1'79 4. Where incorporated: (A/A s r+ ((4,7 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm name? 10 6. *Contracts on hand. (Schedule these, showing gross amount of each contract and the approximate anticipated dates of completion.) PLEASE SSE AT Ft 7. *General character of work performed by your company: PLEA S EE /11 A E 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? Nn If so, where and why? 9. *Have you ever defaulted on a contract? N� 10. *List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed. PLEASE EE AT T AC_NEb 11. *List your major equipment available for this contract: PLEASE_ ATTACH Si) 12. *Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project: PLEASE SEE A1 C.14 E D 13. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City? '/Es 14. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or ration to furnish any information requested by the City of Pfy Angeles. Print Name: 4Re &02y V 4 Aa sH Title: V 1 ce'2 io E r 00 430 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 1. See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works "Listing of Proposed Sub Contractors and Major Material Suppliers 2. THIS FORM MUST ACCOMPANY EACH BID WITHOUT ALTERATION. END SECTION 00 430 Division 00 Bidding Division Port Angeles Public Library 00430/12 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NAME AND ADDRESS LISTING OF PROPOSED SUB CONTRACTORS Bidder shall list all subcontractors proposed to be used on portions of the work in excess of ten percent of the total bid. FAILURE TO LIST SUB CONTRACTORS SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO BE A NON RESPONSIVE BID. If there are no sub- contractors, write "NO SUB CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED sc1,ItifitsSkzf /1(746 DESCRIPTION OF WORK CO. Y 00 480 NON- COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 1. See accompanying PW- 407.8(11/95) "Non- Collusion Affidavit 2. THIS FORM MUST ACCOMPANY EACH BID WITHOUT ALTERATION. END SECTION 00 480 Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00480/13 STATE OF WASHINGTON COUNTY OF C1.ALLP A Subscribed and sworn to before me this aw-407.8 101/961 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT The undersigned, being first duly sworn on oath, says that the bid herewith submitted is a genuine and not a sham or collusive bid, or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named; and (s)he further says that the said bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any bidder on the above work or supplies to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that said bidder has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to him/her self an advantage over any other bidder or bidders. saale,x3 JoiSsuwa3 4 j ,,;Sc: 1U slid Y003 "1 VtiONvS 1gnatur i -der /Contractor Sim day of MA 2c� COPY 19 Notary Public in and for the State of Washington. Residing at SEotcl M I�fA My Comm. Exp.: A I i o t 9 8 00 500 AGREEMENT FORMS 1. Contents: a. See accompanying sample American Institute of Architects, Electronic Document Service, AIA Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Twelfth Edition, Copyright 1987, Pages 1 through 7. b. This Document is for sample use only. Refer to Section 00 100, "Instructions to Bidders Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library END OF SECTION 00 500 00500/14 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AIA Document A101 Electronic Format AGREEMENT made as of the 22nd day of April in the year of Nineteen Hundred and Ninety -Seven BETWEEN the Owner: (Name and address) City of Port Angeles 321 East 5th Street Port Angeles, WA 98362 and the Contractor: (Name and address) Primo Construction 970 Carlsborg Road Seauim, WA 98382 The Project is: (Name and location) Port Angeles Public Library N.O.L.S. Service Center Remodel 2210 South Peabody Street Port Angeles, WA 98362 The Architect is: (Name and address) Lindberg Architects 319 South Peabody Street Port Angeles, WA 98362 THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. The 1987 Edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, copyright 1987 by the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006 -5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT TWELFTH EDITION AIA COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced under license number 298003005 and can be reproduced without violation until 2/4/98 1A1 1 !1(1 n 1 The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below. ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others, or as follows: ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreement, as first written above, unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement, if it differs from the date of this Agreement, or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) Date of commencement will be stipulated in the Notice to proceed. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than (Insert the calendar date or number of calendar days after the date of commencement. Also insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work, if not stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.) 365 calendar days after date of commencement indicated in the notice to proceed subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time.) Failure to substantially complete the work within the specified time period will result in liquidated damages as set forth in Specification 00 800, Supplementary Conditions. AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT TWELFTH EDITION AIA COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced under license number 298003005 and can be reproduced without violation until 2/4/98 Electronic Document Service A101 -1987 2 ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of Three Million, Four Hundred and Seventy -Six Thousand, Eight Hundred Dollars ($3,476, 800.00 subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date until which that amount is valid) Base Bid Bid Alternate #2. 4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: N/A ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: N/A 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the last day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the tenth day of the following month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than ten days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 5.6.1. Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of five percent (5 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.7 of the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order; AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT TWELFTH EDITION AIA COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced under license number 298003005 and can be reproduced without violation until 2/4/98 Electronic Document Service A101 -1987 3 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of five percent (5 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of the General Conditions. 5.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to Ninety five percent (95 of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Subparagraphs 5.6.1 and 5.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) N/A ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; and (2) a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect; such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: N/A ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) 1.5% (ii 30 days oast payment due date. (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modifications, and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT TWELFTH EDITION AIA COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced under license number 298003005 and can be reproduced without violation until 2/4/98 Electronic Document Service A 101 -1987 4 1 7.3 Other provisions: N/A ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. 8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A101, 1987 Edition. 9.1.2 The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition. 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated February 24, 1997 and are as follows: Document Title Pages Section 00 -800 Supplementary Conditions pages 18 -41 Section 00 -820 Additional Articles pages 42 -43 Attachments 1 6 Section 00 -830 Public Works Policy Procedure page 44 Attachments 1 8 9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 9.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement) Section Title Pages Div 00 16 Proiect Manual for Port Angeles Public Library 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated 02/24/97 unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Number Title A01 -A18 C01 -008 E01 -E04 L 1 -L3 M01 -M06 S01 -S06 Architectural Civil Electrical Landscaping Mechanical Structural Date 02 -24 -97 02 -24 -97 02 -24 -97 02 -24 -97 02 -24 -97 02 -24 -97 AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT TWELFTH EDITION AIA COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced under license number 298003005 and can be reproduced without violation until 2/4/98 Electronic Document Service A101 -1987 5 9.1.6 The addenda, if any, are as follows: Number Date Pages #1 03/13/97 01 -05 Attached Revision Drawings R1 -R5 #1 (Landscaping) 03/13/97 01 -04 #1 (Mechanical) 01 -03 Attached Drawings MD1 MD2 Proiect Memorandum 03/13/97 01 (Electrical Addendum) #2 03/20/97 01 -05 Attached Revision Drawings and Exhibits 06 -11 Portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List here any additional documents which are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. The General Conditions provide that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) 1. Advertisement for Bids Project 94 -19 City of Port Angeles 2. Information for bidders and checklist 3. Bid Bond form 4. Non collusion affidavit 5. Certification of Non- Segregated facilities 6. Bid Form 7. Public works Department policy and procedures sheets 01 -06 AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT TWELFTH EDITION AIA COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced under license number 298003005 and can be reproduced without violation until 2/4/98 Electronic Document Service A101 -1987 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. Prosper Ostrowski, Honorable Mayor City of Port Angeles (Printed name and title) Greg Parrish, Vice President Primo Construction (Printed name and title) AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER- CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT TWELFTH EDITION AIA COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced under license number 298003005 and can be reproduced without violation until 2/4/98 Electronic Document Service A101 -1987 7 R ODUCER ACORD�, CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE CSR UK ICO PR3 1 1 urley, Atkins Stewart, Inc. 800 Nienth Ave., Suite 1500 eattle WA 98101 ebbie R. Kimball n one No. 206 682 -5656 Fax No. SURED Primo Construction Inc P.O. Box 296 Carlsborg WA 98324 LTR EXCLUSIONS AND TERMS, ION OF SUCH POLICIES LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM /DD/YY) DATE (MM /DD/YY) 004125690 08/20/96 08/20/97 08/20/96 08/20/97 08/20/96 08/20/97 1 GENERAL AGGREGATE PRODUCTS COMP /OP AGG PERSONAL ADV INJURY 1 EACH OCCURRENCE I FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) MED EXP (Any one person) COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT BODILY INJURY (Per person) BODILY INJURY (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE LIMITS AUTO ONLY EA ACCIDENT OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY EACH ACCIDENT AGGREGATE EACH OCCURRENCE AGGREGATE WC ,T4TU- I TORY LIMIT I EL EACH ACCIDENT EL DISEASE POLICY LIMIT EL DISEASE EA EMPLOYEE operations of DATE (MM /DD/YY) 04/21/97 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 $1,000,000 51,000,000 s 50,000 5,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WIOMMISMM91•T0 MAIL 20 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Debbie R. Kimbal AC RD 0 ATIO 1988 CS 807 (2.95) COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY C.5 807 (2 -951 THiS ENDORSEMENT CHANCES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ iT CAREFULLY. AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSUREDS INCLUDING COMPLETED OPERATIONS TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY AN INSURED CONTRACT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LABILITY COVERAGE PART the following is added to WHO I5 AN INSURED (Section II): 1. To the extent it is required by the terns of an 'insured contract" which requires you to add by endorsement as an additional insured a person or organization, WHO t5 AN INSURED (Section 11) is amended to include as an insured such person or organization {"additional insured") bvt only with respect to: la) Vicarious liability arising out of your ongoing operations performed for the additional insured; or (b) Liability arising out of any act or omission of the additional insured for which you have entered into an enforceable "Insured contract" which obligates you to indemnify the additional insured, or to furnish insurance coverage for the additional insured, and arising out of your ongoing operations for that additional insured. 2. Additional Exclusion. This insurance does not apply to 'bodily injury', or "property damage' occurring after: (a) All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs), to be performed by or on behalf cf the additional Insured(s) at the site of the covered operations has been completed; or (b) That portion of 'your work° out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. This exclusion does nct apply to the extent that an 'insured contract" requires that you assume the tort liability of the additional insured arising out of a risk that would otherwise be excluded by this exclusion. In addition, the following provisions apply: 3. The Limits of insurance as provided in Section in are those shown in the Declarations or those limits which are specified in an 'insured contract" under which you assume the tort liability of the additional insured, whichever are less. These Limits of Insurance are inclusive of and are not in addition to the Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. 4. In no event shall the coverages d this Coverage Form be made broader by the insured contract. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. I CO f HURLEY, ATKINS STEWART INCORPORAT ED April21, 1997 Thank You, Account Administrator Insurance Bonds Benefits 1KlfO \inch Avenue, Suite 1500 Seal k, Washington 98101 (206) 682 -5656 FAX (206) 682.8494 TO: City of Port Angeles ATTN: Ron FAX# 360 417 -4609 PGS 3 RE: Primo Construction, Inc. T fl 'rI bRfi2 ?QQ +Qf 'f1N YEN HURLEY ATKINS STEWART, INC. PH 206 -682 -5656 FX 206 682 -8494 Attached is our certificate of insurance as requested. Please feel free to call if you have any questions. HqQ f NM i Q M114 A' l)1f1N QQ b i MU )P-T2-NP 00 510 ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR RETAINED PERCENTAGE 1. See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works, "Escrow for Agreement for Retained Percentage Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library END OF SECTION 00 510 00510/15 IT H E A M ER IC AN THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES, CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY r 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS r 5. SUBCONTRACTORS General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK AIA I N S T I T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S AIA Document A201 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT This document has been approved and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, ©1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N W Washington, D C 20006 Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of Its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1987 1 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work '96.6,993,12.3 Acceptance of Work 966,9.82,993,9101,9103 Access to Work 3.16, 6 2.1, 12 1 Accident Prevention 423,10 Acts and Omissions 321,322,332,3128,318,423, 439, 831, 1014, 1025, 1342, 137, 141 Addenda 1 1 1, 3 11 Additional Cost, Claims for 436,437,439,'6.11,,103 Additional Inspections and Testing 426,98:2, 1,2 2 1, 13 5 Additional Time, Claims for 4 3 6, 4 3 8, 4 3,9, 8 3 2 .O ADMINISTRATIONF; THE CONTRACT 3 33,4,94, Advertisement or Inyitatiotl to $id 1' I 1 Aesthetic Effect 4 213,451 Allowance$ 3.8 All risk Insurance 113 1 1 Applications for Payment 4 2 5;737,9 9.3, 9 4, 9 5 1, 9 6 3, 983, 9101, 9103, 9104, 11 1 3, 1424 Approvals 24, 333 ,35,3102,3124 through 3128,3183, '4.27,,934 f 4, 13,4 2, 135 Arbitration 414,4'3'2,434,4 8 3 „1', 10 1 2, .11- 3 +9 ;:11 3 10` n :4 r hitect,,Definiyo of r 4 1 t A17i,,h ect- ,-Extent ofAuth ©lily'" 2 4,3 4,3 126,4 2;.45 :2;430, 44,5',2;,63;7'12, 21,736,'74;,92,931; '9'4,-9 2,6.3,:9. 98.3;9.10 1, 9 10 3, l'2 13 5 1352,142"2,,142,4 Architect; Llmlt 90ns Qf itthority and R 333,3:128, 3 124 i 4 12 1 4 4_2 2, 423, 4, 2 6, 427, 4 2:10, '4' -2 4,32,52:1,:74,9,42:964, ,itl'4hitect' Addition S 1d Extienses ..2 4;982; 1 1,,'' j 2 2 1, 12'24,':1352, 4353', 1'4 2 4 A rchitect's Administr*tiQn,of the Contract 4.3,'4 3 6, 4 3 7, 4 4, 9 4, 9.5 Architect's Approvals' 2 10 2, 3 12 12 8, 3 18 3, 4 2 7 Architect's Authority to,Relect Work 3 5 1, 4 2 6, 12 1 2, 12 2 1 Architect:s'Copyright, 13 Architect's Decisions i, 426,427,42 11, 4 2 12, 4 2 13, 432, 436, .41,,444, 45,63,736,738,813,8 31, 92;94, 9 5 1,,x,9 2,' 9 9 1, 10 1 13 5 2, 1422, 14 2 4' A'rchitect's lnspectioris ''422,42:9,43'.6,9'42,98 9 9.2, 9 10 1, 13,5 Architect's Instructions 4 2 6, 4 2 7, 4 2 8, 4.3 7, 7 4 1, 12 1, 13 5 2 Architect's Interpretations 42 1 1 4 2 12, 4 3 7 Architect's On -Site Observations 4 2 2, 4 2 5, 4 3 6, 9 4 2, 9 5 1, 9 10 1, 135 4210 Architect's Project Representative Architect's Relationship with Contractor 11 2, 3 2 1, 3 2 2, 333,351, 373, 311,3128,31211,316,318,423,424, 426, 4212, 52, 622, 734; 982, 37, 12 1, 135 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 11 2, 4 2 3, 4 2 4, 426, 963,'964, 11 37 942,951,9101 4:22,425,429,4 982,99'2,,9101, 135 Asbestos 10 1 Attorneys' Fees 3 18 1,'9 10 2, 10 1 4 Award of Separate Contracts 6 1 1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work Basic Definitions` Bidding Requirements 1 1 1, 1 Boller and Machinery Insurance Bonds,Lien Bonds; Performance and Payment Architect's Representations Architect's Site Visits 2 A201 -1987 5.2 1.1 17,52 1,1141 11.3.2 9102 736.4,9103,1139,114 INDEX Building Permit 371 Capitalization .1.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion 982 Certificates for Payment 42 5, 4 2 9, 9 3 3, 9.4, 9 5, 9 6 1, 966,971,983,9101,9103, 137, 14113, 1424 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 3 12 11, 13 5 4 Certificates of Insurance 93 2, 9 10 2, 11 1 3 Change Orders "1.1 1,241,3824,311,428,433,523, 71,7.2, 732, 8 3 1, 9 3 1 1, 9 10 3, 11312, 11 3 4, 11 3 9, 12 1 2 721 7.1 3 11,428,7,831,931 1,101 3 4.3.1 4.3,44,45,625,832, 9312,933,9104,1014 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 45 Claims for Additional Cost 4 3 6, 4.3.7, 4 9, 6 11,103 Claims for Additional,TIme 4 3 6, 4.3.8, 4 39,83 2. Claims fqr Concealed pr Unknown Conditions 4.3.6 Claims for Da(najes 3 18; 4 3.9, 6,1 1, 6 2 5, 8 3 2, 9 5 1 2, 10 1 4 Claims Subjeet to Arbitrati6n 4.3 2,44,4 5 Cleaning Up, 3:15, 6 3 Commencement of Statutpry Limitation Period 13.7 Commencement -of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2 1 2, 221,321 ,322,371,3101, 6 2 2, 8 1 2, 8 2 2, 9 2, 11 1 3, 11'3 6, 11 4 1 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8 1 2.; Change Orders, Definition of Changes CHANGES IN THE WORK Claim, Definition of Claims and Disputes Communications Facilitsiting Contract Administration Completion „Conditions Relating'to" 3 11, 3 15, 4 2 2, 4 4 3 2, 9 4 -2, 9' 8, 9 91, 9 10, 1 1 3 5, 12 2 2, 13 7 1 COMPLETION, PAYM AND Completion, Substantial 4 9, 4 3 5 2 8 1 1, 8 ,1 3,,$ 2), 9 8, 9 9 1, 12 2' 2,13 7 Compliance with Laws 1 3, 3 6, 3 7, 3 13, 4 1 1, 10 2 2, 11 1, 11 3, 131, 1351, 1352, 136, 141 -1, 14213 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 436 Conditions of the Contract 1 1 1, 1 1 7,'6 1 1 Consent, Written 1,3 1, 3 12 8, 3 14 2, 44.1 2, 434, 455, 932,982, 991 ,.9g102,910'3,101'2,'1'01..3 11 3 1; 11 3.14, 11 3 11,'132, 13'42` CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS +1', 1 4,6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7 3 1 Construction Change Directives 1 1 1, 4 2 8, 7.1, 7.3, 9 3 1 1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's 3 10, 6 1 3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4 Continuing Contract Performance 4.3.4 Contract, Definition of 1 1 2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 4 3 7, 5 4 1 1,,14 Contract Administration 333,4,9 4, 9 5 391,424,521 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 37 1, 3,10, 52,92,1113,11 3 6, 11 4 1 Contract Documents, The 1.1, 1 2, 7- Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1 3, 2 2 5, 5 3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1 1 1 Contract Performance During Arbitration 434,45 3 Contract Sum 3 8, 4 3 6,'4 3 7, 4 4 4, 5 2.3, 613,72,73;9.1,9'7, 1131, 1224, 123, 14.24 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 436,438,444,72 1 3,73, 8 2 1, 8 3 1, 9 7, 12 1 1 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. n CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6 1 2 Contractor's Bid 1 1 1 Contractor's Construction Schedules 3.10, 6 1 3 Contractor's Employees 332,3 4 2, 3 8 1, 3 9, 3 18, 423, 426, 81 2, 102, 103, 11 1 1, 142 1 1 Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces 2 2 6, 3 12 5, 3 14 2, 4 2 4, 6, 12 2 5 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 1 2 4, 3 3 2, 3 18 1, 3 18 2, 5 2, 5 3, 5 4, 9 6 2, 11 3 7, 11 3 8, 14 2 1 2 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1 1 2, 3 2 1, 3 2 2, 333, 351, 373, 3 11, 3 1283 16, 3 18, 423, 424, 426, 4 2 12, 5 2, 6 2 2, 7 3 4, 9 8 2, 1137, 121, 135 Contractor's Representations 1 2 2, 3 5 1,3 12 7, 6 2 2, 8 2 1, 9 3 3 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3 3 2, 3 18, 4 2 3, 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 1 2 2, 3 2, 3 7 3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9 7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 14 1 Contractor's Submittals 3 10, 3 11, 3 12, 4 2 7, 5 2 1, 5 2 3, 7 3 6 9 2 9 3 1 9 8 2 99 1, 9102, 9103, 1012, 1142, 1143 Contractor's Superintendent 3 9, 10 2 6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1 2 4, 3 3, 3 4, 4 2 3, 8 2 2, 8 2 3, 10 Contractual Liability Insurance 11 1 1 7, 11 2'1 Coordination and Correlation 1 2 2, 1 2 4, 3 3 1, 310,3127,613,621 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1 3, 2 2 5, 3 11 Correction of Work 2 3, 2 4, 4 2 1, 9 8 2, 991, 1212, 122, 13713 Cost, Definition of 7 3 6, 14 3 5 Costs 24, 321 ,374,382,3 152,436,437,4381,523, 61 1, 6 2 3, 6 3, 7 3 3 3, 7 3 6, 7 3 7, 9 7, 9 8 2, 9 10 2, 11 3 1 2, 11 3 1 3, 11 3 4, 11 3 9, 12 1, 12 2 1, 12 2 4, 12 2 5, 13 5, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6 2 6 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3 14 2, 624,9515, 10212, 1025, 103, 111, 113, 1225 Damage to the Work 3142,991,10212,1025,103,113 Damages, Claims for 3 18, 4 3 9, 6 1 1, 6 2 5, 8 3 2, 9 5 1 2, 10 1 4 Damages for Delay 6 1 1, 8 3 3, 9 5 1 6, 9 7 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8 1 2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8 1 3 Day, Definition of 8 1 4 Decisions of the Architect 42 6, 42 7, 42 1 1 4 2 12, 4 2 13, 432, 436, 4 ,444,45,63,736,738,813,831,92, 94,951,982,991, 1012, 1352, 1422, 1424 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.5, 9 7, 14 1 1 3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Refection and Correction of 2 3, 2 4, 3 5 1, 4 2 1, 426,435,952,982,991, 1025, 12, 13713 Defective Work, Definition of 3 5 1 Definitions 11,211,31,351,3121,3122,3123,411, 4 3 1, 5 1, 6 1 2, 7 2 1, 7 3 1, 7 3 6, 8 1, 9 1, 9 8 1 Delays and Extensions of Time 4 3 1, 4 3 8 1, 4 3 8 2, 6 1 1, 6 2 3, 7 2 1, 7 3 1, 7 3 4, 7 3 5, 7 3 8, 739, 81 1, 8.3, 103 1, 141 1 4 Disputes 414,43,44,45,625,63,738,9312 Documents and Samples at the Site 3 11 Drawings, Definition of 1 1 5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 1 1 1, 1 3, 225,311, Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions 3 2 Effective Date of Insurance 8 2 2, 11 1 2 Emergencies 4 3 7, 10,3 Employees, Contractor's 3 3 2, 3 4 2, 3 8 1, 3 9, 3 18 1, 3 18 2, 423, 426, 81 2, 102, 103, 111 1, 14211 Equipment, Labor, Materials and 1 1 3, 1 1 6, 3 4, 3 5 1, 382, 3 12 3, 3 12 7, 3 12 11, 3 13, 3 15'1, 427, 62 1, 736, 932, 933, 11 3, 1224, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work 1 1 3, 12 3,3 2, 3 4 1, 351,422,423,434,438,622,713, 739, 82, 83, 95, 991, 102, 142, 143 Execution, Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2, 3 7 1 Extensions of Time 4 3 1, 4 3 8, 7 2 1 3, 8 3,10 3 1 Failure of Payment by Contractor 9 5 1 3, 14 2 1 2 Failure of Payment by Owner 4 3 7, 9 7, 14 1 3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4 2 1, 4 2 9, 4 3 2, 435, 1112, 1113, 1135, 1231, 137 Financial Arrangements, Owner's 2 2 1 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11 3 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) Hazardous Materials 10 1, 10 2 4 Identification of Contract Documents 1 2 1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5 2 1 Indemnification 3 17, 3.18, 9 10 2, 10 1 4, 11 3 1 2, 11 3 7 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2 1 2, 2.2, 434, 613 ,614,62 9 10 3, 10 1 4, 11 2, 11 3, 13 5 1, 13 5 2 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 4.3.9 Inspections 3 3 3 3 3 4, 3 7 1, 4 2 2, 4 2 6, 4 2 9, 4 3 6, 9 4 2, 9 8 2, 9 9 2, 9 10 1, 13 5 Instructions to Bidders 1 1 1 Instructions to the Contractor 381,428,52 1, 7, 12 1, 13 5 2 Insurance 439 61 1,7364,932,982,991,9102, 11 11.3.2 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery Insurance, Contractor's Liability Insurance, Effective Date of Insurance, Loss of Use Insurance, Owner's Liability Insurance, Property Insurance, Stored Materials INSURANCE AND BONDS Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy Insurance Companies, Settlement with Intent of the Contract Documents AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 426,427,4 Interest Interpretation 1 2 5, 1 4, 1.5, 4 1 1, 4 3 1 42 11.1 822,1112 1133 11.2 10 2 5,11.3 932,11314 11 9 9 1, 11 3 11 11 3 10 123,3124, 212,4213,74 13.6 ,51,612,814 11,4212,437 456 Interpretations, Written Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Judgment on Final Award 4 5 1, 4 5 4 1, 4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1 1 3, 1 1 6, 3.4, 3 5 1, 3 8 2, 3 12 2, 3 12 3, 3 12 7, 3 12 11, 313, 3 15 1, 4 2 7, 6 2 1, 7 3 6, 9 3 2, 9 3 3, 1224, 14 Labor Disputes 8 3 1 Laws and Regulations 1 3, 3 6, 3 7, 3 13, 4 1 1, 4 5 5, 4 5 7, 991, 1022, 111, 113, 131, 134, 1351, 1352, 136 Liens 2 1 2, 4 3 2, 4 3 5 1, 8 2 2, 9 3 3, 9 10 2 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4.5.5 Limitations, Statutes of 4 5 4 2, 12 2 6, 13 7 Limitations of Authority 3 3 1, 4 1 2, 4 2 1, 4 2 3, 4 2 7, 4 2 10, 5 2 2, 5 2 4, 7 4, 11 3 10 A201 -1987 3 Limitations of Liability 2 3, 3 2 1, 3 5 1, 3 7 3, 3 12 8, 3 12 11, 3 17, 3 18, 4 2 6, 4 2 7, 4 2 12, 6 2 2, 9 4 2, 9 6 4, 9 10 4, 1014, 1025, 1112, 1121, 1137, 1342, 1352 Limitations of Time, General 2 2 1, 2 2 4, 3 2 1, 3 7 3, 3 8 2, 3 10, 3 12 5, 3 15 1, 4 2 1, 4 2 7, 4 2 11, 4 3 2, 433, 434,436, 439, 4542, 52 1, 523, 624, 734, 74, 8 2, 9 5, 9 6 2, 9 8, 9 9, 9 10, 1113, 1131, 1132, 1135, 1136, 1221, 1222, 135, 137 Limitations of Time, Specific 2 1 2, 2 2 1, 2 4, 3 10, 3 11, 3 15 1, 4 2 1, 4 2 11, 4 3, 4 4, 4 5, 5 3, 5 4, 7 3 5, 7 3 9, 8 2, 92 ,931,933,941,961,97,982,'9102, 1113, 1136, 11310, 11311, 1222, 1224, 1226, 137, 14 Loss of Use Insurance 11.3.3 Material Suppliers 1 3 1, 3 12 1, 4 2 4, 4 2 6, 5 2 1, 93 1, 93 1 2, 93 3, 942, 965, 9 104 Materials, Hazardous 10 1, 10 2 4 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1 1 3, 1 1 6, 3 4, 3 5 1, 3 8 2, 3 12 2, 3 12 3, 3 12 7, 3 12 11, 3 13, 3 15 1, 4 2 7, 6 2 1, 736,932,933, 1224, 14 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3 3 1, 4 2 3, 4 2 7, 9 4 2 Minor Changes in the Work 1 1 1, 4 2 8, 4 3 7, 7 1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1 1 1 Modifications to the Contract 1 1 1, 1 1 2, 3 7 3, 3 11, 4 1 2, 4 2 1, 5 2 3, 7, 8 3 1, 9 7 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2 3 1, 435,952,982, 12, 13713 Notice 2 3, 2 4, 3 2 1, 3 2 2, 3 7 3, 3 7 4, 3 9, 3 12 8, 3 12 9, 3 17, 4 3, 4 4 4, 4 5, 5 2 1, 5 3, 5 4 1 1, 8 2 2, 9 4 1, 951, 961, 97, 9 10, 101 2, 1026, 11 1 3, 11 3, 1222, 122 133, 1351, 1352, 14 Notice, Written 2 3, 2 4, 3 9, 3 12 8, 3 12 9, 4 3, 4 4 4, 4 5, 5 2 1, 5 3, 5 4 1 1, 8 2 2, 9 4 1, 9 5 1, 9 7, 9 10, 1012, 1026, 1113, 113, 1222, 1224,13.3,1352, 14 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13 5 1, 13 5 2 Notice to Proceed 8 2 2 Notices, Permits, Fees and Observations, Architect's On -Site Observations, Contractor's Occupancy On -Site Inspections by the Architect On -Site Observations by the Architect Orders, Written OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2. Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2 1 2, 2.2, 4 3 4, 6, 9, 10 1 4, 11 2, 11 3, 13 5 1, 14 1 1 5, 14 1 3 Owner's Authority 3 8 1, 4 1 3, 4 2 9, 5 2 1, 5 2 4, 5 4 1, 731, 822, 931,932, 1141, 1224, 1352, 142, 1431 Owner's Financial Capability 2 2 1, 14 1 1 5 Owner's Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 11 3 3 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1 1 2, 521,541,964 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 2 4, 12 2 4, 14 2 2 2 Owner's Right to Clean Up 4 A201 -1987 223,3.7,313,7364,1022 4 2 2, 4 2 5, 4 3 6, 9 4 2, 9 5 1, 9 10 1, 135 122,322 9 6 6, 9 8 1, 9 9,11 311 422,429,436, 942,982,992,9101 422,425,436, 942, 951, 9101, 135 2 3, 3 9, 4 3 7, 7, 8 2 2, 11 3 9, 12 1, 122, 1352, 1431 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.3, 4 3 7 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 14 3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14 2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents 1 1 1,1.3, 2 2 5, 5 3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9 6 6, 9.9, 11 3 11 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6 2 6 Patents, Royalties and 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4 2 5, 9 2, 9.3, 9 4, 9 5 1, 9 8 3, 9 10 1, 9 10 3, 9 10 4, 1424 Payment, Certificates for 4 2 5, 4 2 9, 9 3 3, 9.4, 9 5, 9 6 1 966, 971, 983, 9101, 9103, 137, 141 1 3, 1424 Payment, Failure of 4 3 7, 9 5 1 3, 9.7, 9 10 2, 14 1 1 3, 14 2 1 2 Payment, Final 4 2 1, 4 2 9, 4 3 2, 4 3 5, 9 10, 11 1 2, 11 1 3, 11 3 5, 12 3 1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7 3 6 4, 9 10 3, 11 3 9, 11.4 Payments, Progress 4 3 4, 9 3, 9 6, 983,9103, 136, 1423 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9, 14 Payments to Subcontractors 5 4 2, 9 5 1 3, 962, 963, 964, 11 38, 142 1 2 PCB 10 1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7 3 6 4, 9103, 11 39, 114 Permits, Fees and Notices 2 2 3, 3.7, 3 13, 7 3 6 4, 10 2 2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Product Data, Definition of Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings Progress and Completion Progress Payments 10 1 3 12 2 311,3.12,427 422,43 434,93, 9.6, 983, 9 103, 136, 142 3 Project, Definition of the 1.1.4 Project Manual, Definition of the 1.1.7 Project Manuals 2 2 5 Project Representatives 4 2 10 Property Insurance 10 2 5, 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1 3, 3 6, 3 7, 3 13, 4 1 1, 4 5 5, 457, 1022, 11 1, 113, 131, 134, 1351, 1352, 136, 14 Rejection of Work 3 5 1, 4 2 6, 12 2 Releases of Waivers and Liens 9 10 2 Representations 1 2 2, 3 5 1, 3 12 7, 6 2 2, 8 2 1, 9 3 3, 9 4 2, 9 5 1, 9 8 2, 9 10 1 Representatives 2 1 1, 3 1 1, 3 9, 41 1, 42 1, 42 10, 5 1 1, 5 1 2, 132 1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.4, 4 5 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3 3 2, 4 2 3, 6 1 3, 6 2, 10 Retainage 931,962,983,991,9102,9103 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 1 2 2, 3.2, 3 7 3, 3 12 7 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3 10 1, 3 10 2, 3 11, 3 12, 4 2 7, 4 2 9, 5 2 1, 5 2 3, 9 2, 9 8 2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3 12 5 Rights and Remedies 1 1 2, 2 3, 2 4, 3 5 1, 3 15 2, 4 2 6, 4 3 6, 4 5, 5 3, 6 1, 6 3, 7 3 1, 8 3 1, 9 5 1, 9 7, 10 2 5, 103, 1222, 122 4,13.4, 14 3.17 6.3 Royalties and Patents AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Rules and Notices for Arbitration Safety of Persons and Property Safety Precautions and Programs Samples, Definition of Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples at the Site, Documents and Schedule of Values Schedules, Construction Separate Contracts and Contractors 4.5.2 10.2 423,42 7,10.1 3 12 3 3 11,3.12,4 27 3.11 9.2, 9 3 1 3 10 1 1 4, 3 14 2, 4 2 4, 455,6, 1137, 1212, 1225 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3 12 1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3 11, 3.12, 4 2 7 Site, Use of 3.13,61 Site Inspections 1 2 2, 3 3 4, 4 2 2, 4 2 9, 4 3 6, 9 8 2, 9 10 1, 13 5 Site Visits, Architect's 4 2 2, 4 2 5, 4 2 9, 4 3 6, 942, 951, 982, 992, 9 10 1, 135 Special Inspections and Testing 4 2 6, 12 2 1, 13 5 Specifications, Definition of the 1.1.6 Specifications, The Statutes of Limitations Stopping the Work Stored Materials 1 1 1, 1.1.6, 1 1 7, 1 2 4, 1 3, 3 11 4 5 4 2, 12 2 6, 13 7 23,437,97,1012,103,141 6 2 1, 9 3 2, 10 2 1 2, 11 3 1 4, 12 2 4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5 1 1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1 2 4, 3 3 2, 3 12 1, 423,53,54 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5 4, 9 3 1 2, 9 6 2, 963,964, 1021, 1137, 1138, 1411, 14212, 1432 Submittals 1 3, 3 2 3, 3 10, 3 11, 3 12, 4 2 7, 5 2 1, 5 2 3, 736, 92, 93 1, 982, 991, 9102, 9 10 3, 101 2, 11 1 3 Subrogation, Waivers of 6 1 1, 11 3 5,11.3.7 Substantial Completion 4 2 9, 4 3 5 2, 8 1 1, 8 1 3, 823, 991, 1221, 1222, 137 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9 8 1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5 2 3, 5 2 4 Substitution of the Architect 4 1 3 Substitutions of Materials 3 5 1 Sub subcontractor, Definition of 5 1 2 Subsurface Conditions 4 3 6 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10 2 6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1 2 4, 3.3, 3 4, 4 2 3, 4 3 4, 6 1 3, 6 2 4, 7 1 3, 7 3 4, 8 2, 8 3 1, 10, 12, 14 Surety 441,444,5412,9102,9103,1422 Surety, Consent of 991,9102,9103 Surveys 2 2 2, 3 18 3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 4 3 7, 5 4 2, 14 1 1 4, 14 3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4 3 7, 5 4 1 1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 7 3 6 4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5 4 1 1, 14.2 Termination of the Architect 4 1 3 Termination of the Contractor 14 2 2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and inspections 3 3 3, 4 2 6, 4 2 9, 9 4 2, 12 2 1,13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 4 3 8, 7 2 1, 8.3 Time Limits, Specific 2 1 2, 2 2 1, 2 4, 3 10, 3 11, 3 15 1, 4 2 1, 4 2 11, 4 3, 4 4, 4 5, 5 3, 5 4, 7 3 5, 7 3 9, 8 2, 9 2, 9 3 1, 9 3 3, 9 4 1, 9 6 1, 9 7, 9 8 2, 9 10 2, 1113, 1136, 11310, 11311, 1222, 1224, 1226, 137, 14 Time Limits on Claims 4 3 2, 4.3.3, 4 3 6, 4 3 9, 4 4, 4 5 Title to Work 932,933 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions 4 3 6, 8 3 1, 10 1 Unit Prices 7 1 4, 7 3 3 2 Use of Documents 1 1 1, 1 3, 2 2 5, 3 12 7, 5 3 Use of Site 3.13,611,621 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9 3 1 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment 4.3.5, 4 5 1, 9 10 3 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13 4 2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9 10 4, 11 3 7, 13 4 2 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 4 3 5, 4 5 1, 9 9 3, 9103, 1133, 1135, 1137, 1342 Waiver of Liens 9 10 2 Waivers of Subrogation 6 1 1, 11 3 5, 11 3 7 Warranty and Warranties 3.5, 4 2 9, 4 3 5 3, 9 3 3, 9 8 2, 9 9 1, 1222, 13713 Weather Delays 4 3 8 2 When Arbitration May Be Demanded 4.5.4 Work, Definition of 1 1 3 Written Consent 1 3 1, 3 12 8, 3 14 2, 4 1 2, 4 3 4, 4 55,932,982,991,9102,9103, 1012, 1013, 1131, 11314, 11311, 132, 1342 Written Interpretations 4 2 11, 4 2 12, 4 3 7 Written Notice 2 3, 2 4, 3 9, 3 12 8, 3 12 9, 4 3, 4 4 4, 4 5, 5 2 1, 5 3, 5 4 1 1, 8 2 2, 9 4 1, 9 5 1, 9 7, 9 10, 10 1 2, 1026, 1113, 113, 1222, 1224, 1352, 14 Written Orders 2 3, 3 9, 4 3 7, 7,822, 1139, 121, 122, 1352, 1431 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1987 5 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract A Modifi- cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements) 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral, The Con- tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac- tual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Con- tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project 1.1:4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work per- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- ules and diagrams 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equip- 6 A201 -1987 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- ments upon request 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- sentation that the Contractor has visited the site, become famil- iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- formed and correlated personal observations with require- ments of the Contract Documents 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor The Contract Documents are comple- mentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all, performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- ments and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. 1,2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well -known technical or construction indus- try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- ance with such recognized meanings 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- tor, are for use solely with respect to this Project They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropnate to and for use .in the,execution of their Work under the Contract Documents All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory .copytighi notice if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications °and other documents `prepared by the Architect Submittal or distribdtion to meet official regulatory requirements or for other ,purposes in con- nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the 'Architect's copyright or other reserved rights' CAPITALIZATION' 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in thes 6eneriil Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined; (2) the titles of num- bered articles and identified references t� Paragraphs, Subpara- graphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre- quently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and arti- cles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's hen rights Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as, the site, and the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Agreement and, within five days after any change, information of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract [Note Unless such reasonable evidence were furnished on request prior to the execution of the Agreement, the prospective contractor would not be required to execute the Agreement or to commence the Work 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents; the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assess- meets and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly prdgress of the ork.. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided iii the Contract Do<curheiitS, the Contractor' will' be furnished, free pt Charge,' sutlt copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasohably neces'sary'for execution of the Work. 2.2.6 The,foregoing are in addition fc5other, a?id'respon; s'ibilities of the Owner•enumeratedittereln .and 'especially tllbse' in- respect to Article: <6.(Csnstti,ictioil li b :doper `or by Sepat'ate: Coli tractors) Article'') "(11ayit;ient5 -an ctsttt i ietidn)" a n d Arts ,1e 11 (Insur and Bonds). 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12 2 or persistently fails to carry 'odt Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing,'niay order the Contrac- tor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause■for such order has been eliminated, however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6 1 3 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work to accordance with the Contract Documents and falls within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven -day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second seven -day period If the Contractor within such second seven day period after receipt of such second notice falls to com- mence and continue 'to correct any. deficiencies, the Owner 'may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- ciencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi- tect If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner 3.1 DEFINITION ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term "Contractor" means,, the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, V C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1981 r 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2 2 2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect If the Con- tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission .in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac- tor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor- mance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field mea- surements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- suant to Paragraph 3 12 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construc- tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc- tions concerning these matters 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per- form the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por- tions of Work already performed under this Contract to deter- mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equip- ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- rated or to be incorporated in the Work 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them 8 A201 -1987 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit- ted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents Work not conforming to these require- ments, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or nego- tiations concluded 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regula- tions However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con- trary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the Work, .2 allowances shall cover the cost to- the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts, AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1957 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowances, .4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3 8.2 2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8 2 3 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work The superinten- dent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- tractor Important communications shall be confirmed in writ- ing Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Con- tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- cable execution of the Work 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi- nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per- formance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar sub- mittals are not Contract Documents The purpose of their sub- mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4 2.7 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- tractors Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- tal has been approved by the Architect Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- ings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- tect's approval thereof 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifi- cations 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or other- wise altering such construction, or by excavation The Contrac- tor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 A201 -1987 9 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor, such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or prod- uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents However, if the Contractor has rea- son to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Archi- tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, dam- age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3 18 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3 18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifica- tion obligation under this Paragraph 3 18 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3 18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Archi- tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifica- tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- sonably withheld 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4 1 2 and 4 1.3 shall be subject to arbitration 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Para- graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat- ing that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3 3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION 10 A201 -1987 AIA© 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. r r tractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra- tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially autho- rized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi- cate through the Architect Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect Commu- nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa- tion of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13 5 2 and 13 5 3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- tect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons perform- ing portions of the Work 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu- ments The Architect's action will be taken with such reason- able promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit- tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3 3, 3 5 and 3 12 The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc- tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7 4 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will pro- vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- rated in the Contract Documents 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- ing performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- tor The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur- nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4 2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- nish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpre- tation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques- tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- ing to the Contract Claims must be made by written notice The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4 4 A deci- sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4 4 4, shall be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been com- pleted The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take action required under Subparagraph 4 4 4 within 30 days after the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a mechanic's lien 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party, must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later Claims must be made by written notice An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1987 11 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final reso- lution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from. .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances aris- ing out of the Contract and unsettled, .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con- ditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif- fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions The Archi- tect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is. justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial deter- mination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Para- graph 10 3 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a writ- ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- tect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the procedure established herein 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data 12 A201 -1987 substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, of any of the other party's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable tune not exceeding 21 days after first observance The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter If a Claim for addi- tional cost or tune related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4 A 7 or 4 3 8. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant, (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of the Claim by the other party or (5) suggest a compromise The Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial Claim stands. 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to arbitration Upon expiration of such time period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy 4.5 ARBITRATION 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraph 4 3 5 Such controversies or Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4 4 4 shall be subject to arbitration upon written demand of either party Arbitration may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4 3 and no decision has been rendered AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. L rr- T c 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4 4 shall, if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4 5 1, be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur- rently in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- tractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration. During arbi- tration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4 3.4 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded. Demand for arbi- tration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a final written deci- sion on the Claim, (2) the tenth day after the parties have pre- sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events described in Subparagraph 4 3 2 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration pro- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4 5 1 and 4 5 4 and Clause 4 5 4 1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13 7 4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree- ment and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contrac- tor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- inal third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a dispute not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein The fore- going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under appli- cable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitra- tion is permitted to be demanded When a party fails to include a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently, the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment 4.5.7 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof 5.1 DEFINITIONS ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- tractor The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor 5.1.2 A Sub subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site The term "Sub- subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub subcontractor 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as prac- ticable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti- ties (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal por- tion of the Work The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- tractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- able objection 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per- son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- sonable and timely objection The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection The Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued However, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such change AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1987 13 If 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- ments, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu- ments, assumes toward the Owner and Architect Each subcon- tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -sub- contractors The Contractor shall make available to each pro- posed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Para- graph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcon- tractor in writing, and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted 14 A201 -1987 ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other por- tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else- where in the Contract Documents 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different por- tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner Contractor Agreement 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Condi- tions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con- tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa- rate contractors' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsi- ble therefor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10 2 5 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4 3 provided the separate contractor has reciprocal obligations 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Paragraph 3 14 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate con- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in Paragraph 3 15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 2000( WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. r 1 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appli- cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or l subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted i E r ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- tion of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect, a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor, an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following .1 a change in the Work, .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7 3 3 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi- tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- tract Time being adjusted accordingly 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per- mit evaluation, .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub- sequently agreed upon, .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percent- age fee, or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- tor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, includ- ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit In such case, and also under Clause 7 3 3 3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7 3 6 shall be limited to the following .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance, .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- ing cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed, .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others, .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- nel directly attributable to the change 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for Payment The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contrac- tor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con- firmed by the Architect When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect for determination 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the deter- mination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agree- ment upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execu- tion of an appropriate Change Order AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1987 15 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9 8 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract By executing the Agreement the Con- tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4 3 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8 3 does not preclude recovery of dam- ages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, includ- ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incor- poration in the Work If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of hens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION 16 A201 -1987 AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contrac- tor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9 5 1 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor- dance with the Contract Documents The foregoing representa- tions are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified However, the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- ment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- tor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9 4 2 cannot be made If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9 4 1 If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner The Archi- tect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of .1 defective Work not remedied, .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- ing probable filing of such claims, .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment, .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor, .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay, or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub subcontractors in similar manner 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9 6 2, 9 6 3 and 9 6 4 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer- tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Con- tractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start -up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a por- tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- plete and correct items on the list Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1987 17 nated portion, thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contrac- tor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com- pletion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- stantial Completion, •shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate Warranties required by the Con- tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple- tion The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be sub- mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or por- tion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par- tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac- tor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11 3 11 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, secu- rity, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insur- ance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9 8 2 Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree- ment between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written nonce that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make 18 A201 -1987 such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work accept- able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- formed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- tor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidenc- ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of hens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner If a Subcon- tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such hen, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- tract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por- tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit- ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- paragraph 4 3 5 9.10.4 Acceptance of final. payment by the Contractor, a Sub- contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Subparagraph 4 3 5 AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. r i ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, main- taining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- nated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with final determination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under Article 4 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Archi- tect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- ing but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder Such obligation shall not he construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10 1 4 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby, .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- rated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontrac- tors, and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo- cation or replacement in the course of construction 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10 2 1 2 and 10 2 1 3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10 2 1 2 and 10 2 1 3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3 18 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to pre- vent threatened damage, injury or loss Additional compensa- tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4 3 and Article 7 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are apphcable to the Work to be performed, AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution A201 -1987 19 .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupa- tional sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees, .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Con- tractor's employees, .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by another person, .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop- erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom, .6 claims for damage's because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of owner- ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle, and .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3 18 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11 1 1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Con- tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims -made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be main- tained after final payment 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11 1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reason- ably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9 10 2 Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance Optionally, the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self protection against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract The Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability insurance unless specifically required by the Contract Documents 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- tract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without vol- untary deductibles Such property insurance shall be main- tained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9 10 or until no person or entity 20 A201 -1987 other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11 3 to be covered, whichever is earlier This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work. 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all -risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner If the Contrac- tor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reason- able costs properly attributable thereto 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the Owner or insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are not identified in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles 11.3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit I 11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner, this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or for other special haz- ards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. r L 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adja- cent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment prop- erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Proj- ect during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11 3 7 for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate property insurance All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11 3 Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, defini- tions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior writ- ten notice has been given to the Contractor 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcon- tractors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their sub- contractors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11 3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum- erated herein The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- gation by endorsement or otherwise A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that per- son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property Insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11 3 10 The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub subcontractors in similar manner 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary The Owner shall deposit in a separate account pro- ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor- dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4 5 If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam- aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a Loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5 The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9 9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- panies providing property insurance have conserited to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac- tor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con- tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu- lated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga- tions arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover- ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspec- tions and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substantial Comple- tion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution A201 -1987 21 for commencement of warranties established under Sub- paragraph 9 9 1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep- tance of such condition This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work This obligation under this Subparagraph 12 2.2 shall survive accep- tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- covery of the condition 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which arc not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor- dance with Paragraph 2 4 If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- able time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense If the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- tractor, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12 2 shall be con- strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con- tract Documents Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12 2 2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made 22 A201 -1987 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them- selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa- tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Con- tract Documents Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE ARTICLE 13 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- nances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time Unless other- wise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with'an independent test- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals The Contractor shall give the' Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce- dures The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub- paragraph 13 5 1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner; and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING:'Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place ..where the Project is located •The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- paragraph 13 5 3 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13 5.1 and 13 5 2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13:7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan- tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion, .2' Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi- cate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occur ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certifi- cate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu- ance of the final Certificate for Payment, any appli- cable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any warranty provided under Paragraph 3 5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12 2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons .1 issuance of an order of a court or other publicauthor- ity having jurisdiction, .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable, 3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9 4 1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents, 4 if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14 3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365 -day period, whichever is less, or 5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2 2 1 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor- tant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14 1 2 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor 1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors, .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, reg- ulations or orders of a public authority having juris- diction, or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to jus- AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A201 -1987 23 tify such action, may without prejudice.to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi- nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety. .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip- ment, tools, and construction equipment and machin- ery thereon owned by the Contractor, .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- graph 5 4, and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2 1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi- tect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the 24 A201 -1987 Owner The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon appli- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina- tion of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interrup- tion No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus- pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible, or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA© ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W WASHINGTON, D C 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 00 600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00 610 Performance Bonds 1. See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works "Performance and Payment Bond END OF SECTION 06 610 Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00600/16 That we, the undersigned, PRIMO CONSTRUCTIO INSURNCE COMPANY a the State of Washington, as I ll surety oorporatlo Washington to become sure 4 upon bonds of cc are jointly and severally held and firmly bound t *3 751,467 y .0 for the payment of which successors, heirs, administrators or personal re WHERIEAS, the City of Port Boles has let or the Bove bounded P numbered 94-1S and providin AMWFST SURETY tNSTjj�NCF. CnMPANW Surety By /ML Y v/) Mark Nermo Attorney -In -Fact Title PW -407_1 s ruse PERFOR and PAYMENT BOND Bond to the City of Port Angeles KNOW ALL MEN 13 Y THESE MOMENTS: This obbligation is entered Intl) pursuant to the stlatutes of the State of Washington and the ordina ces of the City of Port Angeles. Dated at P,2 ET 4 woof. ems Washington, this y of t 19S.i, The cdnditions of the above obligation are suchithat (which!contract is referred tot herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and WHEREAS, the said Prtncip I has accepted, arils about to accept, the said contract, and undertake to perform the therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; now, amore, if the Said Principal, PRIMO. CONSTRT.TCTT perform all of the provisions said contract In within such extensions of ti as may be g mech ics, subcontractors materialmen, a subcontractors with prT visio and supplies for and hdld the City of Port An les harmless fro performance as specified in id contract or cr workmanship provided or rformed under aa:ept�nce thereof by the C of Part Angeles, then and in that event, this obligation shall be void; but otherwise, it shall bit and remain in full force and effect. Signed this day of ,19 Q7 sy INC. as Principal, and AMWEST SURETY ration, organized and existing under the laws of and qualified under the laws of the State of tractors with municipal corporations as surety, the City of Port Angeles in the penal sum of um on demand we bind ourselves and our resentatives, as the case may be. I about to let to the sald PRIMO CONSTRUCTION, INC. ri 'pal, a certain contract, the said contract being for Library Facility Construction Protect shall faithfully e manner end within the time therein set forth, or d under said contract, and shaii pay all laborers, all persdris who shall supply said Principal or carrying an of said work, and shall indemnify any damage or expense by reason of failure of defects appearing or developing in the material id contract within a period of one year after its PRIMO CONSTRTJCT ON. TNC E 'ESi1E�.1 Title Y Bond 1328596 6320 Canoga :Avenue Post Office I3ox 4500 Woodland Hills, CA 91365 45(10 TEL 818 704 -1111 EXPIRATION DATE 12-19-98 READ CAREFULLY This document is printed on white paper containing the artificial watermarked logo (A of Amwest Surety Insurance Company (the "Company on the front and brown security paper on the back Only unaltered originals of the POA are valid This POA may not be used in conjunction with any other POA No representations or warranties regarding this POA may be made by any person This POA is governed by the laws of the State of California and is only valid until the expiration date The Company shall not be liable on any limited POA which is fraudulently produced, forged or otherwise distributed without the permission of the Company Any party concerned about the validity of this POA or an accompanying Company bond should call your local Amwest branch office at (206) 522 -3111 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENT, that Amwest Surety Insurance Company, a Nebraska corporation (the "Company does hereby make, constitute and appoint DIANNE HANSEN MARK NERMO SUZANNE HOLDEN AS EMPLOYEES OF AMWEST SURETY INSURANCE CO its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact, with limited power and authority for and on behalf of the Company a su thereto if a seal is required on bonds, undertakings, recognizances, reinsurance agreement for a Miller Ac the nature thereof as follow Small Business Administration Guaranteed Bonds up to S "•1,250,000.00 Bid Bonds up to S• "5,000,000.00 Contract (Performance Payment), Court, Subdivision S "'5,000,000.00 License Permit Bonds up to S'•5,000,000.00 Miscellaneous Bonds up to S' "5,000,000.00 and to bind the company thereby This appointment is made under and by au I, the undersigned secretary of Amwest Surety Insurance Company, a Ne force and effect and has not been revoked and furthermore, that the re provisions of the By -Laws of the Company, are now in full force an Bond No 1328596 Signed sealed this 1 This POA is signed and sealed by facsimile under Company at a meeting duly held on December RESOLVED, that the President or any authority as defined or limited in the ins of the Company to bonds, undertaking revoke any POA previously gran RESOLVED FURTHER, that an (i) when signed by the President o (ii) when signed by the President or any authorized attorney -in -fact or age (iii) when duly executed and seal by the power of attorney issue RESOLVED FURTHER, that the si jlt UTI ii d by autho 1975 ent, in vi encin ces :i. 'esi.•an 'dent njunc wi po tment Ip obliga APRIL corporation f the Board rto i<xecute eh o r perfo bo e By -La nd, unde any V (if a requir one or more attorneys -in -fact or agents pursuant to and within the limits of the authority evidenced ompany to sup c person or persons a re of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any POA or certification thereof authorizing the execution and del ery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually affixed IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Amwest Surety Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by Its proper officers, and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed this 14th day of December, 1995 (2,4. C 7 11 4AZAI t4k &"Zeo%___ Karen G Cohen, Secretary John E Savage, PreS(dent POWER NUMBER 0000676471 affix the seal of the company or other written obligations in fich are now in full force and effect RTIFY that this Power of Attorney remains in full h on this Power of Attorney, and that the relevant 7 C 7*Le,A, tle? Karen G Cohen, Secretary DIRECTORS alt alt utions adopted by the Board of Directors of Amwest Surety Insurance Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, may appoint attorneys -in -fact or agents with ac case, for and on behalf of the Company, to execute and deliver and affix the seal s of all kinds, and said officers may remove any such attorney -in- factor agent and suretyship obligation shall be valid and bind upon the Company and sealed (if a seal be required) by any Secretary or Assistant Secretary, or or Assistant Secretary, and countersigned and sealed Of a seal be required) by a duly State of California County of Los Angeles On December 14, 1995 before me, Peggy B Lofton Notary Public, personally appeared John E Savage and Karen G Cohen, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s) Is /are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me all that he/she/they executed the same in his/her /their authorized capacity(les), and that by his/her /their signature(s) thin rumenj.thu erw(i) orjhe ntjjy u pn�eh of which the persons) acted, executed the instrument. xis 0 11n WITNESS hand and official seal PECCYLLOFTON I!� Commission #106 P 00 Notary Public California Li 4 ?0 Signature (Seal) LosMQeles Catsity 3 ccAli Lofton, Notary Pu My Comm. ExpirM Aug 6.1990 CO DEC.14, 1995 Q f. I 00 800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 810 Modifications to General Conditions 1. Supplementary Conditions: The following Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from, or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction:, AIA Document A201, 1987 edition Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph or subparagraph thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph and subparagraph shall remain in effect. 2. In all other instances, the Supplementary Conditions shall have precedence over all other provisions they supplement, modify, delete or replace. 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Omit the portion of the last sentence reading, "Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement.." 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT Add to Section 1.1.2 the following prior to the last sentence of Section 1.1.2. The Contractor waives any right the Contractor may have as an alleged third -party beneficiary of any such contracts and agreements and covenants not to sue the Owner or Architect as a third -party beneficiary of the contracts. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT Delete Section 1.2.2 and substitute therefor the following: 1.2.2 By executing this Contract, the Contractor represents and warrants that he has visited the site and has fully acquainted himself with the type and location of the Work and the conditions and facilities that may affect the Work, including without limitation those conditions relating to and that may affect: the transportation, handling, delivery and storage of materials; the availability of labor; the availability of water and electricity; the availability, condition and use of roadways and other access to the Work; weather conditions; the type and location of surface and subsurface physical conditions; the type and location of surface and subsurface utility lines at the project site and those adjacent to the project site; other contracts to be entered into by the Owner relating to the project that may affect the Work and require coordination and scheduling efforts by the Contractor; and the type, availability and storage of equipment for use in performing the Work. The Contractor shall determine and fully acquaint himself with all regulations, codes, ordinances and provisions of law which affect the Work. Contractor shall bear and pay for, without reimbursement from Owner, all items required or services performed by reason for the Contractor's failure to familiarize itself with the visible or apparent conditions at the Project Site. Add the following subparagraph 1.2.6: 1.2.6 Numbering of trade Divisions of these Specifications and items of work included in each Division and Section, conforms to the CSI Manual of Practice, as issued by-the Construction Specifications Institute. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/18 Divisions and Sections included are listed in "Table of Contents Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall check his copies of the Project Manual with the Table of Contents bound therein to be sure that they are complete. Add Section 1.2.7 as follows: 1.2.7 In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities: 1. The Agreement. 2. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. 3. The Supplementary Conditions. 4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 5. Drawings and Specifications. In the case of inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 Delete this subsection in its entirety. 2.2.2 Delete subsection 2.2.2 and substitute the following: The Owner, at the reasonable request of the Contractor, shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics for the site of the Project based upon information readily available to Owner. Owner does not warrant the accuracy of any information not prepared by Owner and Owner does not guarantee that other information is not available. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 Delete this subsection in its entirety and substitute the following: If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven -day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the costs of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation of the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Between the words recognized" and "such add "or should have recognized Between the words "recognized" and "error add or recognizable Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/19 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.3 The Contractor shall submit with his bid, Section 00 430, "Statement of Proposed Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers 3.4.= "_:hitect will promptly reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the Owner, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposal. If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not available, the Architect may state that action will be deferred until the Contractor provides further data. Failure of the Owner to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to such requirements. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, any substitutions of Subcontractors /Suppliers must be reviewed and approved by the Architect. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1.1 3.8 ALLOWANCES Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.3, 3.4.4, and 3.4.5: Add the following Subparagraph 3.6.1.1: Taxes to be paid include those imposed by Federal, State, County, and City governments excepting only real estate taxes on the property, and such taxes as applicable shall be included in the contract sum. The Owner will pay sales taxes proportionally with each periodic and final payment request in addition to the amount allowed on the payment certificate and Contractor shall pay such taxes to the authority as required by law. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES Delete from paragraph 3.7.4 the following: "...performs work knowing it to be... and replace with "...knows or should know that work to be performed is..." Delete from paragraph 3.8.1 the following: "....but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection." 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 Delete the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.10.1 and replace with the following: The, Contractor shall submit a Construction Progress Schedule pursuant to Section 01300, submittals, Section 1.04 (total working days) to the Architect within five (5) calendar days of the award date of the contract. This schedule and any supplemental schedule shall show: (1) completion of all work within the specified contract time, including work within each phase of the work as described on Plan Sheet Al. (2) the proposed order of work; and (3) projected starting and completion times work and for the total project. The schedule shall be developed by a critical Contractor shall provide sufficient material, meet the completion times in this schedule. for major phases of the path method. The equipment, and labor to Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/20 Add the following after the last sentence of Subparagraph 3.10.1: The Owner's approval of any schedule submittal shall not transfer any of the Contractor's responsibilities to the City. The Contractor alone shall remain responsible for adjusting forces, equipment, and work schedules to ensure completion of the work within the time(s) specified in the contract. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor falls behind the schedule, the Contractor shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve progress. The Owner may require an increase in the number of shifts and /or overtime operations, days of work and /or otherwise to increase operations and to submit for approval such supplementary schedule or schedules in chart form as may be deemed necessary to demonstrate the manner which the agreed rate of progress will be regained, all without additional cost to the Owner. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Owner under the provisions of this section shall be grounds for determination by the Owner that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with such diligence as will ensure completion within the time specified. Upon such determination the Owner may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work or any separable part thereof in accordance with determination for default or in accordance with other provisions provided in the contract. If the Contractor desires, or due to slow progress is required to carry on work at night or outside the normal working hours, the Contractor must submit a written proposal to the Owner. Add the following Subparagraphs 3.10.4 and 3.10.5: 3.10.4 The Contractor and all Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers shall schedule submittals, materials, deliveries, and installations to conform with the Contractor's progress schedule, and provisions to this effect shall be included in all subcontracts. 3.10.5 Refer to Section 01 300 for further requirements. 3.15 CLEANING UP Add the following Subparagraph 3.15.3: 3.15.3 For the purposes of Subparagraphs 3.15.1 and 3.15.2 of the General Conditions, in addition to Contractor's leaving all floor surfaces in a broom -clean condition (or its equivalent) and Contractor's cleaning of all interior /exterior surfaces, Contractor shall perform the following final cleaning for all trades at the completion of Work; (i) Remove temporary projections, offices and shacks; (ii) Remove marks, stains, finger prints and other soil or dirt from painted, decorated and natural finish woodwork and other Work; (iii) Remove spots, plaster, soil and paint from ceramic tile, marble and other finished materials, and wash or wipe clean; (iv) Clean fixtures, cabinet work and equipment, removing stains, paint, dirt and dust, and leave same in undamaged, new condition; (v) Clean aluminum in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer; and Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/21 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION (vi) Clean resilient floors thoroughly with a well- rinsed mop containing only enough moisture to clean off•any surface dirt or dust and buff dry by machine to bring the surfaces to sheen. •___=ty -d and the following substituted in its place: 3.18.1 Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law with respect to its obligations under the Contract Documents, indemnify, defend, protect and hold harmless Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants and their constituent partners, employees, agents, representatives, stockholders, officers and directors (collectively, the Indemnified Parties) from and against each and all of the following: (a) Any claim, liability, loss, damage, cost, expense, including attorneys' fees, award, fine or judgment, resulting from or arising out of (i) the performance of the Work, or (ii) breach of the obligations of Contractor under the Contract Documents, or (iii) any other act or omission with respect to the Work by Contractor, the Subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, attributable to death, bodily injury, sickness, disease or injury to or destruction of tangible property (except for the Work), or loss of use thereof; provided, however, Contractor shall not be obligated to indemnify Owner to the extent such damages are the result of the negligence or willful misconduct of Owner. Such obligation shall not be construed as to negate, abridge or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party described in this paragraph. Contractor's obligation to defend the Indemnified Parties shall not extend to any action, proceeding arbitration which asserts or alleges only that the injury to the claimant resulted solely from the negligence or misconduct of the Indemnified Party and from no other cause of if a final judgment is obtained establishing that such injury to the claimant resulted solely from the negligence or misconduct of the Indemnified Party, in which latter event, Contractor's obligation to defend such Indemnified Party shall cease upon the date such judgment becomes final, and such Indemnified Party shall thereupon reimburse Contractor for its reasonable attorneys' fees and court costs in so defending the Indemnified Party. Contractor shall be obligated to defend an Indemnified Party to the extent the concurrent negligence of the Owner or another Indemnified Party is alleged and upon the date a judgment becomes final establishing the extent of the Indemnified Party's negligence, the Indemnified Party shall thereupon reimburse Contractor for the pro rata portion of attorneys' fees attributable to and to the extent of such negligence and the pro rata portion of court costs in defending such Indemnified Party. (b) Any and all liens and charges of every type, nature, kind or description which may at any time be filed or claimed against the Project, or any portion thereof, as a consequence of acts or omissions of Contractor, Contractor's agents, servants, employees, subcontractors, sub subcontractors or any or all of them and which are not due to Owner's failure to perform its obligations under this Contract. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/22 (c) Any claim, liability, loss, costs, damage or expenses, including attorneys' fees, on account of or through the use of the Project, or any portion thereof, by Contractor, or by any other person whomsoever at the invitation, express or implied, of Contractor or by permission of Contractor or arising out of or indirectly or directly resulting from the performance of the Contract by Contractor, any subcontractor, any sub subcontractor, or anyone employed directly or indirectly by any of them or for whose acts they may be liable. (d) Any claim, liability, loss, cost, damage or expense, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or in connection with any claim by or any act or omission of any employee of Contractor, any subcontractor, sub subcontractor, anyone employed directly or indirectly by any of them or for whose acts they may be liable, including any claims under or related to or arising out of workmen's compensation acts and other employee benefit acts. By affixing their initials below, the parties acknowledge that this provision has been mutually negotiated by the parties as related to waiver by Contractor of any immunity it might otherwise have and the Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51, Revised Code of Washington. Contractor Owner Add the following Subparagraph 3.18.4: 3.18.4 The provisions of this Paragraph 3.18 shall survive the termination or expiration of the Contract and shall not be limited in any way by the amount or type of insurance obtained by Owner, Contractor or any Subcontractor. 4.1 ARCHITECT ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1.3 Delete portion reading "...against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and...." 4.1.4 Delete Subparagraph in its entirety. Add the following Subparagraph 4.1.5: 4.1.5 The Architect is not bound to define the limits of any subcontract, and will not enter into disputes between the Contractor and his employees, including subcontractors. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.11 Delete this subsection in its entirety. 4.2.12 Delete this subsection in its entirety. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.2 Decisions of Architect Delete this subsection in its entirety. 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance Delete "including arbitration" from line 2. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/23 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment Delete Subparagraph in its entirety. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions Delete this section in its entirety and substitute the following: In the event Contractor encounters unanticipated concealed conditions, it shall notify Owner and Architect of the discovery on the same day the condition(s) is encountered. Contractor shall additionally notify Architect of any costs and /or time claimed to be associated with the unanticipated concealed condition(s) within twenty -four (24) hours. Such notification shall include a specific breakdown of all costs claimed, including labor and material costs and time. Failure to provide notification shall constitute a waiver of such claims. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time Add the following to 4.3.8.1: Written notice of a claim for additional time shall be given promptly (but in no event later than fifteen (15) days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise thereto. 4.3.8.2 Add the following to 4.3.8.2: No additional compensation shall be paid or claimed for additional contract time due to weather delay. 4.3.8.3 Add the following Subparagraph 4.3.8.3: Should an extension of time be granted to Contractor by Change Order signed by Owner, the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless from any damage, cost or loss to any other contractor or subcontractor caused or in any way related to such extension. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Delete this section in its entirety. 4.5 ARBITRATION Delete section 4.5 in its entirety including 4.5.1, 4.5.2, 4.5.3, 4.5.4, 4.5.4.1, 4.5.4.2, 4.5.5, 4.5.6, and 4.5.7 and substitute the following in its place: 4.5.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof or the Project, except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment provided in Article 9.10, shall be decided by a court of law under regular rules of civil procedure, with venue in Clallam County, state of Washington. Unless otherwise stated in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any court proceedings. 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to settle disputes by mediation whenever possible. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 5.2.1 and substitute the following: Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/24 Each bidder shall have listed, on the form provided in the proposal section, the name, address, and description of the work, of each subcontractor to whom the bidder proposes to sublet portions of the work in excess of ten percent of the total amount of their bid. For the purpose of this paragraph, a subcontractor is defined as one who contracts with the Contractor to provide materials and labor, labor only, or who specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to drawings contained in the Contract Documents. Failure to list subcontractors may render a bid non responsive and may result in automatic rejection of the bid. All persons or entities proposed by Contractor to be Subcontractor or Sub subcontractors shall be responsible persons or entities, of suitable experience and ability to perform the Work proposed to be subcontracted to it. 5.2.1.1 Add the following Subparagraph 5.2.1.1: Not later than ten days after the date of commencement, Contractor shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities proposed as manufacturers for each of the projects identified in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications) and, where applicable, the name of the installing subcontractor. 5.2.2 Delete or Architect Delete the last sentence reading "The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection." 5.2.3 Delete the portion reading "...or Architect.." 5.2.4 Delete the portion reading "...or Architect.." 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS The following Subparagraphs are hereby added to Article 5: 5.3.2 Contracts between Contractor and its Subcontractors shall: (i) require that the Subcontractor and Contractor assign their interest in the Subcontract to the Owner, which assignment shall become effective upon the Contractor's default under the Contract Documents and the Subcontractor's receipt of notification from the Owner that (a) the Contractor is in default under the Contract Documents; and (b) the assignment is effective; (ii) require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under each Subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment in accordance with Article 9 of the General Conditions and Article 5 of the Standard Form of Agreement; (iii) require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted portions of the Work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor where appropriate) in sufficient time so that the Contractor may comply in the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner; (iv) waive all rights the Contractor and Subcontractor may have against one another for damages caused by fire and other perils covered by the property insurance described in Paragraph 11.3 of these General Conditions, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee under such Paragraph 11.3; and Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/25 (v) obligate such Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this Subparagraph 5.3. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies of the Contract Document to which the Subcontractor will be bound by this Paragraph 5.3. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such Contract Documents available to his Sub subcontractors. (vi) require that the Contractor shall be fully and solely responsible to the Owner for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor, just as the Contractor is responsible for the Contractor's own acts and omissions. 5.3.3 All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor that specifically binds the subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and contains third party beneficiary waiver provisions as required by revised Subparagraph 1.1.2. The Contractor shall pay each subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor on account of losses under policies issued pursuant to the Contract. 5.3.4 All contracts for work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall provide that any dispute between the Contractor and Subcontractor will be litigated in superior court as provided in revised section 4.5 of this document and, further, that in the event a Subcontractor makes any claim for attorneys' fees or costs, that said claim, if allowed, will not be directly or indirectly passed through by the Contractor against the Owner. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Delete paragraph 6.2.5 in its entirety and substitute the following: 6.2.5 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall upon due notice promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all costs which the Owner has incurred. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.6 In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" and substitute an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedule set forth in Subparagraph 7.3.10 below." 7.3.8 Delete this section it its entirety. 7.3.9 Add to last sentence, "per procedure of City Resolution 7- 91". Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/26 7.3.10 Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.10: In Subparagraph 7.3.6 the allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedule: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION for the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost. For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. For each Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by that Contractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost. For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub subcontractors, 10 percent of the amount due the Sub subcontractor. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.1.4. In order to facilitate checking of quotation for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change be approved without such itemization. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.2.1 Delete the first sentence of Subparagraph 8.2.1 and replace it with the following: The Owner will issue the Notice to Proceed within ten (10) days of receipt in proper form and after approval of the required Contract, bonds, certificates and other required submittals. The Work of this project shall be substantially completed within 365 calendar days from the date of Notice to Proceed. Time is of the essence of the Contract. Any delay in the performance of the work will be an inconvenience and be expensive to the Owner and will interfere with and delay business and commerce and could cause increased risk to persons and property. The cost to the Owner in the administration of the Contract, including architectural and engineering services and observation and administration of construction, will be increased by such delays. It will be impracticable and extremely difficult to ascertain and determine the actual damages which could be suffered by the Owner as the result of such delays. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 Delete Subparagraph 8.3.1 and substitute the following: If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work (which changes in the work have been identified by a Change Order as causing delay), or by delay authorized by Owner, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as Architect, Owner and Contractor shall determine. The Contractor agrees to limit any and all claims or damages for such delays to those delays which are unreasonable and in those cases to only the actual labor and equipment idled directly as a result of such unreasonable delays. Claims for unreasonable delays shall be only for acts which impact the critical path of the Contractor for performance of the work. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/27 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by one or more labor disputes, fire, an unusual delay in transportation, weather conditions not reasonably anticipated during any period which are more adverse than the conditions normally prevailing during such period, unavoidable casualties, or by other causes beyond Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by Owner, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as Architect, Owner and Contractor shall determine, but no additional relief shall be available for such delays. 8.3.2.1 Add the following Subparagraph 8.3.2.1: The Contract Time will not be adjusted for normal inclement weather which can be expected at the Project locale due to precipitation or temperature, based upon actual data from the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) for the locale of the Project. Contractor agrees that the measure of abnormal inclement weather due to precipitation or temperature during the period covered by this Contract shall be the number of days exceeding those shown in the NOAA weather data over the previous 5 -year average in which precipitation exceeded .10 inch (or in the case of snow or ice pellets, 1 inch or more, or in which the highest temperature was 32 degrees F. or below). No extension of time will be made for abnormal inclement weather after the principal portions of the Work are enclosed except for site work which critically affects the Contract Time or Specific Dates. For the purpose of this paragraph, the term "enclosed" is defined to mean when the Work is sufficiently closed in (exterior walls up and roof in place) so as to permit any structure, or major portion thereof which is part of the Work, to be adequately heated so as to allow the various trades to perform their work. The Architect shall determine when the structure is "enclosed" and shall issue, upon-the request of Contractor, a letter certifying the date the Work become enclosed for the purposes thereof. If the total calendar days lost due to inclement weather, from the start of the Work at the Project Site by the Contractor until the principal portions of the Work are enclosed, exceeds the total number of days to be expected for the same period, a time extension;„ if granted, shall only be the number of calendar days needed to equal the excess number of calendar days lost due to such abnormal inclement weather. 8.3.3 Delete section 8.3.3 and substitute the following: Except as provided above, the Contractor shall not recover any amounts from Owner for delay in performance of the Work unless Owner's or person's acting for the Owner actions or inactions were the actual, substantial cause of the delay, except where the Contractor could have reasonably avoided the delay by the exercise of due diligence. If the delay has been caused by anyone other than Owner or persons acting for the Owner, the Contractor may not seek delay damages from Owner. Owner shall not be included as a party to any proceeding, whether in arbitration or litigation, in which the Contractor or any other contractor seek damages directly or indirectly from one or more third parties allegedly responsible for such delay. The Contractor shall not, as a result of delays from any causes, be entitled to damages arising out of actual or alleged loss of efficiency; morale, fatigue, attitude, or labor rhythm; constructive acceleration; extended home office overhead; expectant underrun; trade stacking; reassignment of workers; concurrent operations; dilution of supervision; learning curve; beneficial or joint occupancy; logistics; ripple; season change; profit upon damages for delay; impact damages or similar damages. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/28 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3.1 The following sentence is hereby added at the end of Subparagraph 9.3.1: and otherwise substantiating the cost of the work for which payment is sought. The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet. 9.3.1.3 Add the following new Subsection 9.3.1.3: Until the Work is complete, the Owner shall pay 95% of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. All sums not paid the Contractor under this section shall be retained percentage. 9.3.3 The following sentence is hereby added to Subparagraph 9.3.3: Contractor shall continue to have responsibility to replace stolen, defective or vandalized work, materials or equipment. Add the following Subparagraphs 9.3.4, 9.3.5, and 9.3.6: 9.3.4 At the time of submitting monthly application for payment, the Contractor shall submit a written certification that the work is on or behind schedule. If behind schedule, the Contractor shall state the number of days and the cause of delay. 9.3.5 The Contractor shall request that two certified copies of wage rate approvals be sent to the business office of the Owner at the address noted elsewhere in the Specifications. Payment cannot be released by the Owner until the affidavit is received. Each voucher claim submitted by the Contractor for payment shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with pre -filed statements of intent with the Department of Labor and Industries. 9.3.6 Once each calendar month, the Owner will make partial payment to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified approved estimate of the work performed during the preceding calendar month. In accordance with RCW 60.28.010, a sum equal to 5% of all amounts of such estimate shall be retained. After the award of the contract, Owner shall require the Contractor to exercise, in writing, one of the options listed below. .1 Retained percentage will be retained in a fund by the public body until thirty days following the final acceptance of said improvements or work as completed; or .2 Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company until thirty days following the final acceptance of said improvements or work as completed. .3 Initial election is to be accomplished on a form approved by the Owner. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT Change 7 days to 15 days wherever it occurs. 9.4.1 Modify by deleting "the" after the words "after receipt of" and add the words "a completed 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION Add the following items to Subparagraph 9.5.1: .8 failure to present affidavit pertaining to wages paid as required by the contract documents; Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/29 .9 failure of the Contractor to promptly provide the progress schedule; or .10 any claims which Owner may have against Contractor under or in connection with the Contract Documents or Contractor's work. If Owner shall decline to make the payment requested in an Application for Payment because Owner believes that the Work has not progressed to the point indicated in the Application for Payment, the quality of Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, or for any other reason listed in Subparagraph 9.5.1.1 through 9.5.1.10 above, Owner shall so notify Contractor. If Contractor and Owner cannot promptly agree on a revised amount, Owner shall pay such amount as shall not be in dispute. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.7 ESCROW AGREEMENT Add the following Subparagraphs 9.6.7, 9.6.7.1, 9.6.7.2, 9.6.7.3,.9.6.7.4, and 9.6.7.5: When the Contractor elects to place amounts reserved in escrow, the Contractor and Owner shall jointly select a bank or trust company as the escrow agent. The Owner, the Contractor, and the escrow agent shall then execute an Escrow Agreement on form approved by the Owner. A copy of the completed Escrow Agreement shall be provided the escrow agent, the Contractor, the Owner, and Fiscal Officer of the Agency. .1 Investment of Funds in Escrow Upon receipt of an invoice voucher requesting a progress payment, the Owner will issue, in addition to the warrant or check for the regular progress payment, a warrant or check made payable jointly to the bank or trust company and the Contractor, in an amount equal to the amount retained on each voucher. This warrant will then by forwarded to the escrow agent who will negotiate the warrant and invest the proceeds as required by the Contractor and approved by the escrow agent and the Owner. A list of acceptable bonds or securities shall be attached to the Escrow Agreement. When interest on such investments accrues and is paid, it must be forwarded to the Contractor. .2 Investments Authorized The following is a list of bonds, or other securities approved by the Agency: .1 Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the United States. .2 Other obligations of the United States or its agencies. .3 Obligations of any corporation wholly owned by the government of the United States. .4 Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage Association. .5 Time deposits in commercial banks. .6 No further approval is necessary if any of these bonds or securities are selected by the Contractor. .7 Other bonds or securities may be approved by the Owner provided that the Contractor has the staff assistance and expertise which will permit him to exercise sound judgement in assessing the probable safety and liquidity of such investments. In no event will the Owner approve investments in stock of any company, association, or corporation. In all cases, the investments selected must mature on or prior to the date set for completion of the contract, including extensions thereof. .3 Upon final acceptance of a contract, and the expiration of the 30 day period thereafter, and after receipt of certificates from the Department of Revenue, Department of Labor and Industries and the Department of Employment Security, and satisfactory evidence is available to insure that taxes and fees due, or to become due, by these agencies are discharged, and the claims of material Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/30 suppliers and laborers who have filed their claims together with a sum sufficient to defray the cost of foreclosing the liens of such claims, and to pay attorney's fees, have been paid, the Fiscal Officer of the Agency will pay to the Contractor, the fund retained in escrow, or issue instructions to the Owner and escrow agent authorizing the release to the Contractor of the securities and bonds held in escrow. .4 If such taxes have not been discharged, or the claims, expenses and fees have not been paid, the Fiscal Officer of the Agency shall: .1 Pay such taxes and fees from the funds retained and issue a warrant for the remaining balance payable to the County Treasurer and the Owner. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deduct such liens, expenses and fees that have been filed and pay the remainder, if any, to the Contractor. Disposition of amounts held by the Owner to settle liens, expenses and fees will be disposed of in accordance with the advice of legal council. .2 Order the securities and bonds held in escrow to be converted to money, and returned to the retainage fund held by the Fiscal Officer of the Agency, who shall dispose of such funds in accordance with Subparagraph 9.5.6.4.1 above. .5 Escrow agent will not make any payment from a retained percentage fund or release any retained percentage escrow account to any person, until instructions to do so have been received from the Fiscal Officer of the Agency. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 Subparagraph 9.7.1 is hereby deleted. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Subparagraph 9.8.1 is hereby deleted and the following substituted in its place: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use; provided, however, the Date of Substantial Completion shall not precede the day on which the Owner approves the Work and receives a "signed -off" notice of final inspection (or its equivalent in a form acceptable to Owner) and a Temporary Certificate of Occupancy from applicable governmental authorities with respect to the Work. Contractor covenants to satisfy all conditions precedent for the issuance of the final Certificate of Occupancy which are the responsibility of Contractor within thirty (30) days after the issuance of the Temporary Certificate of Occupancy unless otherwise agreed to in writing. 9.8.3 Delete this section in its entirety. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE Add the following Subsections 9.9.4, 9.9.5, 9.9.6: 9.9.4 Occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of existing claims on behalf of the Owner or Contractor against each other. 9.9.5 Occupancy by the Owner prior to project acceptance does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to maintain all Contractor's liability insurance and bonds required of the Contractor under the contract until the entire project is completed and accepted by the Owner. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/31 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Add the following Subparagraph 9.10.1.1: .1 Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Final Completion of the Work. Add the following Subparagraph 9.10.2.1: 9.10.3 Delete the following from the end of the Subparagraph, "...except that it shall not Subparagraph 4.3.5." 9.10.4 Delete the last sentence reading "Such waivers....Subparagraph 4.3.5." Add the following Paragraph and Subparagraph: 9.11 Liquidated Damages 9.11.1 Owner and Contractor agree that should the work of this project not be substantially completed within 365 calendar days from the date of Notice to Proceed, through no fault of the Owner, that from the compensation otherwise to be paid, the Owner may retain the sum of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) for each and every day the work remains uncompleted. Owner and Contractor agree that the amount of damages the Owner will sustain due to delay is difficult to ascertain and that the amounts specified are the proper measure of liquidated damages which the Owner will sustain per day by the failure of the Contractor to complete the identified work. 10.1.3.2 .1 At the conclusion of the project, the Contractor and his subcontractors shall submit affidavits of wages paid to the Department of Labor and Industries for Certification by the Director. Affidavits shall be submitted on S.F. 9843, "Affidavits of Wages Paid or a similarly constructed form. Final payment on the contract will be withheld until receipt by the Owner of certification by the Director that the prevailing wage requirements of the law have been satisfied. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Delete the following from the final sentence, "on which arbitration... under Article 4." Subparagraph 10.1.3 is hereby deleted and the following subparagraphs are substituted in its place: The Contractor shall determine what areas are affected by asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and the extent to which such areas are affected. The Contractor shall also determine and notify the Owner and Architect of the scope and expense of work necessary to render the asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) harmless. Hazardous Substances. Contractor shall not permit or allow any Hazardous Substance to be deposited, disposed, placed, generated, buried, discharged, manufactured, refined, transported, treated, handled or located on or about the Project. Contractor shall not have violated this paragraph if (a) the Contractor temporarily uses or stores Hazardous Substances and such Hazardous Substances are reasonably required for and are in quantities appropriate to the performance of the Work; and (b) the Contractor exercises reasonable oversight over the Contractor's use and storage of such Hazardous Substances and compliance with Governmental Requirements applicable to such use and storage. Hazardous Substances for purposes of this'paragraph include (a) asbestos, (b) petroleum- Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/32 10.2.8.1 based chemicals and substances, (c) urea formaldehyde, (d) radon, (e) PCB and (f) any chemical, material, element, compound, solution, mixture, substance or matter of any kind whatsoever which is defined, classified, listed, designated or regulated as hazardous, toxic or radioactive by the statutes, ordinances, codes, regulations, orders or directives of the United States of America, the State of Washington, any political subdivision of the State of Washington, any municipal corporation of that state or any board, agency, authority or body associated with any of the foregoing or any quasi- governmental body or agency with jurisdiction over the Project. 10.1.4 Subparagraph 10.1.4 is hereby deleted and the following substituted in its place: To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor will indemnify, defend (with counsel acceptable to Owner), protect and hold harmless the Owner, or other persons or entities designated by Owner and their directors, officers, representatives, employees and agents from and against any and all claims, costs, expenses (including attorneys' fees and costs), liabilities, penalties or actions arising, directly or indirectly, from the presence on or about the Project site of any hazardous substances, excepting only such matters as are caused solely or exclusively by the negligence or willful misconduct of Owner or present at the Project site at the time of the execution of these Contract Documents in which case the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, its subcontractors, employees, and agent. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY The following is added to Paragraph 10.2: 10.2.8 SAFETY Contractor's Responsibility for Safety. Contractor shall at all times be responsible for all aspects of safety in connection with the Work, including initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs, including establishing and enforcing access restrictions such as exclusion zones required by applicable health and safety regulations. Contractor shall at all times perform the Work, or ensure that it is performed, in a manner to avoid the risk of bodily injury to persons or risk of damage to any property. Contractor shall promptly take all precautions which are necessary and adequate against any conditions that involve a risk of bodily harm to persons or a risk of damage to any property. Contractor shall continuously inspect all Work, materials and equipment to discover and determine the existence of any such conditions and shall be solely responsible for discovery, determination and correction of any such conditions. 10.2.8.2 Compliance with Laws. etc. Contractor shall comply, and shall ensure that all Subcontractors and Suppliers on Site comply, with all applicable Federal, state and local laws, regulations, ordinances and standards related to safety. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with other contractors and their subcontractors regarding safety matters. Contractor shall promptly comply, and ensure that all its Subcontractors and Suppliers on Site promptly comply, with any specific safety directions given to Contractor by the Owner's Representative or its designee. Failure to so comply shall be a material breach of this Contract and can, at Owner's option, be a basis for termination of this Contract. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/33 10.2.8.3 10.2.8.4 10.2.8.5 Safety Proaram Plan. Prior to beginning the Work of any portion, thereof, Contractor shall submit for Owner's review written Safety Program Plans for Contractor and all Subcontractors, with detail commensurate with the Work. Such plans should be prepared by an appropriate health or safety professional. Review of such Safety Program Plans by Owner shall not (1) relieve Contractor of its responsibility for safety, (2) be construed as limiting in any manner Contractor's obligation to undertake any action which may be necessary or required to establish and maintain safe working conditions at the Site, nor (3) create any liability for Owner. Safety Program Plans shall be conspicuously posted at the Site. Contractor shall follow its Safety Program Plans and ensure that all its Subcontractors follow their Safety Program Plans. Safety Representative. Contractor shall appoint a qualified Safety Representative and shall authorize such representative to devote to his or her Safety Representative duties whatever time is necessary to properly perform such duties. Safety Meetings and Eouioment. Contractor shall hold regular scheduled meetings to instruct its personnel and all Subcontractors' personnel on safety practices. Contractor shall furnish appropriate safety equipment for the Work in progress and enforce the use of such equipment by its employees. Contractor shall ensure that each Subcontractor furnishes appropriate safety equipment for the Work in progress and enforces the use of such equipment by its employees. 10.2.8.6 Accident Reports. Contractor shall maintain accurate accident and injury reports and shall furnish to Owner a copy of any accident report prepared as required by the applicable workers compensation law and shall also furnish to Owner a monthly summary of injuries and worker hours lost due to injuries. 10.2.8.7 Payment for Emeraencv Services. In the event any employee of Contractor or any Subcontractor, who is engaged in any activity related to the Work, requires the services of an ambulance, physician, hospital or other health provider, Contractor shall pay or arrange for such Subcontractor or employee to pay all charges for any such services directly to the provider of such services. 10.2.8.8 Safe Workplace. Contractor warrants that before starting the job, it will furnish a copy of its written Accident Prevention Program (APP) and a site specific Safety Plan, which identifies anticipated job safety hazards within the scope of its contract and all phases of its contract and which addresses the specific means it will use to address such hazard, to the Owner. Contractor warrants that its APP and Safety Plan conforms to the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act. Contractor warrants it will ensure that its employees follow all APPs, Safety Plans and work rules. Contractor warrants that it will communicate all work rules to its employees and that it has a progressive disciplinary plan for safety or work rule violations which it consistently enforces and will continue to enforce _throughout the length of this Contract, no matter who discovers the violation. Contractor warrants that it will select and furnish to its employees all appropriate safety equipment and participate fully in coordination of all safety issues among all contractors /subcontractors on the job. Contractor agrees that it will provide the Owner with weekly documentation relating to Contractor's safety compliance, identification of hazards or safety violations, actions taken to correct them, disciplinary action taken and safety training undertaken. Contractor warrants that it will provide safety training on a regular basis to all workers as required by WISHA, will conduct safety inspections as required by WISHA and will report all identified hazards. Contractor agrees to undertake any abatement actions required as a Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/34 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 result of the discovery of violations. The following language is 10.3.1: provided such emergency omission of Contractor or 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE hereby added to the end of Subparagraph is not directly caused by an act or its agents. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE In the first line following the word "maintain insert the words "in a company or companies licensed to do business in the State in which the Project is located and include costs therefore in the Base Bid." Omit semicolon on third line and add "including Contingent Employers Liability (Stop Gap);" Add "Include coverages for Owned Automobiles, Non -Owned Automobiles and Hired Cars." Add the following Subparagraph 11.1.1.8: Blanket Contractual Liability; Delete Subparagraph 11.1.2 and add the following: The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment and shall be written on an occurrence basis, for not less than the following, or greater if required by law: 1. Worker's Compensations: a) State Statutory b) Employer's Liability S500.000/1.000.000 2. Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a) Bodily Injury: 11.00Q.000 Each Occurrence ,52.000.000 Annual Aggregate b) Property Damage: $1.000.000 Each Occurrence $2,000.000 Annual Aggregate c) Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for two years after final payment. d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C, and U coverages. 3. Contractual Liability: a) Bodily Injury: 11.000.000 b) Property Damage: 52 54.444 S500.000 Each Occurrence Each Occurrence Annual Aggregate 4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion Deleted: 12.000.000 Annual Aggregate 5. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: a) Bodily Injury: 11,000.000 Each Person Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/35 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 52.000.000 b) Property Damage: 51.000,000 6. The Owner shall be named as an additional insured. Each Occurrence Each Occurrence 7. In addition, furnish umbrella coverage in an amount not less than $1,000,000.00. 8. Bodily injury coverages above shall include death. 11.1.3 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 11.1.3: Certificates will be on ACORD Form 25S. 11.2 OWNERS LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 Delete first sentence. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE Delete Paragraph 11.3.1 in its entirety along with its subparagraphs and substitute the following: The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to 115 percent of the full insurable value thereof. Such insurance shall be in a company or companies licensed to do business in the State in which the project is located and against which the Owner has no reasonable objection. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, the Subcontractors, and Sub Subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, and malicious mischief. If not covered under all risk insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored off the Site or in transit when such portions of the work are to be included in an Application for payment under Subparagraph 9.3.2. Costs for Property Insurance shall be included in the Base Bid. Add the following Subparagraph 11.3.1.1: 11.3.1.1 If by terms of this insurance any mandatory deductibles are required, or if the Contractor should elect, with the concurrence of the Owner, to increase the mandatory deductible amounts or purchase this insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of the amount of the deductible in the event of a paid claim. 11.3.3 Add the following sentence to the end of paragraph,: "This paragraph shall not be construed to bar an insurer's right of subrogation." Delete Subparagraph 11.3.6 in its entirety and substitute the following: 11.3.6 If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain insurance and to so notify the Owner, then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.3.7 Delete subparagraph in its entirety. 11.3.8 Replace "Owner" with "Contractor" wherever it occurs. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/36 Replace "Owner" with "Contractor wherever it occurs. Delete the word "arbitration Delete the portion of sentence reading "...in which case the Paragraph 4.5." Omit Subparagraph in its entirety. The following is hereby added to the end of Paragraph 11.3: Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will reasonably protect him from the potential liability described in Subparagraph 3.18.1. The Contractor hereby indemnifies and agrees to hold harmless and defend Owner, its agents, representatives, shareholders, and its affiliates from all loss and liability to the extent of any deficiency of coverage under such insurance. The Contractor will fully insure, and the Owner will not be liable for the loss of, any building materials not stored on the site of the Project. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND Delete subparagraph 11.4.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 11.4.1 Contractor shall secure, include costs therefor in the bid, and pay for performance, labor and material payment, and maintenance bonds issued by a bonding company licensed to transact business in the State of Washington, in Statutory Form. Other bond forms will not be acceptable. Liability under each of the bonds shall be: 1001 of contract sum plus sales tax for 1) performance, 2) labor and material payment, and 3) for maintenance for defective work during the specified maintenance periods. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.2 Subparagraph 12.2.2 is hereby deleted and the following substituted in its place: If, within one year after the date on which the Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion for Payment pursuant to Paragraph 9.8 of the General Conditions or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Contractor shall be responsible for enforcing any and all warranties given by Subcontractors or Sub subcontractors. This obligation shall survive any termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD Omit Section in its entirety along with all of its subsections. Add Sections 13.8, 13.9, 13.10, and 13.11 as follows: Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/37 13.8 HOURS OF LABOR 13.8.1 All work under this contract shall be performed pursuant to public policy of the State of Washington, as set forth in Chapter 49.28 Revised Code of Washington, as amended, requiring that public work be performed in work days not more than eight hours each, except in extraordinary emergency. The provisions of said Chapter 49.28 RCW as amended, are by reference incorporated and made a part hereof. Pursuant to the provisions of Section 49.28.050 and 49.28.060 RCW, the Owner may cancel the agreement in case the work is not performed in accordance with the said policy. 13.9 PREVAILING WAGES 13.9.1 Before commencement of work on a public works contract, each Contractor and subcontractor shall file with the Owner and with the Department of Labor and Industries a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages (S.F. No. L. I. 700 -29) including fringe benefits; to be followed at the conclusion of the contract, before release of the retained percentage, with the submission of an Affidavit of Wages Paid (S.F. No. 9843) for certification by the Director, Department of Labor and Industries, in accordance with RCW 39.12.040. 13.9.2 Upon approval and return of S.F. No. L.I. 700 -29 and S.F. No. 9843 by the Department of Labor and Industries, one copy shall be transmitted to the City. 13.9.3 Statements of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages forwarded to the State agency or department shall be accompanied by a listing of each Contractor, and all their subcontractors. Each such listing shall be identified with the State project number. 13.9.4 In accordance with RCW 39.12.040, the retained percentage withheld on a public works contract cannot be paid until there is on file an Affidavit of Wages Paid, properly certified by the Department of Labor and Industries, for the Contractor and each of his subcontractors. 13.9.5 Contractors are responsible for obtaining and filing affidavits of their subcontractors. Filing cost to be paid by Contractor. 13.10 OFFSHORE ITEMS 13.10.1 13.11 OWNER'S RIGHT TO OCCUPY INCOMPLETE WORK In compliance with RCW 39.25, the Owner shall be furnished with a certified statement setting forth the nature and source of Offshore Items in excess of $2,500 which have been utilized under each prime contract in the performance of the work. "Offshore Items" are those items procured from sources beyond the territorial boundaries of the United States including Alaska and Hawaii. This certified statement is mandatory and shall be received before final payment is made on the contract. Should the Work, or any portion thereof, be complete prior to scheduled Substantial Completion, the Owner shall have the right to occupy such portion of the Work. In such an event, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra compensation on account of said occupancy by the Owner or by the Owner's normal full use of the Work, nor shall the Contractor interfere in any way with said normal full use of the work. Further in such an event, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra compensation on account of the Owner's occupancy and use of the portion of the Work, nor shall the Contractor be relieved of any responsibilities of the Contract including the required times of substantial completion and completion of the Project. Such Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/38 ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF CONTRACT 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1.1 Delete the words "persistently or repeatedly" 14.2.1.3 Delete the word "persistently A new Paragraph 14.4 shall be added as follows: 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in the Contract Documents, Owner shall have the right at any time for any or no reason whatsoever to terminate the Work or any portion thereof upon giving Contractor ten (10) days prior written notice. Thereupon, as the Contractor's sole remedy hereunder, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for the Work completed to the effective date of the termination of the Contract as set forth below. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination, Contractor shall immediately, in accordance with Owner's instructions, proceed with performance of the following duties: Unless otherwise specified, terminate all Subcontracts and orders to the extent that they relate to Work so terminated; Complete the performance of the Work not terminated; and Take such other actions as may be necessary or requested by Owner for the protection and preservation of the terminated Work. 14.4.3 In the event of termination for Owner's convenience, Contractor shall be paid: 14.4.4 14.4.2.1 14.4.2.2 14.4.2.3 14.4.2.4 14.4.2.5 14.4.3.1 14.4.3.2 occupancy by the Owner does not, in itself, constitute Substantial Completion nor Final Completion and does not affect any Liquidated Damages that would otherwise be assessed. Cease operations as specified; Place no further orders and enter into no further Subcontracts for materials, labor, services or facilities. For Work properly performed on the terminated portion of the Work before the effective date of termination; and Reasonable demobilization costs directly related to such termination including costs associated with termination as described in detail in invoices and descriptions provided by Contractor and approved by Owner. In determining amounts due Contractor under this Paragraph 14.4, Owner shall be credited for payments previously made to Contractor for the terminated portion of the Work and claims which Owner has against Contractor under the Contract, and for the value of materials, supplies, equipment or other items to be disposed of by Contractor that are covered under the Contract Sum. If Contractor has, prior to the date of termination, collected sums toward the cost of the Work or Contractor's fee in excess of the reimbursable amounts set forth above, Contractor shall promptly pay such excess to Owner or, at Owner's option, such excess shall be deducted from any amounts due Contractor from Owner. In the event of such termination by Owner, Owner may require Contractor to promptly assign all or some subcontracts, materials, tools, equipment and appliances previously acquired by Owner, rental Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/39 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 agreements and any other commitments which Owner in Owner's sole discretion chooses to take by assignment, and in such event, Contractor shall promptly execute and deliver to Owner written assignments provided by Owner. 14.4.5 In no event shall Contractor have a claim for damages, lost profits or otherwise on account of the termination of the Contract by Owner. ARTICLE 15 SPECIAL REOUIREMENTS FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION /EOUAL OPPORTUNITY 1. General Application: a. Discrimination in all phases of employment is prohibited by Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Presidential Executive Order 11375, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination, Chapter 49.60 RCW, and by Gubernatorial Executive Orders 66 -1 and 70 -01, among other laws and regulations. These special requirements establish minimum requirements for affirmative action /equal opportunity and are intended to define and implement the basic non discrimination provisions of these specifications. Failure to comply with these requirements may constitute grounds for application of contract default remedies. 2. Contractors Aareement: a. During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1) The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory or mental handicap, nor shall the Contractor commit any of the other unfair practices defined in RCW 49.60, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination. 2) The Contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will be considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability. 3) The Contractor will send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency, or worker's representative of the contractor's commitments under this contract and RCW 49.60, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination. 4) The Contractor will permit access to its books, records and accounts, and to its premises by the Owner or the Washington State Human Rights Commission for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with these specifications. 5) The Contractor will include the provisions of clauses, 1) through 4) above in every Subcontract or purchase order, so that such provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or vendor. A new Article 16 is hereby added: ARTICLE 16 REGULATIONR 16.1 The Contractor shall comply with statutory provisions relating to public works, including but not limited to the following: A. Chapter 70.92 RCW relating to provisions for the aging and physically handicapped. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/40 B. Chapter 39.12 RCW relating to prevailing wages on public works. C. Chapter 39.16 RCW relating to resident employees on public works. D. Chapter 49.28 RCW relating to hours of labor. E. Chapter 49.60 RCW relating to discrimination. F. Chapter 39.08 RCW relating to Contractor's bond. G. Chapter 18.27 RCW relating to registration of Contractors. H. Title I of Americans with Disabilities Act "ADA and Washington law and regulations relating to discrimination of and the definition of persons who are handicapped or disabled, including but not limited to workers injured on the job. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library 00800/41 APR -22 -1997 09 :14 FROM PRIMO CONSTRUCTION, INC. TO LINDBER P.01 00 820 �i ARTICtIta 1, CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGREGATED WACILTTXES The Bidder Certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any,segregated facilities at any of hid establishments, and that be does not permit his employees co perform their control. where segregated facilities a further that he will not maintain or p facilities at any of his establishment employees to perform their services at segregated facilities are maintained. certification will be a violation of V contract resulting from acceptance of the term "segregated facilities' means restrooms and washrooms, restaurants drinking fountains, recreation or ente dousing facilities provided for empl directions or are in fact segregated O national origin, because of habit. lac agrees that (except where he has obtai proposed subcontractors for specific t certifications from proposed 9tibcontra exceeding $10.000 which. are exempt fo Opportunity clause, and that he will r ervices at any location, under his e maintained. The bidder certifies ovide for his employees any segregated and that he will not permit his any location under his control where The bidder agrees that a breach of this e Equal Opportunity clause in any his bid. As used in this certification any waiting rooms. work areas, d other eating areas, parking lots, tainment area, trans rcation. and es which are segregat d by explicit the basis of race, color, religion, or 1 custom, or etherwisiee. The bidder ed identical certification from me periods) he wi l lti obtain identical tors prior to the award of subcontracts the provisions of th0 Equal Lain such certifications in his files. t Not The penalty for making false sta.ements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001 Date; MA2e. 19 97 PR.. c. c 2 1ST I 3/14c. Official Address 970 cAR_LSEr RrAb Street Address SEQ .t. I nrt W A 3 ff City, State. `Lip APR -2� -199? G: 05 Name d ='drier Y \hen- 2ESIa .LN 1 Ti le PO& AhsCcFLES wrist te- f.I;R gr4.k-I Natne Of Project '1711$ rolii4 inittr ACCOIPAtiY vacs $XD WITBOUT i &T*LA low. 3E0 452 7EE14 C Divieiei 00 Bidding InformlatiOn Port Angeles Library 00820/42 TOTAL P.01 94% P.01 TOTAL P. @1 2. Public Works Denartment Policy and Procedure PW 404: a. See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works, "Public Works Department Policy and Procedures 1) Resolution No. 7 -91! a) See accompanying City Council of the City of Port Angeles, "Resolution No. 7 -91 2) Design Clarification /Variation Reauest /Field Authorization: a) See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works Department "DCVR 3) Flow Chart for Change Orders: a) See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works "Flow Chart for Change Orders on Construction Contracts 4) Contract Chance Order: a) See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works Department "Contract Change Order NO. 5) DCVR Loa: a) See accompanying City of Port Angeles Public Works Department "DCVR Request Log END OF SECTION 00 820 Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Library 00820/43 II PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT POLICY AND PROCEDURES CHANGE ORDERS ON CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS PW-404 1.0 PURPOSE: 1.1 To provide instructions to field inspectors and office personnel on procedures for contract change orders. 1.2 To improve recordkeeping on construction projects. 1.3 To provide a uniform method for contract change orders 2.0 ORGANIZATIONS AFFECTED: 2.1 Public Works Engineering staff 2.2 Engineers and Architects on City managed construction projects 3.0 POLICY: 3.1 All revisions, clarifications, field requests and field authorizations for construction contracts shall be documented using the 'DESIGN CLARIFICATIONNARIATION /REQUEST/FIELD AUTHORIZATION' form. 3.2 All change orders to contracts shall be approved in accordance with City Council Resolution No. 7 -91 Appendix 6.1. 4.0 DEFINITIONS: 4.1 DCVR: Design Clarification/Variation Request/Field Authorization. 5.0 PROCEDURES: 5.1 A construction contract change order maybe initiate:1 by the Contractor, City inspector, or Architect/Engineer by using the DCVR form, Appendix 6.2. 5.2 The person completing the form shall fill in all areas of the forrn and sign the request. 5.3 The paperwork flow on the change order shall proceed as shown on the attached diagram, Appendix 6.3. 5.4 The change order form is Appendix 6.4. 6.0 APPENDIX: 6.1 City Council Resolution No. 7-91 PW-404.01 (3/9: 6.2 The "Design Clarification/Variation Request/Field Authorization' Form PW- 404.02 [11/93] 6.3 Procedure flow for Change Orders PW- 404.03 (11/93] 6.4 Change Order Form PW- 404.04 [11/93] 6.5 DCVR Request Log PW- 404.05 [12/93] December 15, 1993 1 lack Piuis Director RESOLUTION NO. 7 -91 A RESOLUTION of the City Council of the City of Port Angeles Authorizing the approval of change orders for construction contracts under certain circumstances, and establishing a procedure for City Council review. WHEREAS, change orders, which are revisions to a construction contract, are an integral part of con ruction contracts that are administered by the Public Works Department and City Light Department; and WHEREAS, decisions on change orders must often be made immediately to allow the contractor to corm' ie witt the work with a minimum of admuustrative delay; and WHEREAS, the City of Port Angeles desires to establish a formal policy and procedure which would allow the Cit) Manager and the Directors of Public Works and City Light to approve change orders under certain circumstances: now therefore, PW- 404.01 (3/911 BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PORT ANGELES as follows: Section 1: The City Manager and the Director of Public Works and Director of City Light are hereby authonzec and directed to approve and sign construction contract change orders on construction contracts under the following con iitions 1. If the change order does not substantially change the scope of the project; and 2. If the total increase or decrease in the contract amount, as a result of the change order. does not excee fifteet percent (15%) for contracts under 5100,000, and ten percent (10%) for contracts over 5100,000 of the bid total ated u the onginal approved contract; except that no individual change order shall exceed S100.000; and 3. If the total contract amount as adjusted by the change order is within the amount budgeted for the protect. 4. If the amount of the change order is 55,000 or less, the Director of Public Works or Director of City Licht ma approve and sign the change order; if the amount of the change order is over S5,000, it must also be approved and signe by the City manager or his designee. Section 2: Where the Director of Public Works or Director of City Light approves and signs change order according to the conditions stated above, he shall forward the change order to the City Council for its information withi thirty (30) days of the signing of the change order. Section 3: If the change order does not meet the conditions set forth in Section 1, the Director of Public Works or Director of City light shall submit the change order to the City Council for approval in advance of his approval and signing of the change order. PASSED by the City Council of the City of Port Angeles at a regular meeting of said Council held on the 19th ds of March, 1991. SIGNED: Joan K. Sargent, Mayor ATTEST: Dorothy J. McFarland, Acting City Clerk APPROVED AS TO FORM: Craig K. Knutson, City Attorney PROJECT NAME• ORIGINATOR: ITEM: REFERENCE DRAWING OR SPECIFICATION: DESCRIPTION OF REQUEST: DATE REPLY REQUIRED: PROJECTED COST EFFECTS: COST INCREASE [APPROX. VALUE S NO CHANGE IN PRICE COST DECREASE [APPROX. VALUE S ORIGINATOR SIGNATURE: VARIATION REMARKS: CLARIFICATION: REVIEWED BY: ARCHITECT/ENGINEER CITY INSPECTOR CITY ENGINEER PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR 1 CITY MANAGER CITY OF PORT ANGELES PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT DESIGN CLARIFICATION VARIATION REQUEST FIELD AUTHORIZATION OWNER ARCIiI!i;CT ENGINEER It is our opiaioo that this work is not an extra to tbs contract and d'imet tbs contractor to perform tbs work deacn'bsd par the contact dower. If you consider the above to be an emu to tbs coronet, you must prepare and wtbmit a detailed cat proposal and justification. h is our opinion that this wort will mull in a teed for a chums order to the totanet amount and/or time. You should prepare a detailed cod proposal and justification as soon as possible since the wort will not be authorized until such data is approved. If such work is critical to the timely execution of the contract. you are authorized to proceed subject to the work not exceeding; and days to the contract time. Final con and time changes shall be subject to the review and approval and execution of a change order. Payment for the wort herein authorized will not be made prior to the execution of a charge order. Pw.apaor 111A71 1 1 1 1 1 1. 1 3 PROJECT NUMBER: CRITICAL TO SCHEDULE: YES PROJECTED TIME EFFECTS: INCREASE IN CONTRACT TIME I DAYS) NO INCREASE IN CONTRACT TIME DECREASE IN CONTRACT TIME DAYS) SIGNATURE: DATE: DATE: COPIES TO: OWNER ARCH. ENGR. MECH. ELEC STRUCT. CIVIL MANAGER COUNCIL OTHER DCVR NO. NO DCVR INITIATED by Contractor Inspector Arch. /Enpr. I Review by Review by A/E City Engineer I Change Orde71 No DCVR Completed by Needed inspector and work considered part of Yes initial contract Timing Yes Contractor provide Critical rough estimate and time est. on DCVR I No Request made to Contractor for amount and/or days infotmation rwroaaa )uno) 1 Formal Change Order completed by inspector City Engineer Approval Change Order less —J than $5,000 Contractor authorized Copy of Change Order Director to begin work to Council in 30 days of Approval approval Change Order over $5,000 Scope of the YES project changed 1 110 Total increase /decrease over 152 for project under 5100,000 TES Total increase /decrease over 102 for project over $100,000 Change Order over $100,000 I No FLOW CHART FOR CHANGE ORDERS ON CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS Appeal to City Engineer Change Order is within the NO City Council budgeted amount for project Approval I YES City Manager sign Change Order 1 Contractor authorized to begin work Contractor !Project No LID No. State/Fed. Aid No. DESCRIPTION OF WORK I You are ordered to perform the following descnbed work upon receipt of an approved copy of this Change Order: Such work will be compensated by: Increase or Decrease in bid items; Force Account; Negotiated Price: The r escribed work affects the existing contract items and /or adds and/or deletes bid items as follows: hem Deaenpuoa DCVR Quantity Unit •S Coat •S Cost No. Per Unit ORIGINAL CONTRACT DAYS: APPROVED .BY: 1 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER PROJECT NIGRJCIIY ENGINEER CONTRACTOR PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR :`..CITY MANAGER CITY COUNCIL APPROVAL DATE: PW-404.04 (11/931 Project Name DATE: CURRENT CONTRACT 1 S DAYS: 1 DAYS: CITY OF PORT ANGELES PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER NO. SHEET OF Otis' Rev. Ong. Rev. Ong. Rev. Otis. Rev. Saks Tax Not Inchar ed All wort. materials and meannementa to be in accordance with the provisions of tie original cotttaact and/or the standard specifications and special provisions for the type of construction involved. The payments and/or additional time specified and s =teed to in this order include every claim by the Contractor for any aura payment or extettiion of time with respect to the watt described herein, including delays io the overall project. EST. NET CHANGE THIS CHANGE ORDER SIGNATURE: TOTAL CHANGE ORDERS. INCLUDING THIS ONE DAYS: •Net S Cost .d Days �Vr ��rYr �ti /rt tp sr r. '+a�<a.. -max �a� EST. CONTRACT AFTER THIS CHANGE ORDER 1 DAYS: DATE: �97 DCVR REQUEST LOG Ire PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: titevefr NO ORIG DATE ORIG IV/404.0S IRAs) DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 1 COST YIN 6 DATE DATE REPLY REM ARKS RECD REPLY RECD 1' 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 00 830 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 1. See accompanying Department of Labor and Industries prevailing wage rate schedule. Division 00 Bidding Information Port Angeles Public Library END OF SECTION 00 830 00830/44 BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 03 -05 -97 OVERTIME CODES OVERTIME CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE HOURLY RATE ACTUALLY PAID TO THE WORKER ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS, THE HOURLY RATE MUST BE NOT LESS THAN THE PREVAILING RATE OF WAGE MINUS THE HOURLY RATE OF THE COST OF FRINGE BENEFITS ACTUALLY PROVIDED FOR THE WORKER. I ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. C. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. E ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS), SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE F THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. H ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS OR EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. J THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. K ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE L ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE M ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE N ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. P ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. R ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE U ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE v, ALI HOURS \'ORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS MAY BE WORKED AS A MAKE -UP DAY AT THE PREVAILING HOURLY RATE OF WAGE (NO OVERTIME) WHEN WORK IS LOST DUE TO ANY REASON BEYOND THE EMPLOYER'S CONTROL. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE A THE FIRST SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED M EXCESS OF SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 03 -05 -97 -2- ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT STRAIGHT TIME IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS OR HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS OR ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT THE STRAIGHT HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, INCLUDING THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED ON UNPAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. HOLIDAY CODES HOLIDAYS NEW YEARS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8) HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8) HOLIDAYS NEW YEARS DAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7) II( >LIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY. INDEPENDENCE DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER IIANkSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS (6) f(» IDAYS NFW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6) HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8) HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VFTERANS' DAY THANKSGIVING DAY. THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9) PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY. WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY. AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 Q PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6) R PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY. WASHINGTON 'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, ONE -HALF DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY. (7 1/2). S PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). T PAID HOLIDAYS SEVEN (7) PAID HOLIDAYS. BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 03-05 -97 -3- U PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY. INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, AND A DAY OF THE EMPLOYEES CHOICE (7). PAID HOLIDAYS: SIX (6) PAID HOLIDAYS. W PAID HOLIDAYS: NINE (9) PAID HOLIDAYS. X HOLIDAYS AFTER 520 HOURS NEW YEAR'S DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY AFTER 2080 HOURS NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY (8) Y HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY FOLLOWING THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). Z HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). 6 A PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). B HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, AND THE DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY (9). C HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). D PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, THE DAY BEFORE OR THE DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY (9). E HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). F HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). H HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY. MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). I PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY. INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7) M I'AID HOLIDAYS THANKSGIVING AND CHRISTMAS UNPAID HOLIDAYS_ NEW YEAR'S DAY. MEMORIAL DAY. INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY AND THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING. N PAID HOLIDAYS MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY UNPAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY AND THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY Q PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY UNPAID HOLIDAY_ PRESIDENTS' DAY R HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING, JR DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY. AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8) S PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY. CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8) BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 03-05 -97 -4- 6 T PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). U PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY (9). PAID HOLIDAYS• NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, AND EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY (9) W PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY (10). X PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY, EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY (11) NOTE CODES 8 A THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY. IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE: OVER 50' TO 100' SI 00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100' TO 175' S2 25 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 175' TO 250' 55 50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 175 FEET OVER 250' DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE, PROVIDED IT IS NO LESS THAN THE SCALE LISTED FOR 250 FEET B THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY. IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE. OVER 50' TO 100' 51 00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100' TO 175' 52.25 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 175' TO 250' 55 50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 175 FEET C THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE OVER 50' TO 100' S1 00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100' TO 150' 51 50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 150' TO 200' S2 00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET OVER 200' DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE D WORKERS WORKING WITH SUPPLIED AIR ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE AN ADDITIONAL 51.00 PER HOUR. E ALL CLASSIFICATIONS, INCLUDING ALL APPRENTICES, REPORTING TO AN EMPLOYER'S DESIGNATED JOB HEADQUARTERS AND WORKING A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4) HOURS IN ANY ONE (1) DAY SHALL RECEIVE A PER DIEM ALLOWANCE OF TWENTY -FOUR DOLLARS (524.00) IN ADDITION TO THE PREVAILING HOURLY RATE OF WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS L V, ORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS LEVEL A SO 75, LEVEL B SO 50 AND LEVEL C SO 25 M WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS LEVELS A B 51 00, LEVELS C D SO 50 N WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS LEVEL A 51 00, LEVEL B SO 75, LEVEL C 50 50, AND LEVEL D SO 25 Classification State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section Telephone (360) 902 -5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504 -4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not Tess than this total A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05 -97 (See Benefit Code Key) Over Time Holiday Note Code Code Code Page 1 PREVAILING WAGE ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $24.73 1M 50 BOILERMAKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $33.38 1R 5N BRICK AND MARBLE MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $29 37 1N 5A CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) JOURNEY LEVEL $13.12 1 CARPENTERS ACOUSTICAL WORKER $28.79 1M 50 CARPENTER $28.63 1M 5D CREOSOTED MATERIAL $28.73 1M 50 DRYWALL APPLICATOR $28.63 1M 50 FLOOR FINISHER $28.76 1M 50 FLOOR LAYER $28.76 1M 5D FLOOR SANDER $28.76 1M 50 MILLWRIGHT AND MACHINE ERECTORS $29.63 1M 5D PILEDRIVER $28.63 1M 50 SAWFILER $28 76 1M 5D SHINGLER $28.76 1M 50 STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR $28.76 1M 50 STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS $28.76 1M 5D CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $25.01 1 DIVERS TENDERS DIVER $61 26 1M 5D 8A DIVER TENDER $30.62 1M 50 DREDGE WORKERS ASSISTANT ENGINEER 529.02 1N 5D 8L ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND) 528 58 1N 50 8L BOATMEN $29 02 1N 5D 8L CRANEMAN 529.07 1N 5D 8L ENGINEER WELDER 529 07 1N 50 8L LEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC 529 46 1N 5D 8L MAINTENANCE 528 58 1N 50 8L MATES 529.02 1 N 5D 8L OILER 528 66 1N 50 BL DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $28 71 1J 5A ELECTRICAL FIXTURE MAINTENANCE WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL 59.37 1J 5A Classification ELECTRICIANS INSIDE CABLE SPLICER CABLE SPLICER (TUNNEL) CERTIFIED WELDER CERTIFIED WELDER (TUNNEL) CONSTRUCTION STOCK PERSON JOURNEY LEVEL JOURNEY LEVEL (TUNNEL) ELECTRICIANS MOTOR SHOP CRAFTSMAN JOURNEY LEVEL ELECTRICIANS POWERLINE CONSTRUCTION CABLE SPLICER CERTIFIED LINE WELDER GROUNDPERSON HEAD GROUNDPERSON HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR JACKHAMMER OPERATOR JOURNEY LEVEL LINEPERSON LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR POLE SPRAYER POWDERPERSON ELECTRONIC TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS CONSTRUCTOR MECHANIC MECHANIC IN CHARGE PROBATIONARY CONSTRUCTOR FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS ALL CLASSIFICATIONS FENCE ERECTORS FENCE ERECTOR FENCE LABORER FLAGGERS JOURNEY LEVEL GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL HEAT FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS MECHANIC HEATING EQUIPMENT MECHANICS MECHANIC INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS MECHANIC INDUSTRIAL POWER VACUUM CLEANER JOURNEY LEVEL INLAND BOATMEN DECKHAND ENGINEER- DECKHAND OPERATOR CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05 -97 Page 2 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note WAGE Code Code Code $35 53 1J 6H $38.28 1J 6H $34 28 1J 6H $36.90 1J 6H $18.43 1J 6H $33 83 1J 6H $35.53 1J 6H $15 37 2A 6C $14 69 2A 6C $33 36 4A 5A 8E $30.62 4A 5A BE $22 26 4A 5A 8E $23 40 4A 5A 8E $30 62 4A 5A 8E $23 40 4A 5A 8E $30 62 4A 5A BE $26 15 4A 5A 8E $30.62 4A 5A 8E $23 40 4A 5A 8E $12.07 1 $26.54 4A 61 $35 84 4A 61 $39 55 4A 61 $13 78 4A 61 $13 50 1 $13.80 1 $11 60 1 $20 05 1M 50 $10 72 1 $30 57 1F 6R $18 45 1J 5A $15 65 1 $9 07 1 $18 15 1K 5D $19 77 1K 50 $20.55 1 K 50 CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05 -97 **f *Or ...,k.....it..,►.,t.Ynt******* (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code INSPECTION /CLEANING /SEALING OF SEWER WATER SYSTEMS BY REMOTE CONTROL CLEANER OPERATOR, FOAMER OPERATOR $9 73 1 GROUT TRUCK OPERATOR $11 48 1 HEAD OPERATOR $12.78 1 TECHNICIAN $6 25 1 TV TRUCK OPERATOR $10.53 1 INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEY LEVEL $20 50 1 IRONWORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $30 62 1B 5A LABORERS ASPHALT RAKER $25 21 1M 5D BALLAST REGULATOR MACHINE 524.73 1M 5D BATCH WEIGHMAN 520.05 1M 50 CARPENTER TENDER 524 73 1M 5D CASSION WORKER 525 57 IM 50 CEMENT DUMPER /PAVING $25 21 1M 5D CEMENT FINISHER TENDER 524 73 1M 50 CHIPPING GUN 524 73 1M 5D CHUCK TENDER 52473 1M 50 CLEAN -UP LABORER 524 73 1M 5D CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER 524 73 1M 5D CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR 525.21 1M 5D CRUSHER FEEDER $20 05 1M 50 CURING CONCRETE 524 73 1M 5D DEMOLITION, WRECKING MOVING (INCLUDING CHARRED MATERIALS) $24 73 1M 50 DIVER 525 57 1M 5D DRILL OPERATOR (HYDRAULIC, DIAMOND, AIR TRAC) 525 21 1M 50 EPDXY TECHNICIAN 524 73 1M 50 FALLER /BUCKER, CHAIN SAW 525 21 1M 5D FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP (i e dusting, vacuuming, window cleaning; NOT 517 73 1M 50 construction debris cleanup) GABION BASKET BUILDER 524 73 1M 50 GENERAL LABORER 524 73 1M 50 GRADE CHECKER TRANSIT MAN $25.21 1M 50 GRINDERS $24 73 1M 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A 525 57 1M 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B $25.21 1M 50 HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVELS C D 524 73 1M 5D HIGH SCALER $25 21 1M 50 HOD CARRIER /MORTARMAN 525 21 1M 50 JACKHAMMER 525 21 1M 5D MINER 525 57 IM 50 NOZZLEMAN, CONCRETE PUMP, GREEN CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH 525 21 1M 50 PRESSURE AIR WATER ON CONCRETE ROCK, SANDBLAST, GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER PAVEMENT BREAKER $25 21 1M 50 PILOT CAR 520 05 1M 5D PIPE RELINER (NOT INSERT TYPE) 525 21 1M 513 PIPELAYER CAULKER 525 21 1M 50 POT TENDER 524 73 1M 5D Page 3 Classification POWDERMAN POWDERMAN HELPER RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER (POWER) RE- TIMBERMAN SPREADER (CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES) SPREADER (CONCRETE) STAKE HOPPER TAMPER SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR GAS TAMPER (MULTIPLE SELF PROPELLED) TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE) TOPMAN, TAILMAN TRACK LABORER TRACK LINER (POWER) TUGGER OPERATOR VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS, OR ELECTRIC) VIBRATOR WELL -POINT MAN LABORERS UNDERGROUND SEWER WATER GENERAL LABORER PIPE LAYER LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER INSTALLERS LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OR TRUCK DRIVERS LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS LATHERS JOURNEY LEVEL MACHINISTS (HYDROELECTRIC SITE WORK) MACHINIST METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) FITTER/WELDER LABORER MACHINE OPERATOR PAINTER PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL PLASTERERS JOURNEY LEVEL PLAYGROUND PARK EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS JOURNEY LEVEL PLUMBERS PIPEFITTERS JOURNEY LEVEL POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS ASSISTANT ENGINEERS (OILERS) BACKHOES, (75 HP UNDER) BACKHOES, (OVER 75 HP) BACKHOES, (3 YD UNDER) BACKHOES, OVER 3 YD AND UNDER 6 YD) BACKHOES, (6 YD AND OVER WITH ATTACHMENTS) BATCH PLANT OPERATOR, CONCRETE BELT LOADERS (ELEVATING TYPE BOBCAT CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05 -97 Page 4 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note WAGE Code Code Code $25.57 1M 50 $24 73 1m 5D $25 21 1m 5D $25 57 1M 5D $25.21 1M 5D $25 21 1M 5D $24.73 1M 50 $25.21 1M 5D $25 21 1M 50 $24 73 1M 5D $24 73 1M 5D $24 73 1M 5D $25 21 t M 5D $24.73 1M 5D $24 73 1M 50 $25 21 1M 5D $25 21 1m 5D $24.73 1M 5D $25.21 1M 5D $11 42 1 $7 81 1 $7 93 1 $28.93 1J 5A $16 84 1 $15 16 1 $11 13 1 $10.66 1 $11 41 1 $23 88 2B 5A $29 81 1R 5A $7.93 1 $37 61 1B 5A $27 19 1N 50 8L $29 29 1N 5D 8L $29 65 1N 50 8L $29 65 1 N 50 8L $30 09 1N 50 8L $30 59 1N 5D 8L $29 65 1N 5D 8L $29.29 1N 5D 8L $27.19 IN 5D 8L Classification 4* CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05 -97 BROOMS $27.19 1N 5D 8L BUMP CUTTER $29 65 1N 5D 8L CABLEWAYS $30 09 1N 5D 8L CHIPPER $29 65 1N 50 8L COMPRESSORS $27 19 1N 50 8L CONCRETE PUMP -TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM ATTACHMENT $29.65 1N 50 8L CONCRETE PUMPS $29 29 1N 50 8L CONVEYORS $29.29 1 N 50 8L CRANES, THRU 19 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $29.29 1N 5D 8L CRANES, 20 44 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $29 65 1N 50 8L CRANES, 45 TONS 99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $30 09 1N 5D 8L WITH ATACHMENTS) CRANES, 100 TONS 199 TONS, OR 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $30 59 1N 5D 8L WITH ATTACHMENTS) CRANES, 200 TONS OVER, OR 250 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH $31.09 1N 5D 8L ATTACHMENTS) CRANES, A- FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER $27 19 1N 50 8L CRANES, A- FRAME, OVER 10 TON $29.29 1N 5D 81. CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE 20 44 TONS) $29 65 1N 50 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (45 99 TONS) $30.09 1N 50 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (100 TONS OVER) $30.59 1N 5D 8L CRANES, TOWER CRANE $30 59 1N 5D 81. CRUSHERS $29 65 1N 50 8L DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES (POWER) $29 65 1N 50 8L DERRICK, BUILDING $30.09 1N 50 8L DOZERS, D -9 UNDER $29.29 I N 5D 81_ DRILL OILERS AUGER TYPE, TRUCK OR CRANE MOUNT $29.29 1N 5D 81. DRILLING MACHINE $29.65 1N 5D 8L ELEVATOR AND MANLIFT, PERMANENT AND SHAFT -TYPE $27 19 1N 5D 8L EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER) $29 29 1N 5D 8L FINISHING MACHINE /CURB EXTRUDER $29.65 1N 5D 8L FORK LIFTS, (3000 LBS AND OVER) $29.29 1N 50 81. FORK LIFTS, (UNDER 3000 LBS) $27 19 IN 50 8L GRADE ENGINEER $29.29 1N 50 81. GRADECHECKER AND STAKEMAN $27.19 IN 50 8L HOISTS, AIR TUGGERS $29.29 1N 50 8L HYDRALIFTS /BOOM TRUCKS (10 TON UNDER) $27 19 1N 50 8L HYDRALIFTS /BOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON) $29.29 1N 50 81. LOADERS, OVERHEAD UNDER 6 YD) $29.65 1N 5D 81. LOADERS, OVERHEAD (6 YD UP TO 8 YD) $30 09 IN 50 81_ LOADERS, OVERHEAD (8 YD OVER) $30 59 1 N 50 81_ LOCOMOTIVES, ALL 52965 1N 5D 81. MECHANICS, ALL (WELDERS) $29 65 1N 50 81_ MIXERS, ASPHALT PLANT 529 65 1 N 50 81_ MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING) 529 65 1N 50 8L MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON FINISHING) $29 29 1N 5D 81_ MUCKING MACHINE, MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL AND /OR SHIELD $30 09 1N 50 81_ OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION AND MULCH SEEDING $27 19 1N 5D 8L OPERATOR PAVEMENT BREAKER $27 19 1 N 50 8L PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $29 65 1N 5D 8L PLANT OILER (ASPHALT CRUSHER) $29.29 IN 51) 81. Page 5 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note WAGE Code Code Code Classification CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05 -97 Or*. w* (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note WAGE Code Code Code POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL $27 19 1N 5D 8L POWER PLANT $27 19 1N 50 8L PUMPS, WATER $27 19 1N 5D 8L QUAD 9, D -10, AND HD -41 $30 09 1N 5D 8L REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR $30 09 1N 50 8L ROLLAGON $30.09 1N 5D 8L ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $27 19 1N 51) 8L ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MULTILIFT MATERIALS (COMPOSITION $29 29 1N 50 8L MATERIALS) ROTO -MILL, ROTO- GRINDER $29 65 1N 5D BL SAWS CONCRETE $29 29 1N 5D 8L SCRAPERS CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL $29 29 1N 5D 8L SCRAPERS, SELF PROPELLED UNDER 45 YD) $29 65 1N 50 8L SCRAPERS, SELF PROPELLED (45 YD AND OVER) $30 09 IN 5D 8l SCREED MAN $29 65 1N 5D 8L SHOTCRETE GUNITE $27 19 1N 50 8L SHOVELS, (3 YD UNDER) $29 65 1N 5D 8L SHOVELS, OVER 3 YD AND UNDER 6 YD) $30.09 1N 50 8L SHOVELS, (6 YD AND OVER WITH ATTACHMENTS) $30 59 IN 5D 8L SLIPFORM PAVERS $30 09 1N 50 8L SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR BLAW KNOX $29 29 1N 50 8L SUBGRADE TRIMMER $29 65 1N 5D 8L TRACTORS, (75 HP UNDER) $29 29 1N 5D 8L TRACTORS, (OVER 75 HP) $29 65 1N 5D 8L TRANSPORTERS, ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE $30 09 1N 5D 8L TRENCHING MACHINES $29.29 1N 50 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER /DRIVER UNDER 100 TON) $29 29 1N 50 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER /DRIVER (100 TON OVER) $29 65 1N 50 8L WHEEL TRACTORS, FARMALL TYPE $27 19 1N 50 8L YO YO PAY DOZER $29 65 1N 50 8L POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS- UNDERGROUND SEWER WATER ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $19.85 1 POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE $25 15 4A 5A LINE CLEARANCE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $23 44 4A 5A SPRAY PERSON $23 09 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER $22.31 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON /CHIPPER OPERATOR $16 25 4A 5A REFRIGERATION AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS MECHANIC $27 68 1 RESIDENTIAL BRICK MARBLE MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $29 37 1N 5A RESIDENTIAL CARPENTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $15 35 1 RESIDENTIAL CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $18.00 1 RESIDENTIAL DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $21 05 1 RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $15 94 1 Page 6 CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05-97 ****y (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code RESIDENTIAL GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL $10 00 1 RESIDENTIAL INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEY LEVEL $9 86 1 RESIDENTIAL LABORERS JOURNEY LEVEL $8 44 1 RESIDENTIAL PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $2219 1 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBERS PIPEFITTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $16 97 1 RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATION AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS JOURNEY LEVEL $35 81 1A SA RESIDENTIAL SHEET METAL WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $16.25 1 RESIDENTIAL SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $10 88 1 RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEY LEVEL $26 68 1R 51 ROOFERS JOURNEY LEVEL $26 80 1R 5A USING IRRITABLE BITUMINOUS MATERIALS $29.80 1R 5A SHEET METAL WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $33.77 1J 5A SIGN MAKERS INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $19.29 1 STOCK PERSON $10.39 1 SIGN MAKERS INSTALLERS (NON ELECTRICAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $12.15 1 SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $10 88 1 SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS JOURNEY LEVEL $10 31 1B 50 SPRINKLER FITTERS,(FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEY LEVEL $26 41 1 STAGE RIGGING MECHANICS (NON STRUCTURAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $13 23 1 SURVEYORS CHAIN PERSON $9 35 1 INSTRUMENT PERSON $11 40 1 PARTY CHIEF $13 40 1 TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION OUTSIDE CABLE SPLICER $21 53 28 5A HOLE DIGGER /GROUND PERSON $11 55 2B 5A INSTALLER (REPAIRER) $20 59 2B 5A JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE LINEPERSON $19 95 2B 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER I $21 53 28 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $21 07 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY) $21 53 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (LIGHT) $19 95 2B 5A TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $10 90 2B 5A TELEVISION LINEPERSON $14 87 2B 5A Page 7 Classification TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN TELEVISION TECHNICIAN TREE TRIMMER TERRAZZO WORKERS 11LE SETTERS JOURNEY LEVEL TILE, MARBLE TERRAZZO FINISHERS FINISHER TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS JOURNEY LEVEL TRUCK DRIVERS DUMP TRUCK DUMP TRUCK TRAILER OTHER TRUCKS TRANSIT MIXER WELL DRILLERS IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER OILER WELL DRILLER CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 03 -05-97 Page 8 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note WAGE Code Code Code $17 91 2B 5A $16 00 2B 5A $19 95 2B 5A $28 08 1N 5A $23.16 1N 5A $22.79 1K 5A $16 27 1 $28.19 1M 5D 8L $18.27 1 $17 66 1 $11 60 1 $9.45 1 $11.60 1- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY AND SEQUENCE OF WORK 3 4 GFNFRA 5 6 The Project consists of construction of a new library building and remodeling of an existing service 7 center facility, with associated sitework. Prior to completion of work under the general contract, the 8 Owner will engage seperate contractors for asbestos abatement in the Service Center and for 9 installation of furnishings in the new space. 10 11 The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract. The existing service center building will 12 house continuously operating computer equipment, and occasional personnel occupancy throughout 13 the construction process. Of particular importance is continuous operation of the computer 14 equipment and its telephone lines. 15 16 PHASE ONE: The owner will vacate the existing building prior to Date of Commencement, and 17 will relocate computer equipment to the area designated on the phasing plan. Construct the 18 temporary computer room indicated on the phasing plan, install temporary window barriers, and 19 other temporary facilities as required to maintain heat, security and weather protection for the 20 South portion of the service center. Maintain unobstructed access to and protection for the South 21 entry door. The Owner's seperate contractor will perform asbestos abatement in the Service 22 Center. 23 24 Complete demolition of the portions of the service center indicated, site clearing, and construction 25 of the new building. Complete exterior revisions and interior remodelling of the Service Center, 26 to the extent possible leaving the temporary computer room in place. The power pole providing 27 electrical and telephone service to the existing building must remain operational. 28 29 PHASE TWO: Upon substantial completion of phase one, the owner will begin installation of 30 furnishings under a separate contract, and will relocate the computer equipment to Room #134. 31 These operations will take two weeks. 32 33 Remove the temporary computer room. Complete interior remodeling of Service Center in the 34 vicinity of the temporary computer room. The owner will occupy the new building and 35 Northern portion of the Service Center during this phase. 36 37 Upon completion of all interior work, perform the building "flushing" as specified in the 38 mechanical work. 39 40 Use of the Sing: Limit use of premises to areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond 41 the areas indicated. 42 43 Keep driveways and entrances clear. Do not use these areas for parking or material storage. 44 Schedule deliveries to minimize on -site storage of materials and equipment. 45 46 Use of the Existing Building: Maintain building weathertight. Repair damage caused by 47 construction. Protect the building and its occupants during construction. 48 49 The Owner will be responsible for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the 50 building. 51 52 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 53 54 55 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 56 57 END OF SECTION 01010 58 SUMMARY AND SEQUENCE OF WOR$ 01010 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES 3 4 GENERAL 5 6 Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases installation, are specified in the Contract 7 Documents by allowances. Allowances are established to defer selection of actual materials and 8 equipment until additional information is available. 9 10 Types of allowances required include the following: 11 12 Lump -sum allowances. 13 14 Contingency allow ances. 15 16 At the Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. 17 18 Purchase products and systems from the designated supplier. 19 20 bmit l Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances: 21 22 Submit invoices or delivery slips to show quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in 23 fulfilling each allowance. 24 25 Coni gencv Allowances: Use contingency allowance only as directed for the Owner's purposes 26 and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. 27 28 Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include 29 Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit. 30 31 At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner 32 by Change Order. 33 34 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 35 36 37 EXECUTION 38 39 Coordinate materials and their jaitgatign for each allowance with related materials and installations 40 to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 41 42 43 SUMMARY OF ALLOWANCES 44 45 Lump -sum allowances: 46 47 Exterior Sign (Section 10425) $1500 48 49 Contingency allowances: 50 51 Electrical Contingency (Section 16010) $2250 52 53 END OF SECTION 01020 ZMWKFTCES 61020 1 1 2 SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Schedule of Values: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the 8 Contractor's Construction Schedule. 9 10 Submit the Schedule of Values at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the 11 date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment. 12 13 Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for 14 the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 15 16 Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following 17 for each item listed: 18 19 Description of Work. 20 21 Dollar value. 22 23 Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 24 25 Anplicationss_lor Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by 26 the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 27 28 Payment Application Timea: Payment dates are indicated in the Agreement. The period covered by 29 each application is the period indicated in the Agreement. 30 31 Pa yment- Application Forma: Use AIA Document 0702 and Continuation Sheets 0703 as the form 32 for Applications for Payment. 33 34 Annlication Preparation: Complete every entry, including notarization and execution by a person 35 authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. 36 37 Transmittal: Submit 3 executed original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect 38 within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments. 39 40 initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide 41 with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following, which must be submitted 42 prior to or at the preconstruction meeting: 43 44 List of subcontractors (expanded beyond those required at time of bid). 45 46 List of principal suppliers and fabricators (expanded beyond those required at time of bid). 47 48 Schedule of Values. 49 50 Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 51 52 List of Contractor's staff assignments. 53 54 Copies of licenses from governing authorities. 55 56 Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 57 58 Performance and payment bonds. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 1 1 2 Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of 3 Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall reflect Certificates 4 of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of 5 the Work. 6 7 Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include 8 the following: 9 10 Occupancy permits. 11 12 Warranties and maintenance agreements. 13 14 Test/adjust/balance records. 15 16 Maintenance instructions. 17 18 Meter readings. 19 20 Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy. 21 22 Final cleaning. 23 24 Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with 25 submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 26 27 Completion of Project closeout requirements. 28 29 Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 30 31 Transmittal of Project construction records to the Owner. 32 33 Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 34 35 Removal of temporary facilities and services. 36 37 Change of door locks to Owner's access. 38 39 40 pRODTTCTS (Not Applicable) 41 42 43 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 44 45 46 END OF SECTION 01027 47 01027 2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work that may 8 be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding 9 change in either the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, 10 systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 11 12 The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to 13 incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 14 15 Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully 16 integrate that Work into the Project. 17 18 Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of 19 the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for 20 later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. 21 22 Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections 23 referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work 24 described under each alternate. 25 26 27 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 28 29 30 EXECUTION 31 32 33 ALTERNATE #1 (Deductive): COMPOSITION ROOFING 34 35 Provide composition shingle roofing as detailed and specified in lieu of the metal roofing 36 detailed and specified. Provide 112" CDX Plywood underlayment in lieu of exterior gypsum 37 sheathing. 38 39 40 ALTERNATE #2 (Additive): VARIABLE SPEED MECHANICAL UNIT DRIVES 41 42 Provide variable speed drives as specified in the Mechanical Work. 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 END OF SECTION 01030 50 ALTERNATES 01030 1 1 2 SECTION 01040 COORDINATION 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 This Section includes requirements for coordinating construction operations including, but not 8 necessarily limited to, the following: 9 10 Coordination drawings. 11 12 Administrative and supervisory personnel. 13 14 Cleaning and protection. 15 16 17 COORDINATION 18 19 Coordinate construction to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. 20 Coordinate operations that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 21 22 Schedule operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one 23 part depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 24 25 Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for 26 maintenance, service, and repair. 27 28 Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 29 30 Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining procedures 31 required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at 32 meetings. 33 34 Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their 35 work is required. 36 37 Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required procedures with other 38 activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress. Such activities include, but are not limited to, 39 the following: 40 41 Preparation of schedules. 42 43 Delivery and processing of submittals. 44 45 Progress meetings. 46 47 Project closeout activities. 48 49 50 Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings if needed for installation of products and 51 materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space 52 necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 53 54 Staff Names: Prior to or at the preconstruction meeting, submit a list of the Contractor's staff 55 assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel at the Project Site. Identify 56 individuals and their responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. 57 58 COORDINATION O1040 1 1 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3 4 5 EXECUTION 6 7 Inspection of conditions: Require Installers of major components to inspect substrate and conditions 8 under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been 9 corrected. 10 11 Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests to minimize the need to uncover 12 completed construction. 13 14 Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials, during handling and installation. 15 Apply protective covering to assure protection from damage. 16 17 Clean and maintain completed construction as necessary through the construction period. Adjust and 18 lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. 19 20 Limiter Exposures: Supervise construction to assure that no part is subject to harmful, dangerous, or 21 damaging exposure. Such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 22 23 Excessive loading. 24 25 Excessive internal or external pressures. 26 27 Excessively high or low temperatures. 28 29 Water or ice. 30 31 Solvents and chemicals. 32 33 Abrasion. 34 35 Soiling, staining, and corrosion. 36 37 38 END OF SECTION 01040 39 0 1040 2 COORDINATION 1 2 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 8 Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would 9 change their load- carrying capacity or load- deflection ratio. 10 11 Obtain approval before cutting and patching the following structural elements: 12 13 Foundation construction. 14 15 Bearing and retaining walls. 16 17 Load bearing steel or wood framing. 18 19 Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce 20 their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that 21 would increase maintenance or decrease operational life or safety. 22 23 Visual Rg irementi: Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in the 24 Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch in a manner that 25 would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and 26 patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 27 28 Retain the original Installer to cut and patch exposed Work. 29 30 Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged in such a 31 manner as not to void warranties. 32 33 34 PRODUCTS 35 36 Use materilk identical to existing materials. Use materials that visually match adjacent surfaces to the 37 fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable. Use materials whose performance will 38 equal that of existing materials. 39 40 41 EXECUTION 42 43 Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is to be performed before 44 cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action. 45 46 Before proceeding, meet with parties involved. Review areas of potential interference and 47 conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before 48 proceeding. 49 Temp y_SuppgL Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 50 51 Protection: Protect existing construction to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse 52 weather conditions for portions that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 53 54 Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 55 56 Avoid cutting pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or 57 relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 58 arrITRUZT15177011170 01045 1 1 2 Cutting: Cut using methods that will not damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 3 Comply with the original Installer's recommendations. 4 5 Use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. 6 Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of 7 adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 8 9 To avoid marring finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed 10 surfaces. 11 12 Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a 13 diamond -core drill. 14 15 Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires 16 excavating and backfilling. 17 18 Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by -pass utility services 19 before cutting. Cut -off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug 20 and seal the remaining pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter 21 after by- passing and cutting. 22 23 Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified 24 tolerances. 25 26 Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 27 28 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining 29 construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 30 31 Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor 32 and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. 33 Remove floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials to achieve uniform color and 34 appearance. 35 36 Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire 37 surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. 38 39 Patch, repair, or rehang ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform 40 appearance. 41 42 Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, 43 oils, putty, and similar items. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or 44 finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 45 46 47 END OF SECTION 01045 48 01045 '2 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 3 4 5 GENERA!, 6 7 This Section specifies requirements for field engineering services including, but not limited to, the 8 following: 9 10 Survey and layout work. 11 12 13 Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data. 14 15 Surveyor Qualification: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located. 16 17 18 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 19 20 21 EXECUTION 22 23 Identification: The Owner will identify existing control points and property line comer stakes. 24 25 Verify layout information, m relation to property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding 26 to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent 27 reference points during construction. 28 29 Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without written approval. Report 30 destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of changes in 31 grades. 32 33 Replace destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control 34 points. 35 36 Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks. 37 38 Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 39 40 Existing Utilities: The existence of underground utilities and construction is not guaranteed. Verify 41 location of underground utilities and other construction before beginning sitewoik. 42 43 Prior to construction, verify location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary and 44 stone sewers, and water service piping. 45 46 Work from lives and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to 47 set lines and levels at each story of construction and to locate each element. Calculate and measure 48 required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine 49 dimensions. 50 51 Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their 52 use. 53 54 As construction proceeds, check every element for line, level, and plumb. 55 56 57 58 >='IELD ENGINEERINGT 1 irvevor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available 2 for reference. 3 4 Record deviations from lines and levels. Advise the Architect when deviations exceed tolerances. 5 On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. 6 7 Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, 8 fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. 9 10 Building Lines and Levg1: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, 11 column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and 12 electrical work. 13 14 Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, 15 utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate 16 with local authorities having jurisdiction. 17 18 19 20 END OF SECTION 01050 21 O1050 2 FIELD ENCJINEERINU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Definition: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 8 9 "Indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings; or to other 10 paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. 11 Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the 12 reference. Location is not limited. 13 14 "Directed "Requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean 15 directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. 16 17 "Approve When used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, 18 applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the 19 Conditions of the Contract. 20 21 "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having 22 jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control 23 performance of the Work. 24 25 "Furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, 26 installation, and similar operations. 27 28 "Install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, temporary storage, 29 unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, 30 curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 31 32 "Provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 33 34 "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, 35 subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a particular construction activity including 36 installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in 37 the operations they are engaged to perform. 38 39 The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully 40 completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being 41 familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of 42 authorities having jurisdiction. 43 44 Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be 45 performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as 46 "carpenter." 47 48 "Prpiect site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either 49 exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as part of the Project. The extent of the 50 Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the 51 land on which the Project is to be built. 52 53 "Testing Agencies A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific 54 inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret 55 results of those inspections or tests. 56 57 58 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 1 1 2 Specificaaion Formj: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the 3 Construction Specifications Institute's 16- division format and "MasterFormat" numbering system. 4 5 Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications is abbreviated. Words implied, but 6 not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as 7 plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract 8 Documents indicates. 9 10 Streamlined language is generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the 11 imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, 12 subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly 13 by the Contractor or by others when so noted. 14 15 The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied 16 where a colon is used within a sentence or phrase. 17 18 Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, 19 applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied 20 directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the 21 Contract Documents by reference. 22 23 Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. 24 25 Copies of Standards: Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 26 Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall 27 obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request. 28 29 Abbreviations and Namea: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other 30 Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating 31 organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text 32 provision. Refer to Gale Research Inc.'s "Encyclopedia of Associations," which is available in most 33 libraries. 34 35 permits. Licenses. and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, 36 certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, 37 judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with 38 standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 39 40 41 pRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 42 43 44 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 45 46 47 END OF SECTION 01095 48 0109S 'Z REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but 8 not limited to, the following: 9 10 Preconstruction conferences. 11 12 Preinstallation conferences. 13 14 Progress meetings. 15 16 Preconstruction Conferencg: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction. 17 Review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 18 19 Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor 20 and its superintendent; major subcontractors; and other concerned parties shall attend. 21 22 Participants shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the 23 Work. 24 25 Agenda: Discuss items that could affect progress, including the following: 26 27 Tentative construction schedule. 28 29 Critical work sequencing and phasing. 30 31 Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 32 33 Use of the premises. 34 35 Preinstallation conferences: Conduct a conference before each activity that requires coordination 36 with other operations. 37 38 Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected 39 by the installation shall attend. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 40 41 Review the progress of other operations and preparations for the activity under consideration at 42 each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: 43 44 Compatibility problems and acceptability of substrates. 45 4b Time schedules and deliveries. 47 48 Manufacturer's recommendations. 49 50 Warranty requirements. 51 52 Inspecting and testing requirements. 53 54 Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements, and the approved schedule. 55 Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and 56 the Architect. 57 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 1 1 Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate 2 actions necessary to resolve problems and reconvene the conference. 3 4 Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at weekly intervals. Notify the 5 Owner and the Architect of scheduled dates. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of the 6 payment request. 7 8 A en¢era: The Owner, Architect, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in 9 planning, coordination, or future activities shall be represented. Participants shall be authorized to 10 conclude matters relating to the Work. 11 12 Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous meeting. Review items of 13 significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion appropriate to Project status. 14 15 Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where 16 each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how to expedite 17 construction behind schedule; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss 18 revisions required to insure subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 19 20 Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 21 22 Time. 23 24 Sequences. 25 26 Status of submittals 27 28 Deliveries and off-site fabrication problems. 29 30 Temporary facilities and services. 31 32 Quality and work standards. 33 34 Change Orders. 35 36 Reporting: Distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties who should have 37 been present. Include a summary of progress since the previous meeting and report. 38 39 Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each meeting where 40 revisions have been made. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each 41 meeting. 42 43 44 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 45 46 47 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 48 49 50 END OF SECTION 01200 51 01200 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 3 4 5 GENERAL. 6 7 Submittal Procedures: Coordinate submittal preparation with construction, fabrication, other 8 submittals, and activities that require sequential operations. Transmit in advance of construction 9 operations to avoid delay. 10 11 Coordinate submittals for related operations to avoid delay because of the need to review 12 submittals concurrently for coordination. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on 13 a submittal requiring coordination until related submittals are received. 14 15 processing: Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow more time if the Architect must delay 16 processing to permit coordination. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing. 17 18 No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals 19 sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. 20 21 Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label on each submittal for identification. Provide a 22 4- by 5 -inch space on the label or beside title block to record review and approval markings and 23 action taken. 24 25 Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately. Transmit with a transmittal form. 26 The Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than the Contractor. 27 28 Submittal Schedule: Prepare a schedule indicating timing for submittals, coordinated with the 29 construction schedule. 30 31 Contractor's Construction Schedule: Prepare a critical path type contractor's construction schedule. 32 Provide a separate time bar for each activity and a vertical line to identify the first working day of 33 each week. Use the same breakdown of Work indicated in the "Schedule of Values." 34 35 Submit within 30 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work." 36 37 Secure performance commitments from parties involved. Coordinate each element with other 38 activities; include minor elements involved in the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. 39 Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work. 40 41 Indicate completion in advance of Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion to 42 allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 43 44 phasing: Show how phased completion affects the Work. 45 46 Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies of the Contractor's Construction Schedule to the 47 Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and parties required to comply with submittal dates. Post 48 copies in the field office. 49 50 When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. 51 52 Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been 53 made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 54 55 56 57 58 SUBMITTALS 01300 1 1 2 3 Shop Drawingq: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Indicate deviations from the 4 Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information. Include 5 the following information: 6 7 Dimensions. 8 9 Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 10 11 Compliance with standards. 12 13 Notation of coordination requirements. 14 15 Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 16 17 Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. 18 19 Product Data: Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction. Mark 20 each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where Product Data includes information on 21 several products, mark copies to indicate applicable information. 22 23 Include the following information: 24 25 Manufacturer's printed recommendations. 26 27 Compliance with trade association standards. 28 29 Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 30 31 Application of testing agency labels and seals. 32 33 Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 34 35 Notation of coordination requirements. 36 37 Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of 38 options is required. 39 40 Submittals: Submit 5 copies; submit additional copies where required for maintenance manuals. The 41 Architect will retain one, forward one to the Owner, and return the others marked with action taken. 42 43 Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, the submittal serves as the final 44 submittal. 45 46 Re- submittals: Revise and resubmit when directed by the Architect. Review time beyond 47 one resubmittal will be billed to the Contractor. 48 49 50 Distribution: Furnish copies to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, and others required for 51 performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Do not proceed 52 with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession. 53 54 55 56 57 58 01300 2 SUBMITTALS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Samples: Submit full-size Samples cured and finished as specified and identical with the material 2 proposed. Mount Samples to facilitate review of qualities. 3 4 Include the following: 5 6 Specification Section number and reference. 7 8 Generic description of the Sample. 9 10 Sample source. 11 12 Product name or name of the manufacturer. 13 14 Compliance with recognized standards. 15 16 Availability and delivery time. 17 18 Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a check of these 19 characteristics, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the 20 actual component as delivered and installed. Where variations are inherent in the material, 21 submit at least 3 units that show limits of the variations. 22 23 Refer to other Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication 24 techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar characteristics. 25 26 Samples not incorporated into the Work, or designated as the Owner's property, are the 27 Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 28 29 Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection 30 of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from standard choices. The Architect will 31 review and return submittals indicating selection and other action. 32 33 Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication 34 techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. One set will be 35 returned marked with the action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, at the Project Site, for quality 36 comparison. 37 38 Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, the submittal may serve as the 39 final submittal. 40 41 Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each 42 set. 43 44 Distribution of Samples: Distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, and others 45 as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 46 47 Architect's Action: Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return are 48 required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return. 49 Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. 50 51 Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp. The Architect will 52 mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken. 53 54 pROD1TCTS (Not Applicable) 55 56 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 57 58 END OF SECTION 01300 SUBN TITAL 01300 -3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 3 4 5 GENERA!, 6 7 Quality- control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by 8 Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract 9 enforcement activities performed by the Architect. 10 11 The Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform testing and 12 inspection services. 13 14 Specific tests required are referenced in the individual specification sections. 15 16 Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove 17 unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements. 18 19 The cost of retesting is the Contractor's responsibility where tests performed indicated 20 noncompliance with requirements. 21 22 Auxili Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary 23 services as Notify the agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. 24 Auxiliary services include the following: 25 26 Calling for and scheduling required tests 27 28 Providing access to the Work. 29 30 Furnishing incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests. 31 32 Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting 33 the agency in taking samples. 34 35 36 Duties of the Testing Agency: The testing agency shall cooperate with the Architect and the 37 Contractor in performing its duties. The agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform 38 inspections and tests. 39 40 The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies 41 observed in the Work during performance of its services. 42 43 The agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements or approve or accept any 44 portion of the Work. 45 46 The agency shall not perform duties of the Contractor. 47 48 Coordination: Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum of delay. Avoid 49 removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 50 51 The Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar 52 activities. 53 54 55 56 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 57 58 QUALITY CONTROL 6r417-71" 1 2 3 4 5 6 FXRCI JTLOI 7 8 Repair and Protection: Upon completion of inspection, testing, and sample taking, repair damaged 9 construction. Restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and 10 Patching." 11 12 Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired 13 construction. 14 15 Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility 16 for inspection and testing. 17 18 19 END OF SECTION 01400 20 2 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 4 5 GENERAL I 6 7 Summary: This Section specifies construction facilities and temporary controls including temporary 8 utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 9 I 10 Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities 11 having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 12 13 Building code requirements. I 14 15 Health and safety regulations. 16 17 Utility company regulations. I 18 19 Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 20 I 21 22 Environmental protection regulations. 23 Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and 24 Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and I 25 Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." 26 27 Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary 28 electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." I 29 30 Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility 31 before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1 32 33 34 PRODUCTS 35 I 36 Materials: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, 37 previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. 38 39 Lumber and Plywood: Comply with Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." I 40 41 Tarpaulins: Waterproof, fire resistant, UL- labeled tarpaulins with flame -spread rating of 15 or 42 less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon reinforced, laminated polyethylene or I 43 polyvinyl chloride, fire retardant tarpaulins. 44 45 Water: Potable water approved by local health authorities. 46 I 47 Qpen -Mesh Fencing: 0.120 -inch- (3 -mm thick, galvanized 2 -inch (50 -mm) chainiink fabric 48 fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts, 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line 49 posts and 2 -1/2 inches (64 mm) I.D. for comer posts. 50 I 51 Equipment,: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use 52 undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use 53 intended. 55 Water Hoses: 3/4 -inch heavy-duty, abrasion- resistant, flexible rubber hoses. Provide adjustable 56 shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. 57 1 TEMPORARTTATICTITES 01500 1 1 Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA polarized outlets. Provide outlets equipped with 2 ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and 3 equipment. 4 5 Electrical Power Cords: Grounded extension cords. Use hard service cords where exposed to 6 abrasion and traffic. 7 8 Lamps and Light Fixtures: General service incandescent lamps. Provide guard cages or 9 tempered -glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed 10 to moisture. 11 12 Heating Ilnitt: Temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another 13 recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. 14 15 Fire Extinguishers; Hand carried, portable, UL- rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary 16 offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand carried, portable, UL- rated, 17 Class ABC, dry chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA- 18 recommended classes for the exposures. 19 20 Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size 21 required by location and class of fire exposure. 22 23 24 EXRCTTTTON 25 26 Installation. General: Use qualified personnel to install temporary facilities. Locate facilities where 27 they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the 28 Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 29 30 Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as 31 required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use 32 of completed permanent facilities. 33 34 Conditions of Use: Keep temporary facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate safely and 35 efficiently. Relocate as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to 36 interfere with progress. Take necessary fire- prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, 37 dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on -site. 38 39 Temporary Utility Installation: Engage the local utility company to install temporary service or 40 connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder 41 with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. 42 43 Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted to make 44 connections for temporary services. 45 46 Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, 47 provide trucked -in services. 48 49 ,�,,ST a Palm: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or 50 Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for 51 Change Orders. 52 53 Temporary Water Service: Install temporary water service and distribution piping of sizes and 54 pressures adequate for construction. Maintain service until permanent water service is in use. 55 Sterilize piping prior to use. 56 57 58 01500 1 TISKIITIURIMOLITIES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Temporary Electric Power: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and 3 distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics. Include meters, 4 transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main 5 distribution switch gear. 6 7 Power Distribution: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to 8 damage. 9 10 Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching to fulfill security 11 requirements and illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 12 13 Temporary Heal: Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of completed installations or for 14 protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. 15 Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations. Coordinate 16 ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize consumption of 17 energy. 18 19 Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide 20 vented, self contained, LP -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 21 Use of gasoline- burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is 22 prohibited. 23 24 Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for personnel engaged in 25 construction. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office. 26 27 Sanitary Facilities: Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, 28 operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the 29 Project's needs. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials 30 for each facility. Provide covered waste containers. 31 32 Toile: Install self- contained, single occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated 33 recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a 34 glass- fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. 35 36 Drinking -Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap dispenser, bottled drinking -water 37 units. 38 39 Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary connections to remove effluent. Filter out soil, 40 construction debris, chemicals, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute 41 waterways. 42 43 Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade 44 construction to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. 45 46 Support Facilities Installation: Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other construction and support 47 facilities for easy access. Maintain facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to 48 Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use 49 permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner. 50 51 Field Offices: Provide weathertight temporary offices of size to accommodate personnel at the 52 Project Site. Provide offices on foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide units with 53 lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Keep the office clean and 54 orderly for use for small progress meetings. 55 56 57 TEMMECRITTAMTIES 01500 -3 1 pewatering Facilities and Dry: For temporary drainage and dewatering operations not directly 2 associated with construction, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 3 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain excavations and construction free 4 of water. 5 6 Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction from 7 exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Where heat is 8 needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures 9 where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating 10 and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions. 11 12 Project Signs: Install project identification and other signs where indicated to inform the public 13 and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on framing of preservative- treated. wood or 14 steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Engage an experienced sign painter to 15 apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. 16 17 Waste Collection and Disposal: Collect waste daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. 18 Enforce requirements strictly. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials 19 separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. 20 21 Stairs Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. 22 23 Security and Protection Facilities Installation: Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as 24 available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent 25 facilities until Substantial Completion. 26 27 Temporary Fire Protection: Until permanent facilities supply fire- protection needs, install and 28 maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of types needed to protect against controllable fire 29 losses. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241. 30 31 Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose. 32 Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers. 33 34 Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 35 36 Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire- exposure areas. 37 38 Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and 39 similar sources of fire ignition. 40 41 Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest date, complete installation of the permanent fire- 42 protection facility and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 43 44 Barricades. Warning Signs. and Lights: Comply with code requirements for erection of 45 barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs. Where appropriate and 46 needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. 47 48 Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance 49 gates to enclose the entire site or the portion sufficient to accommodate construction. 50 51 Provide open -mesh, chainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and 52 earth. 53 54 Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of 55 construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, and theft. 56 Provide a secure lockup where materials and equipment are of value and must be stored. 57 01500 -4 TEMOCKYTKCIEITIES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Environmental Protection: Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways that 2 comply with environmental regulations and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and 3 subsoil might be contaminated or polluted. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce 4 harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making equipment to hours that will minimize complaints. 5 6 Operation: Enforce discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability to intended uses to 7 minimize waste and abuse. 8 9 Maintenance: Maintain facilities in operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by 10 freezing temperatures and similar elements. Maintain temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, 11 humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 -hour basis where required to achieve 12 indicated results and to avoid damage. 13 14 Protection: Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. 15 Protect during excavation. 16 17 Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced 18 by a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or restore permanent 19 construction delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, 20 clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 21 22 Materials and temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. 23 24 Remove temporary paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil 25 and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove 26 materials contaminated with oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and substances that 27 might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace paving, curbs, sidewalks 28 at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority. 29 30 At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction 31 period. 32 33 Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. 34 35 Replace wom parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 36 37 Replace burned out lamps. 38 39 40 END OF SECTION 01500 41 TEMPOMYTATICITIES b1500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or 8 taken from previously purchased stock. 9 10 "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or 11 model number or designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature. 12 13 "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise 14 fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 15 16 "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that 17 requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. 18 19 Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single 20 source. 21 22 When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the 23 Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected. 24 25 Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service connected or 26 power- operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied 27 spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: 28 29 Name of product and manufacturer. 30 31 Model and serial number. 32 33 Capacity, speed and ratings. 34 35 Deliver. store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means 36 and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 37 38 Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete 39 with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 40 41 Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure 42 that products are undamaged and properly protected. 43 44 Store products subject to damage by the elements aboveground, under cover in a weathertight 45 enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and 46 humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 47 48 49 PRODUCTS 50 51 General Product Reauirementa: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are 52 undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. 53 54 Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and 55 details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 56 57 Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced 58 and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT U161U 1 1 2 Product Selection Procedures: Procedures governing product selection include the following: 3 4 Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or 5 manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 6 7 Semioronrietary Specification Reauirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or 8 manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 9 10 Where products are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal," comply with 11 provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 12 13 Descrintive Snecification Reauirementa: Where Specifications describe a product, listing 14 characteristics required, with or without use of a brand name, provide a product that provides the 15 characteristics and otherwise complies with requirements. 16 17 Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with 18 performance requirements, provide products that comply and are recommended for the 19 application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in product literature or by the 20 manufacturer's certification of performance. 21 22 Compliance with Standards. Codes. and Regulations: Where Specifications only require 23 compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the 24 standards, codes, or regulations specified. 25 26 Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching a Sample, the Architect's decision on 27 whether a product matches will be final. Where no product in the specified category matches 28 and complies with other requirements, comply with provisions concerning "substitutions" for 29 selection of a matching product in another category. 30 31 Visual Selection: Where requirements include the phrase as selected from manufacturer's 32 standard colors, pattems, textures or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other 33 requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line 34 selected. 35 36 37 EXECUTION 38 39 Comn y with manufacturer's instructions for installation of products. Anchor each product securely 40 in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as 41 necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 01600 45 01600 2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1 2 SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS 3 4 5 GENERAL. 6 7 Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by 8 the Contract Documents proposed after award of the Contract are considered requests for 9 substitutions. The following are not requests for substitutions: 10 11 Substitutions requested during the bidding period and accepted by Addendum prior to award of 12 the Contract. 13 14 Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner. 15 16 Specified options included in the Contract Documents. 17 18 Contractor's compliance with regulations issued by governing authorities. 19 20 Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution received within 21 60 days after commencement of the Work. 22 23 Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution. Utilize the standard CSI substitution request 24 form. Submit requests according to procedures required for change -order proposals. 25 26 Identify the product or method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification 27 Section and Drawing numbers. 28 29 Provide documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions and the 30 following information: 31 32 Coordination information, including a list of changes needed to other Work that will be 33 necessary to accommodate the substitution. 34 35 A comparison of the substitution with the Work specified, including performance, weight, 36 size, durability, and visual effect 37 38 Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and installation procedures. 39 40 Samples, where applicable or requested. 41 42 A statement indicating the effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the 43 schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the substitution on 44 Contract Time. 45 46 Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. 47 48 Certification that the substitution conforms to the Contract Documents and is appropriate 49 for the applications indicated. 50 51 The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may become necessary 52 because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 53 54 Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information within one 55 week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of 56 acceptance or rejection within 2 weeks of receipt of the request. Acceptance will be in the form 57 of a change order. 58 SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 1 1 2 PRODUCTS 3 4 Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider a request for substitution when one or more of 5 the following conditions are satisfied. Otherwise, the Architect will return the requests without action 6 except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 7 8 Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 9 10 Changes are in keeping with the intent of the Contract Documents. 11 12 The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not 13 consider the request if the specified product cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue 14 the Work promptly. 15 16 The request is related to an "or- equal" clause. 17 18 The substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, or other considerations, 19 after deducting compensation to the Architect for redesign and increased cost of other 20 construction. 21 22 The specified product cannot receive approval by a governing authority, and the substitution can 23 be approved. 24 25 The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or 26 Samples for construction not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable 27 request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval. 28 29 30 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 31 32 33 END OF SECTION 01631 34 01631 2 SUBSTITUTIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 3 4 GENERA 5 6 Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in 7 Divisions 2 through 16. 8 9 Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, 10 complete the following: 11 12 In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows Substantial Completion, show 13 100 percent completion for the Work claimed as substantially complete. 14 15 Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 16 17 Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and 18 similar documents. 19 20 Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement 21 surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 22 23 Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 24 25 Changeover locks and transmit keys to the Owner. 26 27 Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation and maintenance personnel. 28 Remove temporary facilities, mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 29 30 Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 31 32 Touch up and repair and restore marred, exposed finishes. 33 34 Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will proceed or advise the 35 Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial 36 Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or 37 corrected before the certificate will be issued. 38 39 The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially 40 complete. 41 42 Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 43 44 Final Acceptance: Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final 45 payment, complete the following: 46 47 Final payment request with releases and supporting documentation. Include insurance 48 certificates where required. 49 50 Submit a statement, accounting for changes to the Contract Sum. 51 52 Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise 53 resolved for acceptance. 54 55 Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of 56 Substantial Completion. 57 58 Submit consent of surety to final payment. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700=1" 1 2 3 Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work 4 has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to 5 the Architect. 6 7 Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If 8 the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or 9 obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required. 10 11 If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. 12 13 Record Document Submittal: Do not use record documents for construction. Protect from loss in a 14 secure location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference. 15 16 Record Drawings: Maintain a set of prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to 17 show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally 18 shown. Mark the drawing most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Give attention to 19 concealed elements. 20 21 Mark sets with red pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate 22 categories of the Work. 23 24 Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind with durable -paper cover sheets; 25 print titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. 26 27 Record Specificatioul: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Mark to show 28 variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 29 Give attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction. 30 Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 31 32 Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's 33 records. 34 35 Maintenance Manuals: Provide three copies. Organize operation and maintenance data into sets of 36 manageable size. Bind in individual, heavy -duty, 3 -ring, binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet 37 information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following 38 information: 39 40 Emergency instructions. 41 42 Spare parts list. 43 44 Copies of warranties. 45 46 Wiring diagrams. 47 48 Shop Drawings and Product Data. 49 50 51 FROM 1CTS (Not Applicable) 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 01700 2 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 EXECUTION N 4 5 Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires 6 maintenance to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Include a detailed review 7 of the following items: 8 9 Maintenance manuals. 10 11 Spare parts, tools, and materials. 12 13 Lubricants and fuels. 14 15 Identification systems. 16 17 Control sequences. 18 19 Hazards. 20 21 Warranties and bonds. 22 23 Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. 24 25 As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following: 26 27 Startup and shutdown. 28 29 Emergency operations and safety procedures. 30 31 Noise and vibration adjustments. 32 33 Final Cleaning: Employ experienced cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the 34 condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Complete 35 the following operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. 36 37 Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 38 39 Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass. Remove glazing compounds. Replace 40 chipped or broken glass. 41 42 Clean exposed finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances. 43 Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 44 45 Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean 46 plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 47 48 Clean the site of rubbish, litter, and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, 49 and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, even textured surface. 50 51 Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities. 52 53 Building Flushing: After owner's placement of furnishings, operate the mechanical system as 54 outlined in Division 15. 55 56 57 END OF SECTION 01700 58 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers 8 for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. 9 10 special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, 11 either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the 12 Owner. 13 14 Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. 15 16 Disclaimers and Limitatipns: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not 17 relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's 18 disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and 19 subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 20 21 Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove 22 and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and 23 replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. 24 25 Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by 26 replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty 27 shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. 28 29 Kgplgcement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or 30 rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract 31 Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work 32 regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its 33 anticipated useful service life. 34 35 Owner's Recoursg: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and 36 shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. 37 Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can 38 enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 39 40 Reiection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection 41 to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 42 43 Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment, the Owner 44 reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities 45 required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 46 47 48 Bind warranties and bon in appropriate section of the operations and maintenance manuals 49 50 51 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 52 53 54 EXECUTION 55 56 57 58 END OF SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES 0 1740 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 See section 01010 for summary and sequence of work 8 9 Definitions: As follows: 10 11 Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, 12 or to remain the Owner's property. 13 14 Exivingioj emaiq: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during 15 selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, 16 protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their 17 original locations. 18 19 Except for items or material indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to 20 remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall 21 be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. 22 23 Submittals: 24 25 Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction 26 and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition 27 operations. 28 29 Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 30 31 Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or 32 mechanical conditions. 33 34 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting 35 selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 36 37 Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. 38 Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 39 24 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 40 41 Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished. 42 43 Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted. 44 45 46 pRODUCTR (Not Applicable) 47 48 49 EXECUTION 50 51 Assess the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in 52 structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures 53 during selective demolition. 54 55 perform assessments as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition 56 activities. 57 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 1 1 Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during 2 selective demolition operations. 3 4 Utility Requirements: Locate, identify,. shut off, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility 5 services serving building to be selectively demolished. 6 7 Where utility services, are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass 8 connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding 9 with selective demolition. 10 11 Drain. purge. or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, 12 flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. 13 14 Condu t demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, 15 walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 16 17 Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings, 18 facilities, and site improvements to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective 19 demolition area. 20 21 Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of 22 existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage 23 or damage occurs to structure or interior areas. 24 25 Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed 26 during selective demolition operations. 27 28 Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 29 30 Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and 31 to separate areas from fumes and noise. 32 33 Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability 34 and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. 35 36 Use water miss, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. 37 Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 38 39 Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 40 41 Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition 42 operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 43 44 Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as 45 indicated. 46 47 Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective 48 demolition operations. 49 50 Where revairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 51 52 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to 53 remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 54 55 Witch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend 56 one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance. 57 0207U 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1 patch. repair. or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform 2 appearance. 3 4 Disposal: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to 5 accumulate on -site. 6 7 Do not bum demolished materials. 8 9 Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 10 11 Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. 12 13 14 END OF SECTION 02070 15 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 3 1 1 1 2 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, 8 and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other 9 occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 10 11 Protection: Provide temporary fences, barricades, coverings, or other protection to preserve existing 12 items indicated to remain and to prevent injury or damage to persons or property. Provide protection 13 for adjacent properties as required. 14 15 Restore damaged work to condition existing prior to start of Work. 16 17 Protect existing trees and vegetation that are indicated to remain from physical damage. Do not store 18 materials or equipment within tree drip line. Use licensed arborist for tree damage repair. Replace 19 damaged trees that cannot be restored to full growth, as determined by arborist, unless otherwise 20 acceptable to Architect. 21 22 Exis „n Services: Locations indicated are approximate; determine exact location before 23 commencing Work. Coordinate with local utility service requirements and comply with their 24 instructions. 25 26 27 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 28 29 30 EXECUTION 31 32 Site Clearing: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as 33 indicated or that interfere with new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and roots, 34 together with subsequent off -site disposal. Remove existing paving curbs and sidewalks as indicated 35 and as required for placement of new work. 36 37 Strip and stockpile topsoil that will be reused in the Work. 38 39 Remove existing improvements, both above -grade and below- grade, to extent indicated or as 40 otherwise required to permit new construction. 41 42 Salvable Imo: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where 43 indicated or directed. 44 45 Control air pollution caused by dust and dirt; comply with governing regulations. 46 47 Fill dqnressions_and void resulting from site clearing operations. Using satisfactory soil materials, 48 place in maximum 6- inch -deep horizontal layers and compact each layer to density of surrounding 49 original ground. 50 51 Grade ground surface to conform to required contours and to provide surface drainage. 52 53 Dispose of waste materials, including trash, broken pavement, debris and excess topsoil, off Owner's 54 property. 55 56 Burning waste materials on site is not permitted. 57 58 END OF SECTION 02110 1 1 s LLEARINU U211U 1 2 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK I 4 5 GENERAL, I 6 7 See section 02511 for top course underlying asphalt paving 8 9 See Landscape Section for topsoil requirements I 10 11 The soils report for this project is included in the project manual for informational purposes only. 12 13 aeranitions in this Section include the following: I 14 15 Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse 16 or disposal of materials removed. 17 I 18 Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill 19 immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 20 I 21 Borrow: Soil material obtained off site when sufficient approved soil material is not available 22 from excavations. 23 24 ,Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and surface pavement or walk. I 25 26 Drainage illl: Course of washed granular material placed under slab -on -grade to cut off upward 27 capillary flow of pore water toward slab. 28 I 29 Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or 30 dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial 31 work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense. I 32 33 Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and 34 electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or below 35 ground surface. I 36 37 Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, cables, and underground services 38 within building lines. 39 I 40 Codes and Standards:. Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities with 41 jurisdiction. 42 I 43 Testing and Inspection Service; Owner will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering 44 testing agency to classify proposed on -site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified 45 requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. 46 I 47 Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others 48 except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility 49 services have been provided. 50 I 51 52 PRODUC 53 I 54 Soil Materials: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off site when sufficient approved soil 55 56 borrow materials are not available from excavations. 1 EARTHWOR$ 02200 1 1 "Satisfactory Soil Materials ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; 2 free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, 3 vegetation, or other deleterious matter. 4 5 "Unsatisfactory Soil Materials are as noted in the soils report as "sandy silt "topsoil or "fill" or 6 ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. 7 8 ckfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials, excavated from the site or imported. 9 10 Gravel Base Material: Per APWA and WSDOT current standards 11 12 Bedding Material: Subbase materials with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch sieve and not more than 8 13 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 14 15 Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, 16 ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1 -1R -inch sieve and not 17 more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. 18 19 Detectable Warning Tape: Polyethylene film warning tape encasing a metallic core, 6 inches wide 20 and 4 mils thick minimum, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. 21 22 23 EXECUTION 24 25 Preparation: Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage 26 caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by 27 earthwork operations. 28 29 Provide erosion and sedimentation control measures. 30 31 Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on 32 prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. 33 34 protect subgradea and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation 35 and from freezing temperatures or frost. 36 37 Explosives: Do not use explosives. 38 39 Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of 40 character of materials and obstructions encountered. 41 42 Excavate for footings and foundations to indicated elevations and dimensions, or to the top of the 43 existing satisfactory soil materials which underlay the existing topsoil, whichever is deeper. Widen 44 excavations to permit placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other 45 construction, and for inspections. Trim subgrades to required lines and grades to leave solid base to 46 receive other work. Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Add compacted structural fill if required to 47 bring surface of excavation up to designated footing elevation. Compact bearing surfaces with a 48 vibrating plate compactor. 49 50 Excavate for building slabs. sidewalks and pavement to the top of the existing satisfactory soil 51 materials which underlay the existing topsoil, or deeper if required to achieve final finish grades. 52 Proofroll exposed surfaces to identify soft areas, and notify Architect of same. 53 54 Approval of Subgrade: Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. If 55 Architect determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace 56 with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. Payment will be made according to Contract 57 provisions for changes in the Work. 58 02200 2 EARTHWORK 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or 2 constriction activities. 3 4 5 Excavate utility trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations of uniform widths to 6 provide a maximum 12 inches of working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate 7 trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than the top of pipe or conduit. 8 9 Excavate and shape trench subgrade to provide uniform bearing and continuous support for 10 pipe and conduit. Where encountering rock or other unyielding bearing surface, carry trench 11 excavation 6 inches below invert elevation to receive bedding course. 12 13 14 Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom 15 elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top 16 elevation. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by Architect. 17 18 Store excavated and borrow soil materials acceptable for backfill and fill in shaped, graded, drained, 19 and covered stockpiles. Locate stockpiles away from edge of excavations and outside drip line of 20 remaining trees. 21 22 Provide all soil material required to achieve final finish grades, whether utilized from on site 23 excavation or imported, at no additional cost to the Owner. 24 25 Backfill excavations promptly following acceptance of affected work below final grade. 26 27 Utility Trench Backfflll: Place, compact, and shape bedding course to provide continuous support for 28 pipes and conduits over rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized 29 excavations. 30 31 Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of 32 particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. Place and 33 compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 34 35 Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 36 37 Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches 38 below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 39 40 Fill Preparation: Plow strip or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill 41 material will bond with existing surface. 42 43 When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for 44 fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture condition or aerate soil, and 45 recompact to required density. 46 47 Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer to within 2 percent 48 of optimum moisture content before compaction. 49 50 Rempve and replace, or scarify and air dry, satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to 51 specified density. 52 53 Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth for 54 material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for 55 material compacted by hand operated tampers. Place evenly alongside structures and utilities to 56 required elevations. 57 EARTHWORK 62200 3 1 Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM 2 D 1557: 3 4 Under structures. building slabs. steps. and pavements, compact the top 12 inches below subgrade 5 and each layer of backfill or fill material to 95 percent. 6 7 Under lawn pr unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of 8 backfill or fill material to 90 percent. 9 10 Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill 11 material to 95 percent. 12 13 Grading: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply 14 with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Grade 15 lawns, walks, and unpaved subgrades to tolerances of plus or minus 0.10 foot and pavements and 16 areas within building lines to plus or minus 1/l inch. 17 18 Subbase: Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades and 19 compact at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness. 20 21 place shoulders along edges of subbase to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders at least 22 12 inches wide of acceptable soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase layer. 23 24 Under slabs -on- grade, place drainage fill on prepared subgrade and compact to required cross 25 sections and thickness. 26 27 Field Ouality Control: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill 28 layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with 29 requirements. 30 31 When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify 32 and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact, and retest 33 until obtaining required density. 34 35 protection: Repair and reestablish grades where completed or partially completed surfaces become 36 eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction. 37 38 Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, 39 backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 40 41 Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and 42 debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. 43 44 45 END OF SECTION 02200 46 02200 4 EARTHWORK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 02511 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Refer to section 02200 for gravel base material. 8 9 lamina's: Product Data, material certificates, and the following: 10 11 Job -Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. 12 13 Installer Qualificationa: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot -mix asphalt paving 14 similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful 15 in- service performance. 16 17 Manufacturer Oualifications: Manufacturer of hot -mix asphalt shall be a registered and approved 18 paving mix manufacturer with authorities having jurisdiction or with the DOT of the state in which 19 Project is located. 20 21 Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of authorities having jurisdiction for 22 asphalt paving work on public property. 23 24 Asphalt- Paving Publication: Comply with Al's "The Asphalt Handbook," except where more stringent 25 requirements are indicated. 26 27 Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp or 28 if the following conditions are not met 29 30 Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F 31 32 Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of 33 placement. 34 35 Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. 36 37 Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a 38 minimum ambient or surface temperature of 50 deg F and not exceeding 95 deg F 39 40 41 PRODUCTS 42 43 Crushed Surfacing Top Course; Per APWA and WSDOT current standards 44 45 Paving Materials: Use materials and aggregate gradations for Type 'B' Asphalt Paving, and as follows: 46 47 Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured, crushed 48 blast- fumace slag; complying with ASTM D 692. 49 50 Fine Aggregate: Sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly cured 51 blast -fumace slag, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073. 52 53 Mineral Filler. Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with 54 ASTM D 242. 55 56 Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration- 57 graded material. 58 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING EC 1 1 2 3 Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow 4 setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. 5 6 Pavement Marking Paint: Latex, water -base emulsion, ready mixed, complying with FS TT 1952. 7 8 Precast Wheelstops: 12" wide x 6" high x 6' long with sleeves for mounting pins 9 10 ExECUTION 11 12 Proof -roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic -tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require 13 further compaction. 14 15 Before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. 16 17 Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland 18 cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot -mix asphalt pavement. 19 Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. of surface. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed 20 before paving. 21 22 Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove 23 spillages and clean affected surfaces. 24 25 Machine place base and surface courses of hot -mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, 26 and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that 27 prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to requited grade, cross section, and thickness, when 28 compacted. 29 30 Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Remove excess material and 31 fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt. 32 33 Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free 34 of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot -mix asphalt course. 35 36 Compact paving as soon as placed hot -mix asphalt will bear roller weight. Compact hot -mix paving 37 with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 38 39 Complete compactiop before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F 40 41 Compact each hot -mix asphalt course to an average density of 96 percent of reference laboratory 42 density according to ASTM D 1559, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent, and to 43 the following tolerances: 44 45 Thickness: Base course, plus or minus 1/2 inch surface course, plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 46 47 Surface Smoothness: Base course, 1/4 inch; surface course, 1/8 inch, measured within 8' 48 49 Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace 50 with fresh, hot -mix asphalt compacted by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. 51 52 Apply pavement- marking paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of 53 dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to 54 provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils 55 56 Install precast wheelstops with reinforcing steel driven through the pavement. 57 58 END OF SECTION 02511 02511 2 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Refer to Section 02200 for subase materials underlying paving 8 9 Submittals: Submit the following: 10 11 Product data for reinforcement, accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds. 12 13 Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of 14 materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 15 16 Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests. 17 18 Ouality Assurance: Comply with provisions of ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for 19 Buildings," ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," and CRSI "Manual of 20 Standard Practice," except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 21 22 Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products 23 complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 24 25 Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform 26 materials evaluation testing and inspection. 27 28 29 FRODIJCTS 30 31 Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal- framed plywood, or other acceptable panel -type materials to 32 provide full- depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 33 34 Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100 -foot or less radius. 35 36 Reinforcing Materials: As follows: 37 38 Deformed Reinforcing Bus: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated. 39 40 Welded Steel Wire Fabti ASTM A 185, flat sheets, not rolls. 41 42 Plain. Cold -Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. 43 44 Concrete Materials: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections for concrete 45 materials, admixtures, etc. 46 47 Curing Materials: As follows: 48 49 Moisture- Retaining Cover. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white burlap polyethylene 50 sheet complying with ASTM C 171. 51 52 Mix Design: Comply with mix design procedures specified in ACI 301 and proportion mixes 53 according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal- weight concrete with the following 54 properties: 55 56 Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 57 58 Water Cement Ratio: 0.45 maximum at point of placement. PORTLAND CEMEN1 CONCRETE PAVING 02520 1 1 2 Slump Limit: 3 inches at point of placement. 3 4 Air Content: 5.5 to 7.0 percent. 5 6 7 8 EXECUTION 9 10 Surface Preparation: Proof -roll prepared subbase and remove loose material from surface. 11 12 Forms: Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to 13 required lines, grades, and elevations. 14 15 Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement. Set 16 wire ties with ends directed into concrete. 17 18 Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable; lap at least one full mesh and lace 19 splices with wire. 20 21 Joints: Locate and install contraction, construction, isolation, and expansion joints as indicated or 22 required. 23 24 Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 304 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing 25 concrete. Place concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. 26 27 Moisten subbase when required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is 28 placed. 29 30 Consolidate placed concrete according to ACI 309R using mechanical vibrating equipment 31 supplemented with hand rodding and tamping. 32 33 Screed and darby or bull -float the surface before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the 34 surface. 35 36 Protect concretg from cold or hot weather during mixing, placing, and curing as follows. 37 38 In cold weather, comply with ACI 306R. 39 40 In hot weather, comply with ACI 305R. 41 42 Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has 43 stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch 44 in 10 feet as determined by a 10- foot -long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any 45 direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular 46 texture. 47 48 Medium -to- Fine Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete surface, 49 perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform fine line texture. 50 51 Textured Surface: At curb ramps and where otherwise noted, imbed diamond pattern mesh in 52 concrete to impart slip resistant texture. 53 54 Final Tooling: Tool edges and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to a radius of 3/8 55 inch. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on 56 concrete surfaces. 57 0252U '2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 1 protection: In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and 2 during finishing operations with an evaporation control film. Apply according to manufacturer's 3 instructions. 4 5 Curing: Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from 6 exposed surfaces. 7 8 Moisture -cure concrete by water ponding, continuous fog spraying, continuously wetted 9 absorptive cover, or by moisture- retaining -cover curing. Keep concrete continuously moist for 10 not less than 7 days. 11 12 13 Field Ouality Control: The Owner will employ a testing agency to sample concrete 14 15 16 Additional Test: The testing agency will make additional tests of concrete when test results 17 indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other characteristics have not been met, as 18 directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by 19 cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 20 21 Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, and does not meet the 22 requirements of this Section. 23 24 protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. 25 26 Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep 27 concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 02520 31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 02711 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submit product data for the following: 8 9 Perforated piping. 10 11 12 PRODUCTS 13 14 Pipes and Fittings: 15 16 Fumish drainage pipe complete with bends, reducers, adaptors and couplers 17 18 perforated PVC pipe: ASTM D 2729 19 20 Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile fabric of polypropylene (PP) or polyester fibers, or 21 combination of both. 22 23 Soil Materials: As follows: 24 25 Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, 26 ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate, Size No. 57, with 100 percent passing 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not 27 more than 5 percent passing No. 8 sieve. 28 29 Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and 30 natural sand, with 100 percent passing 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing No. 50 (0.3- 31 mm) sieve. 32 33 34 EXECUTION 35 36 Examine surfaces and area for suitable conditions where foundation drainage systems are to be 37 installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 38 39 Filtering Material: Place supporting layer of filtering material over compacted subgrade where 40 drainage pipe is to be laid to depth indicated or, if not indicated, to compacted depth of not less than 41 4 inches 42 43 Piping Installation: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of 44 foundation drainage system piping. 45 46 Install piping beginning at low points of system, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping 47 with full bearing, solidly in filtering material. Install piping according to manufacturer's written 48 instructions and other requirements indicated. 49 50 Lay perforated pipe with perforations down and joints tightly closed. 51 52 Extend piping and connect to storm drainage system. 53 54 Testing: Test drain piping with water or visually check piping to ensure free flow before backfilling. 55 Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. 56 57 Place additional filtering material to depth of 4 inches around sides and top of drains after testing. 58 Cover with filter fabric material. FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 02711 1 1 2 3 Drainage Fes: Place fill over drain piping after satisfactory testing and covering with filtering 4 material. Cover piping to width of at least 6 inches on each side and above top of pipe to within 12 5 inches of finish grade. Place fill material in layers not exceeding 6 inches in loose depth, and 6 compact each layer placed. 7 8 Fill to Greg: Place fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose -depth layers 9 not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish elevations and slope away 10 from building. 11 12 13 14 END OF SECTION 02711 15 02711 1 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Work in this section includes, but is not limited to the Irrigation system as indicate!. 1.02 RELATED WORK Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, included but not limited to, the following: Section 02200 Earthwork Section 02900 Landscape/Planting 1.03 REFERENCES 1.04 PERMITS/FEES Obtain all permits and pay required fees to any governmental agency having jurisdiction over the work. Arrange inspections if required by local agencies and ordinances during the course of construction. 95 -932 2(24/97 A. Selections from within the following standards (current as of Project Manual date) are stated/Part 2 and Part 3. 1. Washington State Division of Industrial Safety, latest rules and regulations. 2. Western Plumbing Officials Uniform Plumbing Code. 3. Local Plumbing Code. 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). D.1785 -83 Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipes, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. D2466 -80 Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. Al20 -84 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped Zinc coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. D2672 -81 Bell -End Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: NFPA 70 National Electrical Code latest edition 6. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Publications: C506 -78 Standard Backflow Prevention Devices Reduced Pressure and Double Check Valve Types. B When these specifications and/or drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standards or larger size, these specifications and/or drawings shall take precedence over the above rules, regulations, or codes. IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -1 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide all materials, labor, and equipment necessary for furnishing and installing irrigation system complete with automatic rain shutoff. Includes, but is not limited to, trenching and backfilling, furnishing and installing all equipment and items indicated and specified, and balancing and testing of system. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. At least 30 days prior to beginning work, submit the following data for products submitted for approval as equal. 1. Manufacturer's descriptive data including operating characteristics, operating pressures, pressure losses, materials used in products, test certificates, special features, guarantees and other data required to completely describe the product. 2. Samples of the proposed substitution when requested. Samples will be returned to Contractor whether or not approval is given. B. Project Record Drawings: Furnish Record Drawings of the complete irrigation system in accordance with the General and Special Conditions. 1. Contractor will be furnished with one (1) set of full -size blueline prints and one (1) set of mylar reproducible drawings showing irrigation work as designed under this contract. 2. Maintain the blueline prints on site at all times during construction. Make a daily record of all work installed on the prints. Prints will be reviewed at each site visit. 3. On the prints, show actual location of valves, manual drains, risers, drainage piping and sleeving. Dimension from easily identified permanent features such as buildings, curbs, fences, walks or property lines. 4. Show approved manufacturer's name and catalog number on prints. 5. Make drawings to scale with all notations neat in appearance. 6. After testing and approval of mainlines and laterals for backfill, transfer all information noted on blueline prints to mylar in a neat, orderly way. 7. Mylar shall show name, address, and telephone number of the installing Contractor. 8. Turn the record mylar over to the Owner's Representative for review at or before the Preliminary Inspection of the Project. 9. At Final Inspection, submit Record Drawings, with all required changes to Owner's Representative. Record Drawings must be approved prior to final payment. C. Operations and Maintenance Manual: At or before Preliminary Review of irrigation system, submit for approval time (3) manual, bound in hardback, 3- ring notebook, to Owner's Representative. At a minimum, the following information/items are required to be in the manual: 1. List of authorized distributors and service representatives for each item of irrigation equipment including names, addresses, and telephone /fax numbers. 2. Guarantee/Warranty certificates for all equipment used and Contractor's written warranty for entire system one (1) year guarantee/warranty for entire system. 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -2 2/24/97 3. Instruction manuals for all equipment used. 4. Parts lists for each item with exploded views of each item showing part numbers. 5. Complete trouble shooting guide to common irrigation problems. 6. Winterization and spring start-up procedures. 7. Chart of approximate length of operating times for programming each controller zones for spring, summer, and fall schedule. 8. A pocket for one (1) blueline print of the approved mylar Record Drawings. The print shall be added at time of final review. 9. 8 -1/2" x 11" copies of all irrigation construction details for the irrigation installation. 10. Controller cabinet keys. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE 95 -932 244/'97 A. Substitutions: 1. Specific reference to manufacturers' names and products specified in this Section are used as standards, but this implies no right to substitute other material or methods without written approval of the Owner's Representative. 2. Installation of any approved substitution is Contractor's responsibility. Any changes required for installation of any approved substitution must be made to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and without additional cost to Owner. 3. No substitutions will be permitted which have not been submitted for prior approval and approved by the Owner's Representatives. 4. Approval by Owner's Representative of substituted equipment and/or dimensional drawings does not waive these requirements. B Personnel: 1. Qualifications: Installer /supplier to be "specialist" in irrigation system installation with a minimum of five (5) years experience in similar projects. 2. Superintendent to be experienced and fully qualified to direct and perform all work in this Section. 3. Workers to be qualified and competent. C. Special Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. See referenced Codes, Ordinances. 2. Local Plumbing Code. 3. State, City, and/or County: rules, regulations and requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING, In accordance with the following: A. Deliver material in original containers bearing the name of manufacturer, brand, and model. B Prevent damage to system components during loading, transporting, and unloading, or due to water conditions or any activities at the project site. IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -3 C. Protect polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings from direct sunlight. D. Beds on which PVC pipe is stored must be full length of pipe. E. Do not use any pipe or fittings that have been damaged, dented, or rusted. 1.09 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS 95 -932 2/24/97 A. Site Conditions: 1. Water Source: Connect to 2 -inch irrigation water meter at approximate location shown on the Civil Engineer drawings. 2. Electrical: Controller is to be located outside the building as shown on the Architectural drawings. Connect to 120 V ac power as shown on the Electrical drawings. Coordinate installation with the General Contractor and other trades. 3. Sleeving: Sleeving is required for lines under all paved or surfaced areas, walls, and for control wire not running with piping. Coordinate installation with General Contractor and other trades. 4. Notification: If interruption to water service is required, give Owner, City of Port Angeles, and local Water District 72 hours notice and perform work during non -work hours if possible. B Underground Conditions: 1. Be cognizant of utility lines and underground obstructions. 2. Be familiar with all utility, irrigation, mechanical, civil, and electrical drawings so that digging/drilling operations do not damage lines. Should utilities or other work not shown on the drawings be found during excavations, promptly notify Owner's Representative. Failure to do so will make Contractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from Contractor's operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on drawing. C. Replace or repair at Contractor's expense any existing planting, building, equipment, underground utilities, walks, and/or forms damaged as a result of the contractor's operations in a manner satisfactory to the Owner before final payment is made. D. If building water services are interrupted, take care to flush system thoroughly as required by state and local codes. 1.10 WARRANTY In addition to manufacturer's guarantees or warranties, warrant all work for one (1) year from the date of Final Acceptance against defects in material, equipment, and workmanship. Warranty shall also cover repair of damage to any part of the premises (including planting) resulting from leaks, settlement or other defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship to the satisfaction of the Owner. IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -4 1.11 BARRIERS. SAFETY GUARDS. CONSTRUCTION WARNINQ FENCING A� Q1 WARNING LIGHTS Provide for public, visitors', and workers' protection, as required by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Material and equipment of types and sizes shown on drawings, details, or as specified. Material throughout the system is required to be new and in perfect condition. B Materials or products not as specified or not submitted for prior approval and approved shall be replaced immediately with the specified item. No field approvals will be given. 2.02 PIPE A. General: No substitutions of smaller pipe sizes will be permitted, but substitutions of larger sizes of same type, at no extra cost, are acceptable upon review and approval by the Landscape Architect. Each length of PVC pipe is to be coded with an identifying extrusion "run" number and the manufacturer's name or trade name, the pipe size, and schedule or class. B Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): 1. Pressure Mainline all sizes: PVC 1120, 1220, SDR 21 C, Schedule 40, solvent weld and shall conform to ASTM D1784. 2. Laterals all sizes: PVC 1120, 1220, SDR 21 C, Class 200, solvent weld and shall conform to ASTM D1784. 3. Threaded Pipe and Nipples: PVC 1120 and 1220, Schedule 80, conforming to ASTM D1785. C. Polyethylene pipe: Linear low density polyethylene. Minimum wall thickness 0.100 inch. D. Galvanized Pipe: Standard wall Schedule 40, hot dipped galvanized iron or steel pipe, threaded or coupled, which conform to ASTM Al20. E. Flexible Poly Pipe: 1/2 -inch diameter polyethylene tubing, thick walled, as manufactured by RainBird or Toro. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Solvent Weld Pipe (PVC) Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2466, Type, Grades 1 or 2. Pipe may be belled on one end with the dimensions of the tapered bell conforming to ASTM D2672. Molded fittings manufactured of the same material as the pipe, suitable for solvent weld. Slip fitting socket taper shall be so sized that a dry, unsoftened pipe end can be inserted no more than halfway into the socket. Plastic saddles and flange fittings not permitted. 95 -932 2!24/97 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -5 B. Barb fittings: Black thermoplastic materials, as manufactured by RainBird or Toro. C. Galvanized Steel Pipe: Standard weight threaded galvanized malleable iron fittings, 150 psi. D. Clamps: Stainless steel. 2.04 SOLVENT WELD COMPOUND Two -step application with separate primer and solvent compounds as recommended by pipe manufacturers to meet site conditions encountered. 2.05 VALVE BOXES. A. Point -of- Connection Equipment: Concrete Utility Vault, Model #25 -TA with hinged diamond plate steel cover, as manufactured by Utility Vault Company. Provide extensions as required. B Automatic Control and Ball Valves: 11" x 17" standard box with locking cover as manufactured by Ametek, Carson, or approved equal. Provide extensions as required. One valve per box. No exceptions. 2.06 PROTECTIVE SLEEVE WITH LOCKING CAPS Two (2) inch diameter Class 200 PVC, length as required. Cap, Weathennatic 906L or approved equal. All drain valves to be enclosed in protective sleeves with locking caps. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS KEYS Provide three (3) of each of the following keys: Manual drain crosshandle key, valve box cover lock key, controller cabinet keys and quick coupler valve key with swivel hose ell. 2.08 CONTROL WIRING D. Electrical Tape: Black plastic, 3/4 -inch wide, spec. grade, min. 0.007 inches thick, all weather type. E. Duct Tape: All weather cloth tape. 2.09 SLEEVE MATERIALS For control wires and water lines: PVC 1120, 1220, Class 200 pipe. 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -6 2124197 A. Copper, insulated single strand, minimum size AWG No. 14, 600 V, UL approved as Type UF. Color code as follows: White Common ground wire Red Control wire Yellow Spare wires B. Trace Wire: 12 gauge bare copper wire. C. Splice: Watertight electrical splices with 3M, Scott's Lock Seal Tack 3576 -78, Pen -Tite PVC socket or RainBird ST -03 with PT -S5 sealer. 2.10 DRAIN ROCK Unfractured rock, 100 percent passing 1 -1/2 -inch square sieve and 0 percent passing 3/4- inch sieve. 2.11 MAINTENANCE EOUIPMENT Provide two (2) manufacturer's service wrenches for each head type requiring such. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Available Pressure Verification: Prior to the start of any work, verify size, depth, and location of water source. Verify available gallonage at required operating pressure at point -of- connection. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section and as have been approved by Owner's Representative. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes Contractor's acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. C. Discrepancies in drawings /site: Report to the Owner's Representative any deviations between irrigation drawings and the site. Failure to do so prior to the installing of the equipment and resulting in replacing, and/or relocating equipment shall be done at Contractor's expense. 95 -932 284/97 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protect work, adjacent property, public, visitors and workers. Be responsible for any damage or injury arising from this contract. Take reasonable care to discourage vandalism. Confine work to areas designated. Do not disturb natural vegetation outside of project limit lines. Protect all trees and shrubs within project limits not designated to be removed. Repair or replace plantings damaged as a result of Contractor's operations to satisfaction of Owner at Contractor's expense. 2. Furnish and maintain all warning signs, shoring, barricades, red lanterns, etc., as required by the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety and local ordinances. Take care to protect open trenches and pits. B Layout: 1. Layout work as accurately as possible to drawings. Drawings are diagrammatic to the extent that swing joints, offsets, and all fittings are not shown. 2. Stake the sprinkler irrigation system head locations following the diagrammatic design shown on the drawings for approval before the construction begins. Alterations and changes in the layout may be expected in order to conform to the ground conditions and to obtain full and adequate coverage of water. It is understood that corrective measures IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -7 may become necessary, but no changes or alterations in the system as planned shall be made without the prior authorization of the Owner's Representative. 3. Where connections to existing stub -outs are required, make necessary adjustment in layout to connect, should stubs not be located exactly as shown. Adjust layout as necessary to install around existing work. Where piping is shown to be under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, intention is to install piping in planted areas. Do not install directly over another line in same trench. No stacked pipe allowed! 4. Install irrigation to avoid proposed tree locations. Plant locations will be field adjusted at direction of Owner's Representative to avoid irrigation equipment. 5. Provide for dewatering as required to deep them dry until backfilling. 3.03 EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING. A. Perform all excavations as required for installation of work included under this Section, including shoring of earth banks, as necessary. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations, etc., damaged or cut as a result of the excavations, to their original condition. 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -8 2/24/97 B Dig trenches wide enough to allow a minimum of 3 inches between parallel pipe lines. Trenches shall be of sufficient depth to provide minimum cover from finish grades as follows: 1. Over PVC pipe on pressure side of irrigation control valve, control wires and quick coupling valves (pressure mainlines): 24 inches minimum. 2. Over pipe on non pressure side of irrigation control valve (lateral lines): 18 inches minimum, 24 inches cover under paving. 3. Over all sleeving: 24 inches minimum. 4. Excavate to depth required in any material encountered with no extra compensation. Materials unsuitable for bedding of pipe to be removed to depth 4 inches below trench bottom and replaced with any of the following suitable bedding materials as directed by the Owner's Representative. a. From bottom of trench to specified subgrade: Excavated trench material free of material which might damage the pipe, including rocks, roots, sticks, debris, or other sharp objects over 1 -inch in diameter, or sand as required. b. From subgrade to finish grade (except in paved areas): Topsoil depth and type as specified in Section 02900, Landscape/Planting. 5. The top 4 to 6 inches of topsoil, when such exists, shall be kept separate from subsoil and shall be replaced as the top layer when backfill is made. C. Exercise care when excavating trenches near existing trees and shrubs. Where roots are 2 inches or greater in diameter, except in the direct path of the pipe, hand- excavate and tunnel; where large roots are exposed, wrap with heavy burlap for protection and prevent excessive drying. Trenches dug by machines adjacent to trees having roots 2 inches or less in diameter, shall have the sides hand trimmed making a clean cut of the roots. All roots 1/2-inch and greater in diameter that are cut and trimmed shall be treated with an approved tree wound dressing. Trenches having exposed tree roots shall be backfilled within 24 hours unless adequately protected by moist burlap or canvas. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.04 SLEEVING C. Plug ends of sleeves around insert piping to prevent soil from entering ends. Complete this prior to backfilling of trenches. D. Coordinate sleeving with General Contractor and other trades as required. 3.05 PIPE LINE ASSEMBLY A. General: 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -9 2/24/97 D. Dispose of all surplus excavation from trenches on the project site as directed by the Owner's Representative. Remove all sticks, trash and other extraneous material over 3 inches in diameter off the project site. A. Install sleeves for all piping and wiring under all paved or surfaced areas, through walls, and as required to facilitate a smooth construction sequence. B Sleeves shall be minimum twice the IPS diameter of insert pipe and shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond edge of walls, walks, and paving. Allow sufficient space for valve wiring. 1. Install pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seal all threaded joints with Teflon tape, Rectorseal "Heavy Duty" #100 Virgin Teflon Thread Sealing Paste, or Lasco Blue Pipe Thread Sealant. 3. Take care not to overtighten metal pipe to PVC fittings. 4. Keep interior of pipes clean and free from dirt, debris, excess solvent, pipe cuttings or burrs. Ream to full diameter. When pipe laying is not in progress, close end of pipe. B. PVC Pipe: 1. Use two -step solvent weld process only; apply as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. No water shall be permitted in pipe until a period of at least 10 hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing. 3. The joints shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system. 4. Only factory threaded Schedule 80 PVC pipe may be connected to a threaded fitting without an adapter. No female PVC adapters permitted. Use only male PVC adapters with Schedule 80 PVC nipples (3 -inch minimum length). 5. Snake pipe from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. C. Galvanized Pipe: 1. Install pipe in accordance with industry standards and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Paint all piping below grade with a least one (1) coat of "Galv -Weld" (or approved equal) to prevent acid corrosion. Cast fittings need not be painted. Take care to thoroughly paint all male threads. Do not paint above grade portions. 3.06 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Quick Couplers: 1. Install on triple swing joints as detailed. 2. Minimum riser size shall be the pipe size of the quick coupler inlet. 3. Set all quick couplers 2 inches above final finish grade in groundcover areas only. B. Pop -Up Sprinklers: 1. Install on flexible poly pipe as detailed. 2. Set top of all heads to grade specified. 3. Set all heads perpendicular to finish grade and 4 inches back from curbs and 6 inches from walks unless otherwise noted. C. Rotary Sprinklers: 1. Install on triple swing joints as per detail. 2. Minimum riser size shall be the pipe size of the sprinkler inlet. 3. Set top of all heads to grade specified. 4. Set all heads perpendicular to finish grade and 4 inches back from curbs and 6 inches from walks unless otherwise noted. 3.07 VALVE BOXES, A. Install in approximate locations shown on drawing, outside of paved areas, and grouped together where possible. B Avoid all proposed tree locations. Adjust equipment location as needed. C. Where valves occur adjacent to paved areas, install so that the valve box will be no closer than 12 inches to paving and perpendicular or parallel to it. Grouped valves shall be spaced evenly to present a neat appearance. D. Enclose all valves in valve boxes. Valve box extensions may be required. Install as per detail and locate precisely by dimensions of two (2) fixed objects on Record Drawings. E. Check and tighten all valve bonnet packings and bolts. F. Provide sufficient room in boxes to service all equipment. G. One valve per box. No exceptions. 3.08 DRAIN VALVES Install at point -of- connection and at all low points of mainline as required to completely drain system. Each drain to have minimum 6 cu. ft. drain rock sump. Install valves as detailed. System will be winterized by compressed air blow -out through a quick coupler. 3.09 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Install in accordance with local code and manufacturer's printed instructions. 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -10 2/24/97 3.10 CONTROL WIRING 95 -932 2/24/97 B. Connect automatic control valves to controller in sequence as noted on the drawings. C. Install controller outside the building as per manufacturer's printed instruction. Verify exact location with Owner's Representative. D. Install automatic rain shutoff device as per manufacturer's printed instruction. Install on roof, verify exact location with Owner's Representative. E. Affix a non fading copy of the irrigation diagram to inside each of the cabinet doors. Irrigation diagram shall be a copy of the mylar Record Drawing and clearly show all valves operated by each of the controllers, showing station number, valve size, and type of planting irrigated, sealed between two (2) sheets of 20 millimeter (minimum) plastic. A. Wiring between automatic controllers and automatic control valve shall comply with latest edition National Electrical Code, and shall have a common neutral (white), control (orange), spear wire (black) and separate control conductor for each valve. B. Splices will be permitted only at junction boxes, valve boxes, or at control equipment. A minimum of 2 foot of excess conductor is to be left at all splices, terminal and control valves to facilitate inspection and future splicing. Encapsulate all splices with approved sealants. Show all splices on Record Drawings. C. Control wires are to be taped together at 5 foot intervals with electrical tape; then, this bundle is to be taped to the bottom of the main (supply) line at 10 foot intervals with at least one (1) full wrap of duct tape. Tie a loose 20 inch loop in all wiring at changes of direction greater than 30 degrees. Untie all loops after all connections have been made. D. At Contractor's option, the control wire may be placed to the side of the main rather than below, provided that the wire is not installed above the top of the main nor more than 8 inches from the side of the main. The bundle of control wires are to be taped together at 5 foot intervals. E. Run two (2) unconnected continuous spare control wire through each intermediate valve box (with loop) between each controller and furthest automatic control valve. F. Provide and install bare copper trace wire with all piping, main and lateral lines. Attach to piping with nylon wire ties at minimum 10 -foot intervals and at all changes in direction. All splices shall be made by twisting ends together and attaching with watertight splices as specified. G Sleeve all control wire which does not run with irrigation piping. H. When backfilling around valve box, make sure that spare wires are exposed in valve box. IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -11 3.11 BACK LOW PREVENTER A. Install in location shown on drawings as per detail, in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations and codes and ordinance. B Provide sufficient clearance for servicing backflow preventer and related equipment. Clean out all soil from valve box to 12 -inch below backflow preventer. Use valve box extensions from finish grade to 12 inches below backflow preventer. 3.12 FLUSHING A. Backflow preventer: Two (2) fully -open flushings: One (1) prior to placement of valves; the second, after placement of valves and quick couplers, and prior to hydrostatic testing. B. Pressure Mainlines: Two (2) fully -open flushings: One (1) prior to placement of valves, and a second, prior to hydrostatic testing after placement of control valves, quick couplers and drain valves. C. Lateral Lines: One (1) fully -open flushing prior to placement of sprinkler heads. 3.13 TESTING A. General: 2!24/97 1. To be valid, all tests must be performed under the observation of the Owner's Representative. 2. Submit verbal requests for inspection to Owner's Representative at least 48 hours prior to anticipated testing. Do not request testing until satisfied that work will pass test. 3. If any part of the irrigation system is backfilled before testing or inspection, it must be completely uncovered and exposed until approved for backfilling. 4. Furnish a pressure gauge mounted on a quick coupler valve key for testing at point directed by Owner's Representative. B Preparation: Prior to request for preliminary testing, accomplish the following: 1. Install all piping, valves, and other equipment except sprinkler heads. 2. Purge all air from lateral lines and cap all risers. 3. Purge all air from mainlines. C. Testing: 1. Test of Pressure Mainlines and Valves: With all valves in place and closed, test at 150 psi minimum for 30 minutes without introduction of additional service or pumping pressure. Lines which show loss of pressure exceeding 5 psi at the end of specified test period shall be rejected. 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -12 2/24/97 2. Test of Laterals: Purge all air from laterals and cap all risers. Open valves and bring system to line pressure. Lateral lines will be inspected visually. Piping and fittings which evidence visible leakage shall be rejected. Leakage of temporary caps on risers is acceptable. 3. Rejected systems or portions of system shall be repaired and retested until approved. Do not request retest until satisfied that system will pass testing requirements. 3.14 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. Backfill: 1. After system is operating and the required tests and approvals have been made, backfill excavations and trenches with the specified backfill. 2. Backfill when PVC pipe is not in an expanded condition due to heat or pressure. Cooling the pipe can be accomplished by operating the system a short time or by backfilling in the early part of the morning. 3. The top 4 inches (lawn) or 6 inches (shrub and groundcover) of soil shall be stockpiled topsoil with all rocks, sod, and sticks removed. B Compaction: 1. Trenches shall be thoroughly water settled. No sluicing shall be permitted. Trenches will be backfilled uniform flush with the surrounding grade, raked and rolled with a roller weighing min. 90 lbs. per linear foot. 2. Trenches or tunnels under roads or paved areas shall be backfilled and tamped with a mechanical tamper in successive 6 inch lifts. 3. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be compacted to minimum 95 percent density under pavements, 85 percent under landscaped areas. 4. Dress all areas to surrounding finish grades. 3.15 RESTORATION AND CLEANUP A. Restore all landscape areas to original condition prior to beginning work. B Repair any damage to plant material or adjacent areas. C. All roots, rocks and debris shall be removed from site. D. Sweep and wash spotlessly clean all buildings, walls, walks, pavement, parking lots, and lighting. 3.16 REVIEWS A. Notification: Submit verbal request for reviews to Owner's Representative at least 48 hours prior to anticipated reviews. B Prior to request for preliminary review accomplish the following: 1. Complete all work including balancing, adjusting the system (pressure reducing valves, flow adjustment keys, nozzles, etc.) to provide optimum coverage without fogging. 2. Adjust sprinkler heads to finish grade as detailed. 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -13 END OF SECTION 02810 95 -932 IRRIGATION SYTEM 02810 -14 2124/97 3. Clean out all sediment from valve boxes so that soil level is to bottom of valve, and all wiring (including spare wires) are visible. 4. Complete the Operations and Maintenance Manual ready for review by Owner's Representative. 5. Complete mylar Record Drawing for review by Owner's Representative. 6. Obtain all miscellaneous keys, spare parts and tools required under this contract for review by Owner's Representative and delivery to Owner. 7. Provide copy of Record Drawing and attach to inside face of each controller cabinet. C. Preliminary Review (Punch List): Request review at time of completion of all work under this contract (including planting and seeding). 1. Coverage Check: Operate each zone of the system with the controllers at direction of Owner's Representative. 2. Make all adjustments recommended by Owner's Representative. D. Final Review /Acceptance: 1. Correct all Punch List items prior to requesting final review. 2. At the time of (and as part of) the final review, conduct a training and orientation session for the Owner covering the operation, adjustment and maintenance of the irrigation system. The Record Drawings and Operations and Maintenance Manual shall be reviewed and all features explained. Notify the Owner in writing two (2) weeks prior to the training and orientation session. The date and time of the session shall be subject to approval of the Owner. 3. Operations Test: Test is acceptable if system operates through at least one (1) complete cycle in a satisfactory manner, with uniform coverage of areas to be irrigated, and automatic controls functioning properly. 4. Acceptance of work establishes beginning of one (1) year warranty period for irrigation system, and includes warranty against settlement. If settlement occurs on paved areas, remove and replace. No patching will be allowed. SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPE /PLANTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Work in this section includes but is not necessarily limited to the Landscape/Planting as indicated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Coordinate related work specified in other parts of Project Manual, including, but not limited to, following: Section 02200 Earthwork Section 02810 Irrigation System 1.03 REFERENCES Selections from within the following standards (current as of Project Manual date) are stated/Part 2 and Part 3. A. Washington State Department of Agriculture (WSDA): Washington State Standards for Nursery Stock, Order No. 1627. B. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Soil Classification. C. U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Publications: 1. Federal Seed Act of August 9, 1939. Reprinted September 1975: 53 Stat 1275 Rules and Regulations. 2. Soil Survey Investigation, Report No. 1, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods and Procedures for Collecting Soil Samples, Soil Conservation Service, April 1972. D. American Association of Nurserymen: American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI -Z 60.1 -1980 American Standard for Nursery Stock. E. American Joint Committee of Horticulture Nomenclature: Standard Plant Names, current edition. 95 -932 2a4/97 F. Federal Specifications: (FS) O- F -241D: Fertilizer, Mixed, Commercial. (FS) Q- P -166E: Peat Moss, Peat Humus and Reed -Sedge Peat G Fertilizer: Conform to Washington State Department of Agriculture Laws and Federal Specification O- F -241D pertaining to commercial fertilizers. H. Mulch/Compost: Compost Information Kit. A Publication of the Clean Washington Center, current edition. LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 02900 -1 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide all materials, labor, and equipment necessary for finish grading; soil testing, topsoil preparation/placement /spreading, application of soil amendments and fertilizers, and installation; planting of trees, shrubs, groundcovers, seeding, and mulch as indicated; protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of plants; and related items necessary to complete the work indicated. Work includes providing all necessary equipment for watering until final acceptance, for establishing all lawn areas and planting. 1.05 511BMITTALS In accordance with the following: A. Plant Material Documentation: 1. Within 30 days after award of General Contract, submit documentation that all specified plant materials have been ordered. 2. List suppliers names, addresses, and phone number. 3. List respective growing or storage locations with addresses. 4. Seed: submit a letter of certification for the seed mix from supplier to the landscape architect for review and approval at least 30 days prior to seeding. B. Stockpile Topsoil Testing: 1. Submit two (2) representative samples to Soil and Plant Laboratory, Bellevue Washington, (206) 746 -6665 or approved equal, for tests #A03 and #A17 and one (1) sample to Landscape Architect. 2. Submit three (3) copies of the test results to Landscape Architect for approval. Amend all stockpiled topsoil in accordance with soils laboratory recommendations. Topsoil testing and amendments shall be done at contractor's expense. C. Mulch/Compost: 1. Submit two (2) representative samples and material sources for Landscape Architect's approval at least 30 days prior to installation. 2. Submit copy of the Solid Waste Handling Permit issued to the supplier by the Jurisdictional Health Department as per WAC 173 -304 (The Minimal Functional Standards). 3. Certification by the supplier that the compost products originate 100 percent from recycled plant waste. A maximum of 35 percent by volume of other approved organic waste and/or biosolids may be included. They shall conform to the physical listed above and be listed by percentage of the final compost product. D. Maintenance Data: Include special directions essential for the Owner's year -round maintenance program after the guarantee period expires. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier/Installer Qualifications: To be a "specialist" in landscape installation with a minimum of five (5) years experience in similar scale projects.. 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 2/24/97 02900 -2 B Special Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. See referenced Codes, ordinances, and the like. 2. Washington State Department of Agriculture: Regulations. 3. State, City, and/or County: Rules, regulations, and requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLINQ In accordance with the following: A. Delivery: 1. Protect plants during delivery to prevent damage. Protect trees during transport by tying in branches and covering all exposed branches. 2. Protect seed during delivery from drying out or becoming contaminated. 3. Fertilizers to be in original unopened container, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. 4. Pesticides, herbicides and soil fumigants to be in original unopened containers labeled with Environmental Protection Agency and State registration number and manufacturer's registered uses. 5. Acceptance at site: Upon delivery, verify undamaged conditions. 6. Deliver all plants with legible identification nursery labels. a. Label trees and bundles of like shrubs. b. State correct plant name and size. c. Use durable waterproof labels with water resistant ink, which will remain legible for at least 60 days. B. Storage: 1. Protect plants and seed from rain, sun, and drying winds. 2. Keep seed, lime, and fertilizers in dry storage and away from contaminants. 3. Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within four (4) hours in a safe, healthy, vigorous condition. Any and all plant material that is not properly stored, will be rejected. If balled and burlap trees and shrubs are on -site for more than twelve (12) hours, they must be healed in with one of the following: sawdust, bark, or compost. The Contractor will replaced the rejected material at no extra charge to the Owner. 4. Do not store pesticides, herbicides, and soil fumigants with any other landscape materials. Store in secure separate structure or vehicle. C. Handling: Protect plants and seed from injury during handling and transportation on -site. 1.08 PROJECT SITE CQNDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Plant and seed during periods normal for optimum growth, as determined by season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. Planting operations may be conducted under unseasonable conditions, without additional compensation, and by accepting FULL responsibility for any subsequent, resulting losses. 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 2/24197 02900 -3 2. Do not perform planting or seeding when ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy or in an unsatisfactory condition. B Underground Conditions: 1. Be cognizant of utility lines and underground obstructions. 2. Be familiar with utility, irrigation, mechanical and electrical drawings so that digging/drilling operations do not damage lines. C. Satisfactorily repair and replace at Contractor's expense damaged buildings, equipment, underground utilities, irrigation equipment, paving, surfacing, and forms damaged as a result of Contractor's operations. Repair immediately after damage has occurred. 1.09 SEOUENCING /SCHEDULING A. Phase in properly with Landscape Architect reviewed/accepted Progress Schedule. B Coordinate ordering of all materials immediately following General Contract award. Assure that specified sizes, quantities, and the like are furnished and installed. 1.10 WARRANTY, A. Note that Warranty Period for this work, while of the standard/General Conditions one year's duration, is timed to begin not at Substantial Completion, but as specified this Section, Part 3. B Guarantee Replacement: 1. Plant Material: Warrant for healthy, thriving conditions: a. Trees and shrubs for one (1) year. b. Groundcover and seed until active, vigorous growth is evident. 2. Remove and replace immediately during the Guarantee Period: dead, diseased, dying, broken or disappeared plant materials (due to any cause, except those noted below). Perform, at no additional expense to Owner. Use specified plants and plant as specified; guarantee until acceptable active, healthy growth is evident. 3. Seeding: Warrant replacement of seeding until active, vigorous growth is evident with no bare spots over 3 inches square. 4. During Guarantee Period, Contractor is not held responsible for replacing plants destroyed or damaged by vandalism, accidents caused by vehicle (other than Contractor's), or Acts of God (provided that Contractor has exercised due care to protect the work). When required replacement time falls due during non planting season, Contractor may request Owner's permission to defer planting until proper season. If granted, immediately remove from site dead plants, including all roots. Backfill pits properly with planting mix. Finish grade and leave in acceptable condition until proper planting season occurs. Replacement plants are required to be of same kind and size originally planted. Plant as originally specified. 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 02900 -4 2/24/97 1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS Proposed only at the time of submitting documentation of ordered material. Any proposed substitution requires written proof from at least five (5) sources (major plant suppliers) that specified material is not available. 1.12 BARRIERS. CONSTRIJC:TION_EARMNG FENCING. SAEUY GUARDS AND WARNING LIGHTS Provide for public, visitors', and workers' protection, as required by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS /GENERAL A. Comply with "Quality Assurance" provisions, "References Specifications, and Manufacturer's data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. B Owner will inspect all plant material at the project site for approval. The Owner reserves the right to reject any plant material after it has been installed. 2.02 PLANT MATERIALS 5. Contractor shall visit the site at least once a month during the Guarantee period to review conditions of plant material. If unsatisfactory growing conditions are evident, notify Owner in writing immediately. In the absence of such communication, the Contractor is fully responsible for all plant loss replacements. A Standards: Meet or exceed following reference standards for quality, size, and condition: 1. Washington State Standards for Nursery Stock: Order No. 1627. 2. ANSI Z 60.1 -1980: American Standards for Nursery Stock. B Plant Names: Plant varieties shall be as specified in the plant list and be true to botanical name as listed in the latest edition of "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by American Joint Committee of Horticulture Nomenclature. C. Plant Stock: 1. Be fresh, well foliaged, in prime condition when in leaf, and exhibiting normal habit of growth. 2. Have all leaders and buds intact, free of disease, injury, insects, insect eggs, larvae, and indications of strawberry root weevil. 3. Be free of seeds, weed roots, and other such contaminants. D. Plants are to be nursery grown unless otherwise indicated. 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 2/24/97 02900 -5 E. Plants are required to be from stock acclimated to Project Site environmental conditions, having been consistently cultivated and grown under these conditions. No cold storage plants are permitted. F. Grafted trees are required to be grafted at ground level. G Ball and burlapped (B &B) stock is required to have a natural ball sufficient to insure survival and healthy growth. H. Bare root (BR) materials are required to have sufficient root system insuring survival and healthy growth. I. Container grown plants are required to have sufficient growth to hold the earth intact when removed from containers but shall not be root bound. 2.03 SEED A. General: 1. Seed labels are required to be in conformance with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations under Federal Seed Act 53 State and applicable State seed laws. 2. All seed shall be blue tag or certified quality. 3. Seed shall be furnished in original sealed packages bearing producer's guaranteed analysis for the following information: Seed name, lot number, net weight, percentage of mix, purity, germination, weed seed and inert material. 4. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not be accepted. 5. All seed minimum 98% pure and minimum 90% germination. 6. All seed shall be State certified seed of the latest season's corp. B Lawn Mix: All Lawn Mix by weight) Seed by weight Perennial Rye Blend Futura 2000 60 Fine Fescue Reliant 40 2.04 WOOD FIBER MULCH FOR HYDROMULCH NG A. Shall be virgin wood cellulose fibers, manufactured from whole wood chips expressly for this purpose. B Approved products include: Conwed 'Hydro -Mulch Fiber' (612) 221 -1190 Weyerhaueser 'Silva -Fiber' (800) 443 -9179 C. Dispersing agents any be added at Contractor's option, provided that the additive is not harmful to the mixture. 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 2/24/97 02900 -6 2.05 STABILIZING EMULSION FOR HYDROMULCHING Non -toxic to plants or animals, non staining to concrete surfaces, capable of being combined with water at time of mixing and application. 2.06 TACKIFIER FOR HYDROMULCHING J -Tac or approved equal. 2.07 STOCKPILED TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be the existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on the site as specified in "Earthwork Section 02200. At Contractor's option stockpiled topsoil may be screened or rocks may be removed after spreading as specified in this section. 95 -932 2!24/97 B Topsoil Amendments: Modify stockpile topsoil after installation in accordance with the testing laboratory recommendations. 2.08 SOIL AMENDMENTS The following organic, soil amendments, and fertilizer are to be used for bid price only. Specific amendments and fertilizer specification shall be as per soil laboratory recommendations from representative samples furnished by the Contractor: Amount/1,000 square feet 6 cu. yds. (2" layer) sawdust 100 lbs. Gypsum 70 lbs. Calcium Carbonate Limestone 70 lbs. Dolomitic Limestone 5 lbs. Ammonium Nitrate 10 lbs. Treble Superphosphate (0 -45 -0) 5 lbs. Potassium Sulfate Topsoil amendments shall be thoroughly mixed prior to incorporation into topsoil. 2.09 FERTILIZER A. General: Use brands acceptable to Landscape Architect and that conform to applicable State fertilizer laws and Fed. Spec. O -F -241, Type I, Class 2 and grades as recommended by the soils laboratory and as specified below. B. Lawns: 1. Pre-plant fertilizer: 16 20 20 at 5 lbs. per 1,000 square feet and 38 percent ureaformaldehyde at 5 lbs. per 1,000 square feet. 2. Post -plant fertilizer. Ammonium sulfate at 5 lbs. per 1,000 square feet. Two (2) applications required. LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 02900 -7 C. Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcovers: 2.10 SAWDUST Sawdust shall be approved mixed conifer derived from fir or hemlock (no cedar) material. Sawdust shall be free of chips, splinters, or any foreign material. Maximum particle size is 1/4 inch in any direction. 2.11 MULCH/COMPOST 1. Formula 4 "Transplanter" as manufactured by Pacific Agro Co., with Hercules Nitroform and W.R. Grace's "Magamp" and trace elements. Apply at rate of: Trees 8 oz. Large and Medium Shrubs 4 oz. Low Shrubs and Groundcovers 2 oz. 2. Agriform Tablets: Planting tablets, 21- and 5 -gram size, as manufactured by Agriform International Chemicals, Inc., 20 -10 -5 analysis. Apply at rate of: Trees 4 tablets* 21 gram Shrubs 2 tablets 21 gram Groundcover 1 tablet 5 gram *4 tablets for every foot of ball diameter. Mulch/Compost products shall contain compost plant waste material derived from the aerobic decomposition of recycled plant waste. The composted plant waste shall have a moisture content that has no visible free water or dust produced when handling the material. Mulch/Compost products shall meet the following physical criteria: A. 100 percent shall pass through a 1 -inch sieve when tested in accordance with WSDOT Test Method 602 and 603 (AASHTO T87 and T88). B The pH range shall be between 5.0 and 8.5 when tested in accordance with WSDOT Test Method 417. C. Foreign material (plastic, mineral soils, concrete, metal, etc.) shall be no more than 2 percent on a dry weight or volume basis, whichever provides for the least amount of foreign material. 2.12 PLANTING PIT BACKFILL MIX A. Backfill mix for planting trees, shrubs, and groundcovers shall consist of the following formulation: 0.6 cubic yards by volume stockpile topsoil 0.4 cubic yards by volume specified bark dust or sawdust 16 lbs. Gypsum 10 lbs. Calcium Carbonate Limestone 10 lbs. Dolomitic Limestone 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 02900 -8 2124/97 1 lbs. Ammonium Nitrate 3 lbs. Treble Superphosphate (0 -45 -0) 1 lbs. Potassium Sulfate Soil amendments /fertilizers as per soil analysis B Backfill mix shall be stockpiled topsoil thoroughly mixed with soil amendments and fertilizers. 2.13 STAKING MATERIAL As noted on details. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section and have been approved by Landscape Architect. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes Contractor's acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. B Field Measurements: Verify actual layout in relation to drawings. Make adjustments as required by Landscape Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Verify that all soil contaminants (e.g., paint, solvent, oil, grease, concrete spells, etc.) have been satisfactorily removed from all planting areas. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Site preparation includes soil preparation in all planting and seeded areas and any finish grading necessary or incidental to all planting operations. All work within the drip line areas of existing trees scheduled to remain, shall be done by hand methods. B. Subgrade: 1. After all planting and seeded areas have been brought to required subgrade and reviewed, rip subgrade to an 8 -inch depth with two passes, each 90 degrees to each other, in order to thoroughly scarify the subgrade. 2. Remove all debris and stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension remaining on surface after tilling. C. Stockpiled Topsoil Installation: 1. Place approximately 2 inches (lawn), 3 inches (shrub /groundcover) of stockpiled topsoil evenly over entire area scheduled for seeded/planting. Rototill to a depth of 6 inches to incorporate stockpiles topsoil with subsoil. 2. Place additional 2 inches (lawn), 3 inches (shrub /groundcover) of stockpiled topsoil evenly over entire seeded/planting areas (for a total of 4 inches (lawn) and 6 inches (shrub /groundcover) stockpiled topsoil). 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 284/97 02900 -9 3. Apply fertilizers and soil amendments to all planting and lawn areas at rates specified by soils testing lab. Thoroughly incorporate by rototilling all planting areas to a depth of 6 inches and lawn areas to a depth of 2 inches. D. Finish Grading: 1. Establish finish grades and blend into the existing grades. Spread pre-plant fertilizer and rake into the top 2 inches. 2. Rake, float, drag, roll and perform all necessary operations to remove surface irregularities and to provide a firm, smooth surface with positive drainage. Remove all rocks, sticks and other debris 1 -inch and larger. 3. Finish grades, after installation of seed or mulch, shall be flush with adjacent surfaces unless other wise specified or detailed. 4. Surface drainage shall be away from all building foundation and hardscape. 5. Finish grades must be inspected and approved by Landscape Architect prior to any planting or seeding. E. Plant Locations: After placement of topsoil, stake tree locations and position shrubs above ground for Landscape Architect's review and approval. Make required field adjustments as directed without additional cost to the Owner. Avoid obstructions such as electrical equipment and the like. F. Hydromulch/Hydroseeding 1. All areas that receive hydroseeding shall have been graded smooth to finish grades. Smooth out all holes, ruts, and hummocks. 2. Hydroseed all areas as indicated on the drawings. 3. Hydroseeding equipment shall be as approved by the Landscape Architect. 4. Mix continuously; agitate and circulate seed, mulch, and emulsion to produce homogeneous slurry. 5. Apply uniformly and continuously at specified rate. 6. Hydroseeding shall consist of a slurry composed of water, seed, fertilizer, tackifier, and mulch as follows: Lawn Seed 220 lbs. per acre Fertilizer 400 lbs. per acre Wood Fiber 2,000 lbs. per acre Tackifier 40 lbs. per acre 7. Remove overspray slurry from plant material, building walls, streets, walks, paving, curbs, lighting, signs, etc. 8. Do not seed in windy weather. Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours before operation begins. 9. Take care to avoid damaging or covering plant material and building walls, street, walks, paving, curbs, lighting, etc. 10. After seeding, apply a fine mist over the seeded areas, keeping all areas moist, but not glistening wet, until fully germinated. G. Protect the public visitors', workers', adjacent properties, surfaces, and surrounding areas to preclude harm during work of this Section. H. Provide all necessary planting safeguards required until Provisional Inspection Acceptance is accomplished, or for such time as required to assure vigorous establishment of the plant material. 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 02900 -10 2/24197 95 -932 2/24/97 I. Protect unfinished work when stopping for the day. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the work in accordance with "Quality Assurance" provisions, "References Specifications, and Manufacturer's directions and recommendations. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. B Trees: 1. Excavate pits 6 inches deeper and twice diameter of root ball. Remove excavated soil from the site. Thoroughly scarify bottom of pits by shovel cutting to a depth of 12 inches. Shovel cut pit sides to help root penetration. 2. Backfill bottom of tree pit (minimum 6 inches) with compacted native soil to such an elevation that when tree is installed, it will be at proper finish grade. Compact backfill by hand methods and water to eliminate all voids. 3. If water is encountered in excavation, raise bottom of pit above water level. At surface, create slight mound feathered into surrounding grade. 4. Place tree in upright position in center of pit; release root covering; spread roots. Place roots to have a natural spread and distribution. Thoroughly pack and puddle planting mix around roots. Take care not to injure root systems while back filling and compacting. After water settles, fill again with planting mix and water. Then compact to a grade of not more than 1i2 inch higher than original ball. 5. Wrap trunks of all deciduous trees. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunk for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation. Take corrective measures before wrapping. 6. Watering Basins: Construct a small berm of planting mix as detailed around each tree. In lawn areas, finish grade smooth with surrounding area. 7. Fertilize trees at specified rate; apply uniformly around circumference of root spread under 2 inches planting mix cover, push specified fertilizer tablets into the backfill mix a minimum of 4 inches, evenly spaced. 8. Stake trees immediately after planting, as detailed. Trees and their supports are required to be vertical. 9. Excess Soil: Use excess planting mix to form watering basins. Dispose of unsuitable excess soil on project site as directed by Landscape Architect. 10. Install all trees prior to seeding any areas. C. Shrubs and Groundcovers: 1. After topsoil installation and review of finish grade, excavate planting pockets where indicated and as directed. Make diameter 12 inches wider than root spread; depth required to insure 6 inches cushion of compacted native soil beneath root ball. 2. Set plants upright in center of hole flush with finish grade. Release root covering; spread roots. Place root for a natural spread and distribution. Backfill with planting mix to finish grade. Work soil well around roots. Heel tamp to compact backfill and provide slight depression as watering saucer. Take care to not injure root systems while backfilling and compacting planting mix. 3. Fertilize at specified rate, applied uniformly around root. Spread to root circumference, 2 inches below planting mix surface. LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 02900 -11 4. Plant plants at triangular spacing indicated. Make straight, evenly spread rows. D. Mulching/Compost: Immediately after completion of all planting, mulch all areas except seeded areas to a minimum compacted depth of 2 inches. E. Finishing/Edging: Uniformly edge beds of individual plantings to provide a clear cut division line between planting area and adjacent lawn. Form bed shape as indicated on drawing. F. Pruning and Repair: 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, prune new trees as directed. Repair any injuries. 2. Pruning: Do not change the natural habit or shape of the plant. Make cuts flush. Do not remove leader. Leave no stubs. Trace back to living tissue and remove injured cambium or cuts over 3/4 -inch diameter, bruises, and bark scars. Smooth and shape wounds so as not to retain water. Coat treated areas 1/2 -inch diameter and larger with approved tree wound dressing. 3. Limb up existing trees as required and directed by the Landscape Architect. G Restoration and Clean-Up: Remove excess waste material daily. When planting in an area is complete, clear the area of debris, spoil piles and containers. Where existing turf areas have been scarred or damaged, restore these damaged areas to their original condition. H. Protection of Planted and Seeded Areas: Immediately after planting and seeding protect the area against traffic or other use by erecting barricades and placing signs at appropriate intervals. Maintain the barricades and signs until provisional acceptance. 3.04 CLEAN -UP A. Remove all excess waste material daily. When planting in an area is completed, clean the area of debris, soil piles, containers, etc. B. Sweep and wash "spotlessly" clean all building, walls, walks, pavement, parking lots, and lighting. 3.05 FIELD REVIEWS BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS A. Notifications: The Contractor is required to give Landscape Architect 48 hours notice when The Contractor is fully prepared for the desired review. Reviews are required as follows: 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 224/97 02900 -12 95 -932 2/24/97 1. Rough Grades: Subgrades require review prior to topsoil placement. 2. Finish Grades: Finish grading requires review prior to planting plant material. 3. At the site, immediately prior to installation: Plant material requires review and approval. Immediately remove unsatisfactory material from site. 4. Plant Locations: Require review adjustment and acceptance prior to installation. B Preliminary Review: Upon completion of all planting and all other work, request a preliminary review. The Landscape Architect shall prepare a punch list detailing all remaining work to complete. Partial approvals will not be given. C. Provisional Acceptance Review: Request a Provisional Acceptance Review upon satisfactory completion of all punch list items and any other work required under this contract. The date of Provisional Acceptance of the work establishes the beginning of the one (1) year guarantee period for all plant materials. 3.06 MAINTENANCE Maintain landscape areas from time of installation until Provisional Acceptance of the entire project. Remove dead plants as directed. A. Water plantings by thorough sprinkling. Provide as needed to keep the ground moist and the plants healthy. Prevent wilting. Prevent soil erosion, particularly on sloped areas. Repair any occurring erosion gullies. B. Water trees as required for vigorous thriving condition. Prune, cultivate, fertilize, spray and perform other necessary operations. Spray only as required and as acceptable to Landscape Architect. Plantings will not be accepted until active growth is evident. Maintain tree supports, and the like intact. Adjust as required to maintain firm support throughout Guarantee Period. C. Contractor shall adjust the irrigation system as required to fully water all areas. D. Refer to irrigation drawing for extent of irrigation system. E. Seeded Areas: 1. Water all seeded areas to maintain an equivalent of 1 -inch of absorbed moisture delivered. During dry periods or hot weather water frequently to maintain moisture level. 2. Maintain by mowing, fertilizing, and other necessary operations to establish and maintain an even, thick, and vigorous stand of grass. 3. Reseed any areas which fail to show vigorous growth. Plug any spots larger than 3 inches square. Remove dead seed or sod as directed. LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 02900 -13 END OF SECTION 02900 4. Mow with approved mowing equipment. When the amount of cut lawn or grass is heavy, it shall be removed (off site) to prevent destruction of the underlying turf. Mow to a height of 2 inches whenever average grass height reaches 3 inches. A minimum of two (2) mowings is required or until Provisional Acceptance, whichever is longer. 5. Four weeks after seed installation fertilize seeded areas with specified fertilizer. 6. Perform other work including, but not limited to, eradication of weeds, erosion repair, and overseeding as necessary to maintain a healthy stand of turf. 3.07 FINAL REVIEW /ACCEPTANCE At the end of one (1) year guarantee period, request final review for acceptance of all landscape planting work. Make all required replacement and repairs prior to review. 95 -932 LANDSCAPE/PLANTING 2124/97 02900 -14 GENERAL SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION EXPLORATION SOILS INVESTIGATION For PROPOSED LIBRARY BUILDING This soils report was prepared at the request of Robert Nixon and Associates, Port Angeles, Washington, in accordance with our submitted scope of work and cost estimate. The purpose of the report is to describe the results of our subsurface exploration, identify earth materials underlying the project site, and to make geotechnical recommendations for design of the structural foundation for the proposed library. The project site is located west of Peabody Street between Lauridsen Boulevard and Orcas Avenue within the City of Port Angeles (see Photographs 1 and 2 and Exploration Map). The site comprises four contiguous lots on which three old houses and appurtenant buildings presently exist (Photographs 1 and 2). The structures, all single family and of wood frame construction, appear to be over 60 years old. Some of the houses have partial to full basement areas. Large fruit trees and berry brambles grow in the yard areas. Existing drainage is northward toward Lauridsen Boulevard in conformance with the general gentle slope of the area. It is understood that all existing structures and trees shall be removed prior to new construction. As of this writing, conceptual plans for the library have not been prepared. Subsurface investigation of the project site was conducted on September 11, 1995 by Mr. Blase Cylwik, Engineering Geologist, of Northwestern Territories, Inc. (Nil). A total of seven trenches were excavated by mechanical backhoe and logged to depths of about seven feet below existing ground surfaces (see Exploration Map, Logs of Trenches, and Photographs). Locations of the trenches were selected to provide subsurface information representative of the entire site. Although deeper soils in some of the trenches were very moist, water accumulated in the bottom of only Trench No. 3. It should be noted that each of the trenches was left open at least one hour before refilling. The exploratory trenches were backfilled with the original soils which were generally granular and free of debris. Trenching and backfilling were performed by R. J. Services of Port Angeles. 1 SUBSURFACE SOILS Subsurface conditions, as revealed by the exploratory trenches, are nearly uniform across the project site (Photographs 3 and 4). No significant artificial fill or debris was encountered. In general, 1.5 feet to 2 feet of moderately soft, brown to dark brown porous, sandy silt topsoil was present at each trench location. The topsoil was underlain by poorly stratified, firm to very firm light brown to Tight grey -brown sandy silts and sand containing gravel and, in places, cobbles to 10 inches in diameter. At each trench, these materials became very firm and difficult to excavate below depths of about three to five feet. Possible fill was encountered to only a depth of two feet at Trench No. 4. The attached trench logs represent our interpretation of the field Togs. The soil contacts represent the approximate boundary between soil types. These soil contacts, in most places, are, in fact, gradual. The earth materials below the topsoil layer were deposited by north flowing glacial melt streams. These stream flows originated in the Olympic Mountains to the south during the period of melting and recession of glacial ice which covered much of the Olympic Peninsula over 10,000 years ago. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS General Soil conditions are favorable for construction of the proposed library utilizing conventional continuous and spread footings. It is anticipated that the new library may be up to three stories in height and may include a basement floor. Conditions appear to be uniform over the site and footings should be well supported by the native firm to very firm silty sands and sands. Basement areas of existing buildings will require removal of any wood or concrete walls and refilling with compacted, clean granular fill. Site Preparation All vegetation, surface soils, and any fill should be stripped from areas of proposed slabs or those to be paved for parking, driveways and walkways. These materials should be removed from the site; surface soils may be stockpiled for use in landscaping. Foundations The native soils below 2.5 feet in depth should provide good foundation and an allowable soil- bearing pressure of 1,500 pounds per square foot (psf). Footings penetrating to five foot depth will achieve an allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,500 psf. 2 Structural Fill Structural fill is to be used in the over excavation of any perimeter basement footings, under slabs and for refilling clean -out of existing basement areas. Structural fill shall consist of a granular material with no more than 10% fines passing the No. 200 sieve. The percentage passing the 200 sieve should be measured from that portion of the material passing the 3/4 -inch sieve. Structural fill should be placed only upon firm native soils and should be compacted in 8 to 12 inch lifts at or near the optimum moisture content as determined by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D1557). The subgrade should be inspected by a qualified engineer or inspector prior to placement of any structural fill. The structural fill should be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor Test. Samples of the structural fill should be submitted to a soils laboratory for testing prior to the excavation and compaction work. Slabs on Grade The building floors may be constructed as slabs -on -grade atop a six -inch layer of structural fill. The subgrade should be compacted and must be in a firm, unyielding condition prior to placement of structural fill. The slab subgrade should be observed by a qualified engineer or inspector prior to placement of the structural fill. Any soft areas should be over excavated, backfilled and compacted with structural fill. The structural fill should be tested for compaction prior to placement of the concrete slabs. In areas where moisture is undesirable, a vapor barrier should be placed beneath the slab. Additionally, sand may be used in the fine grading process to provide uniform support for the slab and to minimize damage to the vapor barrier. Drainaae Considerations It is anticipated that ground water could be encountered below depths of about three feet during and shortly after the rainfall season. If ground water is encountered, it should be drained away from the site by drainage ditches, or sump pumps interconnected with shallow connector trenches at the bottom of excavations. If possible, excavation work should be done during the summer to minimize ground water problems. Site grading should be such that surface water is directed off the site. Water should not be allowed to stand in any area where foundations, slabs or pavements are to be constructed. 3 Excavation and Slopes In no case should excavation slopes be greater than the limits specified in local, state and national safety regulations. Temporary vertical cuts up to a depth of four feet may be made in unsaturated soils. For temporary slopes having a depth greater than four feet, the cut should have an inclination no steeper than 1:1 (horizontal:vertical). All permanent slopes should have a maximum inclination of 2:1 (horizontal:vertical). Paving For light vehicle parking and access, we recommend two inches of Class B asphaltic concrete paving over four inches of crushed rock base (WSDOT 9 -03.9(3)). The subgrade should be compacted and must be in a firm, unyielding condition prior to placement of crushed rock. The subgrade should also be observed by a qualified engineer or inspector prior to placement of the crushed rock. Any soft areas should be over excavated, backfilled and compacted with structural fill. The crushed rock should be tested for compaction prior to placement of the asphalt surfacing. For heavy truck loading, we recommend three inches of Class B asphaltic concrete paving over six inches of crushed rock base. Crushed rock should be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D1557). Utility Trenches The native sands may be used for utility trench backfill provided they are not too wet. The soil should be placed and compacted at or near its optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557. If the native sands are too wet to be compacted to 95 then structural fill should be placed in the upper 12 inches of the trench and compacted to 95 Seismic Considerations The site is located within Seismic Zone 3 as illustrated on Figure No. 2 of the 1991 Uniform Building Code (UBC). In accordance with Table 23 -J of the 1991 UBC, the site soil profile is best represented by Profile Type S2. LIMITATIONS This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Robert Nixon Associates and the City of Port Angeles. The recommendations in the report apply only to the property which was examined and they are not applicable to other areas. The investigation and recommendations contained in this report are based upon site conditions as they existed at the time of our exploration and assume that the soils encountered in the test pits are 4 representative of the subsurface soils found elsewhere on the site. During construction, if subsurface conditions are discovered that are significantly different from those described in the report, NTI should be advised at once so we can review the conditions and reconsider our recommendations where necessary. Unanticipated soil conditions are commonly encountered on construction sites, especially when the topography has been altered years ago. Such unexpected conditions frequently require that additional expenditures be made to attain a properly constructed project. We recommend that a contingency be established in the project budget and schedule to cover unexpected conditions. The project was in the conceptual design stage when this report was prepared. We expect that further consultation regarding specific design elements will be necessary. When the design has been finalized, we recommend that NTI be retained to review the final design drawings and specifications to see that our recommendations have been interpreted and implemented as intended. The scope of our services does not include services related to construction safety precautions and our recommendations are not intended to direct the contractor's methods, techniques, sequences or procedures except as specifically described in our report for consideration in design. We recommend that this report be included in the project contract documents for the information of the contractor. Within the limitations of scope, schedule and budget, our services have been executed in accordance with generally accepted professional engineering and geologic principles and practice. This warranty is in lieu of all others, either expressed or implied. Blase Cylwik Engineering Geologist J. R. Jerry Newlin, P.E. Principal Engineer fc: Lib Geo.Rpt dir. Eng \Rpt 1 EXPIRES 04/ 5 I e is �.r 0 -6 o -5.;r- or 64 /0 25 1 .7.1 o -VeA 4- 2 it a0 THIS MP IS INTEL ORD TO SHC 9 TUB ApPA')XINATE T88 TIKE THEY IMPS INSTALLIA. TBB ACC MACY OF r/1 V1 •++A lot M P.a. -PI SP, r o c Gam) CC N U1N Nos Don HN ia. se n,y ri, tJ.ex C W. 11111 11111 ,v 1111 VIII ONO OM 1111 11111_ 4' /L 3 1 7 9 Q 7 6 i 2 7 3 7$ r S1ORM ER 7s 7T4 3 9 0 1 1 4s' 4L 42' 2 1 ►eH ♦.i' Se ©RCA 5 o 4 R r 4 4:10•324-4,.. 4:10•324-4,.. C'� t q z p_5 N �i N Y 0 i it f,)(( RA 77 ,j) AMP Y 0. 0 6 4 3 TION OF 'HBII.IT .85 AT CT POS IT_:4N Is NO GUARA TE 1O 20 4 J 2 r.w/vcf r its 1 57 d? 1=m sP. 0 L• AVE. c 1 6 JOX 85 AfPRO( SC41 E !8 P.5.14. 4./ mood z 60 co ea 3 J 00 Cf. J 5 8 10 1 2 1 I6 19 20 Job No. Job Ft•ld Cogln..r As net ant TT etdrlll.v ,e C/t�tPr_� !toad a Staple Sotppl• Slow. pee idol.- ona. Nunbar Depth Length- Le. tote tenor P 6/ 41 45 ,Di: bt d Color Driving .t. Av. Drop Group Symbol FIELD LOG OF 4.04RINe Ground Surface Iles. Me. Reference Location Ton. Start Time Step F 6 r Description. ICSa.sL callonl q: 9 t2.vatlon S44 Di S' .t Por t 7 St -571-7 S44 (A70) sR�O OSZOVEG 1 0 d Qr sda4tJ Mater Table Attar Ala 2 G� r— Percent Satl•Sllt•Clay Itarearhe hr•. 1 1 1 A•u•t ant Rig Lg 2 TO01 fLL f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 10 1 12 20 Job No. Job Ftald Eegtn•ar Hand 13 11 IS I b 3T 13 19 Sn nylt I Suapla l 61a+•• pm I Mo1•- on•t• .umber D•ptb LoogtA -In. 3404 t•ncy Color As. Prop I Group I Symbol FIELD LOG O F B- A- R-!-Itb Driving ut. Description (aa/atfcatles) Ground Surface HA( M S I)/ S/' Faro as L -4- 5-re7;rwel f Sw 5'L-ry sgti67F /M) SVPW /1 e!� V F FOG ?1? 1 c-V4' 11a10 lie. 2. Qavatles Reforms Location TIAe Mart (7.-z0 9htat TaW I V 2 Ai.-- Tlnte Step Altai P•rc•4a I Saud-SW-Clay MOP omlia MIND gam mIMP WED R•marke TfJsn. -�1 5 6 1 12 1! 14 15— 16 1 7 Id 19 20 Job No. Job Fuld E1e(tn•.r n••lotant T• or RI( z S• I n pl. ..umb 1-1 L c t.._( •r 15.015.001 Olow• per ■lol•- on•l• Depth Loogtb -l.. tore to s ms I M Ili kit_ 3 1 .5 .6 /6 ver VF' br;. -10 e(0-tSJ) i 1 Dolor Group Symbol t Ay. '1 7 EAOCH" FIELD LOG OE •Erbt!•!tO Delving ore. 3D -40 Irp Ground Svtoc. Nolo No. Gevatlao R.1.r..c. Locathis Mao 4 s. Mart r Tim. Step D..crlptloe (as.alAeotto. Motor Tobl. Alter Date Percent Sand.SUt -Cloy Ars 1 R.en■r lea 1 bro. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 6 7 9 10 I —4 u la I5 16-- 7 18 19 20 Job No. Job Ft•ld Eb tutu• Aesu■ ant nt, TE \r4e cL e lland a Sample I Saropl• l Eller.• per Mello- •nats. tuber Depth Length-1n. tor. tang J F Delving tt3. A.. Drop Cole' Group Symbol FIELD LOG OF •01-640 ONO Ground S.r /.c. Nola !N. Rel.reuc. Location 'rink' Start Time Stop 4 Description (Clauutcatlay �-fQ /SK4r d 0 zs -3ey' c °0 6.S' 9'• IOW C..atla. NI M5 LE.41-w 15g e itroa r1 /tar"- /LT% 6, DD air t -57f41) y SItc t re4c Vats Table Altar wIlma P.re..t I Sad-Slit-Clay 9 Remark. kre. 0 1 6 7 t 9 1 0 1 1 12— 13 14 16 I 1r 19 Job Ne. Job Field LS.ta•.r A••l•tant hand Eg se eldr as Sample Sample aloe. per Mole- snele I Group Number Depth Length -la. tura tasty Coley Symbol I Sim A.45 brs-e AF4ho, .r vF DrI.M t .e. n op FIELD LOG i rAG11 o .a-O- -w-o- Hole Her o...tlen R.l.reesa Localism Mae s. Mart 10:47 Ground Surface /K/ Tlttaa SIq 2 De 'triples (Cla.ela.atlsm) y .S 7 67 Petu5 'LT/ .ANe L SAND sic T -E- :o r f r )5 7/ 1 1 1 teas Table Altar I Sand- S R.m. Sand-Slit-Clay 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 hrs. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 6 7 9 9 1 I1 12 I1 14 16 16 I t IJ 19 20 Job Job rl.ld Clanger A. rl•t ant RI. 3 1 .0/ Av. Drop Sample Sample Slew. p•r I Llol.. ond• Color Number Depth L.atth -In. tore tancr I Color 3Z- VF Dridty el. I Groot' Symbol 51.M MS L -t' I S,11/ s -r Paroles _r �i /,6r w S' 4A10 1r A( F $69't1./LY 5/LT ir I brw 20 -2S -f- I f yA f fi I ItLD LOG Of -141 -0 Note Na. Limnos Re'.ro.ce Lmeaaloo Time Mart /O %Z 0 Tints MM 49;f6 D..erlpllea (Claeellleulaa) Grooad Serfage 7,S' Vacs TIM. T� Aft -`er L �i map law WIMP rr MIS MEP Pirogue Sad4Ut•Clav Remark. 11,0 s ov4 hr.. 0 1 S 7 8 9 1 12 12 15 16 17 l 20 J Jeb No. J eb Field Cuglaser A. sl Rant Rig Hand 0 Sunpla N umber R �.1 nut pr d =uy.r Sample Me.. par I 61.4146 �eaal. Depth L.aattb -In, turf tenet' 7 -5 5 A M Dr lrl.,t .1. Av. D-e, Caler Group Symbol 7 ,/c ,'7 MID LOO O R'O"' T r Ground Surface I/els N.. Rarotonga Loewe* Tlsa Mart //l now Step 7 D.scrIptlea (C1aa.1neatlee) fl 5 Parks 511-7/ 59V0 r td/S4 4 D I5 '4 4 '4-0 40 rei Jt7 �S� Water T.W. Alter MIND 1 �b P.resaat Satd- Slit -Clay V itrs Ratttark. 76,5 fr hrs. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3 4 5 GENFRAT, 6 7 Refer to section 03355 for stained concrete finish 8 9 Submittals: Submit the following: 10 11 Product data for reinforcement, forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, 12 waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, and others as requested by Architect. 13 14 Shop d rawings for fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. 15 16 Laboratory test reports or evaluation reports for concrete materials and concrete mix designs. 17 18 Written report to Architect for each proposed concrete mix at least 15 days prior to start of 19 concreting. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Architect. 20 21 Duality Assurance: Comply with provisions of ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for 22 Buildings," ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," and CRSI "Manual of 23 Standard Practice," except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 24 25 Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a testing agency to perform materials evaluation, 26 testing, and inspection. 27 28 29 PRODUCTS 30 31 Fjil2bedded ItenA: Aluminum items are not to be embedded in concrete. 32 33 Form Materials: Furnish form materials with sufficient stability to withstand pressure of placed 34 concrete without bow or deflection. 35 36 Forms for Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Suitable panel -type material to provide continuous, 3 7 straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. 38 39 As follows: 40 41 Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated. 42 4 3 Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 44 45 Concrete Materials: As follows: 46 47 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 48 49 Flv Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. 50 51 Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except local aggregates of proven durability may be used when 5 2 acceptable to Architect. 53 54 Water. Potable. 55 56 5 7 Admixtures: Provide admixtures that contain not more than 01 percent chloride ions. 58 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 1 1 Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2 3 meter- Reducing. Retarding. and Accelera ing Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494. 4 5 Related Materials: As follows: 6 7 Sand bed: Clean sand to be placed over drainage course, immediately prior to pouring of floor 8 slab 9 10 Vapor Retarder: Clear 8 -mil -thick polyethylene. 11 12 oisture- Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or burlap. 13 14 15 Mix Prorrtions and Design: Proportion mixes complying with mix design procedures specified in 16 ACI 301. 17 18 Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight. 19 20 Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with strengths as stated in the Structural Notes. 21 22 Limit maximum water cement ratio of concrete exposed to freezing and thawing to 0.45. 23 24 Slumo Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as 25 follows: 26 27 Ram9s. Slabs. and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 28 29 Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. 30 31 Other Concrete: Not more than 4 inches. 32 33 Adiust mix designs when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, test results, or other 34 circumstances warrant. Do not use revised concrete mixes until laboratory test data and strength 35 results have been submitted to and reviewed by Architect. 36 37 Use air entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, providing not less than 4.0 percent nor 38 more than 6 percent entrained air for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing. 39 40 Use water reducing. accelerating. and retarding admixtures that have been tested and accepted in mix 41 designs in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 42 43 Job -Site Mixing: Use drum -type batch machine mixer, mixing not less than 1 -1/2 minutes for 1 cu. 44 yd. or smaller capacity. Increase mixing time at least 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. 45 46 1314v-Mix Concrete: ASTM C 94. 47 48 49 CT 1TTON 50 51 Formwork: Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, 52 alignment, elevation, and position. Select form materials to obtain required finishes. 53 54 Maintain formwork tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 347 limits, Class A tolerances 55 for concrete exposed to view and Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. 56 57 Provide onenings, in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and 58 securely support items built into forms. 03300 2 CAST -IN- PLACE CONCRETE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form- release agents or wet forms as 3 required. Retighten foams during concrete placement, if required, to eliminate mortar leaks. 4 5 Vapor Retarders/Barriers: Place vapor retarder/barrier membrane for slabs on grade, beneath sand 6 layer, with joints lapped 6 inches and sealed. 7 8 Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement. 9 Locate and support reinforcement to maintain minimum cover with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, 10 spacers, and hangers as required. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed 11 concrete surfaces. 12 13 Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable; lap at least one full mesh and lace 14 splices with wire. 15 16 Joints: Locate and install construction, isolation, and control joints as indicated or required. Locate 17 construction joints so they do not impair strength and appearance of structure. Place isolation and 18 control joints in slabs -on -ground to stabilize differential settlement and prevent random cracking. 19 20 Installation Qf Embedded Items: Set and build anchorage devices and other embedded items 21 required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting 22 diagrams, templates, and instructions provided by others for locating and setting. 23 24 Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and 25 Placing Concrete," for placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. 26 Do not begin concrete placement until other affected work is completed. 27 28 Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and 29 tamping so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into 30 forms. 31 32 Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during 3 3 mixing, placing, and curing. 34 3 5 ip cold weather comply with ACI 306. 36 3 7 In hot weather comply with ACI 305. 38 39 Finish of Formed Surface: As follows: 40 41 Smooth Formed Finish: Provide a smooth finish for concrete surfaces exposed to view and 42 surfaces to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. Repair 4 3 and patch defective areas, with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. 44 45 Monolithic Slab Finishes: As follows: 46 47 Float Fah: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish when surface 48 water has disappeared and when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power 49 driven floats. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand- floating. 50 51 Check and level surface plane to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor 52 levelness). Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. 5 3 Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 54 55 Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab 56 surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, paint, or other thin film -finish coating 5 7 system. 58 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE ()3300 3 1 After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power driven troweL Begin final 2 troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. 3 Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, 4 uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor 5 flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness). Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph 6 through applied floor covering system. 7 8 "Mag" Finial: Where stained concrete is specified, apply magnesium trowel finish (verify with 9 stain applicator prior to proceeding). 10 11 Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and 12 ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 13 14 Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber 15 bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 16 17 Curing: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 18 temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, apply an evaporation control compound according to 19 manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. 20 21 Begin initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces. 22 23 Continue curing unformed concrete surfaces by water ponding, continuous fog spraying, 24 continuously wetted absorptive cover, or by moisture- retaining cover curing. Cure formed 25 surfaces by moist curing until forms are removed. Keep concrete continuously moist for not less 26 than 72 hours for high- early strength concrete and 7 days for all other concrete. 27 28 29 Field Quality Control: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit 30 test reports. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three 31 consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual 32 strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 33 34 Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready -mix producer, and 35 Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the 36 Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing 37 service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive 38 strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and 39 type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. 40 41 Additional Testy: The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test 42 results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the 43 structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of 44 concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 45 46 47 END OF SECTION 03300 48 03300 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 03355 SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES 3 4 5 GENERA! 6 7 Refer to section 03300 for concrete and surface finishing 8 9 Applicator Qualifications: Company must have minimum of 3 years experience and 5 succesful 10 chemically stained concrete projects. 11 12 Submittals: Submit the following: 13 14 Eggwisi for acid wash, stains and sealers 15 16 Co el Sample: Stained concrete is to match the reference sample available for viewing at 17 18 The Lewis Architects 19 2800 Northup Way #100 20 Bellevue, Wa 98004 21 22 (206) 827 -5602 23 24 25 Samples: Prepare sample area on floor slab at an area to be covered with carpet. Do not proceed 26 further without Architect's approval. 27 28 29 PRODUCTS 30 31 Stains: "Lithochrome" Chemstain" as manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company 32 33 Colors: As required to match control sample 34 35 Sealer: Acrylic, non yellowing liquid applied sealer, "CCI- 5000" as manufactured by Chem -Coat 36 Industries, or approved. 37 3 8 Mg: Commercial "hard wax" 39 40 ExECUTION 41 42 Clean concrete adagga of dirt, form oil, stains, grease, water repellants and adhesives. 43 44 Remove curing compounds by sandblasting or sanding. Do not use acid wash. 45 46 Apply stain in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as required to match control 47 sample. 48 49 Application Rate: 150 to 200 square feet per gallon per coat 50 51 Number of coats: 2 coat applications, 2 colors 52 5 3 Allow 4 hours contact time between coats. 54 55 Remove residue from final coat by wet scrubbing with commercial detergent using rotary floor 56 machine or stiff bristle brush. Rinse until rinse water is clean. 57 58 After rinsing, allow 24 hours to dry. SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES 03355 1 1 2 3 Apply sealer with airless sprayer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations 4 5 Application Rate: 300 to 400 square feet per gallon per coat 6 7 Number of coats: 2 coat applications, 8 9 jastall expansion joint sealants at control joints 10 11 Mai ntain stained areas uncovered for minimum 4 days, thereafter Protect with kraft paper until wax 12 application. 13 14 15 Apply wax and buff in accordance with manufacturer's directions immediately prior to substantial 16 completion 17 18 19 END OF SECTION 03355 20 03355 SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES 1 2 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 3 4 5 GENERAT 6 7 SubmitLs: In addition to product data, submit the following: 8 9 Samples for masonry units and mortar showing the full range of colors and textures available. 10 11 aterial certificates for each different masonry product required. 12 13 Material test report& from a qualified independent testing agency for mortar, grout mixes, and 14 masonry units. 15 16 Cold Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace 17 unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: 18 19 Cold- Weather Construction: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar and grout 20 temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Maintain mortar and grout above freezing. Heat 21 masonry units to 40 deg F if grouting. 22 23 Cold -Wea r Protection: Cover masonry with insulating blankets or provide enclosure and heat 24 to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F for 48 hours after construction. Install wind breaks 25 when wind velocity exceeds 15 mi./h 26 27 Jiot- Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work from excessive evaporation of water from 28 mortar and grout. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and 29 above. 30 31 PRODUCTS 32 33 Clay Masonry Units: Comply with the following requirements: 34 35 Provide special molded shapes for applications requiring brick of form, color, texture, and 36 size on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing standard brick sizes or where 37 stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions. 38 39 Provide units without cores or frggg and with all exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills, 40 caps, and similar exposed applications that expose brick surfaces that otherwise would be 41 concealed from view. 42 43 Face Brick; Mutual Materials Mission texture, also complying with the following: 44 45 Sunda& ASTM C 216, and as follows: 46 47 Grade SW. 48 49 Type FBX. 50 51 Size: 2 1 /2" x 3 1 /2" x 7 1 /2" 52 53 Color: As selected by Architect from standard price range 54 55 56 57 58 1 2 Concrete Masonry Units: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of 3 concrete masonry unit required. 4 5 Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows: 6 7 For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special 8 conditions. 9 10 Square -edged units for outside comers. 11 12 j: 7 5 /8" x 15 5 /8" face, thickness as noted on drawings. 13 14 Color: All units with integral color as selected by Architect from Manufacurer's standard 15 range. 16 17 Provide Type j, moisture controlled units. 18 19 Exposedfaces: As noted on drawings, to include: 20 21 Smooth 22 23 Split Face 24 25 Three score Split Face 26 27 Five score Split Face 28 29 Mortar and Grout Materials: As follows: 30 31 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather 32 construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar 33 color. 34 35 Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 36 37 Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 38 39 Aggregate fpr Mn: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate 40 graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 41 42 Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 43 44 Water. Clean and potable. 45 46 Joint Reinf: 9 gauge galvanized wire 47 48 lig& 22 gauge galvanized corrugated steel, 3/4" wide 49 50 Embedded Flashing Materials: Self adhering, laminated membrane bonded to rubberized asphalt, 51 "Penn -a barrier" as manufactured by W.RGrace, or approved. 52 53 Miscellaneous Masonry Accessoriej: As follows: 54 55 Weep Holes: Provide the following: 56 57 Round Plastic Tubing: Medium density polyethylene, 3/8 -inch outside diameter by 4 58 inches long. 04200 1 2 Masonry Cleaners: ProSoCo "Sure Klean 600" buffered acid detergent, Fabrikem "Fabriclean 3 Type R or approved. 4 5 6 7 EXECUTION 8 9 Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws. Allow units cut with water cooled saws to dry before 10 placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut 11 edges concealed. 12 13 Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce 14 uniform blend of colors and textures. 15 16 Wetting of Brick: Wet brick prior to laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. 17 per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb the water so they are damp but not 18 wet at the time of laying. 19 20 ,Constx lion Tolerances: As follows: 21 22 Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet nor 3/8 23 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not 24 exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet nor 1/2 inch maximum. 25 26 Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet 27 28 Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet 29 nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet 30 31 Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickne: Do not vary from bed joint thickness indicated by more 32 than plus or minus 1/8 inch with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch Do not vary from 33 head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 34 35 Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns and for accurate locating of 36 openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less than half -size units at 37 comers, jambs, and where possible at other locations. 38 39 Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern indicated; do not use 40 units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. 41 42 Built -in Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of 43 the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. 44 45 Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint 46 thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 47 48 Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing 49 cavities flush. 50 51 Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, 52 remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. 53 54 provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Lap a minimum of 6 inches (150 55 mm). 56 57 provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. 58 1 2 Anchor masonry veneers to metal studs with masonry veneer anchors to comply with the following 3 requirements: 4 5 Grout all ties solid, to prevent compression resistance to lateral loads 6 7 Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other 8 obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. 9 10 Extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 11 12 In- Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins 13 and smears prior to tooling joints. 14 15 Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, remove mortar particles with nonmetallic 16 scrapers, and clean exposed masonry as follows: 17 18 Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one half of panel uncleaned for comparison 19 purposes. 20 21 protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 22 23 Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by 24 rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 25 26 Cle brick by bucket and brush method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised, using 27 the specified masonry cleaner. 28 29 Clean cion_rancalicinasoci by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 -2 applicable to type of 30 stain. 31 32 Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste 33 mortar, and excess or soil- contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is 34 placed. 35 36 Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. 37 38 39 END OF SECTION 04200 40 1 2 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 3 4 5 GENERAL, 6 7 Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents to 8 be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated. 9 10 Submittals: In addition to Product Data and mill test reports on structural steel and bolts, submit 11 Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components, including connections, splices, 12 holes, welds, and bolts. 13 14 Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 15 16 AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 17 18 ASTM A36 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet 19 Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 20 21 Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using 22 ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 23 24 Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- 25 Steel." 26 27 Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding 28 processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 29 30 Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off 31 ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials 32 from erosion and deterioration. 33 34 Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or 35 rusty before use. 36 37 38 PRODUCTS 39 40 Structural Steel Shapes. Plates. and Bars: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 41 42 Cold Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 43 44 Anchor Rods. Bolts. Nuts: ASTM A 36 45 46 Nonhigh- Strength Bolts. Nuts. and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A 47 48 JIigh- Strength Bolts. Nuts. and Washers: ASTM A 325 49 50 primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust- inhibiting primer. 51 52 Nonmetallic. Shrige- Resistant Grout: Premixed, ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for 53 application. 54 55 Fabrication: Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate 56 structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 57 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 1 1 Comply with fabrication tolerance limit, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel 2 Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. 3 4 Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, 5 and methods used in correcting welding work. 6 7 Shop Pripiing: Shop prime steel, except surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar, surfaces to be 8 field welded, surfaces to be high strength bolted with slip critical connections, and surfaces to receive 9 sprayed -on fireproofing. 10 11 12 FXRCI JTION 13 14 Erect structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 15 specifications referenced in this Section. 16 17 Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials 18 and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and 19 bearing plates and set on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 20 21 Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of base or bearing plate, and pack 22 grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. 23 24 Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel 25 Buildings and Bridges." 26 27 Install and tighten high strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using 28 ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 29 30 Connectiiop Tvpg: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip- critical, direct- tension, or tensioned 31 shear/bearing connections. 32 33 Weld Connection.: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and 34 methods used in correcting welding work. 35 36 37 Shop and Field Ouality Control: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to 38 perform shop and field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 39 40 Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports 41 indicate do not comply with specified requirements. 42 43 Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 44 corrected Work with specified requirements. 45 46 High-strength b olted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification 47 for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 48 49 In addition to visual inspection, welded connections will be inspected and tested according to 50 AWS D1.1 procedures. 51 52 53 END OF SECTION 05120 54 05120 2 STRU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS 3 4 5 GENERA', 6 7 Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each type of joist, accessory, and product specified, 8 submit the following: 9 10 Shop Drawings showing layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include 11 joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories, and connection details, and 12 attachments to other units of Work. 13 14 Material certificates signed by joist manufacturer certifying that joists comply with SJI's 15 "Specifications." 16 17 Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists conforming to SJI standard specifications 18 and load tables. 19 20 Comply with recommendations of SDI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for 21 Steel Joists and Joist Girders," applicable to types of joists indicated. 22 23 Cpmpjy with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code Steel" and AWS D1.3 24 "Structural Welding Code- -Sheet Steel." 25 26 Deliver steel bearing plates and other devices neccessary to the safe and appropriate use of steel joists. 27 28 29 PRODUCTS 30 31 Steel: Comply with requirements of SJI's "Specifications." 32 33 at&el Bolts. Nuts. and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, plain, noncoated. 34 35 High Strength Bolts. Nuts. and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1; plain, noncoated. 36 37 er:Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust- inhibiting primer. 38 39 40 Manufacture joists according to SJI's "Specifications." 41 42 Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and 43 methods used in correcting welding work. 44 45 Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size 46 and type required by SJI's "Specifications Bridging is schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate 47 bridging according to SJI requirements. 48 49 Supply miscellaneous accessories required by the joist manufacturer to complete the joist installation. 50 51 Shop Painting: Prepare surfaces of joists and accessories by either hand tool cleaning, SSPC -SP 2, or 52 power tool cleaning, SSPC -SP 3. Apply one shop coat of primer to provide a continuous, dry paint 53 film thickness of not less than 1 mil. 54 55 56 57 58 STEEL JOISTS 05210 1 1 2 3 EXECUTION 4 5 Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting 6 construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's recommendations, and the 7 requirements of this Section. 8 9 All bridging must be in place and securely attached prior to any load or decking being supported by 10 the joists. 11 12 Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence 13 and procedure with placing of joists. 14 15 Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, 16 and methods used in correcting welding work. 17 18 19 20 END OF SECTION 05210 21 05210 2 STEEL JOISTS 1 2 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittals: Product data and manufacturer's certificates for each type of deck and accessory and the 8 following: 9 10 Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, 11 pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other units of Work. 12 13 Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- 14 Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel," including welder certification. 15 16 FM Listing; Provide steel deck evaluated by Factory Mutual and listed in Factory Mutual "Approved 17 Guide" for Class I fire rating and Class I -60 windstorm ratings. 18 19 20 PRODUCTS 21 22 £teel Roof Deg Fabricate panels without top -flange stiffening grooves conforming to SDI 23 Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and the following: 24 25 Prime painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A611, Grade C, shop primed 26 27 Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G 60 zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 28 29 Galvanized and Shop Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G 60 zinc coated according 30 to ASTM A 525 cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's baked -on, lead- and 31 chromate -free rust- inhibitive primer. 32 33 Deck Proflei As noted in drawings. 34 Profile Degth: As noted in drawings. 35 36 Composite Steel Floor Deck; Fabricate panels with integrally embossed or raised pattem ribs and 37 interlocking side laps, conforming to SDI publication No. 28, "Specifications and Commentary for 38 Composite Steel Floor Deck," the minimum section proerties indicated. 39 40 Where noted as "acoustical provide manufacturer's standard perforations 41 42 Accessories: Provide roof deck accessory materials and floor deck pour stops and closures that 43 comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer. 44 45 Sound Absorbing insulation: Manufacturer's standard preformed glass or mineral fiber insulation 46 strips. 47 48 49 EXECUTION 50 51 Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI 52 Publication No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section. 53 54 Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and 55 bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side 56 lap interlocks. 57 58 Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or deflection. STEEL DECK 05310 1 1 2 Cut. reinforce, and neatly it deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting 3 through or adjacent to the decking. 4 5 Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance 6 and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 7 8 Roof Deck Accessories: Install sump pans, sump plates, ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover 9 plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's recommendations. 10 Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 11 12 Floor Pour stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting 13 structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise inicated. 14 15 Floor Dpck Closures: Weld steel sheet closures according to SDI recommendations to provide 16 tight fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. WEId cover plates at changes of 17 direction of deck panels. 18 19 Weld shear connectors through deck to support framing according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's 20 instructions. 21 22 Sound absorbing insulation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations 23 24 Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces with 25 galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions. 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 05310 29 U531U 2 STEEL DECK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Structural Performance Where specific guages, shapes and spacings are not indicated, engineer, 8 fabricate and erect cold formed metal framing to withstand design loads within limits and under 9 conditions required by applications shown in the drawings. 10 11 Interior Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of 1/360 of wall height. 12 13 Roofing Furring Channels: Wind uplift of 35 psf 14 15 16 AISI "Specifications" Calculate structural characteristics of cold formed steel framing according to 17 AISI's "Specification for design of Cold- Formed Structural Steel Members" 18 19 Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes undivided responsibility for 20 engineering cold formed metal framing by employing a qualified professional engineer to prepare 21 design calculations, shop drawings and other structural data as needed. 22 23 Submittals: Product data for each type of cold formed metal framing, accessory, and product 24 specified; material mill certificates or qualified independent testing agency test reports; welder 25 certificates; and the following: 26 27 Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold- formed metal 28 framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners, and 29 installation details. 30 31 Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- 32 Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code- -Sheet Steel." 33 34 Protect cold formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, 35 storage, and handling. 36 37 Store cold formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid 38 condensation. 39 40 41 PRODUC 42 43 Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 G 60 Grade A for 44 18 GA, Grade D for 14 16 GA, 40,000 psi minimum yield strength. 45 46 Steel Studs and Track: Manufacturer's standard steel studs and tracks, of web depths indicated, per 47 manufacturer's recommendations for proper useage and installation. 48 49 Fabricate steel- framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a 50 minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi 51 52 Steel Shapes and Clio: ASTM A 36 zinc coated by the hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. 53 54 Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion resistant coated, self- drilling, self threading steel drill screws with 55 low profile heads beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 56 57 Galvanizing Repair Pte: SSPC -Paint 20 or DOD -P- 21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 58 94 percent zinc dust by weight. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400- 1 1 2 3 EXECIIIEDI 4 5 Install cold formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections 6 securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this 7 Section. 8 9 Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 10 11 Fasten cold formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with 12 fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. 13 14 Fasten roof furring Z- channels by welding to the steel deck at locations where steel deck is 15 exposed to the interior. Other locations to be weld or screw fastening at contractor's option. 16 17 18 Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized. 19 20 Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard 21 punched openings. 22 23 Erection Tolerances: Install cold- formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation 24 from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 25 26 Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. 27 Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other 28 flushing materials. 29 30 Install ,cold- formed metal framing to a maximum out -of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch 31 32 Non Loadbearing Curtain Wall Installation: Install, align, and securely anchor continuous tracks to 33 suppporting structure. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Space studs as 34 indicated; plumb, align and fasten both flanges of stud to top and bottom track. 35 36 Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of vertical 37 loads while providing lateral support. 38 39 Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches apart. 40 Fasten at each stud intersection. 41 42 Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, 43 continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girls, to provide a complete and stable curtainwall- 44 framing system. 45 46 47 Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed 48 cold formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the 49 manufacturer's instructions. 50 51 52 END OF SECTION 05400 53 05400 2 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 1 1 1 2 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 8 9 Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection, including templates for anchor bolt placement. 10 I1 12 PRODUCTS 13 14 General: Provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface 15 blemishes. 16 17 Steel and Iron: As follows: 18 19 Plates. Shapes. and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 20 21 Cold- Formed Tubing: ASTM A 500. 22 23 Hot Formed Tubinv: ASTM A 501. 24 25 Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. Black finish, 26 27 unless otherwise indicated. 28 Grav -Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. I 29 30 Concretg J sertg,: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 31 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and 32 shims as required, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. 33 34 Aluminum: As follows: 35 36 Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063 -T6. 37 38 Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632 (ASTM B 632M) Pattern 1, alloy 6061 -T6. 39 I 40 Fasteners: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Z,n 25 for electrodeposited 41 zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, 42 and class required. 43 44 Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast- curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd 45 primer with good resistance to corrosion, compatible with finish paint systems, and complying with 46 performance requirements of FS TT-P -664. 47 48 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc -dust- content paint, with dry film containing not less than 94 49 percent zinc dust by weight. 50 I 51 Coperete Fill: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal- 52 weight concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20 MPa). 53 54 Nonshrink. Metallic Gam: Factory- packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with ASTM 55 C 1107. 56 57 Nonshrink. Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 5 8 complying with ASTM C 1107. 1 ME I AL FABRICATIONS 0550U 1 1 2 Fabrication, General: Form from materials of type, size, thickness, and shapes indicated. Work to 3 dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. 4 5 Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas and ease exposed 6 edges. 7 8 Weld comers and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and 9 develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or 10 overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and 11 blended. 12 13 Form exnosed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners 14 where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 15 16 Rough Hardware: Furnish custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other 17 miscellaneous steel and iron shapes for supporting and anchoring woodwork. 18 19 Galvanize, unless otherwise indicated. 20 21 Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3 and the following: 22 23 Siderails: Continuous, 112- by -2 -1/2 -inch (12- by- 64 -mm) steel bars, spaced 18 inches (460 mm) 24 apart. 25 26 Bar Rungs: 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 27 28 Fit rungs in centerline of siderails, plug weld, and grind smooth. 29 30 Support ladders at top and bottom and at 5 feet (1.5 m) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets 31 sized to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches (180 32 mm). 33 34 35 Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete, as 36 indicated. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. 37 38 Galvanize after fabrication. 39 40 Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate from shapes and to sizes indicated. 41 42 Galvanize after fabrication. 43 44 Shelf and Relieving Angles: Fabricate to sizes indicated for attachment to support framing. Provide 45 slotted holes to receive 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends 46 and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 47 48 Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in- 49 place concrete. 50 51 Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete. 52 53 Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide as required to complete the Work but not included 54 with structural steel framework. Fabricate as indicated and required to receive adjacent construction. 55 Fabricate from structural steel of welded construction. Drill and tap to receive hardware, hangers, and 56 similar items. Include anchors for building into other work, spaced not more than 24 inches (600 57 mm) o.c. 58 U55UU 2 METAL FABRICATIONS 1 1 1 Miscellangous Steel Trim: Fabricate from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with I 2 continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use concealed field splices 3 wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation 4 with other work. I 5 6 Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for 7 recommendations on application of finishes. Shop -prime ferrous metal items not indicated to be 8 galvanized. I 9 10 Hot -dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A 153 or ASTM A 123 11 as applicable. 12 I 13 Preparation for Shoo Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- 14 SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 15 I 16 Apply shop primer per requirements of SSPC -PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for 17 18 shop painting. 19 I 20 21 EXECUTION 22 Installation. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. 23 Set units accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. I 24 25 Fit exposed connections accurately together and weld, unless otherwise indicated. Do not weld, 26 cut, or abrade the surfaces of galvanized units that are intended for bolted connections. 27 I 28 provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete 29 masonry or similar construction. 30 I 31 Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces using wedges or other adjustable devices. After the items 32 33 have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts and pack space with grout. 34 Use nonshrink. metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use I 35 nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 36 37 Touch pp shop paint after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and 38 paint with same material as used for shop painting. I 39 40 For 1Qa av nized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing 41 repair paint. 1 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 05500 45 1 1 1 1 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittal: Submit the following: 8 9 product Data for engineered wood products, underlayment, insulating sheathing, air infiltration 10 barriers, metal framing anchors, and construction adhesives. 11 12 Wood treatment data, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, 13 storing, installing, and finishing treated materials. 14 15 Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having 16 jurisdiction that evidence code compliance of engineered wood products, foam plastic sheathing, 17 air infiltration barriers, metal framing anchors, power- driven fasteners, and fire- retardant- treated 18 wood. 19 20 21 PRODUCTS 22 23 Lumber, General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies 24 certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide dressed 25 lumber, S4S, with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. 26 27 For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or 28 omit grade stamps and provide grade compliance certificates issued by inspection agency. 29 30 provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 -inch 31 nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 32 33 Woo¢- Preservative- Treat Material Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) 34 and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an 35 inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 36 37 ,Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 38 lb /cu. ft.. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 39 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 40 41 Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar 42 members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 43 44 Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact 45 with masonry or concrete. 46 47 Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 48 49 Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 50 51 Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives 52 to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft.. 53 54 Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, 55 apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber 56 or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 57 58 ikOUGH CARPENTRY 66707-7 1 Dimension Lumber. Refer to structural notes for required grades and ratings 2 3 Concealed Boards: "Standard" or "Common" 4 5 Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber of any species for support or 6 attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, 7 bucks, Hailers, blocking, and similar members. 8 9 ]engineered Wood Products: Provide the following products, in sizes indicated, for which current 10 model code organization evaluation/research reports exist that evidence compliance with specified 11 requirements for application indicated and building code in effect for this Project. 12 13 Prefabricated Wood I Joists: Units manufactured by bonding stress graded lumber flanges to 14 APA- Performance -Rated panel webs with exterior -type adhesives complying with 15 ASTM D 2559, to produce I- shaped joists complying with the following requirements: 16 17 Loagrades and tvn� ess: in accordance with the Structural Notes 18 19 Manufacturer: Trus Joist Corporation, WSI or approved 20 21 Wood -Based SWjctural -Use Panels: Provide either all- veneer, mat formed, or composite panels 22 complying with DOC PS 2, "Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels," unless 23 otherwise indicated. Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for 24 Construction and Industrial Plywood," where plywood is indicated. 25 26 Trademark: Factory mark structural -use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with 27 grade requirements. 28 29 Span Ra `r s: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA 30 Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential Commercial." 31 32 Combination Subfloor- Unddrlayment: APA -rated Sturd -I- Floor, Exposure 1. 33 34 Plywood Backing ant g: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire 35 retardant- treated plywood panels with grade, C -D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, 36 if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch thick. 37 38 39 Gypsum Sheathing Board: Water resistant -core gypsum sheathing board complying with 40 ASTM C 79 with long edges surfaced with water repellent paper, thickness indicated, and as follows: 41 42 Type: Regular. 43 44 F ge Cgnfiguratioq: V- shaped tongue- and -groove long edges, for horizontal application. 45 46 Air Infiltration Barrier. Air retarder complying with ASTM E 1677; made from polyolefins; either 47 cross laminated films, woven strands, or spunbonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without 48 perforations to transmit water vapor but not liquid water, and with minimum water -vapor transmission 49 of 10 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A. 50 51 Finer,: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, 52 or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or 53 of Type 304 stainless steel. 54 55 Power- Driven F. teners: CABO NER -272. 56 57 Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, 58 where indicated, flat washers. 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1 2 Metal Framing Anchors: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and 3 size indicated and as follows: 4 5 Research or Evaluation Report: Provide products for which model code research or evaluation 6 reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance 7 of metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for Project. 8 9 Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by 10 manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be 11 determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by 12 comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 13 14 Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 15 coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock forming quality, as standard with 16 manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 17 18 Sill- Sealer Gaskets: Glass- fiber resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer, 1- 19 inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to 20 suit width of sill members indicated. 21 22 .1 r II I Formulation complying with APA AFG -01 that is 23 24 manufacturers. 25 26 Carpet Underlayment board: 1/2" high density fiberboard with 1/4" x 4" x 4" grid cut in underside; 27 "Comfort Base" as manufactured by Homasote, or approved 28 29 30 FXECIITION 31 32 Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. 33 34 Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate 35 location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other 36 construction. 37 38 Securely attach rough c pentry wor to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, 39 complying with the following: 40 41 CABO NER -272 for power -driven staples, P- nails, and allied fasteners. 42 43 Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 44 45 "Table 23- I- Q-- Nailing Schedule" of the Uniform Building Code. 46 47 48 Use hot -dip galvanized or stainless -steel nos where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground 49 contact, or in area of high relative humidity. 50 51 Countersink nail he on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. 52 53 Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise 54 indicated. 55 56 Air Infiltration Barrier. Cover sheathing with air infiltration barrier to comply with manufacturer's 57 written instructions. At nail fin windows, run barrier over face of top fin, behind side and bottom 58 fins. approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel kOUGH CARPENTRY 0 3 1 2 Apply air infiltration barrier to cover upstanding flashing with 4 -inch overlap. 3 4 5 Provide Solid Blocking for doorstops, cabinets, bookshelving, and other wall anchored items. 6 7 Install Carpet Underlayment board in slab recess with mastic recommended by the manufactureer. 8 Shim as required to provide level transition with adjacent slab. Fill joints with patching leveling 9 compound 10 11 12 13 END OF SECTION 06100 14 06100 4 kOUGH CARPENTRY 1 I 1 SECTION 06185 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER 2 I 3 4 GENER AI, 5 1 6 Submittals: Submit manufacturer's data, specifications, and installation instructions covering lumber, 7 adhesives, fabrication process, preservative treatment, accessories, and protection. 8 9 Submit certification by treating plant that required treatments comply with specified standards. I 10 11 fig: Comply with ANSI/ANC A 190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber." 12 13 Manufacturer Qualification: Provide factory-glued structural units, produced by AITC- licensed fine I 14 qualified to apply the AITC Quality Inspected mark, or firm qualified to apply the APA -EWS mark. 15 16 Factory-mark each piece of structural glued laminated timber with AITC Quality Inspected 17 mark. I 18 19 Place AITC mark on timber surfaces that will not be exposed in complete Work. 20 I 21 Delivery. Storage. and Handling: Comply with provisions of A1TC 111, "Recommended Practice for 22 23 Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage, and Erection." 24 I 25 26 PRODUCTS 27 Structural Glued Laminated Timber. Comply with ANSI/AITC A190.1 and applicable lumber 28 association standards. I 29 30 Lumber Species: Any softwood lumber or mixed species at manufacturer's option, as required to 31 comply with other requirements. I 32 33 34 Adhesive: ANSI/AITC A190.1, wet -use type. 35 End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard transparent, colorless wood sealer, effective in retarding I 36 37 transmission of moisture at cross grain cuts. 38 Penetrating Sealer. Manufacturer's standard translucent penetrating wood sealer, which will not 39 interfere with application of wood stain and transparent finish, or paint finish, as indicated. I 40 41 Refer to Division 9 Sections for required finishes. 42 I 43 Fabrication: Comply with ANSI/AITC A190.1, providing units of sizes and shapes indicated. 44 45 Where dimensions are not completely documented, provide manufacturer's standard sizes and 4 6 shapes required to fulfill indicated performances. I 47 48 Shop- fabricate for connections and connecting hardware to greatest extent feasible, including 49 drilling of bolt holes. 50 I 51 Appearance Grag: Provide Architectural appearance grade units complying with AITC 110 at 52 exterior locations. 53 I 54 End Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, and after wood 55 treatment (if any), apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross -cut surfaces, keeping 5 6 surfaces "flood- coated" for not less than 10 minutes. 57 1 1 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER Mgr-7 1 Seal Coat: After fabricating and sanding each unit, and end -coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation 2 coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for treated wood where treatment has 3 included a water repellent. 4 5 Factory Applied Protection: Before shipping or exposing to outdoor conditions, bundle -wrap or 6 individually wrap timbers with manufacturer's standard, opaque, durable, water resistant, plastic- 7 coated paper covering with water resistant seams. 8 9 10 EXECUTION 11 12 Installation: Plan and execute erection procedures so that close fit and neat appearance of joints and 13 structure as a whole will not be impaired. When hoisting members into place, use padded or 14 nonmarring slings, and protect corners with wood blocking. 15 16 Adequately brace members as they are placed to maintain safe position until full stability is provided. 17 18 Install miscellaneous steel connectors, anchors, and accessories as indicated. 19 20 Cutting: Avoid cutting members during erection. Except for fastener drilling and other minor 21 cutting, coat cuts with specified end sealer. 22 23 Do not remove wrapping on individually wrapped members until it will serve no useful purpose, 24 including protection from weather, soiling and damage from work of other trades. 25 26 Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection and removing wrappings, or replace 27 damage members as directed where damage is beyond acceptable repair. 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 06185 31 MB 2 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBET( 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 3 4 5 GENERAI 6 7 Refer to section 06402 for cabinets and solid surface countertops 8 9 Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit Samples for each finish and type of siding and 10 paneling. 11 12 13 PRODUCTS 14 15 Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for lumber 16 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards 17 Committee Board of Review. 18 19 Lumber sue painted finish: Where noted as "Wood trim "trim or "painted trim provide the 20 following: 21 22 Hemlock or any close grained wood listed in referenced woodworking standard 23 24 Lumber where noted "Maple" or "Hardwood Clear red maple 25 26 "Slotwall 3/4" thick medium density particleboard with "1'" slots at 3" O.C. and colored plastic 27 inserts in each slot (color as selected by Architect) 28 29 Panel Faces: High density plastic laminate, color and manufacturer as selected by Architect 30 31 Shelving: 3/4 -inch particleboard shelving with radiused and filled front edge. 32 33 Hardboard: Tempered 1/4" hardboard, plain or perforated as noted. 34 35 Plastic Laminate: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD3 36 37 Grade: GP -50 38 39 Color and Manufacturer, As follows: 40 41 PL -1 WisonArt "Florentine" #6301 42 43 PL -2 Abet Laminati Print "Millerighe" #877 44 45 PL -3 WisonArt "Natural Pear" #7061 -60 46 47 PL -4 Abet Laminati Print "Mandarin" #568 48 49 PL -5 WisonArt "Fusion Maple" #7909 -60 50 51 PL -6 Abet Laminati Print Soft Finish #1671 52 53 PL -7 WisonArt "Chiffon" #D301 -60 54 55 Exterior S an ing and RLnin_y Try: Composite wood fiber, "Socomi -Lam or approved, factory 56 primed 57 58 Wood fence and lattice material: Western Red Cedar, tight knot (clear where noted on drawings) 1 2 3 EXECUTION 4 5 Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before 6 installation, for a minimum of 24 hours. 7 8 Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements 9 for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section "Painting." 10 11 Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims 12 where required for alignment. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and 13 seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 14 15 Sanding and Run_ningarim: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full- length 16 pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope 17 at retums and miter at comers. 18 19 Seal exposed faces and edges of particleboard and plywood with two coats clear sealer (see Section 20 06402). 21 22 Install display wall with horizontal slots in alignment at panel joints. Screw to wall through back of 23 slots. 24 25 26 Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. 27 Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 06200 31 06200 2 PALISH CARPENTRY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 3 4 GENERAL 5 6 Refer to section 06200 for plastic laminates, slotwall and general finish carpentry work. 7 8 Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless 9 concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation. 10 11 Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 12 13 Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large -scale 14 details, attachment devices, and other components. 15 16 Samples of lumber and panel products for each species and cut indicated for transparent finish, 17 and each material indicated for opaque finish, with one -half of exposed surfaces finished. 18 19 Samplea of solid surfacing materials. 20 21 AWI Ouality Standard: Comply with "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the 22 Architectural Woodwork Institute. 23 24 vironmental Limitatioga: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet -work is 25 completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at 26 occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 27 28 29 PRODUCTS 30 31 Woodwork for Transparent Finish: Grade and species as follows: 32 33 Grade: Custom. 34 35 Wood Species: Hard maple, plain sawn/sliced. 36 37 38 panel Products: As follows: 39 40 Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 41 42 Medium- Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 43 44 Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2 45 46 Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: Pearwood face veneer. 47 48 49 High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3 (See 06200 for listing of colors and finishes) 50 51 Solid Surfacing Materiaj: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with the 52 material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated 53 finish. 54 55 Corian Solid Surfacing 56 57 Color: Azure (Jewell Family) 58 1 2 3 Cabinet Hardware: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural 4 cabinets. 5 Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA 6 numbers or referenced to this standard. 7 8 Hardware Items: 9 10 ffiagra: European style, concealed 11 Drawer slides; 75 lb capacity, steel 12 Bill; 4" wire pulls, US 26D finish 13 Locks: Keyed cylinder locks 14 File rails: Provide hanging file rails in drawers labeled "file" 15 16 Furring B1 ing. S ims. and Hanging Strips: Softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent 17 moisture content. 18 19 Fabrication. Genera: Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, before shipment to 20 Project site to maximum extent possible. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance 21 for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 22 23 $ackout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for 24 members with ends exposed in finished work. 25 26 Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field 27 assembly. 28 29 Shop -cut openings, to maximum extent possible. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in 30 countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water resistant coating. 31 32 Laminate -Clad Cabinets: As follows: 33 34 AWI Type of Cabinet Constriction: Flush overlay. 35 36 Laminate Cladding for Eposed Surfaces: High- pressure decorative laminate complying with 37 the following requirements: 38 39 Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP -50, 0.050 -inch nominal thickness. 40 41 Ve 'cal Surfaces: GP -50, 0.050- inchnominal thickness. 42 43 Edges: GP -50, 0.050 -inch nominal thickness. 44 45 :materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 46 47 Woodworker's standard low pressure laminate 48 49 Provide dust panels of 1/4 -inch (6 4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments 50 and drawers except where located directly under tops. Face with low pressure laminate. 51 52 Countertops: As follows: 53 54 Where noted "Plastic Laminate High pressure decorative laminate as follows: 55 56 Grade: GP -50, 0.050 -inch nominal thickness. 57 58 Colors. Patterns. n nsh s: As listed in section 06200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 3 4 Where noted "Solid Surfacing Solid surfacing material as follows: 5 6 Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop applied backsplashes and edges. 7 Comply with solid surfacing material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, 8 sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 9 10 Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: 1/2 inch 11 12 3rommets: Round plastic, with removeable insert, color as selected by Architect 13 14 15 Shop Finishing: Finish wood cabinets (casework), at the fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up, 16 cleaning, and polishing until after installation. 17 18 Grade: Custom. 19 20 Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed 21 surfaces of woodwork. 22 23 Washcoat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed -grain 24 wood before staining and finishing. 25 26 Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for finish system, staining, and 27 sheen, with sheen measured on 60- degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 28 29 AWI Finish System TR -5: Catalyzed vinyl lacquer. 30 31 Seal coat: Water based vapor barrier sealant, "Crystal Shield" by Pace Industries, or 32 approved. 33 34 Finish exposed surfaces and edges of particleboard and plywood (including undersides of 35 countertops) with two coats of seal coat. 36 37 EXECUTION 38 39 Preparation: Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas, and 40 examine and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing, before 41 installing. 42 43 Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified above for type of 44 woodwork involved. 45 46 Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with 47 concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches 48 49 Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish 50 at cuts. 51 52 Seal exposed edges of particleboard and hardboard with water based vapor barrier sealant. 53 54 Tops: Anchor securely to base units. Seal space between backsplash and wall. 55 56 57 END OF SECTION 06402 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submit Product Data for each product specified. 8 9 10 PRODUCTS 11 12 Manufacturer and Product: "Weatherseal Siloxane by ProSoCo, Fabrikem "Fabrishield 761" or 13 approved. 14 15 With 3.3- ib /gaL VOCs or less. 16 17 18 19 EXECUTION 20 21 Preparation: Clean substrate and test for moisture content according to repellent manufacturer's 22 written instructions. 23 24 Formed Concret.: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could 25 prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents. 26 27 Clay Brick Masonry: Clean clay brick masonry per ASTM D 5703. 28 29 I t for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical 30 bond to silicate minerals. 31 32 Protect Adjoining Work: Cover nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass. Cover live plants and grass. 33 34 Coordhation with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants have been installed and cured. 35 36 Applica: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Apply a heavy saturation coat using 37 low pressure spray equipment. Apply a second coat per manufacturer's written instructions. 38 39 Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas. 40 41 Clean adioinina surface and surfaces soiled or damaged by water repellent application as work 42 progresses per manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. Repair damage caused by water repellent 43 application. 44 45 46 END OF SECTION 07190 47 WATER REPELLENTS 0119U 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittals: Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. 8 9 Fire- Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test response 10 characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, ASTM E 119, or 11 ASTM E 136 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 12 jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting 13 agency. 14 15 16 PRODUCTS 17 18 19 General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 20 21 Preforme I Unita: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard 22 thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 23 24 Extruded- Polystyrene Board Insulation (Underslabl: ASTM C 578 for type indicated below: 25 26 Thermal Resistance R -8 27 28 Surface burning characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 75 and 29 450. 30 31 Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation; ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane 32 facing), and as follows: 33 34 Fiber Type: Manufactured from glass 35 36 ,surface burning characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 37 50. 38 39 Thermal Resistance: R -19 40 41 Arausfibauasmatibul Unfaced fiberglass batts, 3 1 /2" thickness 42 43 Vapor Barrier. 44 45 At walls where covered by wallboard; 6 mil polyethylene sheet, ASTM D4397 46 47 At walls exposed to ceiling space: Foil faced film vapor barrier, skrim reinforced, with flame 48 spread rating of 25 or less. 49 50 Over mgjal roof deck: Foil Polyester vapor retarder: Alumiseal Zero-Perm; Alumiseal 51 Corporation, or approved 52 53 54 55 Tape for vapor barrier: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer 56 for sealing joints. 57 58 OUILDING INSULATION 07210 1 1 2 3 4 goof Insulation Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, ASTM C 1289, Type II, as follows: 5 6 Acceptable Manufacturers: 7 Celotex, Inc: "Thetmax" 8 Rmax, Inc: "Thermasheath" 9 10 Thickness: 4" (Provide other thicknesses as detailed) 11 12 Resistivity: R of 7 or greater per inch 13 14 Facing: Foil both sides 15 16 17 EXECUTION 18 19 Installation. General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to 20 products and application indicated. 21 22 Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice 23 and snow. 24 25 Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly 26 around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with 27 placement. 28 29 30 Install board insulation pn concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle -type insulation 31 anchors. 32 33 Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in 34 place mechanically. Use tape to seal all joints and cuts. 35 36 install roof insulation according to roofing system manufacturer's and insulation manufacturer's 37 written instructions. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with 38 end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 39 inch with insulation. 40 41 Attached Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical 42 fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to 43 deck type indicated. 44 45 Fasten insulation according to the insulation and roofing system manufacturers' written 46 instructions. 47 48 protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, 49 physical abuse, and other causes. 50 51 52 END OF SECTION 07210 53 07210 2 $UILDING INSULATION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ,SECTION 07311- COMPOSITION SHINGLE ROOFING (ALTERNATE AI 2 3 GENERA', 4 5 Submit Samples showing full range of available colors. 6 7 Delivery. Storage and Handling: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened, labeled 8 bundles, rolls or containers. Store materials to avoid water damage, and store rolled goods on 9 end. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for job -site storage and protection. 10 1 1 Job Conditions: Proceed with shingle installation only when all penetrating work has been 1 2 completed and when substrate is dry and weather conditions are favorable. 13 1 4 Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 30 year warranty 15 16 17 FROD1ICTS 18 1 9 Composition shingle roofing: Mineral surface, self sealing fiberglas shingles of laminated 2 0 construction. Metric size with shadowline treatment, weighing not less than 300 lbs per 21 square, bearing UL class "B" fire label and UL "Wind Resistant" label. Provide "Dimensional 2 2 III" Shadowband Shake shingles as manufactured by Celotex, Inc., "Premier 30" by Pabco, or 2 3 approved. Color as selected by Architect. 24 2 5 Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard factory precut units to match shingles. 26 2 7 goofing Fel: No. 30, asphalt saturated unperforated organic roofing felt, complying with 2 8 ASTM D 226, Type 1, 36" wide. 29 3 0 Nails: Hot -dip galvanized nails of length to penetrate minimum 1R" into sheathing. 31 3 2 Metal Drip Edge &,Metal Flashing: Refer to Section 07600 33 34 3 5 EXECUTION 36 3 7 Genera: Comply with published recommendations and manufacturer's details 38 3 9 Final Adjustmept: Replace any damaged shingles and remove installation debris from site. 40 41 4 2 END OF SECTION 07311 COMPOSITION SHINGLE ROOFING 07311 1 2 SECTION 07410 METAL ROOFING 1 3 4 5 GENERAT: 6 I 7 Refer to section 07600 for flashing and sheet metal which is not fabricated from roofing sheet 8 material 9 10 Single source responsibility Provide materials from same source for all roofing and sheet metal I 11 items specified in this section. Metal roofing installer is to install copings, gutters, lightgage 12 downspouts, and all exposed flashing noted to be from roofing material. 13 I 14 15 performance Requirements: Provide preformed panel systems that comply with performance requirements indicated based on pretesting of installed panels using the following methods. 16 17 Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. I 18 19 Water Penetration: ASTM E 331. 20 21 Structural Properties: ASTM E 72. I 22 23 Wind uplift resistance; Provide roof panels and fastening systems meeting requirements for UL Class 24 90 wind uplift resistance I 25 26 Submittals: Submit manufacturer's product data describing preformed roofing and siding panels and 27 structural support system. 28 I 29 Submit shop drawings showing layout of panels on roofs and walls, and details of special and 30 typical conditions. 31 32 Submit samples of each exposed finish material. I 33 34 Warranty: Provide 20 year written warranty for painted finish 35 37 38 PRODUC 39 Underlayment: 30 Lb saturated rag felt I 40 41 Metal Roofing panels: Formed panels, 16" wide with concealed clip fastenings, by one of the 42 following, or approved: 43 I 44 BHP, Inc "Klip Rib" system, or approved 45 46 Steel for Pain 'tin /g Coating: Hot -dip zinc coated steel sheet, 24 guage, ASTM A 446, Grade C, G90 47 zinc coating, surface treated for maximum coating performance. 48 49 Fes: Manufacturer's standard, with heads gasketed where exposed on exterior. 50 I 51 52 Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard and accessories as required for a complete installation including trim, copings, faciae, flashing, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam closures, gutters, 53 downspouts, gaskets, sealants, and similar items. 54 I 55 Metal Finishes: Apply coatings indicated before forming and fabricating panels, as required for 5 6 maximum coating performance. Provide colors or color matches as indicated. 57 1 1 Fluoropolymer Coating: Baked -on fluoropolymer coating system consisting of epoxy or 2 urethane primer and fluoropolymer topcoat formulated with "Kynar 500 resins, with dry film 3 thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 1.0 mil for topcoat. 4 5 Color. As selected by architect from manufacturer's standard range 6 7 Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's 8 standard procedures and processes to produce panels of type indicated and to comply with indicated 9 profiles, and to dimensional performance requirements indicated. 10 11 Fabricate gutters as continous rolled shape, from metal roofing coil sheet material. 12 13 14 15 EXECUTION 16 17 Comply with panel mfr's. instruction for anchorage, john sealers, flashing and trim for the proper 18 and permanent installation of panels, with provisions for thermal expansion, erected in panel pattern 19 indicated. 20 21 Conceal fasteners by use of laps and joint clips. 22 23 Cut exposed fasteners at interior steel deck locations to within 1/2" of interior deck surface 24 25 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 07410 29 07410- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 This Section includes mechanically fastened sheet roofing. 8 9 Performance Requirements: Install sheet membrane roofing and base flashing that are watertight will 10 not permit the passage of liquid water, and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, 11 and exposure to weather without failure. 12 13 Ste: Product Data for each type of Hoofing product specified and the following: 14 15 Shop Drawings detailing base flashings membrane terminations 16 17 Product test reports indicating compliance of components of roofing system with requirements. 18 19 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has 20 specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project and who is approved, 21 authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product. 22 23 Fire- Test Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the following fire- test response 24 characteristics: 25 26 Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and slopes indicated. 27 28 Preinstallation Conference: Before installing roofing system, conduct conference at Project site to 29 comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Notify participants at least 5 30 working days before conference. 31 32 Meet with Owner, Architect; roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck 33 Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof 34 accessories and roof mounted equipment. 35 36 Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, without monetary limitation, 37 signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair leaks resulting from defects in 38 materials or workmanship for the period of 10 years. 39 41 j'RODUCTS 42 43 PVC Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and modifiers, 44 complying with ASTM D 4434, of the following type, grade, thickness, and exposed face color. 45 46 Type: Type III, fabric reinforced sheet. 47 48 Thickness: 45 mils, minimum. 49 50 Exposed Face Color. White. 51 52 Manufacturer: One of the following, or approved: 53 54 GenFlex Roofing Systems 55 HPG Roofing Systems 56 Mule Hide Products, Inc 57 Sarnafil, Inc 58 07533 1 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 1 Auxiliary Materials: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for 2 intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 3 4 Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, thickness, and 5 color as sheet membrane. 6 7 Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. 8 9 Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide metal termination bars, metal battens, fasteners, pourable 10 sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside comer sheet 11 flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, and other accessories. 12 13 Thermal Barrier. 1R" Exterior gypsum sheathing 14 15 16 Walkway Pada: Factory- formed, nonporous, heavy -duty, slip resisting, surface- textured walkway 17 pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, of materials acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 18 19 20 EXECUTION 21 22 Complete terminations, and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering 23 completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast Remove 24 and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 25 26 27 Mechanically Fastened_,Sheet installation: Install sheet over area to receive roofing according to 28 roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum of 29 30 minutes. Secure one edge of the sheet using fastening plates or battens centered within the 30 membrane seam and mechanically fasten sheet to roof deck. 31 32 Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082. 33 34 Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets and flashings 35 according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Hot -air -weld 36 seams as standard with roofing system manufacturer. 37 38 Test lap edgea with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam calk to seal cut edges of 39 sheet membrane. 40 41 Repair tears. voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. 42 43 Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate according to 44 roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 45 46 Flash penetrations and field- formed inside and outside comers with sheet flashing as 47 recommended by manufacturer. 48 49 Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end 50 laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. 51 52 Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed 53 edges of sheet flashing terminations. 54 55 Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through 56 termination bars. 57 07533 2 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 1 Walkways: Install walkway pads in locations indicated. Heat weld or adhere walkway pads to 2 substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3 4 protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. 5 When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration 6 and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. 7 8 Correct deficiendu in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, 9 reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the 10 time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. 11 12 13 END OF SECTION 07533 14 07533 3 SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 07620 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 2 3 GENERAL: 4 5 Refer to section 04200 for flashing behind brick veneer 6 7 Refer to section 07410 for flashings and other items fabricated from metal roofing coil 8 9 pnform to_profilel. and sizes shown on drawings, and comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal 10 Manual" by SMACNA, for each general category of work required. 11 12 Metal flashing and counter flashing. 13 Metal wall flashing and expansion joints. 14 Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. 15 16 PRODUCTS: 17 18 Zinc- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, 0.20 percent copper, 26 gage (0.0179 inch); ASTM A 525, 19 designation G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. 20 21 E bricaJg, sheet metal with flat -lock seams; solder with type solder and flux recommended by 22 manufacturer, except seal aluminum seams with epoxy metal seam cement and, where required for 23 strength, rivet seams and joints. 24 25 Coat hack -side of fabricated sheet metal with 15 -mil sulfur -free bituminous coating, SSPC -Paint 12, 26 where required to separate metals from corrosive substrates, including cementitious materials, wood or 27 other absorbent materials; or provide other permanent separation. 28 29 provide for thermal expansion of running sheet metal work by overlaps of expansion joints in 30 fabricated work. Where required for water -tight construction, provide hooked flanges filled with 31 polyisobutylene mastic for 1 -inch embedment of flanges. Space joints at intervals of not more than 32 50 feet for steel, 24 feet for copper or stainless steel, or 30 feet for zinc alloy or aluminum. Conceal 33 expansion provisions where possible. 34 35 EXECUTION: 36 37 Anchor work in place with noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and other 38 materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of each material or system. Provide for 39 thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendations of "Architectural Sheet 40 Metal Manual" by SMACNA. 41 42 Seal moving joints in metal work with elastomeric joint sealants, complying with requirements 4 3 specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 44 45 Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances which could cause corrosion. 46 47 Performance: Water -tight and weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is 4 8 required. 49 50 51 END OF SECTION 07620 52 MINCi 01600 1 1 1 2 SECTION 07820 SKYLIGHT STRUCTURES 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 This section includes skylight structures and translucent wall panels 8 9 Submit product data for skylights including materials, dimensions, profiles, finishes, light 10 transmission, and thermal characteristics. 11 12 Submit shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, attachments, fabrication, and installation 13 details. 14 15 Submit sampled indicating color, texture, shape, and sizes specified. 16 17 I 18 PRODUCTS 19 20 Manufacturer: Frame systems, sealant tapes and translucent panels are to be manufactured by one 21 common source. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1 22 23 Kalwall, Inc 24 25 Aluminum Sheeta: ASTM B 209 for Alclad alloy 3005 -1125 or alloy and temper required to suit 26 forming operations and finish requirements. Mill-finish unless indicated otherwise. 27 28 Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alloy 6063 -T52 or alloy and temper required to suit structural 29 and finish requirements. Mill-finish unless indicated otherwise. 30 31 Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" recommendations for application 32 and designations of finishes. I 33 34 Architectural Claw I. Color Anodized: AA- M12C22A42/A44. 35 36 Color_ Medium Bronze 37 38 Skylight Units: Pre engineered unit consisting of extruded aluminum frame and translucent panels. 39 40 41 Ernie: Manufacturer's standard formed or extruded aluminum, bronze anodized. 42 Factory seal perimeter frames to translucent panels 43 44 45 Condensation Control: Fabricate skylight units with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to collect and dispose of condensation. 46 47 Provide Sealing Tape for all joints 48 49 50 Wall Units: Pre engineered unit consisting of extruded aluminum head, jamb and sill members and 51 translucent panels. 52 53 Frame: Manufacturer's standard formed or extruded aluminum, bronze anodized. 54 55 provide Sealing Tape for all joints 56 57 58 1 1 SKYLIGHT STRUCTURES 07$ 1 2 3 Translucent Panels: Laminated and insulated sandwich panels, fiberglass reinforced, as manufactured 4 by Kalwall, Inc, or approved. 5 6 Face Panels: Fiberglass with erosion barrier at exterior face 7 8 Grid Core: Interlocked, extruded aluminum 9 10 Insulation: Fiberglass batts 11 12 Thickness: 2 3 /4" 13 14 Pattern: 12" x 24" "Shoji" 15 16 Color. White on white 17 18 "U" Value: .22 19 20 Shading Coefficient: .1 roof .09 wall 21 22 23 EXECUTION 24 25 Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with 26 installation of roof deck and other substrates receiving skylight units. Coordinate with installation of 27 vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the 28 work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units 29 securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well 30 as inward and outward loading pressures. 31 32 Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood with 33 bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide another permanent separation. 34 35 Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. Touch up 36 damaged metal coatings. Clean skylight units, inside and out, not more than 5 days prior to date of 37 Substantial Completion. 38 39 END OF SECTION 07820 40 07820 2 SKYLIGHT STRUCTURES 1 I 1 2 SECTION 07901 JOINT SEALANTS 3 I 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Preconstruction Joint Sealant Substrate Test&: Submit substrate materials representative of actual joint I 8 surfaces to joint sealant manufacturer for laboratory testing of joint sealants for adhesion to primed 9 and unprimed substrates and for compatibility with joint substrates and other joint related materials. 10 I 1 1 Submittals: In addition to product data submit the following: 12 13 Sample& of each type and color of joint sealant required. 14 I 15 Certified test reports for joint sealants evidencing compliance with requirements. 16 17 18 PRODUCTS I 19 20 Compatibjlity: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with 21 one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions, as demonstrated by 22 testing and field experience, I 23 24 Colors: Provide color indicated of exposed joint sealants or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by 25 Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. I 26 27 Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant 28 of base polymer indicated complying with ASTM C 920 requirements. 29 I 30 general Building Sealant: One -Part, Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and 31 as follows: 32 3 3 Uses NT, M, G, A, and O. 1 34 35 36 Acoustical Sealant: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and I 37 effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building 3 8 39 construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. 40 I 41 Sealant Backings. General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other 42 joint fillers; approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience 43 and laboratory testing. 44 I 45 Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of 46 plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth 47 and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1 48 49 Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in 5 0 unruptured state. 51 1 52 Bond- Breaker Tapp: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant 53 manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back of 54 joint. 55 I 56 Fiber Joint Filler (for concrete paving): Asphalt saturated fiberboard 57 58 1 JOINI' SEALANTS 07901 1 1 Primer: As recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to 2 joint substrates indicated. 3 4 5 EXECUTION 6 7 General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and 8 applications indicated. 9 10 Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193. 11 12 13 14 END OF SECTION 07901 15 U7901 2 JOINT SEALANTS 2 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES I 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 I 7 Submit Product DaU for each type of door and frame specified. 8 9 Submit Shop Drawings for each door and frame specified. 10 I 11 Ouality Assurance: Comply with ANSI/SDI 100. 12 13 Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: NFPA 80, identical to assemblies tested per ASTM E 152, and labeled 1 14 and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities 15 having jurisdiction. 16 17 I 18 FRODUXTS 19 20 Manufacturers: Member firms of the Steel Door Institute 21 II 22 HQt -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569. 23 24 Slld- Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, commercial quality, or ASTM A 620, drawing quality. 25 I 26 Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, or ASTM A 642, drawing quality, with 27 A 60 or G 60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. 28 I 29 Steel Doors: Provide 1 -3/4- inch thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models 30 specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 31 32 Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy -duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478 inch thick I 33 cold -rolled steel sheet faces. 34 35 Exterior Doors,: Grade III, extra heavy -duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0635 -inch- 36 thick galvanized steel sheet faces. Provide polystyrene insulating core. 37 38 39 Frames: Provide frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with I 40 ANSI/SDI 100; fabricate to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. 41 42 For interior frames provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers, 43 formed from 0.0478 inch thick cold -rolled steel for openings 48 inches or less in width and I 44 from 0.0598 -inch- thick steel for openings over 48 inches in width. 45 46 For exterior frame,s provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers, 47 formed from 0.0635- inch thick galvanized steel sheet. I 48 49 Door Silencers: 3 on strike jambs of single -door frames and 2 on heads of double -door frames. 50 I 51 Plaster Guards: Provide where mortar might obstruct hardware operation and to close off 52 interior of openings. 53 54 Grout: As specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." I 55 56 Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. 57 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 1 1 Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold 2 or hot -rolled steel sheet. 3 4 Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware 5 according to SDI 107. 6 7 Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359 inch thick steel. 8 9 Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for 10 glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 11 12 Finishes. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to 13 applying and designating finishes. 14 15 Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. 16 17 Galvanized Steel Sheet Finishes: Comply with SDI 112 and the following: 18 19 Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or 20 other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic 21 coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply 22 galvanizing repair paint specified to comply with ASTM A 780. 23 24 Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20, high- zinc dust content paint with dry film containing 25 not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 26 27 Factory Priming for Field Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, 28 apply air -dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. 29 30 Sho9 Primer: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer paint complying with perfonnance requirements 31 of FS TT-P -641, Type II. 32 33 Steel Sheet Fini hs es: Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1." 34 35 Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces according to SSPC -SP 1. Remove mill scale and 36 rust to comply with SSPC -SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC -SP 8 (Pickling). 37 38 Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating suited to 39 organic coating applied over it. 40 41 Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 42 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to 43 provide a sound foundation for field- applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface 44 preparation and pretreatment. 45 46 47 48 EXECUTION 49 50 General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, 51 and as specified. 52 53 Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames 54 accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 55 56 Except for frame located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly 57 construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 58 08110 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Insta11 at least 3 anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding 2 heights on strike jamb. 3 4 Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 5 6 Grout all frames full 7 8 9 Poor Installation: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in 10 ANSI /SDI 100. 11 12 Fire -Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 13 14 Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime 15 coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer. 16 17 protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors 18 and frames. 19 20 21 END OF SECTION 08110 22 STEEL 08110 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 8 9 Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details 10 of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for veneer 11 matching and factory finishing and other pertinent data. For factory- machined doors, indicate 12 dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver 13 openings. 14 15 Query Standard: Comply with the following standard: 16 17 AWI Ouglity Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural 18 Woodwork Institute. 19 20 21 PRODUCTS 22 23 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors by one of the following: 24 25 Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. 26 Oregon Door 27 Vancouver Door, Inc. 28 Weyerhauser Co. 29 30 Interior Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish (Except Type 'DI: As follows: 31 32 Faces: Maple, plain sliced. 33 34 Grade: Custom. 35 36 Construction: 7 plies. 37 38 Core: Wood Block 39 40 Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 41 42 43 Type 'D' Doors for Transparent_ Finish 44 45 Faces: Maple, plain sliced (match wood block core doors). 46 47 Grade: Custom. 48 49 Construction: Stile and Rail 50 51 Core: Lumber 52 53 54 55 56 pairs and Sets: Provide pair matching and set matching. 57 58 Fabricate flush wood doors to comply with following requirements: FLTSITWOMMES 08211 1 1 2 In sizes indicated for job -site fitting. 3 4 Factory fit doors to comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard. Comply 5 with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire resistance -rated doors. 6 7 Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 8 9 Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of 10 referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 11 12 fright Openings: Trim openings with moldings of hardwood. 13 14 Shop -seal faces and edges of doors for transparent finish with stain (if required), other required 15 pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 16 17 18 F:XFCIJTION 19 20 Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard and as 21 indicated. 22 23 Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware. Seal 24 cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 25 26 27 END OF SECTION 08211 28 08211 2 PLUSH WOOD DOORS 1 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2 I 3 GENERAL: 4 5 See section 07820 for translucent wall panels 6 7 8 See section 08520 for aluminum windows 9 See section 08800 for glazing 10 I 11 System Performance Requirements,: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water 12 penetration requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing stock assemblies according to test 13 methods indicated. I 14 15 Thermal Movement,: Provide for expansion and contraction resulting from an ambient temperature 16 range of 180 deg F without buckling, joint seal failure, undue stress on structural elements, damaging 17 loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or stress on glass. Doors shall function normally over I 18 specified range. 19 20 Wind Loads: Provide assemblies capable of withstanding pressures of 20 psf inward and outward, 21 acting normal to plane of the wall. I 22 23 Structural Performance: Test in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no glass breakage or 24 permanent damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism or permanent I 25 deformation of framing members in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear span. 26 27 Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wes: Test pressure shall be wind load specified. Deflection 28 shall not exceed 1/175 of clear span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test. I 29 30 Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the WW1: Test pressure shall be 1.5 times wind pressure. 31 Deflection of members carrying full dead load shall not exceed amount that will reduce glass bite 32 below 75 percent of design dimension or edge clearance between member and fixed glass or other I 33 fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch. Clearance between the member and operable door or 34 window shall be at least 1/16 inch. 35 I 36 Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) 37 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf. 38 39 Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges) when tested I 40 in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. It 41 42 Thermal Transmittance: Provide U -value of not more than 0.65 BTU /(hr x sq. ft. x deg F) at 15 -mph 43 exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. I 44 45 Submittals: Submit the following: 46 I 47 Product Data: Include fabrication methods, data on finishing, hardware and accessories and surface 48 maintenance recommendations. 49 50 Shop Drawings: Include layout, installation details, 1/4 -inch scale elevations, detail sections of I 51 composite members, anchors and reinforcement, hardware mounting heights and glazing details. 52 53 Certified test reports showing systems have been tested and comply with requirements. 54 I 55 56 In. atl r Oua_iifications: Installer who has completed installations similar to those required and whose work has resulted in a record of successful in- service performance. 57 1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 1 Design Criteria: Drawings indicate size, profile, and dimensional requirements and are based on 2 specific types and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may 3 be considered provided deviations do not change the design concept. 4 5 pROD ITCT.S; 6 7 Provide products as manufactured by Kawneer, Inc, or approved equal conforming to the following: 8 9 Materials; 10 11 Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended; comply with ASTM B 221 for 12 extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for bars, rods, and wire. 13 14 Sn $teal Reinforcement: Comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, 15 ASTM A 611 for cold -rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot -rolled sheet and strip. 16 17 Glazing se Comply with "Glass and Glazing" section. 18 19 Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or material warranted to be 20 noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other 21 components. 22 Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For hardware, use Phillips flat 23 head machine screws that match finish of member or hardware being fastened. 24 25 Concealed Flashing: 0.0179 -inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch- 2 6 thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected for compatibility with other 27 components. 28 29 Drackets and Reinforcements: High strength aluminum; where use of aluminum is not feasible 30 provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. 31 32 CQncrgte/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with 33 ASTM A 123. 34 35 Compression Weatherstripping: Replaceable molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 36 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. 37 3 8 Components: 39 40 Storefront Framing System; 41 42 Exterior storefront: Kawneer "Trifab II 451" with nominal frame dimension of 2" x 4 1 /2" 43 44 jnterior storefront; Same as above with adaptor for 1 /4" glazing 45 46 Glazing: Fabricate to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly. Provide 47 snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops with exterior stops anchored for nonremovaL 48 49 Operable Windows: Hopper" type aluminum units compatable with storefront system. PVC 50 weatherstripping, lever operation. Provide screen and operator pole. 51 5 2 Stile- and -Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical 53 joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j- bolts. 54 55 Design: Provide 1 -3/4- inch -thick doors of design indicated. 56 57 Medium stile (3 -112 -inch nominal width) 58 08410 2 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1 1 1 Fabrication: Fabricate components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and 2 3 comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profiles are indicated on the drawings. 4 Door Hardware; II 5 6 7 For all storefront doors; 8 Ball bearing Butts: 5 knuckle, 2 bearings, steel ball bearing butts sized to comply with III 9 10 ANSI A 156.16. Provide three per door 11 Silencers: At locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to 12 prevent metal -to -metal contact. I 13 14 Cylinders. locks. closers. and push -pulls are supplied under another Division 8 Section 15 I 16 For exterior storefront doors: (in addition to above) 17 18 Weatherstripping Provide compression weatherstripping aginst fixed stops. 19 20 21 Door Bottom: Sweep type seal 22 23 Framing System: Fabricate from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include I 24 reinforcing. Provide for flush glazing from the exterior without projecting stops. Shop fabricate and 25 preassemble. Provide frame sections without exposed seams. 26 27 prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing and hardware application before shipment 28 29 to the Project. Disassemble only as necessary for shipment and installation. 30 L not drill and tap for surface mounted hardware items until time of installation. 31 32 Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. 33 34 Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth. Restore mechanical I 35 finish. 36 37 Reinforc__ing: Install reinforcing for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag 38 resistance and rigidity. Reinforce framing members for hinges and doors (hollow metal and II 39 40 aluminum doors) 41 Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, suitable sealant, nonabsorptive I 42 43 plastic or elastomeric tape or gasket between surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. 44 Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. 45 II 46 mers: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 47 48 Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to I 49 application and designations of finishes. 50 51 Class I. Color anodonic finish:AA- M12C22A42/A44 52 I 5 3 4 Color: Medium Bronze 5 55 56 P57 58 I ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 68410 3 1 2 J XRCA'TIMN: 3 4 Examine substrates for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and conditions that 5 affect installation. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. 6 7 Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without 8 warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install in proper alignment and relation to 9 established lines and grades. Provide support and anchor securely in place. 10 Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface mounted hardware. 11 12 Set sill members in bed of sealant, or with john fillers or gaskets. 13 14 Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section for installation of glass and other panels glazed into doors and 15 framing. 16 17 A4just hardware to function properly. 18 19 Clean completed system after installation. Avoid damage to coatings. 20 21 Clean glass after installation. Comply with "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and 22 maintenance. 23 24 END OF SECTION 08410 25 26 08410 4 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 2 3 GENERAL; 4 5 See Section 07820 for translucent wall panels 6 7 See Section 08410 for aluminum storefronts and operable sections within storefronts. 8 9 System Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum window units that comply with requirements 10 specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock systems according to test methods 11 indicated. 12 13 Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration 14 requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for type, grade, and performance class of windows required. 15 16 Desig wind velocity at the project site is 90 mph. 17 18 Testing: Test each window type and size in accordance with ASTM E 330 for structural performance, 19 ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E 547 for water penetration. Provide certified test 2 0 results. 21 22 subllgitajg: Submit the following: 23 24 Product data. including construction details and fabrication methods; profiles and dimensions 25 of individual components; data on hardware, accessories, and finishes; and recommendations 2 6 for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 27 28 Shop drawings including installation details, elevations, anchors, full -size details of typical 29 composite members, reinforcement, hardware, glazing details, and accessories. 30 31 Design Concept: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of windows required 32 and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Windows by other manufacturers may be 33 considered provided deviations do not change the design concept. 34 35 36 FROM 1CTS: 37 38 Aluminum windows: 39 40 Manufacturer. Millgard, Inc, or approved 41 42 Type: Fixed and operable, thermal break frame with nailing fin. Milgard 920 series at fixed 43 windows, 1120 series at sliders. 44 45 Bead Detail: Square edge 46 47 Jnsect Screens; Provide at all operable locations 48 49 Factory Glaze windows with 1" insulating glass 50 51 Finishes: Medium Bronze anodized aluminum 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS 1 2 3 4 EX ECUTION: 5 6 Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and 7 the sill plate is level. 8 9 Installation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of windows. Set windows 10 plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor securely in place. 11 12 Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic 13 action. 14 15 s et sill members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight 16 construction. Coordinate installation with wall fleshings and other components of the work. 17 18 Clean aluminum promptly after installation. Avoid damage to finishes. Remove excess glazing and 19 sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 20 21 Clean 4t, ;ss of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows. 22 23 24 END OF SECTION 08520 25 08520 2 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 2 3 4 PART 1 GENERAL 5 6 1.01 DESCRIPTION 7 8 A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project 9 Quantities listed are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not 10 specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items 11 specified in quality and finish. 12 13 B. Related Work Elsewhere 14 15 General Requirements 16 Metal Doors and Frames 17 Aluminum Doors and Frames 18 Wood Doors 19 Special Doors 20 Cabinet and Casework (Including Hardware) 21 22 23 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL 24 25 A. Supplier: 26 27 Finish hardware shall be supplied by a recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been 28 famishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than two (2) years. 29 They shall be a factory authorized distributor of the Exit Devices, Locksets and Door Closers. 30 The supplier's organization shall include a member of the American Society of Architectural 31 Hardware Consultants who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to 32 meet with the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation. 33 34 B. Installer: 35 36 Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade union 37 jurisdictions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site. 38 39 C. Codes: 40 41 All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and/or state current 42 building codes. 43 44 Hardware for fire -rated openings shall also be in compliance with all fire building codes 45 applicable to the district in which the building is located. Provide only hardware which has been 46 tested and listed by "UL" for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the 47 requirements of the door and door frame labels. 48 49 1.03 SUBMITTALS 50 51 A. Samples: 52 53 If requested by the Architect, submit one (1) sample of each exposed hardware category, finished 54 as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with the hardware schedule. 55 Samples will be reviewed, by the Architect, for design and finish only, compliance with other 56 requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. Units which are acceptable and remain 57 undamaged through submittal procedures may be used on the project. 58 DOOR 08710 1 1 B. Manufacturer's Data: 2 3 Submit five (5) copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware. 4 5 C. Hardware Schedule: 6 7 At the earliest possible date, submit six (6) copies of the finish hardware schedule and six (6) 8 copies of catalog cuts of each item scheduled. Approval of the hardware schedule does not relieve 9 the Contractor of the responsibility to fulfill the project requirements in accordance with the 10 contract documents. 11 12 The submitted Finish Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation of every item 13 required for each door or opening. List each opening individually. Each heading shall also 14 indicate opening location, hardware group number, door and frame material, type size, fire 15 rating, handing, and degree of opening, A cross reference for any abbreviations or symbols used 16 shall be included. Schedules in coded or horizontal format are unacceptable. Non conforming 17 submittals shall be returned unreviewed. 18 19 A Key Schedule and index shall be included in the submittals indicating the locking function of 20 each Opening for the use of the Owner and/or Architect in development of Keying System. 21 After the schedules have been approved, by the Architect, submit five (5) copies of the corrected 22 schedules. One (1) additional copy plus catalog cuts of each item and installation and 23 maintenance instructions shall be sent. 24 25 D. Templates: 26 27 Furnish hardware templates for each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory 28 prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other 29 work to confirm that provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 30 31 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE 32 33 A. Packaging: 34 35 Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related to the final hardware 36 schedule. Basic installation instructions shall be included in the packages. 37 38 B. Storage: 39 40 Provide a locked room at the jobsite for the storage of the hardware. 41 42 43 1.05 GUARANTEE 44 45 A. Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and operation for a 46 period of one (1) year, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware manufacturer. The 47 following products shall be guaranteed for periods beyond One (1) Year. 48 49 1. Locks Two (2) Years 50 2. Door Closers Ten (10) Years 51 3. Panic Devices Three (3) Years 52 53 No liability shall be assumed by the hardware supplier where faulty operation is due to improper 54 installation or failure to exercise normal maintenance. 55 56 57 58 08710 2 IRMIZIMEDWARE 1 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 3 4 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS 5 6 A. Products may be furnished by the Manufacturers listed in the following Paragraphs 2.02, 7 Materials, or Equivalent products of type, grade, design and function from Manufacturers 8 listed as Acceptable substitutions. Any requests for products not listed must be made in 9 accordance with the General Conditions of the specifications, prior to bid. 10 11 B. All Approvals shall be made by addenda. 12 13 2.02 MATERIALS 14 15 A. The numbers used are from the catalogs of: 16 17 Hager 18 Best 19 Von Duprin 20 LCN Door Closers 21 Glynn- Johnson 22 Tice 23 Pemko 24 Builders Brass Works 25 Rixson Firemark 26 Telkee 27 28 B. Finish: 29 30 Finish in general to be: US26D, except: 31 32 Exterior Hinges, Push and Pull Plates, Door Pulls, Kick Plates US32D Satin Stainless 33 Steel 34 Door Closers: Sprayed to match 35 Threshold, Weatherstrip Door Bottoms: As listed 36 Finish Hardware for Aluminum Doors and Frames US10B, Oil Rubbed Bronze, 37 Exit Devices 313AN. 38 39 C. Butts: 40 41 Manufacturer listed: Stanley 42 Acceptable substitutions:, Hager, McKinney 43 Sizes: 44 1 -3/4" Exterior Vestibule Doors 5 x 4 -1/2" 45 1 -3/4" Interior Doors up to and including 36" 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2" 46 1 -3/4" Interior Doors over 36" 5 x 4 -1/2" 47 Quantity: 3 Each (per leaf) up to and including 90: in height, 4 each over 90" in height 48 For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size and quantity recommended by the butt 49 manufacturer. 50 Outswinging Locked doors to have nonremovable pins (NRP Set Screw in Barrel). 51 52 D. Locksets and Cylinders. 53 54 Manufacturer listed: Best 55 Acceptable substitutions: None 56 Design: As Listed 57 Backset: 2-3/4" 58 DOOk HARDWARE 08710 3 1 2 3 E. Exit Devices: 4 5 Manufacturer listed: Von Duprin 6 Acceptable substitutions: None 7 Furnish Sex Nuts and Bolts at all Wood Doors 8 Provide Glass Bead Kits where interference with Vision Frames occurs. 9 10 F. Door Closers: 11 12 Manufacturer listed: LCN 13 Acceptable substitutions: Norton 7500 (BF) and PR7500 (BF) 14 Furnish drop plates where required. 15 Furnish cold weather fluid, at exterior vestibule doors. 16 Provide special closer mounting as required where interference with weatherstrip or sound seals 17 occur. 18 Furnish Shoulder Thru Bolts for all Wood Doors 19 20 G. Manual Flush Bolts: 21 22 Manufacturer listed: Glynn Johnson 23 Acceptable substitutions: Door Controls 24 25 H. Push Pulls: 26 27 Manufacturer listed: Tice 28 Acceptable substitutions: Quality, Builders Brass Works 29 30 I. Kick Mop Plates 31 32 Manufacturer listed: Tice 33 Acceptable substitutions: Quality, Builders Brass Works 34 Height: 10" 35 All plates shall be furnished with width as required to provide 1/4" clearance at sides of doors and 36 stops. 37 38 J. Stops Holders: 39 40 Manufacturer listed: Builders Brass Works 41 Acceptable substitutions: Quality, Glynn Johnson 42 Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish floor stops F8061X or F8063X Series, or Overhead 43 Stops if required. 44 45 K. Overhead Stop Holders: 46 47 Manufacturer listed: Glynn Johnson 48 Acceptable substitutions: ABH, Rixson 49 Funish Size as recommended by Manufacturer. 50 Furnish Special Shims, Brackets, or Special Template Mounting where required. 51 52 L. Weatherstrip Thresholds: 53 54 Manufacturer listed: Pemko 55 Acceptable substitutions: Reese, National Guard 56 Furnish FHSL25 Flat Head Sleeve Anchors for all Thresholds. 57 Where it occurs weatherstrip shall be applied to both sides of a mullion. 58 08710 4 DOOR HARDWARE M. Door Silencers: Manufacturer listed: Glynn Johnson Acceptable substitutions: Quality, Builders Brass Works Quantity: Furnish three (3) for each single door frame, and four (4) for each pair of door frames. Type: 64 for metal frames, and 65 for wood frames. N. Key Cabinet: Manufacturer listed: Telkee Acceptable substitutions: None Type: RWC -50S O. Keying: All Locksets and Cylinders shall be keyed into the existing Best Lock Co. factory registered Master Key System for the North Olympic Library System. Provide Construction Cylinders and Keys during the construction period. The Lock Manufacturerfs representative shall meet with the Owner to prepare the permanent keying schedule. The Permanent Cores and Keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) shall be transmitted directly to the Owner, prior to occupancy. The General Contractor, shall remove the construction cores and install the permanent cores. All Construction Cores shall be returned to the Finish Hardware Supplier. All Permanent Cores, Keys, and Uncombinated Cores, shall be sent via Registered Mail, Return Receipt Request to the Owner. Stamp all Keys with change designation as directed. Furnish: Six (6) Master Keys per Set Four (4) change keys per Lockset or Cylinder. Twelve (12) Construction Keys 48710 -5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 PART 3 HARDWARE GROUPS AS FOLLOWS: 0871(1 6 Sets Pivots 1 Exit Device 1 Cylinder 1 Exit Device 2 Cylinders 2 Door Pulls 1 Auto. Operator 1 Wall Plate 1 Jamb Switch 1 Door Closer 1 Drop Plate 2 Floor Stop Holders 1 Threshold 2 Door Bottoms Weatherstrip 1 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts Cylinder Exit Device Door Closer Kick Plate Wall Stop Holder Set Door Seal Each Butts 1 Deadlock 1 Push Plate 1 Pull Plate 1 Door Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Mop Plate 1 Wall Stop 3 Silencers Each Butts 1 Privacy Lock 1 Kick Plate 1 Mop Plate 1 Wall Stop 3 Silencers VO BE VO BE TI LCN LCN LCN LCN LCN BBW PE PE ST BE VO LCN TI BBW PE ST BE TI TI LCN TI TI BBW HW -1 HW -2 CB1901 1E72 98L x 03 4041 -EDA B3EKP W141X S88D HW- 3 CB 1901 38H7R 106 x CFC 106x20xCFC 4041RA B3EKP B3EMP W9 HW- 4 ST CB 1900 BE 35HOLF3H TI B3EKP TI B3EMP BBW W9 DOO By Door Manufacturer CD3547TL x Less Pull 1E74 (Outside) CD3547EO 1E74 47 x Spanner Caps 4622 956 (Outside) 951 (Inside) 4041 x Top Jamb Mounted 4041 -180 or TJ (As Applicable) F823X 272A 18100DP By Door Manufacturer 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 I 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 18 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 I 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 I 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sets Pivots Exit Device 1 Cylinder 1 Exit Device 2 Cylinders 2 Door Pulls 2 Auto. Operators 1 Wall Plate 1 Jamb Switch 2 Floor Stop Holders Each Butts 1 Lockset 2 Flush Bolts 1 Dust Proof Strike 1 Overhead Stop 1 Wall Stop 1 Astragal 4 Silencers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts Cylinder Exit Device Cylinder Door Closer Kick Plate Floor Stop Holder Threshold Set Weatherstrip Door Bottom Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Wall Stop 3 Silencers Each Butts 1 Lockset 2 Flush Bolts 1 Dust Proof Strike 2 Wall Stops 1 Astragal 4 Silencers VO BE VO BE TI LCN LCN LCN BBW ST BE GJ GJ GJ BBW PE ST BE VO BE LCN TI BBW PE PE PE HW- 5 By Door Manufacturer CD3547TL x Less Pull 1E74 (Outside) CD3547E0 1E74 47 x Spanner Caps 4622 956 (Outside) 951 (Inside) F823X HW- 6 CB 1900 35H7J3H FB6W DP2 410 Series (RHR Leaf) W9 355CV HW- 7 CB 1961 1E72 (Ouside) CD98NL 1E74 (Cylinder Dogging) 4041 -EDA B3EKP F823X 272A 290AS 18100CP HW -8 ST CB 1900 BE 35H7EW3H BBW W9 HW -9 ST CB 1900 BE 35H7J3H GJ FB6W GJ DP2 BBW W9 PE 355CV DOUR IMMURE 08710 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts Lockset Wall Stop Threshold Set Sound Seal Auto. Door Bottom Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Overhead Stop 3 Silencers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts Cylinder Exit Device Cylinder Door Closer Kick Plate Floor Stop Holders Threshold Set Weatherstrip Door Bottom Each Butts 1 Exit Device 1 Cylinder 1 Door Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Floor Stop 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Door Bottom Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Wall Stop 3 Silencers ST BE BBW PE PE PE ST BE GI ST BE VO BE LCN TI BBW PE PE PE ST VO BE LCN TI BBW PE PE PE HW- 10 CB 1900 35H7C3H W9 2364A 332CR 434ARL HW- 11 CB 1900 35H7E3H 410 Series HW- 12 CB 1960 1E72 98NL x 98ALK 1E74 (Alarm Kit) 4041 -EDA B3EKP F823X 272A 290AS 18100CP HW- 13 HW- 14 ST CB 1900 BE 35H7J3H BBW 8 08710 CB 1960 98E0 x 98ALK 1E74 (Alarm Kit) 4041 -EDA B3EKP F121X 272A x 282A (Welded) 290AS 18100CP 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 I 22 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 I 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 I 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 I 55 56 57 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Overhead Stop 3 Silencers Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Wall Stop 3 Silencers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts Latchset Door Closer Armor Plate Wall Stop Set Smoke Gasket Each Butts Cylinder Exit Device Door Closer Armor Plate Wall Stop Holder Threshold Set Weatherstrip Door Bottom Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Door Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Floor Stop 3 Silencers Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Door Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Door Bottom ST BE GJ ST CB 1900 BE 35H7E3H BBW W9 ST CB 1901 BE 35H0N3H LCN 4041 -RA -H TI B3EAP 34" BBW W9 PE S88D ST BE VO LCN TI BBW PE PE PE ST BE LCN TI BBW PE PE PE HW- 15 CB 1900 35H7J3H 410 Series HW- 16 HW- 17 HW- 18 CB1961 1E72 98NL 4041 -EDA B3EAP 34" W141X 272A x 282A (Welded) 290AS 18100CP HW- 19 ST CB 1900 BE 35H7EW3H x Knurled Outside Lever LCN 4041 -RA TI B3EKP BBW F8061X HW- 20 CB 1960 35H7EW3H 4041 -EDA B3EKP W146X 272A x 282A (Welded) S88D 18100CP DOOR 08710 9 1 2 HW -21 3 4 Each Butts ST CB 1900 5 1 Latchset BE 35H0N3H 6 1 Floor Stop BBW F8061 X 7 3 Silencers 8 9 10 HW -22 11 12 Each Butts ST CB 1961 13 1 Lockset BE 35H7G3H 14 1 Lock Astragal BBW 9615 -1 15 1 Door Closer LCN 4041 -EDA 16 1 Kick Plate TI B3EKP 17 1 Floor Stop BBW F121X 18 1 Threshold PE 272A x 282A (Welded) 19 1 Set Weatherstrip PE 290AS 20 1 Door Bottom PE 18100CP 21 22 23 HW -23 24 25 Each Butts ST CB 1901 26 1 Lockset BE 35H7E3H 27 1 Overhead Stop GJ 90S Series 28 1 Armor Plate TI B3EAP 34" 29 3 Silencers 30 31 32 HW- 24 33 34 Each Butts ST CB 1900 35 1 Push Plate TI 106 36 1 -Pull Plate TI 106 x 20 37 1 Door Closer LCN 4041RA 38 1 Kick Plate TI B3EKP 39 1 Mop Plate TI B3EMP 40 1 Wall Stop BBW W9 41 3 Silencers 42 43 44 HW- 25 45 46 Each Butts ST CB 1900 47 1 Lockset BE 35H7J3H 48 1 Armor Plate TI B3EAP 34" 49 1 Wall Stop BBW W9 50 3 Silencers 51 52 53 HW- 26 54 55 1 Cylinder BE 1E74- C181- 1ER810 56 1 Thumb Turn BE 1E6A4 57 58 Reuse Balance of Existing Hardware 08710 10 DOUR HARDWARE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 3 5 I 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 I 14 15 16 17 I 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 I 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 I 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 I 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Door Closer 1 Armor Plate 1 Wall Stop Holder 3 Silencers Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Door Closer 1 Armor Plate 1 Wall Stop Holder 3 Silencers Each Butts 1 Lockset 1 Door Closer 1 Wall Stop 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Door Bottom 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Each Butts Lockset Door Closer Kick Plate Wall Stop Holder Threshold Set Weatherstrip Door Bottom Rain Drip Sets Pivots 1 Cylinder 1 Deadlock 1 Thumb Turn 1 Set Push Pulls 1 Door Closer 1 Drop Plate 1 Floor Stop HW -27 ST CB 1900 BE 35H7J3H LCN 4041 -EDA TI B3EKP 34" BBW W141X HW -28 ST CB 1900 BE 35H7J3H LCN 4041 -EDA TI B3EAP 34" BBW W141X ST BE LCN TI BBW PE PE PE PE BE AR BE TI LCN LCN BBW HW -29 ST CB 1961 BE 35H7G3H LCN 4041 -RA BBW W9 PE 272A PE 290AS PE 216AV HW- 30 CB 1960 35H7EW3H x Knurled Outside Lever 4041 -EDA B3EKP W141X As per Detail 290AS 3452CP 345A HW- 31 By Door Manufacturer 1E74- C181- 1ER810 MS 1850S Series x 4000 Strike 1E6A4 3347 x Spanner Caps 4041 -EDA -H 4040 -18PA F8061 X 08710 11 1 2 3 4 HW- 32 5 6 7 1 Cylinder BE 1 E74 -C 181 -1 ER810 8 Reuse Balance of Existing Hardware 9 10 11 PART 4 EXECUTION 12 13 4.01 PREPARATION 14 15 A. Provide solid blocking for all wall stops. 16 17 B. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor all 18 hardware as per manufacturer's published templates. Self tapping sheet metal screws are not 19 acceptable. All closers and exit devices on wood doors shall be thru bolted. 20 21 4.02 INSTALLATION 22 23 A. Mounting Heights: Mount units at height recommended in "Recommended Locations for 24 Builders' Hardware" by NBHA except as otherwise indicated. 25 26 B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturet's instructions. 27 28 Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware surfaces which will be painted or 29 finished at a later time, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place. 30 After completion of the finishes, re- install each item. 31 32 Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 33 34 C. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to insure proper operation 35 or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and 36 smoothly. 37 38 4.03 ADJUSTMENT 39 40 A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to acceptance or 41 occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items during the week prior to 42 acceptance or occupancy. Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper 43 function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final 44 operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 45 46 B. Instruct Ownets Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware 47 finishes 48 49 08710 12 DOOR HARDWARE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 08800 GLAZING 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Refer to section 07820 for translucent wall panels 8 9 Refer to section 08520 for preglazed window units 10 11 system Performance Requirements: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal 12 movement, wind loading, and impact loading, without failure including loss or glass breakage 13 attributable to: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; deterioration of glazing materials; 14 and other defects in construction. 15 16 Glass Deaigg: Provide glass lites in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat treated) to 17 meet or exceed the following criteria based on analysis of Project loads and in- service 18 conditions: 19 20 minimilazia&uhirlizsa, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6.0 mm (0.23 inch). 21 22 Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply 23 with specified requirements. 24 25 Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials 26 were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. 27 28 Compatibility test report from insulating glass edge sealant manufacturer indicating glass edge 29 sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials. 30 31 Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers, 32 "FGMA Glazing Manual," and publications of AAMA, LSGA, and SIGMA as applicable to products 33 indicated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 34 35 Safety Glay Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 36 for Category II materials. 37 38 Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with 39 appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 40 41 Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 42 43 44 PRODUCTS 45 4 6 Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class as indicated below, and Quality q3: 47 4 8 Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 49 50 51 Heat Treated Float Glass. Fabrication: Fabricate heat- treated float glass by the following method: 52 53 Vertical (tong -held) or horizontal (roller hearth) proems, at manufacturer's option, except 54 provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks. 55 56 57 58 tiE7MM 08800 1 Heat Treated Float Glass Productg: As follows: 2 3 Uncoated. Clear. Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality 4 q3, kind as indicated below: 5 6 Kind FF where indicated as tempered. 7 8 Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality q8; 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick; of form and mesh 9 pattern indicated below: 10 11 polished Wired Glass: Form 1, and as follows: 12 13 Mesh m2 (square). 14 15 Sealed Insnlotingi lass Unitg: Preassembled units complying with ASTM E 774 and with other 16 requirements indicated. 17 18 provide clear float glass at exterior and interior panes 19 20 Provide heat treated float sass where tempered glass is designated or required by code 21 22 Thickness of each pane; 1/4" 23 24 Air space thicknegg: 112" 25 26 Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Products complying with ASTM C 920, compatible with other 27 materials they will contact. 28 29 Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape, with or without spacer rod as recommended 30 by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, and complying with AAMA 800 31 32 Gaskets: Molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain weathertight seal. 33 34 Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced 35 glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for 36 glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in 37 installation. 38 39 patterned Glass (Countertop screens): 40 41 Two layers of architectural glass placed in common frame as detailed 42 43 public side layer. 1 /8" Watermark glass, #DEPE -168, distributed by Bendheim Glass, 44 New York 45 46 Staff side layer 1 /8" Milk White glass, #DEPE -24, distributed by Bendheim Glass, New York 47 48 Alternate, matching products from local sources are acceptable upon approval by Architect 49 50 51 Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, 52 with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with 53 recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications as required to 54 comply with system performance requirements. 55 56 57 58 08800 -2 1 2 3 4 5 FXECUTION 6 7 Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other 8 glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in "FGMA 9 Glazing Manual." 10 11 Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 12 13 Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 14 15 polish edges of patterned glass where exposed 16 17 18 Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, 19 including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. 20 21 Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for 22 inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass 23 manufacturer. 24 25 26 END OF SECTION 08800 27 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 3 4 5 GFNFRAI, 6 7 Submittal: Product Data for each product specified and Samples for each type of finish indicated. 8 9 10 PRODU CTS 11 12 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 13 14 handed -Metal Lath: 15 16 California Expanded Metal Products Co. 17 Dale//Incor Industries, Inc. 18 Dietrich Industries, Inc. 19 National Gypsum Co. 20 United States Gypsum Co. 21 Western Metal Lath Co. 22 23 Metal Accessories: 24 25 California Expanded Metal Products Co. 26 Dale//Incor Industries, Inc. 27 Delta Star, Inc. 28 Fry Reglet Corporation. 29 Gordon, Inc. 30 Metalex (Keene Products). 31 MM Systems Corp. 32 National Gypsum Co. 33 Pittcon Industries. 34 United States Gypsum Co. 35 Western Metal Lath Co. 36 37 Plastic Accessories: 38 39 Plastic Components, Inc. 40 vinyl Corp. 41 42 Stucco: 43 44 California Stucco Products Corp. 45 Highland Stucco. 46 IPA Systems, Inc. 47 United States Gypsum Co. 48 49 Acrylic- Base Finishes: 50 51 Dryvit Systems, Inc. 52 Pleko Products, Inc. 53 Senergy, Inc. 54 Simplex Products Div.; Anthony Industries, Inc. 55 Sto Industries. 56 Stuc -O -Flex International. 57 58 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MM. 1 Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, diamond mesh, self furring, and with minimum 3.4-lb /sq. yd. 2 weight. 3 4 paper Backing: Asphalt- impregnated paper complying with FS UU -B -790, Type I, Grade D (vapor 5 permeable), Style 2, factory bonded to back of lath. 6 7 Accessories: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated 8 below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. 9 10 Aluminum Components: ASTM B 221 for alloy and temper 6063 -T5 or aluminum extrusions 11 with similar properties. 12 13 Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying 14 with ASTM A 653, G40 minimum coating designation. 15 16 ZiAreAlloy om ens: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc. 17 18 Metal Comerbeads: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel. 19 20 Reinforcement: Smooth -edge strips of expanded -metal lath fabricated from uncoated or 21 zinc- coated galvanized) steel sheet. Provide comerite or stripite foam as required. 22 23 Casing Bead&: Square -edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, with short 24 or expanded flanges to suit kinds of plaster bases indicated. 25 26 Control Joints: Aluminum coated with clear plastic and adjustable for john widths from 1/8 to 27 5/8 inch. 28 29 Foundation Sil_1 ateep'SScreed: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 30 31 Asphalt Saturated Fell: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), nonperforated. 32 33 Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of 34 contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. 35 36 Acid Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (10 percent solution of commercial hydrochloric acid) mixed 37 1 part to not less than 6 nor more than 10 parts water. 38 39 Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster. Potable. 40 41 Liam: ASTM C 206, Type S; ASTM C 207, Type S. 42 43 Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932. 44 45 Base -Coat Cementg: White or gray, as required. 46 47 Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type L 48 49 Base -Coat Aggregate: ASTM C 897, sand. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 09220 2 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 Finish Co g,: Material and color as indicated below: 4 5 Acrylic -Based Finish Coal: Factory-mixed formulation of acrylic emulsion, colorfast mineral 6 pigments, and fine aggregates specifically recommended by acrylic -based finish manufacturer 7 for use over portland cement plaster base coats. 8 9 Colors: As selected by Architect from custom colors 10 11 Final: Manufacturer's smoothest Dryvit "Sandblast R -Wall "Fine" 12 13 14 Mixes and Compositions: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base and finish -coat mixes as applicable. 15 16 Proportion Proportion materials for base coats and job -mixed finish coat in parts by volume 17 according to ASTM C 926. 18 19 Ej er Content: Add amount of fiber recommended by manufacturer to base -coat mixes after 20 ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. 21 22 Acrylic -Based Finish Cog: Apply material as factory packaged; do not add other ingredients; 23 comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 24 25 Mixing: Mechanically mix proportioned cementitious and aggregate materials with water to comply 26 with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. 27 28 29 EXECUTION 30 31 Lathing and Furring: Install lath and furring indicated to comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide 32 Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with ASTM C 1063. 33 34 Install supplementary framing.Jl.ocking. and bracing at terminations in work and for support of 35 fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and similar work to comply 36 with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of 37 lath and furring manufacturer. 38 39 Isolation: Where lathing and metal support systems abut building structure horizontally and where 40 partition or wall abuts overhead structure, sufficiently isolate from structural movement to prevent 41 transfer of loading from building structure. Install slip- or cushion -type joints to absorb deflections 42 but maintain lateral support. 43 44 Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lath 45 or accessories. 46 47 48 Metal Lath: Install metal lath where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, 49 configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with 50 ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Funing," and with ASTM C 1063. 51 52 Exterior sheathed wall surfaces using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, self-furring, diamond -mesh 53 lath. 54 55 Preparing Solid Surfaces for Plastering: Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of 56 plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. 57 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTEI( OVT/F-3 1 Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; 2 coordinate with scratch -coat work. 3 4 S,irfac:e Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen surfaces indicated for direct 5 plaster application, except where a bonding agent has been applied. Moisten to obtain optimum 6 suction for plastering. 7 8 Preparing Existing "Marblecrete" for Plastering: Brush with water and TSP solution, pressure wash to 9 remove residue and loose particles. 10 11 Installation of Plastering Accessories: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation 12 standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Install accessories of 13 type indicated at following locations: 14 15 External Comers: Install comer reinforcement at external comers. 16 17 Terminations of Plaster. Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 18 19 Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the 20 following criteria and approved by Architect: 21 22 Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind 23 plaster membrane. 24 25 Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet in either direction or a length-to- 26 width ratio of 2 -1R to 1. 27 28 Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft.. 29 30 Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. in area. 31 32 Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster 33 membrane. 34 35 Plaster Application: Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so 36 that neither will be damaged by installation of other. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, 37 lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials. Do not use excessive water in mixing and 38 applying plaster materials. 39 40 Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, mixes, and finishes indicated 41 to comply with ASTM C 926. 42 43 Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in 44 finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 -foot straightedge placed at any location on 45 surface. 46 47 Plaster flush with metal frames and other built -in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster 48 ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing 49 beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures 50 with metaL 51 52 Comers: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external comers flush with comerbeads 53 on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work. 54 55 Thickness: As indicated or as required by ASTM C 926. 56 57 'slumber of Coat,: Apply plaster in 3 coats 58 09220 4 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTEI( 2 3 At existing Marblecrete, apply brown coat to thickness flush with aggregate, or as required to provide I 4 a uniform surface that matches new plastered areas. 5 6 At exterior gypsum board soffits. apply finish coat over taped and sanded substrate. I 7 8 Finish Coats: As follows: 9 10 prepared Finish: Apply acrylic -based finish coats, and other factory- prepared finish coats I 11 according to manufacturer's written instructions. 12 13 Moist -cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions 14 for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." I 15 16 Cutting. and Patching: Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around 17 items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, I 18 buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or 19 replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. 20 21 Cleaning and Protecting: Remove plaster from other surfaces not to be plastered. When plastering is I 22 completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris. Protect plaster work 23 from damage or deterioration until Substantial Completion. 24 25 I 26 END OF SECTION 09220 27 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (MM. 1 1 2 SECTION 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3 I 4 5 l 6 7 See Section 07200 for acoustical insulation I 8 9 See Section 09220 for acrylic finish on exterior gypsum soffits 10 I 11 12 Sound Transmission Characteristicg: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined 13 according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing 14 agency. I 15 16 Fire- Test Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated gypsum board assemblies are 17 indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance 18 according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities I 19 20 having jurisdiction. 21 I 22 23 PRODU 24 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 25 I 26 Steel Fram n and Furring: 27 28 Clark Steel Framing, Inc. 29 Consolidated Systems, Inc. I 30 31 Dale Industries, Inc. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 32 Marino/Ware (formerly Marino Industries Corp.). 33 National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. 34 Ununast. Inc. 35 36 Grid Sus; ension ssemblies: I 37 38 Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 39 Chicago Metallic Corp. 40 USG Interiors, Inc. I 41 Worthington Steel Company (formerly National Rolling Mills) 42 43 Gypsum Board nci a ated Products: 1 44 45 Domtar Gypsum. 46 Georgia- Pacific Corp. 47 National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. I 48 United States Gypsum Co. 49 50 Steel Framing Components for Suspended and Furred Ceilings: Provide components complying with 51 ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. I 52 53 54 Wire Tieg: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch thick. I 55 56 Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. 57 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES T 1 Channel': Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch minimum thickness of base metal and 7/16 inch wide 2 flanges, and as follows: 3 4 ,(dying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590lb /1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 5 Furring 3/4 inch deep, 3001/1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 6 7 Finish: Rust inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated. 8 9 Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated and with 0.0179 -inch 10 minimum base metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 11 12 Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, 0.0179 -inch minimum base metal 13 thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 14 15 Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Standard product fabricated from steel sheet complying with 16 ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2 -inch deep channel of the following configuration: 17 18 ogle or Double Leg_Configuatigur Asymmetric- shaped channel with face connected to 19 a single flange by a single- slotted leg (web) or hat shaped channel, with 1 -1/2- inch wide 20 face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded -metal legs (webs). 21 22 Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct 23 hung system. 24 25 Steel Framing for Walls and Partitions: Provide steel framing members complying with the following 26 requirements: 27 28 Steel Studs and Runners; ASTM C 645, in depth indicated and with 0.0179 -inch minimum base 29 metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 30 31 Provide 0.0329 -inch minimum base metal thickness for head runner, sill nurser, jamb, and 32 cripple studs at door and other openings. 33 34 35 eel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, in depth indicated and with 0.0179- 36 inch minimum base metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 37 38 Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound 39 transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568 to form 40 1/2 -inch- deep channel of the following configuration 41 42 Single- or Double -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric- shaped channel with face connected to 43 a single flange by a single slotted leg (web) or hat- shaped channel, with 1 -112-inch- wide 44 face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded -metal legs (webs). 45 46 Z- Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z- shaped furring members with slotted or 47 nonslotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568; with 48 a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch, face flange of 1 -1/4 inch, wall- 49 attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 50 51 Fasteners for Metal Framing: Type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other 52 properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; 53 complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 54 55 Gypsum Board Products: Types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end -to- 56 end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 57 58 Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, 5/8" thickness 09255 2 (YPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Edges: Tapered. 3 4 Use Water resistant board at window wraps and where scheduled on drawings. 5 6 Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931, with manufacturer's standard edges, in thickness 7 indicated. 8 9 Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. 10 11 12 Accessories for Interiorjnstallatioa: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with 13 ASTM C 1047, fonned metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: 14 15 Steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip process or rolled zinc. 16 17 Provide bullnose comer trim at window wraps and where detailed on drawings 18 19 20 Joint Treatment Materials: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the 21 recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for 22 each application indicated. 23 24 Joint Ta for Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 25 26 Use pressure sensitive or staple- attached, open weave, glass -fiber reinforcing tape with 27 compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and 28 joint treatment materials for application indicated. 29 30 Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged vinyl -based products 31 complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 32 33 Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product, all purpose compound formulated 34 for both taping and topping compounds. 35 36 Specialty Joint Compound: Where scheduled, utilize organic formula dry powder compound: 37 38 M100, as manufactured by Murco, Inc. or approved 39 40 Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, 41 nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that is effective in reducing airborne sound 42 transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by 43 testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 44 45 Miscellaneous Materials: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply 46 with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. 47 48 Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 49 50 Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. 51 52 Fastening gypsum board to wood members. 53 54 Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. 55 56 Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members 57 from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 58 (YPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES M3377 1 2 Texture Finish: As follows: 3 4 USG Spray texture finish, or approved, "Level 4" light orange peel non asbestos powder, 5 mixed with water. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 EXEE CUTION 14 15 Install steel frames to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to 16 framing installation. 17 18 t 9 II II I I at terminations in gypsum board 19 assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, 20 furnishings, or similar construction. 21 22 Isigam_smeUraming from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading 23 imposed by structural movement. 24 25 When building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 26 27 Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. 28 29 Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. 30 Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. 31 32 Installing Steel F •i for Suspended and Furred Ceilings: As follows: 33 34 Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. 35 36 Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than 37 that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. 38 39 Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system 40 meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross furring members to each other 41 and butt -cut to fit into wall track. 42 43 For exterior soffits, install cross bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift according to 44 details on Drawings. 45 46 I alli g Steel Fr ming for Walls and Partitions: Install steel studs and furring at spacings indicated. 47 48 Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, 49 except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framin r 50 frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to 51 provide support for gypsum board. 52 53 Cut cords 1/2 inch short of full height t0 provide perimeter relief. 54 55 Frame door openings to comply with GA- 219, and with applicable published recommendations 56 of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 57 09255 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 5 6 with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. Install and finish gypsum panels to amply 7 8 9 10 11 12 Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between 13 edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. 14 15 Isolate pe of nonload- bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except 16 floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2- inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U- 17 bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and 18 abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 19 20 Where STC -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind 21 control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical 22 sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and 23 manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound- flanking paths 24 around or through gypsum board assemblies. 25 26 Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and 27 finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 28 29 Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 30 31 Single -Layer Fa.stening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 32 33 Fasten with screws. 34 35 Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to supports, 36 with end joints staggered over supports. Install with 1/4 -inch open space where panels abut other 37 construction or structural penetrations. Fasten with corrosion resistant screws. 38 39 jn.11ing Trim Accessories: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same 40 fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory 41 manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. 42 43 Install comerbea4 at external comers. 44 45 Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim 46 type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. 47 48 Install LC -bead where gypsu m panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back 49 flange can be attached to fiam g or supporting substrate. 50 51 Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 52 Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 53 Install U -bead where indicated. 54 55 Install control joints at locations indicated. 56 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0923r3 1 F' 's i '1 Gypsum Board Assemblies.: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of 2 cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as 3 required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 4 5 ?refill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint 6 compound. 7 8 Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended 9 by trim accessory manufacturer. 10 11 Levels of Gypsum Board Fish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA- 12 214. 13 14 Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level 15 of finish is required for fire resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. 16 17 Level 4 for exposed interior gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 18 19 Eor bevel 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), 20 and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 21 Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual 22 defects and ready for decoration. 23 24 Where J .evel 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound. 25 26 Finish exterior gypsum soffit board using setting -type joint compounds to prefill joints and 27 embed tape, and for first, fill (second), and finish third) coats, with the last coat being a sandable 28 product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need for sanding. Sand 29 between coats and after finish coat. 30 31 Application of trowelled on acrylic finish is specified in another Division 9 Section. 32 33 Applying Texture Finishes: As follows: 34 35 ?rimer coat of paint to be applied to sanded wallboard surfaces grim to application of spray 36 texture. Refer to section 09900 for primer requirements. 37 38 Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfaces indicated 39 to receive texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered 40 spray equipment, produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin 41 application or of application patterns. 42 43 Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture 44 finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these 45 precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray 46 as recommended by texture finish manufacturer to prevent damage. 47 48 49 END OF SECTION 09255 50 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each type of tile and setting material indicated, submit the 8 following: 9 10 Samples of each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 11 inches square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints. 12 13 Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile 14 manufacturer and Installer. 15 16 17 PRODUCTS 18 19 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 20 21 22 CT -1 Product Mfg: American Olean 23 Color. 55 Matte DK Wedgewood 24 Size: 2" x 2" 25 26 CT -2 Product Mfg: American Olean 27 Color: 24 Bright Maize 28 Size: 4 1 /4" x 4 1 /4" 29 30 CT -3 Product Mfg: American Olean 31 Color. 54 Matte DK Aspen 32 Size: 4 1 /4" x 4 1 /4" 33 34 Grout: Product Mfg: American Olean, Designer Grouts 35 Color: AO Oceanic Blue 36 Type: Non Sanded 37 38 39 ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with Standard Grade requirements of 40 ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics 41 indicated. 42 43 ANSI Standards for Tie nnatallafion Materi Provide materials complying with referenced ANSI 44 standards. 45 46 Trim Units,: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with 47 the following requirements: 48 49 Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 50 51 Provide bullnose edge at termination of wall wainscoating 52 53 Base Units 6" high, bullnose top edge at areas without wainscoat. 54 55 Sgning Materials: Factory prepared dry mix with latex additive: "Multi- Purpose Thin Set Mortar" by 56 Custom Building Products, or approved 57 58 1 2 EXECITIM 3 4 E1eniing: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, 5 verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package 6 show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 7 8 TCA Ins lta lalign G>ideline TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA 9 installation methods indicated. 10 11 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete 12 covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, 13 edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 14 15 Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring 16 visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items for straight 17 aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, 18 collars, or covers overlap tile. 19 20 Jointing Pattern,: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining 21 tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both 22 directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint 23 widths, unless otherwise indicated. 24 25 Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards: 26 27 For ceramic tile grouts (sand- portland cement, dry- set, commercial portland cement, and latex 28 portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 29 30 31 Wall Tile Installatioq: Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with 32 requirements indicated, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed 33 standards. 34 35 Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 36 37 Ea Till: 1/16 inch. 38 39 On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free 40 of foreign matter. Use cleaning materials and methods that comply with tile and grout 41 manufacturers' written instructions. 42 43 44 45 END OF SECTION 09310 46 09310 -2 MEMETITE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 2 3 GENERA!, 4 5 Submittals: In addition to product data for each type of acoustical panel and suspension system 6 required, submit the following: 7 8 6 -inch- square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 9 10 Set of 12 -inch- long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for 11 each color and system type required for the "decorative ceiling grid" 12 13 Fire- Test Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following 14 requirements: 15 16 Surface burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A 17 materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. 18 19 PRODUCTS 20 21 Acoustical Ceiling panels: Armstrong World Industries, Inc, "Second Look I *2765, or similar by 22 US Gypsum, Celotex, or approved., meeting the following criteria: 23 24 Description; Fissured pattern tegular edge tiles, scored to match grid system in 12" x 12" pattern 25 2 6 Edge Deter: Tegular lay -in 28 Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 29 3 0 Size: 24 by 48 inches 31 3 2 Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.50 .60. 33 34 Edge Detail: Reveal sized -to-fit flange of exposed suspension system members. 35 36 37 Suspension System Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, 38 Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. 39 40 Wire Hangers. Braces. and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 41 42 Vic- Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft 43 temper. 44 45 Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, 46 Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106- 47 inch- (2.69 -mm diameter wire. 48 49 Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or if not indicated, manufacturer's 50 standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension 51 systems indicated; formed from s hee t metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed 5 2 flanges of suspension system runners. 53 54 Non- Fire Resistance Rated. Direct -Hung Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal 55 suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with 5 6 applicable ASTM C 635 requirements: 57 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS CONI 1 Wide -Face. Capped. Double -Web. Steel Suspension $vstent: Main and cross runners roll formed 2 from prepainted or electrolytic zinc coated, cold -rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16 -inch- 3 (24-min-) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 4 5 Structural CLssificar_ion: Intermediate -duty system. 6 7 End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt -edge type. 8 9 Cap Material and Finish: Steel sheet painted in white color 10 11 12 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 13 following: 14 15 Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 16 Chicago Metallic Corporation. 17 USG Interiors, Inc. 18 19 20 FXF.CUTION 21 22 General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per 23 manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 24 25 Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with 26 ASTM E 580. 27 28 U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 47 -18. 29 30 Suspend ceiling hatters as follows: 31 32 Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above. Connect hangers 33 either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are 34 appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or 35 elevated temperatures. 36 37 Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly 38 from hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) 39 from ends of each member. 40 41 oldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where 42 necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 43 44 Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. 45 Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 46 47 Install runners at offsets and irregular spacings as noted on plan to allow for uniform continuation of 48 ceiling tile scoring pattern. 49 50 Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners 51 and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 52 53 Rabbet gfs of cut ceiling tiles to match tegular edge detail, allowing tile to lay flat. 54 55 56 57 END OF SECTION 09511 58 09511 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS 3 4 GENERA' 5 6 Sus: As follows: 7 8 Product Data: For each type of product specified. 9 10 Samples: In manufacturer's standard size of each different color and pattern floor covering 11 specified. 12 13 Maintenance Dom: For floor coverings to include in the maintenance manuals specified in 14 Division 1. 15 16 Extra Materi Furnish not less than 10 linear feet in roll fonn for each 500 linear feet or fraction 17 thereof, of each different composition, wearing surface, color, and pattern of floor covering installed. 18 Deliver extra materials to Owner. 19 20 21 PRODUCTS 22 23 Linoleum Flooring #1: (Located in room #127) 24 25 Product Manufactures Gerbert Limited (for DLW Germany) 26 27 Pattern: Marmorette (marbled texture) 28 29 Color: 121 -36 30 31 Thickness: 2 5 mm 32 33 34 Linoleum Flooring (all other locations scheduled for resilient floor) 35 36 Product Manufacturer: Gerbert Limited (for DLW Germany) 37 38 Pattern: Marmorette (marbled texture) 39 40 Color. 121 -24 41 42 Thickness: 2 5 mm 43 44 45 Tmwglable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, portland- cement -based formulation 46 provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. 47 48 Adhesives: Water based, low VOC type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and 49 substrate conditions indicated. 50 51 Cove Strip: 1- inch radius support for integral flash cove base provided or approved by floor 52 covering manufacturer. 53 54 Cove -Base Cap StriQ: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap for integral flash cove base provided or 55 approved by floor covering manufacturer. 56 RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS 096501 1 1 Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect 2 exposed edge of resilient floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running 3 joints. 4 5 6 7 EXECUTION 8 9 Examine substrates. areas. and conditions where installation of resilient floor coverings will occur, 10 with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and 11 conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with requirements specified. 12 13 Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and are dry and free 14 of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive 15 bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests 16 recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 17 18 Wood Subfloors: Verify that underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that 19 may interfere with adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain floor coverings. 20 21 gumanac&al with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 22 23 preparation: Comply with floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions for 24 preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient floor coverings. 25 26 Installation: Comply with floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions. 27 28 Lay jmucsilicaligusgygringa to comply with the following requirements: 29 30 Maintain uniformity of resilient floor covering direction. 31 32 Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low- traffic 33 areas, and not less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 34 35 Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams. 36 37 Avoid cross seams. 38 39 Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, form integral flash cove base by flashing floor 40 covering up vertical surfaces. Support floor covering at horizontal and vertical junction with 41 cove strip. Butt floor covering at top of base against cap strip. 42 43 Hand roll resilient floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in 44 adhesive and eliminate trapped air. 45 46 Clean and protect resilient floor coverings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 47 Clean floor coverings after installation and not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for 48 inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. 49 50 51 END OF SECTION 09650 52 09650 2 RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittals: As follows: 8 9 product Data: For each type of product specified. 10 11 Samples: In manufacturer's standard sizes of each product color and pattern specified. 12 13 Extra Materials: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of 14 each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. Deliver extra materials to 15 Owner. 16 17 18 FROM JCTS 19 20 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated: 21 22 Vinyl Wall Base: 23 24 Type: Standard toe base 25 26 Height: 4" 27 28 Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range 29 30 31 Where noted, provide 6" base as follows: 32 33 Type: Straight with no toe 34 35 Height: 6" 36 37 Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range 38 39 40 Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, portland-cement -based formulation 41 provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. 42 43 Adhesives: Water based, low VOC type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and 44 substrate conditions indicated. 45 46 47 EXECUTION 48 49 Examine substrates. areas. and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with 50 Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum 51 moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product 52 installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until 53 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 54 55 Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates 56 indicated to receive resilient products. 57 58 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1 2 3 4 Installation: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. 5 6 Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and 7 other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 8 9 Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of 10 adjacent pieces aligned. 11 12 Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in 13 continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 14 15 Do not stretch base during installation. 16 17 Fonn comers on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening 18 at bends. 19 20 Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with 21 adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 22 23 24 Clean and protect resilient product according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Clean 25 resilient products after installation and not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections 26 intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. 27 28 29 END OF SECTION 09653 30 09653 2 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 SECTION 09680 CARPET GENFRAT See section 06100 for carpet underlayment board Submittals: Submit Product Data for each type of carpet, adhesive, and the following: IS Qp Drgwingg showing carpet type, color, and dye lot; types, and methods; type of subfloor, and type of installation. Seaming ^rams to illustrate that directional pattern will be uninterrupted Samples of each type of carpet material required. Maintenance data for carpet to include in the operation and maintenance manual. pet Surface Flammabilitty: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84. Subfloor Moisture Conditiong: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. Furnish full -width carpet equal to 5 percent of amount installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents, before installation begins. PRODUCTS Provide products in 12' standard width, meeting the following performance standards: Methenamine pill test (ASTM -D- 2859): Passes Flooring radiant panel test (ASTM -E -648): Class I N.B.S. Smoke chamber test (ASTM -E -662): Less than 450 Electrostatic Propensity Test (AATC -134): Less than 3.0 KV Carpet 1 (Field Carpet): Manufacturer. Prince Street Style/ Pattern: Jalapenos Color: Construction; Surface Texture; Face Fiber: Dv Mgt: Tufte Yam Weight: Gauge; Pile Height: Total Weight; Primary Backing: Secondary Backing: War anty: Representative: 236431 -002, custom Sculpted Textural Pattern Performance loop pile 100% Monsanto Ultron VIP,6.6Nylon Yam dyed 39 oz 3/16" 5/32" 79 oz per square yard Closed weave polyolefin HDR Backing 10 Year wear warranty Loie Markwood (206) 322 -0495 1 2 3 Carpet 2: 4 Manufacturer. 5 Style/ Pattern; 6 Color. 7 Construction; 8 Face Fiber. 9 Dye Method. 10 Pile Height: 11 Stiches per inch; 12 Pile Weil 13 Primary Backing: 14 Secondary Backing: 15 Warranty: 16 Representative; 17 18 19 Carpet 3: 20 Manufacturer. 21 Style/ Pattern; 22 Color, 23 Construction; 24 Face Fiber. 25 12ye Method: 26 Pile Height: Stiches per inch; pile Weigh: Peary Backing: Secondary Backing: Warranty Representative: 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Carpet 4: Manufacturer: Style/ Pattern: Color. Construction; Face Fiber: Dye Method: Pile Heigh Stiches per inch; Pile Weight: Backing: Secondary Backing; Warranty: Representative; Shaw Commercial Scepter 50391 Mossglen 91307 Tufted cut pile 100% Monsanto LXI Type 6.6 Nylon Beck dyed .344" 11.7 42 oz Polypropylene Action Bac 10 Year wear warranty Jim Harding (800) 424 -7429 Shaw Commercial Scepter 50391 Lupine 91901 Tufted cut pile 100% Monsanto LXI Type 6.6 Nylon Beck dyed .344 11.7 42 oz Polypropylene Action Bac 10 Year wear warranty Jim Harding (800) 424 -7429 Shaw Commercial Scepter 50391 Marigold 91203 Tufted cut pile 100% Monsanto LXI Type 6.6 Nylon Beck dyed .344 11.7 42 oz Polypropylene Action Bac 10 Year wear warranty Jim Harding (800) 424 -7429 Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compound': As recommended by the carpet manufacturer Adhesives: Water based, solvent -free, low VOC nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the manufacturer. 09680 2 aRPET 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar moduct recommended by carpet manufacturer 2 for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at 3 seams. 4 5 6 F:XF,CT JT[ON 7 8 Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with 9 requirements specified in this Section and those of the carpet manufacturer 10 11 Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. 12 13 Ise leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as 14 recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 15 16 Remove subfloor coatings_ including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible 17 with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. 18 19 Broom or vacuum clegn subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors 20 for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. 21 22 Reslient- Flooring Substrate PreR ra ion: Replace missing pieces of existing resilient flooring or 23 patch to level as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 24 25 Direct Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue- Down." 26 27 Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; 28 maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in 29 closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 30 31 Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 32 33 Jnstall carpet on insets in electrical floor boxes. 34 35 Hand edge bind carpet edges where abutting stained concrete to minimize exposed edge profile. 36 37 Vacuum cgrga using commercial machine with face beater element. 38 39 protection: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." 40 41 42 END OF SECTION 09680 43 caner Ovum- 2 SECTION 09900 PAINTING 111 3 4 5 GFNERAT, 6 I 7 Refer to Section 03355 for concrete staining systems 8 9 Refer to Section 06402 for fabricator finished casework 10 1 11 Refer to section 07190 for water repellant 12 13 Refer to Section 009220 for acrylic finish on soffits 1 14 15 16 This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items 17 and surfaces. I 18 19 Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop 20 priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 21 I 22 paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to 23 be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a 24 surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not I 25 schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select 26 from standard colors and finishes available. 27 28 Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and I 230 9 labels. 31 Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code 32 required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. I 33 34 Submittals: For each paint system specified, provide the following: 35 I 36 Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and 37 cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by 38 manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 39 I 40 Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label 41 analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for 42 use. 43 I 44 Material Safety Data Sheet: for each material proposed 45 46 Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available I 47 for each type of finish -coat material indicated. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color 48 chips for surfaces to be coated. 49 50 Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual I 51 conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 52 53 Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: 54 I 55 painted Wood,: Provide two 12-inch- square samples of each color and material on 56 hardboard. 57 1 I TAINrnQC Mr:-r 1 2 3 53 54 55 56 57 58 Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by -8 -inch samples of natural or stained -wood finish on actual wood surfaces. 4 Ferrous Mew: Provide two 4- inch square samples of flat metal and two 8 -inch- long 5 samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 6 7 Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same 8 manufacturer as the finish coats. 9 10 Deliver materiall to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers 11 bearing manufacturer's name and label. 12 13 Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient 14 temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and 15 residue. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste 16 daily. 17 18 project Condition&: Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity 19 exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet 20 surfaces. 21 22 23 pRODUCTS 24 25 Exterior Materials; 26 27 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the 28 following: 29 30 Benjamin Moore Co 31 Best Paint Company 32 Columbia Paint Company 33 Dutch Boy Paints 34 Fuller O'Brien 35 Glidden Co 36 Parker Paint Co 37 Pittsburgh Paints 38 Pratt Lambert 39 Preservative Paint Co 40 Rodda Paint Co 41 Sherwin Williams 42 43 Penetrating Ste; Oil based Semi Transparent stain (FS 1T -S -708) 44 45 Metal Printer, Synthetic Rust Inhibiting primer (FS 1T- P-664) 46 47 Galvanized Primer. Galvanized metal primer (FS TT-P -641) 48 49 Exterior Enamel: Alkyd Enamel, Semi -Gloss (FS TT -E -489) 50 51 Exterior Latex: Flat exterior latex 52 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Interior Materials; 3 4 Wall Primer, Low VOC, water based product "PVA 050" by Best Paint Co, or approved. 5 6 Metal Primers: Low VOC, water based acrylic product 7 8 Wall Paint: Provide materials free of pesticide or mildewcide additives, with VOCs of less than 20 9 gr litre. Provide products of one of the following: 10 11 Best Paints, Seattle, WA 12 Miller Paint Co, Portland, OR 13 Benjamin Moore 14 15 Interior Enamel: Low VOC, water based acrylic product, semi -gloss 16 17 Stain: Water based product, custom mixed without added biocides, "Basic Quick -Dry by Basic 18 Coatings, Inc, or approved. 19 20 Sanding Sealer. Low VOC, water based product 21 22 Clear finish: Water based product without added biocides, "Crystal Shield by Pace Chem 23 Industries, "Clear Polyshield by Hydrocoat, or approved 24 25 26 Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types 27 specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be 28 acceptable. 29 30 Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or 31 materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion 32 of equivalent products of other manufacturers. 33 34 Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible 35 with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as 36 demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 37 38 C o1o.: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. 39 40 41 J'XECUTIOP( 42 43 Examine substrates. areas. and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance 44 with paint application requirements. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have 45 been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 46 47 Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility 48 of the total system for various substrates. 49 50 Preparation: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, 51 and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible 52 because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface 53 preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items 54 removed using workers skilled in the trades involved 55 56 57 58 1 2 Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that 3 could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule 4 cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, 5 newly painted surfaces. 6 7 Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written 8 instructions for each particular substrate condition. 9 10 Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and 11 sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 12 13 Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other 14 recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and 15 imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 16 17 Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, 18 undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. 19 20 Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or 21 sealer immediately on delivery. 22 23 Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; 24 remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical 25 cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) 26 recommendations. 27 28 Touch up bare areas and shop applied grime coax that have been damaged. Wire- brush, 29 clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer 30 as the shop coat. 31 32 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is 33 free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal 34 fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 35 36 Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written 37 instructions. 38 39 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during 40 application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain 41 material before using. 42 43 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 44 45 Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and 46 techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 47 48 Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 49 50 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to 51 formation of a durable paint film. 52 53 Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 54 55 The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in items are in place. 56 Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired 57 protection. 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. 2 Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or 3 furniture with prime coat only. 4 5 Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 6 7 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or vanish coat. 8 9 Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise 10 prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface 11 deterioration. 12 13 The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application 14 method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by 15 the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to 16 manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 17 18 If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats 19 until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure 20 edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to 21 that of flat surfaces. 22 23 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces 24 until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb 25 pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or 26 lose adhesion. 27 28 Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators 29 according to manufacturer's written instructions. 30 31 Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended 32 spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the 33 manufacturer. 34 35 Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the 36 manufacturer, to material that 1s required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated 37 by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in 38 first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient 39 sealing. 40 41 Completed Wo$: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or 42 repaint work not complying with requirements. 43 44 Field Ouality Control: The Owner reserves the right to engage the services of an independent testing 45 agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be 46 taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 47 48 If tests show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor 49 shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously 50 coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected 51 paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are 52 incompatible. 53 54 Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint 55 materials from the site. 56 57 After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by 58 washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 1 2 Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct 3 damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. 4 5 Provide "Wet P int" si s to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings 6 provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 7 8 At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 9 defaced painted surfaces. 10 11 12 P ATNT SCHEDTTLF,: 13 14 Exterior Work: 15 16 General: Paint all ferrous, galvanized and shop- primed metal surfaces, unless noted otherwise. Paint 17 all metal surfaces of mechanical, piping and electrical items. Paint all metal flashing not factory 18 finished. Paint exterior wood trim. Stain exterior fences, lattices, and glu -lams at exterior locations. 19 20 Brick: See section 07180 for water repellent treatment 21 22 Stained Wood (Exposed framing, fences): 2 coats penetrating stain 23 24 painted Wood (Fiberboard trim): 2 coats exterior latex on pre- primed materials 25 26 Ferrous Metal: Primer required except on shop- primed items 27 28 One coat metal primer 29 Two coats Exterior Enamel 30 31 Zinc- Coated Mew: 2 finish coats over primer 32 33 One coat Galvanized Metal Primer 34 Two coats Exterior Enamel 35 36 37 Ulterior Work: 38 39 Concrete floor: See section 03355 for concrete stains and sealers 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Natural Finish Woodwork (Doors. trim noted as "Hardwood" "Maple" or "Clear flr"f: 51 One coat stain 52 One coat sanding sealer 53 Two coats clear finish 54 55 Ferrous Metal: (Exposed steel decking and structure, hollow metal, exposed fabrications) 56 Primer is required except on shop- primed items. 57 One coat primer 58 Two coats interior enamel Gypsum Drywall Systems: One coat wall primer applied prior to texturing One coat wall primer applied after texturing Finish coat: Wall paint (eggshell) I II 1).'.+ 1.8 8 8 8 y 88 88 8 :i .8 19 u One coat primer Two coats interior enamel I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 painting on Mechanical and Electrical Wotk: Paint or enamel the following items two coats to match 4 adjacent surfaces where adjacent surfaces are painted or where any painting or stain is scheduled in 5 those spaces or in moms where items are added and no painting is scheduled. 6 7 All items which receive prime coat under Mechanical and Electrical specifications. 8 9 All exposed piping, pipe covering, ducts, grilles, registers, radiators and similar. 10 11 All grilles, registers and similar shall be spray painted. 12 13 All exposed conduit, boxes, panelboards and similar. 14 15 16 pATNT COLORS: 17 18 All colors are to be custom mixed to match Architect provided samples. 19 20 Allow for six different interior colors: 21 22 Exposed steel decking 23 24 Exposed steel structure 25 26 Hollow metal frames and doors 27 28 Gypsum wallboard (2 colors, plus one deep toned accent color) 29 30 31 Allow for six different exterior colors: 32 33 Metal copings and flashings 34 35 Exposed steel decking 36 37 Exposed steel structure 38 39 Hollow metal frames and doors 40 41 Existing wood trim (service center) 42 43 Composite wood trim (Socomi -Lam) 44 45 46 47 48 END OF SECTION 09900 49 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS GENERAL Refer to section 06200 for display surface "Slotwall") Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned elevations. Show location of joints between individual panels where unit dimensions exceed maximum panel length. Include sections of typical trim members. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. PRODUCTS Tackboards And ocksurfacesLyabric wrapped around and lamonated to 1/2" Homasote board, or to composite 1/4" thick seamless cork sheet over 1/4" plywood or hardboard backing. Wrap edges over board and conceal fasteners on back. Fabric; Product/ Manufacturer: Pattern: Style No: Color: Width: Content: Representative: Guilford of Maine Orissa Panel Fabric 2818 -043 Chambal 66" 92% Polyester, 8% Polypropylene Guilford of Maine (800) 544 -0200 Whiteboards: Porcelain enamel writing surface which will accept magnets or magnetic aids. Provide without trim. Match PBS /Alliance Whyte Board, color, white W402 -as detailed. EXECUTION Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. Coordinate Proiect- site assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. END OF SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1UIOU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 2 3 GENERAL: 4 5 Submittals: Shop drawings, manufacturer's data and installation instructions. 6 7 8 pROD! JCTS: 9 10 Manufacturer: Provide toilet partitions as manufactured by one of the following or approved: 11 12 Accurate Partitions 13 Global Steel Products Corp. 14 Knickerbocker Partition Corp. 15 National Partitions 16 Sanymetal Products Co. 17 18 Toilet Partitions: Flush type, overhead braced, floor mounted, plastic laminate faces. 19 20 Plastic Laminate: Wilsonart #7061 -60 "Natural Pear". 21 22 Pilaster Shoed AISI Type 302/304, 20 -gage stainless steel, 3" high, finish to match hardware. 23 Furnish shoes at each pilaster. 24 25 Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard, non ferrous alloy with satin chrome finish. 26 27 Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, heavy -duty operating hardware and accessories, 28 non-ferrous cast alloy with satin chrome finish. 29 30 Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard theft -proof exposed fasteners, finished to match 31 hardware. 32 33 Floor -Suo rted Pilasters: 1 -1/4" thick, with galvanized steel anchorage complete with threaded rods, 34 lock washers, and leveling nuts. 35 36 Overhead Braced Pilasters: 1 -1/4" thick, with galvanized steel floor supports and leveling bolts. 37 Overhead brace, continuous extruded aluminum tube, anti -grip design with clear anodized finish, 38 unless otherwise indicated. Set and secure brace into top of each pilaster. 39 40 Wall -Hung Screens: 1" thick units, size as indicated, of same construction and finish as partition 41 system panels. 42 43 Provide brackets, base anchorages and shoes to match compartment units. 44 45 Hardware and Accessories: Furnish for each door, as follows: 46 47 Hingg Either surface mounted or cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 48 90 deg. 49 50 Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. 51 52 Coat Hook and Bum= Manufacturer's standard unit, rubber- tipped. 53 54 Door Pulis: Manufacturer's standard. 55 56 57 58 10155 1 1 2 3 EXECUTION: 4 5 6 Installation; Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's 7 printed instructions. Set units with not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and not more 8 than 1" clearances between panels and walls. 9 10 Hardware Adjustments: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after installation. 11 12 Set hinges on in -swing doors to hold open approximately 30 deg from the closed position when 13 unlatched. 14 15 Set hinges on out -swing doors to return to fully closed position. 16 17 W. 1- Mounted Screens: Attach with heavy -duty, concealed anchoring devices, including wall 18 channels, wall plates and studs as recommended by manufacturer. 19 20 Cleaning a d Final Adtmentt Perform final adjustments to leveling devices, door hardware, and 21 other operating parts. Clean exposed surfaces and touch up minor finish imperfections using 22 materials and methods recommended by partition manufacturer. 23 24 Replace damaged units which cannot be satisfactorily field repaired, as directed by Architect. 25 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 10155 29 T155 2 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 10425 SIGNS 2 3 4 GENERAL 5 6 Allowance: Include an allowance of $1500.00 for purchase and installation of an exterior sign and 7 lighting. 8 9 Submittals: Submit the following: 10 11 Shop Drawing: Provide plans, elevations, and sections showing typical members, anchors, 12 layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. Include the following: 13 14 Message list for each sign with wording and letter layout. 15 16 Setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchors. 17 18 Furnish full -size rubbings for metal plaques. 19 20 Samples: For initial selection of color, pattern, and surface texture, and for verification of 21 compliance with requirements indicated. 22 23 Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: 8- 112 -by -11-inch sample panel for each material, 24 color, texture, and pattern Show graphic image process showing style, colors and finishes. 25 2 6 Full -size sample of each letter type. 27 28 PRODUCTS 29 30 Miscellaneous_Meti1 .Signs: Size and Text as indicated on drawings. Enameled Aluminum signs with 31 raised edges. 32 33 Anchors and Inserts: Non ferrous metal or hot dipped galvanized. Use toothed steel or lead 34 expansion bolts for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts to be set into concrete or masonry work. 35 36 Interior Signs: Plaque signs composed of engraved plastic, adhesively mounted. Color as selected by 37 Architect. Provide Braille teat on ea sign. 38 39 Rest Rooms: 6" x 6" size, two with text "Men two with text "Woman three with text 40 "Restroom" all engraved with International Symbol of Access. Mount where directed. 41 42 General Interior Sips: :Provide Eight (8) additional 6" x 6" signs, text to be determined. 4 3 Mount as directed. 44 45 &dace Mounted Letters: Provide smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and 46 profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back and tap to receive 47 threaded mounting studs. 48 49 Material: Cast Aluminum 50 51 Finit: Brushed 52 5 3 Height: 12" at library (6" for address characters), 8" at Service Center 54 55 Thickness: 1" to 1 1 /2" for 8" and 12" heights, 3 /4" to 1" for 6" height 56 5 7 ant: Times 58 10425 1 1 2 Plaques: To be provided by owner and installed by Contractor (4 locations) 3 4 5 EXECUTION 6 7 Installation: Locate signs where indicated, using mounting methods specified. Install level, plumb, 8 and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. 9 10 11 Dimensional Letters and Nurnberg: Mount characters using methods recommended for letter form, 12 type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper 13 template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 14 15 Flu LMoBnting: Backs in contact with wall surface. 16 17 18 Cast Metal Plaques: Use method recommended for wall surface. 19 20 Cone lam, Mounting: Use threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in 21 pm-drilled holes filled with quick setting cement. 22 23 24 Cleaning: After installation, clean soiled surfaces. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the 25 Owner. 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 10425 29 10425 2 SFAS 1 1 1 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 2 3 GENERAL 1 4 5 Submittals: Submit the following: 6 7 Product Data: Include rough -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of I 8 box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, 9 door construction, panel style, and materials. 10 I 11 Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers 12 indicated. 13 14 UL- Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and I 15 classification of extinguisher. 16 17 Where noted "Fire extinguisher cabinet or "FE Cab provide cabinet with extinguisher. 18 II 19 20 PRODUCTS 21 I 22 Fire Extinguishers: 23 24 Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL -rated 2A -10BC 5-lb nominal capacity, in red enameled 25 steel container. I 26 27 Cabinet Construction: Box with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and 28 door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 29 I 30 Semirecessed: Partially recessed in walls of shallow depth. 31 32 1 33 Trim Style: One piece with comers mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 34 35 Exposed Trim: One -piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping 36 surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge. 1 37 3 8 Rolled -edge with 2-1f2-inch backbend depth. 39 40 Metal: Enameled steel. 1 41 42 Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard of material indicated, coordinated with 43 cabinet types and trim styles selected. I 44 45 Enameled Steel: Hollow construction with tubular stiles and rails. 46 47 Door Gluing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, 1 48 Quality q3, Kind FT, and Class as follows: 49 50 Class 1 (clear). 51 I 52 53 Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, 54 spacing, and location. I 55 56 Application Process: Silk screen. 57 1 FIRE EXTINGUISI AND ACCESSORIES 10522 1 1 M 1 Door Hardware: Provide door operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and 2 door material and style indicated. Provide lever handle with cam- action latch, or exposed or 3 concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous -type hinge permitting door 4 to open 180 degrees. 5 6 Cabinet Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual." Protect exposed finishes from 7 damage by application of temporary strippable covering prior to shipment. 8 9 Factory- Priming for Field Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately following surface 10 preparation and pretreatment. 11 12 Shop Primer: Fast curing, lead -free, universal primer. 13 14 15 EXECUTION 16 17 Installation: Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. 18 19 Install at heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of 20 goveming authorities. 21 22 prepare wall recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to 23 comply with manufacturer's instructions. 24 25 Fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 10522 29 10522 2 PIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 56 56 57 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 10651 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS GENERAL Submittals: Submit product data and finish samples. Shop drawings showing anchorage details, conditions at openings, location and installation requirements for hardware, and direction of travel. Template for mounting bolt pattern for use of steel fabricator Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. Flame spread of 25 or less; smoke developed, 450 or less. Sound Transmission Reauirementg: ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413 and rated for an STC plus or minus 1 as follows: Sound Transmission Class (STC): 47. PRODUCTS Provide products manufactured by one of the following: Foldoor/Holcomb Hoke Hufcor Air Wall Industrial Acoustics Kwik -Wall Co Modernfold, Inc Panelfold, Inc Panel Configuration: Manually operated, top supported paired panels. Pgne1 Cpnstruction: Top reinforcing as required to support suspension components and as follows: Frame: Steel Face sheet, Steel Thickness: 3" Insulation; As required to achieve STC rating Finish Material: Fabric as follows: Product/ Manufacturer. Pattem: Style No: Color: Width Content: Representative: Guilford of Maine Orissa Panel Fabric 2818 -043 Chambal 66" 92% Polyester, 8% Polypropylene Guilford of Maine (800) 544 -0200 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1 2 3 Top and edge seals: Multi -finger PVC, continous contact 4 5 Bottom Seals, Manually operated retractable seals, operable without tools 6 7 Track System; Steel, with steel soffit, bracket mounted to structure above 8 9 Trolleys: Steel, with ball bearing steel wheels 10 11 12 13 EXECUTION 14 15 Installation: ASTM E 557. 16 17 Startup Seryices: Demonstrate and train Owner's representative on procedures and schedules related 18 to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 19 20 21 END OF SECTION 10651 22 10651 2 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submittals: Manufacturer's product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of 8 construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting methods, specified options, 9 and finishes. 10 11 12 PRODUCTS 13 14 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of the 15 following: 16 17 A J Washroom Accessories. 18 American Specialties, Inc. 19 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 20 Bradley Corporation. 21 General Accessory Manufacturing Co. 22 McKinney/Parker. 23 24 Materials. General: Fabricate toilet accessory items from the following materials and according to 25 requirements specified for individual accessory items: 26 27 Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034 -inch (22 -gage) minimum 28 thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 29 30 Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products 31 with finished edges, ASTM B 16; Castings, ASTM B 30. 32 33 Sheet Steel: Cold- rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 0.04 -inch (20 -gage) minimum 34 thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for 35 applied finish. 36 37 Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60. 38 39 Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type 40 SC 2. 41 42 Mirrpr Glui: Nominal 6.0 -mm (0.23 -inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, 43 Quality q2, and with silvering, electro- plated copper coating, and protective organic coating. 44 45 Galvanizeeel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. 46 47 F teners Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized 48 steel where concealed. 49 50 Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for 51 servicing, resupply, etc. Provide a minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 B 165 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 EXECUTION 28 Toilet Accessories (Bobrick numbers referenced): T1 Seat cover dispenser T2 Toilet Paper Dispenser T3 Mop Holder T4 Towel/waste unit T5 Soap Dispenser T7 Feminine Napkin Disposal T8 Mirror shelf unit T9 Cup Dispenser T10 Grab bar (36 T11 Grab bar (48 T12 Hook T13 Paper Towel Dispenser B -221 B -2840 B -223 x 24 B -3944 B-4112 B -270 B -292 2436 B -235 B -6806 x 36" B -6806 x 48" B -211 B -262 Mirrors Baby Changing Unit (T6) Wall mounted horizontally opening changing table, Diaper Deck as manufactured by American Infant Care Products, or approved. 29 Installation: Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' printed installation instructions, 30 using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb 31 and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 32 33 Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or 34 screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with 35 manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. 36 37 Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. 38 Replace damaged or defective items. 39 40 Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after 41 removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 10800 45 10800 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 10900 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 3 4 GENERAL L 5 6 Submittals: Manufacturer's product data for each item specified, including details of construction 7 relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting methods, specified options, and finishes. 8 9 PRODUCT 10 11 mansion Joints: Reassembled units complete with accessories and transition elements 12 13 mandagarsiudixpra Series SRJ, by Pawling, Inc, Series FRW, byFlextone, Inc, or approved 14 15 Bellows; Black EPDM 16 17 auger Mill finish aluminum 18 19 20 Dike Rack: "Super Cycloops" Model #2175 -10, as manufactured by Columbia Cascade Co, Portland, 21 Oregon, or approved meeting the following criteria: 22 23 Construction; 4 1/2" diameter frame pipe with smaller vertical dividers 24 25 Capacity; 10 bikes (8' -5" length) 26 27 Finish: Galvanized 28 29 Mounting method: Direct imbedment 30 31 32 Corner Guards: Pawling Corporation CG -10 guard with TC -10 cap. Endwall protection CG -11 33 guard with two TC -10 caps. Color as selected by architect from manufacturer's standard color range. 34 35 Ouantity: 16 (verify locations with Architect) 36 37 38 Key box: Recess mounted steel box with tamper switch, model #2 HSR -TS as manufactured by 39 SupraSafe, Inc. Coordinate ordering of unit with Fire Chief. 40 41 Wall access Door. Flush doors with exposed trim, as follows: 42 43 File: 16 gauge steel sheet. 44 45 nom: 14 gauge steel sheet. 46 47 Hinge: Continuous type. 48 49 Latches: Bolt type, operated by a ring turn 50 51 52 Roof Hatch: Provide unit of size indicated, with integrally insulated curbs and hatch door, 1" thick 53 fiberglass sandwich insulation, neoprene gaskets, hardware including self- lifting mechanism, hold 54 open device, and exterior latch handle. 55 56 BIlco Type "S or approved 57 58 Metal Clad Base; Architectural aluminum, brushed finish, formed to shapes indicated MISCELLANEOUS 'SPECIALTIES 1 1 1 2 3 4 FXECUTTON 5 6 Install miscellaneous specialties as detailed on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's I 7 recommendations. Installations to be level, true and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 8 9 Clean all items, apply touch up paint as needed, at substantial completion. I 10 11 12 END OF SECTION 10900 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10900 2 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11900 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 2 3 GENERAL; 4 5 Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 6 7 Shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens including location of screen 8 centerline, location of wiring connections, seams in viewing surfaces, connections to suspension 9 systems for pendant- mounted and recess mounted screens, anchorage details, and accessories. 10 11 12 FROM JCTS; 13 14 p jection screen: Draper "LumaLectric" Series, or approved electrically operated screen. 15 16 Size; 7' high x 9' wide 17 18 Screen Surface: Fiberglass matte white 19 20 Controls; Single station 3 position toggle switch 21 22 23 Dookdrops: Mosier #615 SD, or approved. Provide locking bookdrop doors 24 25 26 Residential Equipment: Specified models are General Electric, other manufacturers with comparable 27 features by prior approval 28 29 Microwave Undercabinet): Model #JEM 21L "Spacemaker II 800 watt output, .8 cu ft 30 capacity. Provide undercabinet mounting kit. 31 32 Refrigerator:: Model #TBX 16S1S Frost free, top mounted freezer, 15.6 cu ft capacity, with 33 built in icemaker. 34 35 3 6 EXECUTION; 37 3 8 Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, complete with all mounting 39 accessories. Leave in clean, smoothly operating condition. 40 41 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 11900 45 iTSTEMANEM EQ UIPME NT 11900 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 12511 WINDOW BLINDS 3 4 5 GENERA!, 6 7 Submittals: In addition to product data for each type of blind, submit the following: 8 9 Samples of each color slat required. 10 11 Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide blinds tested per NFPA 701, Small Scale Vertical Burn Test 12 and listed for rating indicated by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 13 authorities having jurisdiction. 14 15 1 6 FROM JETS 17 18 Horizontal louver blinds: comply with American Window Covering Manufacturers Association 19 (AWCMA) Document 1029, and as follows: 20 21 Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch (mini blinds.) 22 23 Slat Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for 24 horizontal blinds specified. 25 26 Cord Lock Operation: Cord lock, locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or 27 descending travel. 28 29 Cord Egyaliyers: Self aligning to maintain horizontal blind position. 30 31 Unit Sizes: Fill openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 32 33 Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width and length equal to 1/2 inch less than 34 opening. 35 36 Blind Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations 3 7 between blinds of end to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical 3 8 separations between openings. 39 40 Installation Fasteners: Not less than two fasteners per bracket. 41 42 Locations: Windows #44, 45, 46,47,48 43 Relights #54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 44 45 46 47 Light Blocking Shades: Manually operated roller shade with side channels and sill channel mounted 4 8 to window opening 49 5 0 Manufacturer and type; FlexShade "LightBloc as manufactured by Draper Shade Screen 51 Co, or approved 52 5 3 Operation: Spring Roller 54 55 Fabric; As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard light blocking fabrics 56 5 7 Locations: Windows 1103, 04, 05 58 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 1 1 2 3 4 rOCECUTION 5 6 Finishing Operations: Complete all fmishing operations, including painting, before beginning 7 installation. 8 9 stall blinds level. plumb. and located so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch to interior face 10 of glass lites. Gaps between slat ends and jambs do not exceed 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/8 inch, and 11 bottom rail in fully lowered position is within 1/2 inch of bottom of window or other opening. 12 13 Install Light Blocking Blinds with continous seal at window perimeter. Adjust for smooth operation. 14 15 16 17 18 END OF SECTION 12511 19 12511 2 fIORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ,SECTION 12620 SEAT CUSHIONS 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submit manufacturer's product data and samples of materials and finishes. 8 9 Work inclu: Provide upholstered cushions for built in seat 10 11 PRODUCTS 12 1 3 Box cushions Custom fabricated, with zippered back and dense foam, 3 1/2" thickness 14 15 Fabric 16 1 7 Manufacturer: Arc Com 18 Name: Avenue 19 Number: AC -64471 2 0 Color: Midnight #25 21 Content: 76% Cotton, 24% Rayon 2 2 Width: 54" 2 3 Repeat 1" H x 1/14" V 24 2 5 Note: Fabric is a stripe, stripe must run front to back of bench, not lengthwise 26 27 28 EXECUTION 29 3 0 Field measure window seat prior to fabrication 31 3 2 It_jskall cuuhiong plumb with bench 33 3 4 35 36 3 7 END OF SECTION 12620 SEAT CUSHIONS 12620- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 12690 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 3 4 5 GENERAL 6 7 Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications: 8 9 product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified. 10 11 Samples: 12- inch square section of floor mat showing full range of colors, textures, and 12 variations expected. 13 14 Manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and care of floor mats. 15 16 17 PRODUCTS 18 19 Rubber Mat: 12" x 12" X 3/8" thick "Tirex" tile, color "Natural" as manufactured by Pacific Mat, or 20 approved. 21 22 Adhesive: As supplied by manufacturer 23 24 Frame (Exterior locations only): Manufacturer's standard aluminum angle frame 25 26 27 F:XFC1ITIOM 28 29 Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Place all tiles running in the same direction, 30 perpendicular to traffic flow. 31 32 33 Protection: After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of 34 plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain 35 protection during construction and install floor mats just prior to time of Project Substantial 36 Completion. 37 38 39 END OF SECTION 12690 40 MOOR MATS AND FRAME$ 12690 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 2 3 PART1- GENERAL 4 5 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 6 7 AIA Document A201 "General conditions of the Contract for Construction" with supplements thereto, 8 special conditions and applicable portions of Division 1 are hereby made a part of this division of the 9 specifications and shall apply to work under this Division of the specifications. 10 11 WORK INCLUDED 12 13 The work of Division 15 consists of providing labor and products, and of performing all operations required 14 for the complete operating installation of all mechanical systems as shown and specified, in strict 15 accordance with this and all sections of these specifications, applicable drawings, terms, and conditions of 16 the contract, and all applicable codes and ordinances governing installation of the various mechanical 17 systems. Coordinate all work fully with the work of other crafts. Provide all systems complete and in proper 18 operating order. This section of Division 15 is a part of all other sections of Division 15. 19 20 DIAGRAMMATIC DRAWINGS 21 22 Drawings and specifications are complementary, each to the other; what is shown on one is as binding as if 23 called for in both. 24 25 The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not show all offsets in ducts or piping or exact location of 26 piping, ducts, etc. Also, the drawings do not necessarily show in detail all features of the installation; 27 however, provide a complete and satisfactorily working installation. 28 29 Refer to details, diagrams and schematics, in addition to all Mechanical Specifications, for detailed 30 requirements for isolating valves, drain valves, vents, instruments, flexible connectors and similar 31 components. 32 33 If there appears to be insufficient space to install the mechanical work as shown, the A/E shall be notified 34 prior to proceeding with the work. Failure to comply with this requirement will be considered sufficient 35 cause to require altering the work, at no additional cost to the contract, as directed by the A/E. 36 37 CODES. PERMITS. STANDARDS. INSPECTIONS AND FEES 38 39 All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the current versions of the National Fire 40 Codes of the National Fire Protection Association, Uniform Building Code, Uniform Fire Code, Uniform 41 Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code, Federal, State and Local standards, applicable energy codes, 42 with the requirements of local utility companies, and with the requirements of all governmental agencies 43 and departments having jurisdiction. 44 45 All materials and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shall bear the approval 46 label, or shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 47 48 The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government sales taxes, fees 49 and other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with his work; file all necessary 50 plans, arrange for all necessary inspections, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of 51 all governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work, 52 and deliver three copies of same before request for acceptance and final payment for work. 53 54 The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost, any labor, materials, services, apparatus, 55 drawings, in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. 56 57 95112 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -1 1 Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed as directing or permitting work which is not 2 fully in conformance with Codes and Regulations. 3 4 Where the Drawings or Specifications indicate materials or construction which exceeds the quality or size 5 required by Codes and Regulations, the provisions of the Drawings or Specifications take precedence over 6 the requirements of the Codes and Regulations. 7 8 Any variance from code requirements shall be promptly reported to the A/E. No work shall be installed 9 which is not in accordance with Codes and Regulations. 10 11 REVIEW OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS 12 13 General: Procedures and requirements for submittals are addressed in Division 1. In addition, comply with 14 specific requirements of the individual sections and as noted herein. 15 16 Submittals: Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 15 and shown on the 17 Drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment submittals in 18 the manner described elsewhere in these Specifications. In addition, include data for review, organized as 19 noted below. No work shall begin or products ordered until submittals are approved. 20 21 Data Required for Review: Mark submittal literature clearly, bind 8 -1/2 x 11 literature in three hole, hard 22 backed, Iooseleaf binders by individual sets, and include all equipment and material shown on drawings 23 and specified. Submittals not organized and prepared as follows will be returned to the Contractor for 24 compliance prior to any detailed review. Indicate the following: 25 26 Table of Contents listed by specification index sections. 27 Individual tabs numbered by specification section. 28 Specification reference and /or drawing reference for which literature is submitted. 29 Manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address and telephone number. 30 Catalog designation or model number. 31 Rough -in data and dimensions. 32 Performance curves and rated capacities. 33 Motor characteristics and wiring diagrams. 34 Operation characteristics. 35 Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being 36 requested shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of item submitted shall be 37 clearly made. Data of a general nature will not be accepted. When equipment submitted is of a 38 different size or weight, or has different access, service or installation clearances, than the 39 designed equipment, the equipment submittals shall clearly note the differences. 40 Wiring diagrams for the specific system operation. 41 Working construction drawings (shop drawings). 42 43 Partial Submittals: If other than a complete submittal is made, the Contractor may make partial submittals 44 separated into complete specification section classifications. Piece -meal submittals will be returned without 45 review, except for special situations. 46 47 Submittal review is for general design and arrangement only, and does not relieve the Contractor from any 48 of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be checked for quantity, dimension, fit, 49 or proper technical design of manufactured equipment. Where deviations of substitute product or system 50 performance have not been specifically noted in the submittal by the Contractor, provision of a complete 51 and satisfactory working installation is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 52 53 15010 -2 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Equipment Deviations: 2 3 Items of equipment or material designated in the plans or specifications by use of a specific 4 manufacture and number are so noted to indicate a standard of design and not necessarily to be 5 restrictive. Substituted equipment or materials shall be equivalent in capacities, acoustical 6 performance and electrical requirements to the equipment used as the basis for the design. 7 8 Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on 9 the drawing which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or 10 any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, all new 11 drawings and detailing required therefore, and all additional construction costs, shall be prepared 12 by the Contractor at his own expense and approved by the A/E. 13 14 Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, 15 wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, the Contractor 16 shall furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, 17 motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the 18 system, at no additional cost to the Contract. 19 20 If the dimensions or access requirements for equipment submitted differ from equipment 21 dimensions or access requirements indicated on the drawings the submittals shall be clearly 22 marked to indicate the differences. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting equipment 23 which fits the available space as well as being equivalent to the specified equipment. 24 25 All materials shall be furnished and installed in conformance with Codes and Regulations. 26 27 All equipment of the same type, such as valves, fittings, fixtures, fans, control components, etc., 28 shall be products of the same manufacturer, used as recommended by the manufacturer. 29 30 SHOP DRAWINGS 31 32 Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and as specified under 33 each Section of the Specifications. 34 35 Prepare and submit working construction drawings where required to demonstrate proper planning for 36 installation and arrangement of all work for specified systems. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and show 37 dimensions where accuracy of location is necessary for coordination or communication purposes. Show 38 work of all trades which may be pertinent to proper and accurate coordination. Provide required shop 39 drawings for all air systems, sprinkler systems, mechanical rooms, equipment supports, and any product 40 which may be fabricated for the Contractor or by the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be prepared on 41 reproducible paper, all of the same size. 24" x 36" is the preferred drawing size. Scale of drawings shall be 42 as appropriate for the work shown, with 1/4 =1-0" the minimum acceptable scale. 43 44 Combined or separate shop drawings shall be prepared, as required, indicating: 45 Location, size and elevation of ductwork, seismic bracing, grilles, diffusers and registers, HVAC 46 equipment, equipment bases and stands, and access doors in ceilings and walls. 47 Location and elevation of piping, seismic bracing, valves, cleanouts, piping access doors and 48 plumbing fixtures. 49 Location, size and elevation of sprinkler piping, hangers, earthquake bracing, and equipment. 50 Location and elevation of electrical panels, transformers, junction boxes, sound speakers, cable 51 trays, large conduits, and electrical equipment where they may interfere with the mechanical 52 installation. 53 Location, size and elevation of beams, trusses, framing members, soffits, skylights, roof openings, 54 fire separations, ceiling heights and other general construction items where they may interfere with 55 the mechanical installation. 56 57 95112 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -3 1 Following completion of preliminary shop drawings, the Contractor and subcontractors shall review and 2 coordinate the shop drawings, resolve any conflicts and modify the shop drawings. The completed shop 3 drawings, for submittal to the A/E, shall represent all elements of the complete installation, in conformance 4 with the Contract requirements. 5 6 Review of shop drawings is to confirm compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall not be 7 considered as a guarantee of measurements of building conditions and conflicts. Where drawings are 8 reviewed, said review does not mean that the drawings have been checked in detail; said review does not in 9 any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work 10 as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the A/E of any 11 deviation from requirements of the Contract Documents. 12 13 Failure of the Contractor to submit drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle him to an extension 14 of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. 15 16 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 17 18 The schedule of Values for Mechanical work shall be prepared in accordance with Division 1 requirements. 19 The breakdown of Mechanical work shall include the following categories: 20 Mobilization and Demobilization 21 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 22 Water Piping, underground 23 Water Piping, above ground 24 Waste and Vent Piping, underground 25 Waste and Vent Piping, above ground 26 Plumbing Fixture rough -in and carriers 27 Plumbing Fixtures 28 Plumbing Piping Insulation 29 Fire Sprinklers rough -in 30 Fire Sprinklers finish 31 Air Conditioning Units and Heat Pumps 32 Exhaust Fans and Exhaust Hoods 33 Ductwork and Accessories 34 Grilles and Registers 35 Duct Insulation 36 Temperature Controls 37 38 ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS 39 40 NE Architect/Engineer 41 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 42 AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association 43 ANSI American National Standards Institute 44 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 45 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers 46 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 47 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 48 AWS American Welding Society 49 AWWA American Water Works Association 50 CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute 51 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 52 F degrees, Fahrenheit 53 FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic 54 FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation 55 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 56 MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society 57 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 15010 -4 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NEC National Electrical Code 2 NFPA National Fire Protection 3 psig pounds per square inch gage pressure 4 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 5 UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 6 v Volts 7 wp Working Pressure (psig) 8 wg Water gage 9 10 11 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY 12 13 Streamlining: In many instances, the products, reference standards, and other itemized specifications have 14 been listed without verbiage. In these cases, it is implied that the Contractor shall provide the products and 15 perform in accordance with the references listed. 16 17 "Provide as used in this division of the specifications, means furnish all material, labor, sub 18 contracts, and appurtenances required, including mark -up, and install to a complete, operating, 19 finished condition. 20 21 'Install as used in this division of the specifications, means to set in place and connect, ready for 22 use and in complete, operating, finished condition, material that has been furnished by other than 23 the Mechanical Contractor. 24 25 "Rough-in and Connect Only" means provide an appropriate system connection such as supplies 26 with stops, continuous wastes with traps, shut -off valves required, and all piping connections, 27 testing, etc., for proper operation, and to connect equipment furnished by other than the 28 Mechanical Contractor. Equipment furnished is received, uncrated, assembled and set in place by 29 supporting crafts unless they make prior arrangements to hire the mechanical installer for this 30 work. 31 32 "Accessible" means arranged so that an average size man may complete any service required 33 without disassembly or damage to the surrounding installation. 34 35 "Serviceable" means arranged so that the component or product in question may be properly 36 serviced without disassembly, destruction, or damage to the surrounding installation or item being 37 serviced. 38 39 "Product" is a generic term which includes materials, equipment, fixtures and any physical item 40 used on the project. 41 42 DEMOLITION 43 44 Demolition of existing mechanical work is not specifically noted on the Drawings. The exact extent of 45 demolition required must be verified by on -site review. The scope of demolition required is as follows: 46 47 Remove all existing piping, including hangers, valves, insulation and fittings, which is not to be re -used. 48 49 Remove all existing ductwork, including hangers, insulation, fittings, grilles, registers, louvers and dampers, 50 which is not to be re -used. 51 52 Remove all existing mechanical equipment, including bases, supports, foundations, frames, vents, piping, 53 electrical devices, and accessories, which is not to be re -used. 54 55 Remove and replace or reinstall all equipment, piping, ductwork and accessories which must be moved or 56 disassembled in order to accomplish the work shown. 57 95112 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -5 1 Install new piping connections, valves, fittings, insulation, and hangers, as necessary on any piping which is 2 to remain in service, to provide a complete and functional system. Materials shall match existing materials, 3 where possible, or shall be made compatible with existing materials. Insulation thickness shall be in 4 accordance with the insulation specified for new piping. 5 6 Where there is any question as to whether materials are to be removed or are to remain, the Architect or 7 Engineer shall be consulted. 8 9 The Owner has the right to retain ownership of any materials being removed. Other materials shall be the 10 property of the Contractor, and shall be promptly removed from the site. 11 12 Maximum precautions shall be taken to provide protection for the existing building and equipment from 13 damage. Prevent water and dust from entering the existing building. 14 15 PART 2 PRODUCTS 16 17 NOT USED 18 19 PART 3 EXECUTION 20 21 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES 22 23 This Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish in writing to other contractors, 24 with copies to the A/E, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed 25 satisfactorily, with the least possible interference or delay, and with maximum headroom and clearance. 26 27 The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, 28 and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work. 29 30 PROTECTION 31 32 The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his work or workmen, and shall be 33 Liable for all damage thus caused. 34 35 The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; 36 he shall protect work against theft, injury or damage; and shall carefully store material and equipment 37 received on site which are not immediately installed. He shall close open ends of work with temporary 38 covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. 39 40 SCAFFOLDING. RIGGING. HOISTING 41 42 The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and 43 delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when 44 no longer required. 45 46 ELECTRICAL WORK 47 48 The Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing motor starters and motor circuit protective devices for 49 equipment included in Division 15 unless the starters are supplied as an integral part of the equipment or as 50 specified otherwise. 51 52 The Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing power outlet boxes for each piece of equipment, 53 installing electrical devices and connecting them to the equipment. 54 55 The Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing wall switches for fan operation and for the power 56 wiring from the wall switches to the fans. 57 15010 -6 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electrical components provided with mechanical equipment shall be compatible with the electrical services 2 to which they are to be connected. 3 4 Interconnecting wiring between components of Mechanical equipment, when the wiring is not a part of the 5 power wiring to the equipment, shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. 6 7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 8 9 Mass excavation to approximate building levels will be done by the General Contractor. Mechanical 10 Contractor shall, however, do all trench and pit excavation and backfilling required for mechanical work 11 inside and outside the building, including repairing of finished surfaces, all required shoring, bracing, 12 pumping, and all protection for safety of persons and property. Mechanical Contractor shall remove all 13 excess earth from the site, as directed by the A/E, or to a storage point on the site as directed by the A/E. 14 Local or State Safety Codes shall be strictly observed. In addition, it shall be the responsibility of the 15 Contractor to check the indicated elevations of the utilities entering and leaving the building. If such 16 elevations require excavations lower than the footing levels, the A/E shall be notified of such conditions and 17 a redesign shall be made before excavations are commenced. It is also the responsibility of the Contractor 18 to make the excavations at the minimum required depths in order not to undercut the footings. 19 20 Filling, Backfilling, and Compaction shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 2. 21 22 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP 23 24 All materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new, of first -class quality, and shall be furnished, 25 delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit 26 properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first -class 27 standard article as approved by the A/E shall be furnished. 28 29 The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in 30 charge of the installation of the work, together with all skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers, welders, 31 helpers and labor required to unload, transfer, erect, connect -up, adjust, start, operate, and test each 32 system. 33 34 Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications, all equipment and materials shall be 35 installed with the approval of the A/E in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This 36 includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends. 37 38 INSTALLATION 39 40 Cutting and Patching: Keep cutting and patching to a minimum. If required, all patching shall conform to 41 specifications for the new General Construction work. Finish to match existing work. Conform to Division 1. 42 43 Measurements: Verify space availability by field measurement prior to submitting shop drawings for 44 approval. 45 46 Roughing -In Dimensions: Obtain roughing -in dimensions for equipment from approved shop drawings or 47 actual equipment measurements. 48 49 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions where furnished. If the 50 details are in conflict with design drawings, notify the A/E prior to proceeding with the installation. 51 52 Accessibility: Install all equipment which requires periodic servicing or repairs so it is readily accessible. 53 Otherwise, obtain the A/E's approval of location. 54 55 Provision for Light Fixtures: In installing piping and ductwork, allow clearance for light fixtures. If 56 interferences occur, move the piping or ducts and, if not possible, notify the A/E. 57 95112 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -7 1 Delivery, Storage, and Handling. 2 3 Handle, store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during 4 installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the A/E. 5 Replace damaged or defective items. 6 7 Factory finished equipment which is damaged shall be refinished as required to bring the 8 equipment to a Tike -new condition in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If, in the 9 opinion of the NE, the equipment cannot be satisfactorily repaired, the equipment shall be 10 replaced. 11 12 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION 13 14 Perform all tests required by Codes and Ordinances. A/E shall be notified of scheduled testing. Give 15 sufficient notice before performing such tests. 16 17 Additional tests shall be performed as required in other sections of the specifications. Tests shall include 18 Air Quality Testing, described in Section 15990 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 19 20 Systems Operation Demonstration: Subject systems to such operating tests as are required to 21 demonstrate that the equipment installed will operate within the specified limits through normal ranges and 22 sequences including simulation of possible abnormal conditions. Operate every device manually and 23 automatically, in accordance with its purpose. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system performance, 24 correct deficiencies and retest systems. 25 26 If the work is completed during the heating season, perform final tests of cooling equipment the following 27 summer. If completed during summer, perform test of heating system the following winter. 28 29 Operation of Equipment and Systems: Contractor is responsible during all periods of balancing and testing. 30 31 Provide all equipment, instruments, personnel and supplies required to conduct all tests. 32 33 Fuel and electricity required for tests will be provided by the Contractor. 34 35 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 36 37 Furnish one set of as -built drawings to the A/E in conformance with the requirements of Division 1. 38 As -built drawings shall show all buried piping, with dimensions given to permanent, easily identified building 39 features. 40 As -built drawings shall indicate locations of all valves, dampers, and other access points which are above 41 ceilings or concealed in walls. Valve numbers shall be indicated on the As -Built Drawings. 42 As -built drawings shall indicate actual locations of all ducts installed above inaccessible ceilings. 43 44 PRESSURE VESSEL CERTIFICATES 45 46 Construct and label to conform with the Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessels Inspection Law of the State of 47 Washington. Provide, for each item, a framed certificate under glass. Mount where directed by A/E. 48 49 15010 -8 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS 2 3 Prepare three copies of an Operating and Maintenance Manual for all equipment provided under Division 4 15 in accordance with Division 1. 5 6 Contents: 7 8 Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall include operating information, maintenance information, 9 control information, parts lists, filter information when applicable, lubrication information and 10 exploded view diagrams when applicable. 11 12 Information shall be arranged in an orderly manner, generally in the sequence of the specifications. 13 14 An index shall list the contents of each section of the manual, with index tabs matching the index. 15 The index page shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the mechanical contractor. 16 The index page of each section shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the 17 contractor or subcontractor responsible for the products included in that section of the manual. 18 19 The index page shall list the name, address, and telephone number of a 24 -hour, seven -day 20 emergency organization; either the contractor or a service organization authorized to represent the 21 contractor. 22 23 The temperature control section shall include information for control components, control 24 diagrams, sequences of operation, and As -Built drawings of the controls. When applicable, the 25 control section shall include point -to -point test lists and other testing, adjusting and calibration 26 documentation. 27 28 The manuals shall include Testing and Balancing Reports. 29 30 Manuals shall be provided in high quality, three -ring binders. The outside of the binders shall be printed or 31 stamped with the name of the project, the names of the Owner, Consulting Engineer, and Contractor, and 32 the year the project was completed. The identification shall be permanently attached, contrasting color to 33 the binder and sized appropriately. Plastic tape labels will not be considered permanent labels. 34 35 Submit one preliminary copy of the manual for review by the A/E prior to assembling the final copies. This 36 preliminary copy will be returned, and with any required additions and corrections, can be used as one of 37 the final copies of the manual. 38 39 Submit the final manuals before requesting final payment. 40 41 INSTRUCTION PERIODS FOR OWNER'S PERSONNEL 42 43 Following initial operation of all mechanical equipment and prior to acceptance of the mechanical work 44 conduct demonstrations of equipment operation and instruction periods for the Owner's representatives 45 during the time balancing work is being performed. 46 47 Contractor's representatives, in general, who conduct these instructions and demonstrations shall be 48 qualified foremen or superintendents acquainted with this project and from the trade involved. For Control 49 Systems, the representative shall be the control Engineer who performs testing and adjustment. For major 50 equipment, the representative shall be manufacturer's representatives with operating experience and 51 substantial design experience on this project. Their qualifications shall be submitted to the NE and 52 approved before conducting the instruction period. 53 54 Representatives of Owner who will be present at these meetings may include Owners, Administrative, 55 Operating and maintenance personnel; and for Fire Protection Systems, representatives of Fire Department 56 and Fire Marshal. 57 95112 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -9 1 General Description of Instruction Periods: Each period shall include preliminary discussion and 2 presentation of information from Maintenance Manuals with appropriate references to drawings, followed by 3 tours of equipment spaces explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing, and 4 maintenance procedures, temperature settings and available system and equipment adjustments. 5 6 Duration of Instruction Periods 7 8 Plumbing Systems 1/2 day 9 Heating and Cooling Systems 2 days 10 Air Handling Equipment 1/2 day 11 Controls and Energy Management 2 days 12 13 Scheduling of Instruction Periods: Notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and 14 demonstration periods shall be given to Owner at least two weeks prior to each instruction period and 15 agreement reached on the date of each instruction period. Instruction periods shall be no Tess than ten 16 days after submittal of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals to the Owner. 17 18 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 19 20 Submit written copies of all guarantees and warranties prior to requesting final payment. 21 22 COMPLETION OF WORK 23 24 When requesting final inspection, give ten days' notice. Submit written certification that the work has been 25 fully completed in strict accordance with plans and specifications. 26 27 BUILDING FLUSHING 28 29 Following completion of mechanical installation, and following installation of carpet and furnishings, but 30 prior to occupancy, the building ventilation systems shall be operated to flush contaminants from the 31 building. 32 33 100% outside air shall be used for flushing when possible, or the maximum possible percentage of outside 34 air. Freeze control devices shall not be bypassed. 35 36 Flushing shall be done for 24 hours a day when possible, with a flushing period of two weeks duration, 37 coordinated through the A/E. 38 39 Fuel and energy for budding flushing will be provided by the Contractor. 40 41 INSPECTION 42 43 Submit written certification of inspection from the governing building authority stating that all work has been 44 inspected, accepted and approved as complying with existing governing ordinances and codes. 45 46 PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START -UP 47 48 Upon completion of the equipment and systems installation and connections, the Contractor shall 49 assemble all equipment factory representatives and subcontractors together for system start-up. 50 51 These individuals shall assist in start-up and check out of their systems and shall remain at the site until the 52 system operation is acceptable and understood to the Owner's maintenance and /or operation personnel. 53 To provide acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's representative, the Contractor shall 54 prepare a written statement of acceptance for the Owner's signature. 55 56 15010 -10 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The statement shall be worded similarly to the following: 2 3 "I, the Contractor, associated factory representative and subcontractor, have started and operated 4 each system, have proved their normal operating to the Owner's representative, and have 5 instructed him in the operating and maintenance thereof." 6 7 Date 8 Owner's Representative 9 10 11 Date 12 Contractor 13 14 Copies of this acceptance shall be sent to the A/E and one copy shall be put in each maintenance manual. 15 16 A second and third instruction meeting between the Owner's operating personnel, the Contractor and his 17 associated subcontractors shall be held three months and twelve months after acceptance. A signed 18 report of each meeting shall be sent to the NE at the conclusion of each meeting. 19 20 A copy of the following check list shall be submitted with above reports to indicate systems checked. 21 22 SUBMITTED OR OWNER'S 23 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATED BY REPRESENTATIVE DATE 24 25 1. Plumbing Systems 26 2. Fire Protection Systems 27 3. Air Conditioning Systems 28 4. Air Handling Units 29 5. Ventilating Systems 30 6. Controls and Energy 31 Management Systems 32 33 34 35 36 37 ***END OF SECTION 38 95112 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2 3 PART 1 GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Work in this Section includes sleeves, anchors, access doors; motors and electrical connections; pipe, 12 valve and equipment identification; welding, brazing, and soldering; and clean -up. 13 14 SUBMITTALS 15 16 Product Data 17 18 Motors 19 Motor Control Equipment 20 Ceiling Hangers 21 Pipe and Valve Identification 22 23 REFERENCE STANDARDS 24 25 The publication of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 26 27 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 28 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 29 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 30 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 31 American Welding Society (AWS) 32 Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS) 33 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 34 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 35 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 36 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 37 38 SERVICEABILITY OF PRODUCTS 39 40 Furnish all products to provide the proper orientation of serviceable components to access space provided. 41 42 Coordinate installation of piping, ductwork, equipment, system components, and work of other trades to 43 allow proper servicing of all items requiring periodic maintenance or replacement. 44 45 Replace or relocate all products incorrectly ordered or installed, if required, to provide proper serviceability. 46 47 ACCESSIBILITY OF PRODUCTS 48 49 Arrange all work to provide access to all serviceable and /or operable products. Lay out work to optimize 50 net usable access space within confines of space available. Advise the A/E in a timely manner, of areas 51 where proper access cannot be maintained. Furnish layout drawings to verify this claim, if requested. 52 53 Provide access doors in ceilings, walls, floors, etc., for access to traps, valves, dampers, automatic devices, 54 and all serviceable or operable equipment in concealed spaces unless specifically specified under other 55 divisions of these specifications. 56 57 Access doors may not specifically be shown on the drawings. Coordinate requirements with reflected 95112 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -1 1 1 ceiling plans. Sizes required are determined by specific component or piece of equipment serviced. 2 Submit shop drawings showing proposed sizes and locations of access panels. 3 4 I 4 ROUTING 5 6 Route all pipe and ductwork parallel with building lines, and as high as possible, except where underground 7 or shown otherwise on the plans. I 8 9 Route piping and ducts to clear all doors, windows, and other openings and to avoid all other pipes, ducts, 10 Tight fixtures, etc. 1 11 12 Conceal all pipes and ducts where routed through finished areas, unless authorized by the A/E or otherwise 13 indicated on plans. 14 I 15 Route piping which is subject to freezing away from attic vents, combustion air intakes, and similar building 16 openings. 17 18 Install all piping which is subject to freezing on the interior of the building insulation, unless it is required to 19 install the piping on the exterior of the building insulation, in which case, as coordinated with the A/E, other 20 acceptable means of freeze protection or shutting off flow to the piping during cold weather is to be 21 provided. 22 23 PART 2 PRODUCTS 24 25 GENERAL I 26 27 Provide all products new, unused, and undamaged, of current standard manufacture, and of latest design 28 and best quality. I 29 30 Where more than one type of material is specified, the contractor may choose one type; however only one 31 type of material may be used in a specific piping system. 32 I 33 SLEEVES. INSERTS AND FOUNDATIONS 34 35 Sleeves: Provide galvanized steel pipe with unthreaded ends where piping passes through any floor slab I 36 above grade. Provide other sleeves of sheet steel. Manufacturer: Miracle or Adjus -to- Crete. 37 38 Inserts: Steel or malleable concrete insert, Grinnell figure 281, 282, 285 or equivalent. 39 I 40 Expansion Shells and Bolts 41 42 Expansion Shells for Rod Hangers: Phillips self -drilling anchors, Gregory "Bulldog", Omark "Drill I 43 Anchors or Fastite shells, in holes drilled in structural concrete. 44 45 Expansion Bolts for Equipment: USM "Molly Parabolt", or McCullough "Kwik -Bolt" in holes drilled in 46 concrete. I 47 48 Formed Steel Channels at Slab: 12 -Gage Minimum, 1 -3/8 -inch x 1 -5/8 -inch minimum cross section size; 49 Unistrut P -3000, B -Line, or Powerstrut. I 50 51 Welding to Building Structural Members: Not allowed except as indicated on the drawings. 52 53 ACCESS DOORS I 54 55 Access Doors: Bonderized steel, 20 -gage doors and 16 -gage frames, with flush screw driver operated cam 56 latch, fitted with concealed hinges, factory prime coated. Manufacturer shall be Milcor, models as listed, or 1 57 Elmdor equivalent or approved substitute. 15050 -2 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 95112 1 I 1 Access panels shall be Milcor Style AT for acoustical tile, Style K with expanded metal wings for plaster, 2 Style M for masonry, tile and drywall and style DW for gypsum board walls and ceilings. 3 4 Access doors and panels in fire rated construction shall have UL 1 -1/2 hour B label. Milcor 3208 Series in 5 walls and 3210 Senes in ceilings. 6 7 ROOF CURBS 8 9 All roof mounted air conditioning units, air handling units, fans, roof mounted air intake, relief and exhaust 10 hoods, air intake ducts, relief ducts, and exhaust ducts which pass through the roof shall be provided with 11 roof curbs. 12 13 Roof curbs shall be as indicated for each equipment type. If no special curb type is indicated, curbs shall 14 be a minimum of 12" in height, level on the top, suited to the equipment base ,curb cap or flange to be 15 installed on top of the curb. Curbs shall be insulated or acoustical type when so indicated. 16 17 Curbs shall have cant strips, shall be coordinated with the roof pitch or slope, shall be coordinated with the 18 roof framing, and shall be flashed and counterflashed for a watertight installation. 19 20 Equipment roof curbs shall be installed with spring vibration mountings between the curb and the 21 equipment when so indicated. The connection between the curb and the unit shall be water -tight. 22 23 WELDING, BRAZING AND SOLDERING 24 I 25 26 Welding materials and procedures shall be in accordance with AWS 249.1. 27 Solder: Lead Free Solder: 95 percent tin, 5 percent antimony solder; tin copper, silver, antimony and 28 nickel; or tin copper and silver, ASTM B 32. Workable range of at least 60 degrees F. 29 30 Brazing Alloy: Melting temperature 1000 degrees F or higher; AWS A5.8. 31 I 32 PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR UNDERGROUND FERROUS METAL SURFACES 33 34 General: All steel pipe and other ferrous metal surfaces buried in contact with fill materials or concrete 35 shall be protected as follows: 36 37 Pipe Wrapping: 20 -mil thickness pressure sensitive vinyl tape; 3M "Scotch Rap" No. 51 corrosion 38 protection tape, or approved equal. 39 Joint Covering: 3M "Scotch Rap" or approved equal, 50 percent overlap, 6 inches each side of 40 joint. 41 Piping factory- coated by manufacturer shall be satisfactory, providing it affords protection 42 comparable to the above and that all joints and breaks in the coating are sealed in a manner 43 compatible with the particular coating being used. 44 Cast iron and ductile iron items need not be coated. 45 46 MOTORS 47 48 Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA and as specified. Motors 3/4 HP and 49 larger shall be premium efficiency type. Minimum motor efficiencies shall meet the efficiency requirements 50 of the applicable Energy Code. Motors shall be tested in accordance with standards of A.S.A. C50 and 51 conform thereto for insulation resistance and dielectric strength. Each motor shall be provided with conduit 52 terminal box, adequate starting and protective equipment as specified or required. Where motors are to be I 53 54 controlled through variable speed drives, the motor shall be fully compatible with the drive. 55 The capacity shall be sufficient to operate associated driven devices under all conditions of operation and 56 load and without overload, and at least the horsepower indicated or specified. Each motor shall be 57 selected for quiet operation. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 95112 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -3 1 Motor overload capacity shall be 110% (service factor 1.1 minimum) for all motors. Sizing of motors shall 2 not include the overload factor. 3 4 Motor types shall be as follows: 5 Three -phase motors: Induction type, single- speed, unless indicated otherwise. 6 Single -phase motors: Split -phase or capacitor start type as recommended by the manufacturer for 7 the particular piece of equipment, single -speed unless indicated otherwise. 8 9 Motors shall be General Electric, Westinghouse, Allis- Chalmers, Century, or approved equal. 10 11 Motors and equipment shall be provided for current characteristics as shown on the electrical drawings. 12 13 MOTOR STARTERS 14 15 Single speed starters: 16 17 Provide with three overload relays for complete single- phasing and overload protection. Provide six 18 relays for 2 -speed starters. 19 20 Provide START -STOP push button station, with HAND /OFF /AUTOMATIC (HAO) switch and red 21 pilot Tight, for each motor starter, located in a suitable location. 22 23 Provide with two extra Normally Open interlocking contacts in addition to seal -in contacts. 24 25 Combination full voltage starters, fusible switch type: 26 27 External manual reset and thermal overload relays, low voltage protection and fusible switch short 28 circuit protection. 29 30 Overload relays: Bimetallic type. 31 32 Motor control starters to be heavy duty type, push button and selector switch with NEMA 1 enclosure. 33 34 Manual thermal element units: Allen- Bradley Bulletin 600. 35 36 Acceptable starter manufacturers: Square D Co., Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, General Electric or 37 approved substitute. 38 39 General: 40 41 Verify all motor sizes and characteristics and type of control. 42 43 Provide each starter with a suitable phenolic nameplate with white cut letters to designate purpose 44 of the starter. 45 46 For motors which are 115 volt, single phase, provide manual element units. 47 48 For motors which are three phase, provide combination magnetic starters. 49 50 CONTROL WIRING 51 52 Provide all control wiring for controls specified under Division 15. These requirements apply to wiring 53 required in addition to the power wiring shown and specified as part of Division 16. 54 55 Extent: Provide wiring as required to provide the operations specified and as recommended by equipment 56 manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide interlock control wiring between equipment. 57 15050 -4 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 95112 1 1 Do not install control wiring in power circuit conduit. Do not use magnetic starters and disconnect switches 2 as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all I 3 control equipment with the A/E prior to rough -in. Provide all control wiring in zinc coated electrical metallic 4 tubing, with conduit fittings at all junction points, connections and outlets. Provide all conduits in 5 accordance with Division 16 requirements. 6 I 7 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION AND PAINTING 8 9 Equipment Identification 10 11 Mechanical equipment shall be identified with engraved laminated plastic nameplates or with 12 painted labels, sized proportionate to the size of the equipment and located to be readily visible. 13 Nameplate or label size and colors shall be reviewed with the A/E prior to ordering. 14 15 Painting 16 17 Touch -up paint on factory finished mechanical equipment where finish is damaged, or repaint the 18 entire unit if paint damage is extensive. The A/E shall determine whether repainting is required. 19 Paint shall match original factory finish. 20 21 Paint visible surfaces inside grilles, registers and diffusers dull black. 22 23 Paint all exterior mechanical work, including supports and frames, except for factory finished I 24 equipment. 25 26 Pipe Identification 27 28 All piping which is accessible for maintenance operations, including piping concealed above 29 suspended ceilings, shall be identified with semirigid plastic or adhesive identification markers. 30 Markers shall be Brady Seton, or equivalent or approved, conforming to ANSI A13.1, "Scheme for 31 the Identification of Piping Systems I 32 33 Direction of flow arrows shall be included on each marker. 34 35 Locations for Pipe Markers Shall be as Follows: 36 37 Adjacent to each valve. 38 At 20 -foot centers maximum for the length of the pipe. 39 At least one marker between any two partitions. 40 41 Valve Tags: Manual valves on all piping lines, including primary mains, branches, risers, and valves in 42 mechanical equipment rooms, shall be provided with valve tags where the function is not obvious or the 43 destination is not visible from the valve. Valve tags shalt contain the following information. 44 45 Valve Numbers with a Description of Function: Function shall be indicated on the valve tag. 46 47 Valve tags shall be of 19 -gage brass with stamped, black enamel -filled characters. Tags shall be 48 not less than 1 -1/2 -inch size and shall be attached to valves with a brass chain and a brass S -hook. 49 At Contractor's option, valve tags may be black and white laminated plastic with lettering engraved 50 through the black cover to the white backing. 51 52 A typewritten fist of the tag numbers, showing specific valve location and specific list of rooms 53 affected by valve operation, shall be included in each operation and maintenance manual. 54 55 Each valve tag shall be numbered chronologically by system and applicable tag number shall be 56 indicated on the as -built drawings. 57 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 95112 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -5 1 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 2 3 ACCESSIBILITY 1 4 5 The Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases, the adequate 6 clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for the proper installation of his work. He shall cooperate 7 with the General Contractor and all other contractors whose work is in the same space, and shall advise the I 8 General Contractor of his requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall, however, be kept to the 9 minimum required. 10 I 11 The Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully 12 accessible positions. Equipment shall include but not be limited to valves, traps, cleanouts, motors, 13 controllers, switch -gear, and drain points. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better 14 accessibility, and any change shall be approved. I 15 16 The Contractor shall provide the General contractor the exact locations of access panels for each 17 concealed valve, control, damper, or other device requiring service, to coordinate locations for access 18 panels and access doors. Locations of these panels shall be submitted in sufficient time to be installed in 19 the normal course of work. 20 21 PIPING SLEEVES I 22 23 Provide sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roofs or walls. 24 I 25 Size: Annular clear space of approximately 1/4 -inch for bare pipe sleeves; 1/2 -inch for caulked sleeves. 26 Provide insulation and covering continuous through sleeve, except caulked sleeves. 27 28 Projection Above Floor: Wherever piping passes through any floor slab, provide sleeves extending 1 -inch I 29 above finished floor. 30 31 Installation: Set sleeves in place prior to pouring of concrete in new construction; core drill and grout 32 sleeves in place for unit masonry construction and existing construction. Fasten sleeves to wood forms with I 33 centered lag screws or nails. Attach sleeves to metal forms with Kalon type "U" drive screws and sheet 34 metal clips. 35 I 36 Sheet Metal Dams: For core drilled, saw cut and formed openings through above grade floor slabs, 37 provide galvanized sheet metal dams all around opening on top of floor, water -tight soldered or welded 38 construction, sealed and anchored to floor water -tight, minimum 1 -inch projection above floor, and 2 -inch 39 flange width on floor or spigot end with 3/16 -inch bead. I 40 41 Sleeves shall not be required for cast -iron soil pipe passing through concrete slab on grade. Where 42 penetrating a membrane waterproof floor provide membrane clamping devices. I 43 44 DUCT SLEEVES AND PREPARED OPENINGS 45 46 Provide sleeves or prepared openings for ducts passing through floors, roofs, ceilings, or walls, including I 47 fire rated or smoke separation walls and partitions extending above ceilings: 48 49 Provide duct sleeves for all round ducts 15 inches in diameter or less. I 50 51 Provide framed openings for round ducts larger than 15 inches in diameter and all square and 52 rectangular ducts. 53 I 54 Provide framed openings where grilles, registers and diffusers are installed at openings. 55 56 Fabricate duct sleeves of 20 -gage galvanized steel. 1 57 15050 -6 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 95112 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unless otherwise indicated, clearance between duct and sleeves or insulation and sleeve shall be 1 -inch. 2 3 Clearance between framed prepared opening and duct or insulation shall be 1 -inch. 4 5 Unless otherwise indicated, provide closure collars of galvanized sheet metal not less than 4- inches wide, 6 for exposed ducts on each side of walls or floors where sleeves or prepared openings are provided. Collar 7 shall be installed tight against surface. Collar shall fit snugly around the duct or insulation. Sharp edges of 8 the collar around insulated duct shall be ground smooth to preclude tearing or puncturing the insulation 9 covenng or vapor barrier. Collars for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or less shall be fabricated from 20- 10 gauge galvanized steel. Collars for round ducts larger than 15 inches and all square and rectangular ducts 11 shall be fabricated from 18 -gauge galvanized steel. 12 13 Coordinate the size and location of sleeves and prepared openings with other trades. 14 15 Sleeves and framed openings shall be modified or eliminated at fire dampers or smoke dampers, so that 16 the installation conforms to the requirements for sleeves and wall openings at fire dampers. 17 18 SEALING OF SLEEVES AND PREPARED OPENINGS 19 20 Sealing through Floor Slabs and Firewalls: 3M Fire Barrier cover CP25 or Putty 303 extending full depth 21 through the wall or floor. Provide sheet metal around outside of insulation passing through sleeve before 22 caulking and sealing. Install in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions. 23 24 For voids or holes to 6 -inch maximum diameter and 4 -inch maximum depth, 3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP25 or 25 Putty 303 may be used. Apply in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions. 26 27 Sealing of Sleeves Below Grade: Where pipes pass through openings in concrete walls below grade, 28 provide a flexible, leakproof seal in the annular space between the wall and pipe; Link -Seal or approved. 29 30 The annular space between pipe and sleeve or between insulation jacket and sleeve does not require 31 sealing in interior walls or pipe chase areas which are not designated as fire rated or acoustically rated. 32 33 Penetrations through fire rated concrete floors and walls may be made using UL listed ProSet firestop 34 penetrators and Proset Firefilt fire rated caulking. 35 36 FLASHING REQUIREMENTS 37 38 Pipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membranes shall be installed through a 4 -pound lead 39 flashing or a 16 -ounce copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably 40 formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not Tess than 6 inches from the pipe and shall be set over the 41 roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a 42 minimum of 6 inches. 43 44 EXPANSION SHELLS AND BOLTS 45 46 Use only where necessary to hang piping or equipment from existing concrete slabs or walls. 47 48 INSERTS 49 50 Verify that locations are correct before concrete is poured. 51 52 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSTALLATION 53 54 Provide supports for all equipment, piping and ducts as required, including braces for seismic restraint; 55 these include frames or supports for pumps and fans. All steel framework exposed to the weather shall be 56 galvanized after fabrication. 57 95112 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -7 15050 -8 1 Manufacturer's Instructions: All equipment, including ductwork and piping appurtenances, shall be installed 2 in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. 3 4 Floor- Mounted Equipment, General 5 6 Provide machine and floor or foundation fastenings; set equipment on concrete pads. Provide 7 equipment base drawings, bolt setting information, and anchors for all floor mounted equipment. 8 For new construction, provide anchor bolts through concrete equipment pads to structural concrete 9 slab; for existing construction, provide concrete expansion anchors through concrete equipment 10 pads, installed into existing structural concrete slabs. 11 12 Install all equipment at the locations indicated. Set equipment accurately with principal centerlines, 13 and level using manufacturer's leveling screws, blocks, shims, or wedges. Do not distort 14 equipment or baseplates. 15 16 Install seismic restraints as specified in Section 15140. 17 18 Wall Hung Equipment 19 20 At wall attached fixtures and equipment weighing less than 50 pounds, provide backing plates of at 21 least 1/8 x 10 inch sheet steel or 2 x 10 inch fire retardant treated wood securely built into the 22 structural walls. Submit attachment details of heavier equipment for approval. 23 24 Roof Mounted Equipment 25 26 Set all equipment level unless otherwise indicated. Provide equipment bases, curbs, piers or 27 similar supports as approprate and as specified. All bases shall have cant strips, flashing and 28 counterflashing as required, and shall be installed in a manner to avoid penetrating the roofing 29 materials in a manner that can cause leaks or roof damage. Equipment curbs that are designed to 30 have insulation inserted in the base shall be insulated with rigid insulation, thickness to match the 31 curb depth, compatible with the roofing system. 32 33 Suspended equipment, piping and ductwork. 34 35 Install as specified in Section 15140. 36 37 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 38 39 Mass excavation to approximate building levels will be done by the General Contractor. Mechanical 40 Contractor shall, however, do all trench and pit excavation and backfilling required for mechanical work 41 inside and outside the building, including repairing of finished work inside and outside the building, including 42 repairing of finished surfaces, all required shoring, bracing, pumping, and all protection for safety of 43 persons and property. Mechanical Contractor shall remove all excess earth from the site, as directed by 44 the Architect, or to a storage point on the site as directed by the Architect. Local or State Safety Codes 45 shall be strictly observed. In addition, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to check the indicated 46 elevations of the utilities entering and leaving the building. If such elevations require excavations lower than 47 the footing levels, the Architect shall be notified of such conditions and a redesign shall be made before 48 excavations are commenced. It is also the responsibility of the contractor to make the excavations at the 49 minimum required depths in order not to undercut the footings. 50 51 Filling, Backfilling, and Compaction shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 2. 52 53 Surplus Earth: Haul off -site and dispose of legally. 54 55 Barricades: Locate and maintain barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards, as required 56 during periods of open excavation to protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage. 57 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 95112 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Clean -up: Leave premises thoroughly clean at completion. 2 3 Installation of Piping in Backfilled Areas: Wherever any piping is to be installed in areas which have been 4 excavated below pipe inverts, for any purpose, install the piping in a manner which will prevent subsequent 5 settlement. Do not install the piping until the backfill is to full compaction and completed up to a level of 18 6 inches or more above the level of the installed pipe; install piping in trenches which have been re- excavated 7 through the backfill. 8 9 ACCESS DOORS 10 11 Provide access doors as required to gain access to balancing and fire dampers, valves, fans, terminal units, 12 and other equipment, requiring periodic inspection, through finished walls or ceilings. Coordinate with other 13 trades. 14 15 Minimum Size: 12 -inch x 12 -inch for hand access, 24 -inch x 24 -inch for man entry. 16 17 PROTECTIVE COATING APPLICATION 18 19 Surface Preparation 20 21 Remove all grease and oil with suitable solvent. 22 23 Wire brush and scrape to remove all loose mill scale, rust, corrosion products, old coatings, dirt or 24 other foreign materials. 25 26 Pipe Wrapping Application 27 28 Wrap the exterior surface of all underground black steel pipe and fittings with the specified 29 wrapping material. Provide wrapping up to 6 inches above the exterior grade or slab level. 30 31 Factory- applied wrapping (required for all straight lengths of pipe): Spirally -wound with half 32 overlapping and a hold -back of not less than 4 inches on each end for field fitting. 33 34 Field applied wrapping (required for all fittings and field joints): Complete pressure testing prior to 35 wrapping. Initially stretch tape to conform with surface while spirally half overlapping; apply a 36 second wrapping, half overlapping and spiralled with spirals opposite to the first wrapping. Overlap 37 factory- wrapped pipe wrapping a minimum of 6 inches. 38 39 Inspect wrapped surfaces for film thickness and uniformity of tape application. Test these surfaces 40 in their entirety for presence of flaws with an electrical flaw and holiday detector at crest voltage of 41 5,000 volts. Instrument shall be approved type and incapable of field adjustment, with calibration 42 within the past 6 months certified by the manufacturer or by an approved testing laboratory. 43 Perform test before and after installation. Repair defects and repeat test on affected areas. 44 45 MOTORS 46 47 Install motors in conformance with manufacturer recommendation, properly aligned with driven device. 48 49 CONTROL WIRING 50 51 Install in conformance with current National Electrical Code and all requirements of Division 16. 52 53 Provide and install all temperature control wiring, all equipment control wiring and all interlock wiring. 54 Control wiring shall be in conduit when so specified in other Sections of the specifications. 55 56 95112 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -9 1 PIPE LABELING 2 3 Labeling Schedule 4 5 Outside Diameter Length Size of 6 of Pioe Color Band Letter 7 8 3/4" 1 -1/4" 8" 1/2" 9 1 -1/2" 2" 8" 3/4" 10 2-1/2" 6" 12" 1-1/4" 11 8" 10" 24" 2_1/2" 12 Over 10" 32" 3 -1/2" 13 14 Band Letter 15 Pipe Contents Color Color Marker Wording 16 17 Soil, Waste, Drain Vent Green White S, W, D, or V 18 Domestic Cold Water Green White CW 19 Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black HW 20 Domestic Hot Water Recirc. Yellow Black HWC 21 Fire Protection Red White F 22 Rain Leader Green White RL 23 24 Other piping shall be labeled in accordance with the classifications of ANSI A13.1. 25 26 EQUIPMENT READINESS 27 28 Shipping blocks and similar restraints shall be removed from equipment. 29 30 Spring mounts, spring hangers, and pipe, duct and equipment supports shall be leveled and adjusted. 31 32 Drive belts and motor mounts shall be adjusted. 33 34 Cooling fluid and lubricating oil shall be installed. 35 36 CLEANING 37 38 The contractor shall remove all waste material, debris and packing materials caused by his work. 39 40 The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of all equipment, ductwork and 41 piping. Fan equipment, plenums and duct systems shall be vacuum cleaned if extremely dirty, if so directed 42 by the A/E. 43 44 Clean all plumbing fixtures, plumbing equipment, drain traps, cleanouts, hydrants, etc. 45 46 47 48 *END OF SECTION 49 15050 -10 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15100 PIPE. VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 2 3 PART 1 GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Included in this Section are pipe, valves, fittings, and piping specialties. 12 13 REGULATORY AGENCIES 14 15 All work shall be in conformance with applicable codes and with applicable standards. 16 17 REFERENCE STANDARDS 18 19 The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 20 21 American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) 22 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 23 American Welding Society (AWS) Publication 24 Federal Specification (Fed. Spec) 25 Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 26 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 27 Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 28 29 SUBMITTALS 30 31 Product Data: 32 33 Piping 34 Fittings 35 Valves 36 Pipe Joining Materials 37 Thermometers 38 Gauges 39 Piping Specialties 40 41 PART PRODUCTS 42 43 STEEL PIPE 44 45 Pressure Ratings: Provide pipe, fittings, accessories and all other components with minimum pressure 46 rating of 150 psig. 47 48 Pipe: Black or galvanized steel, ASTM A 53, Grade A or B, electric resistance welded or seamless, 49 standard weight unless otherwise noted. 50 51 Fittings 52 53 2 Inches and Smaller 54 55 Threaded: 150 psig black malleable iron, ASME B16.03 and ASTM A 197. 56 Welded: 3000 psig forged steel, socket weld. 57 95112 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 15100 -1 1 2 -1/2 Inches and Larger 2 3 Standard weight, seamless steel, butt welding, ANSI B16.09, Grade WPB. 4 Grooved Joint: Provide the following UL listed and FM approved couplings and fittings: 5 6 Couplings: ASTM A 536 ductile iron or ASTM A47 malleable iron with EPDM gaskets with 7 temperature range of -30 to 230 degrees F. Victaulic Style 77 flexible or equal of Grinnell 8 or Gustin- Bacon. 9 10 Fittings: Fittings and tees constructed of ASTM A536 ductile iron, ASTM A106 carbon steel 11 or ASTM A4 malleable iron. Victaulic, Grinnell or Gustin- Bacon. 12 13 Fittings for galvanized pipe shall be galvanized. 14 15 Fittings for steel drainage piping, ANSI 816.3. 16 17 Unions: 150 psig black or galvanized malleable iron, screwed, ASTM A 197, brass seat. 18 19 Flanges 20 21 2 Inches and Smaller: 125 psig cast iron screwed, ANSI B16.1 and ASTM A 126, Class B; 150 psig 22 forged steel weld neck or slip on, ASME B16.5 and ASTM A 181, Grade I; 150 psig forged steel 23 socket weld, ANSI B16.5 and ASTM A 181, Grade I. 24 25 2 -1/2 Inches and Larger: 150 psig forged steel weld neck or slip on, ASME B16.5 and ASTM A 26 181, Grade I. NOTE: Flanges facing flat faced cast iron flanges will have flat face finish. Grooved 27 joint flange adapters may be used in lieu of flanges on all pipe sizes. 28 29 Bolting: Machine bolts and nuts, hex head bolts, hexagon nut, ASTM A 307, Grade B, dimensions ANSI 30 B18.2, threads ANSI B1.1. 31 32 Gaskets: ANSI B16.21 nonmetallic, 1/16 inch thick; Garlock Style 3000, Crane, Garlock or US Rubber. 33 34 Joint Compound: Teflon tape. 35 36 Manufacturers: US Steel, LTV, Bethlehem, Laclede, Lone Star, Sawhill, Wheatland or Sharon. 37 38 COPPER PIPE AND TUBE 39 40 Pressure Ratings: Provide pipe, tubing, fittings, accessories and all other components with minimum 41 pressure rating of 150 psig. 42 43 Tubing (Pipe): ASTM B88 type K or type L copper water tube, hard drawn or soft. 44 45 Fittings 46 47 Wrought copper solder fittings and screwed adapters, ANSI B16.22. 48 Cast bronze solder joint fittings and screwed adapters, ANSI B16.18. 49 Wrought copper solder fittings, drainage pattern, for drain piping, ANSI B16.22. 50 51 Unions 52 53 Wrought copper solder joint unions, ANSI B16.22. 54 Cast bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.18. 55 56 Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Cast bronze, 125 psig Class, ASME Standards. 15100 -2 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 9511 2 1 3 4 5 I 6 8 9 I 10 11 12 I14 15 16 I 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 I 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 I 35 36 37 I 38 39 40 41 I 42 43 44 I 45 46 47 48 I 49 50 51 52 I 53 54 55 i 1 Bolting: Machine bolts and nuts, hex head bolt, hexagon nut, ASTMA 307, Grade B, dimensions ANSI B18.2, threads ANSI B1.1. Gaskets: ANSI B16.21 nonmetallic 1/16 inch thick. Garlock Style 3000. Threaded Joint Compound: Teflon tape. Solder: 95 percent tin, 5 percent antimony solder, ASTM B 32 Harris "Bridgit" acceptable. Brazing Alloy: Melting temperature 1000 F or higher; AWS A5.8. Manufacturers: Chase, Anaconda, Revere, Mueller, Reading Tube or Bridgeport. CAST IRON PIPE Pipe Fittings Couplings Standard weight cast iron soil pipe, ASTM A74. Standard weight hubless cast iron soil pipe, CISPI 301. Standard weight cast iron soil pipe fittings ANSI A112.5.1 and ASTM A74. Hubless cast iron fittings, CISPI 301. Screwed drainage fittings, ANSI B16.12. Type 304 stainless steel shield with stainless steel clamps, neoprene gasket. Husky series 4000, Mage or approved substitute. Cast iron couplings, MG or approved substitute. DUCTILE IRON PIPE Pipe: Ductile Iron, centrifugally cast in 18 foot nominal lengths conforming to AWWA C151; cement -mortar lined conforming to AWWA C104; bituminous exterior coating conforming to AWWA C151; Standard Thickness Class 52. Fittings: Ductile iron Class 350 short body, in accordance with AWWA C153 and C111, cement mortar Tined in accordance with AWWA C104. Joints: Rubber gasket, Tyton type of mechanical joint conforming to AWWA C111. Gaskets for Flanged Fittings: 1/16 inch thick Cranite conforming to AWWA C111. DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND COUPLINGS Provide at each joint between dissimilar metals 2 Inches and Smaller: Dielectric unions rated at 250 psig at 180 F conforming to ANSI B16.39. 2 -1/2 Inches and Larger: Dielectric flange fittings conforming to ANSI B16.42 (iron) or ANSI B16.24 (bronze). Manufacturer: Watts 3000 Series, Epco or equivalent. 95112 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 15100 -3 1 STRAINERS 2 3 2 Inches and Smaller: Cast Bronze, Y- pattern, threaded ends, 20 mesh stainless steel screen; 250 psi at 4 210 F. 5 6 Strainers 2 -1/2 Inches and Over: Cast iron, Y- pattern, flanged ends, stainless steel screen (manufacturer's 7 standard mesh size), 250 psi at 350 F steam. 8 9 Manufacturer shall be Armstrong, Crane, Hoffman, Keckley, McAlear, Sarco or Watts. All strainers shall be 10 of the same manufacturer. 11 12 VALVES 13 14 Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller 15 16 Gate: MSS SP80, 125 psig bronze, screwed, union bonnet, rising stem, solid bronze disc, 17 repackable under pressure, Milwaukee 1152. 18 Globe: MSS SP80, 150 psig bronze, screwed, union bonnet, rising stem, bronze plug and seat, 19 Milwaukee 590. 20 Angle: MSS SP80, 150 psig bronze, screwed, union bonnet, rising stem, bronze plug and seat, 21 Milwaukee 595. 22 Check: MSS SP80, 125 psig bronze, screwed cap, swing disc, regrindable seat, Milwaukee 509-S 23 for WOG, 509 -T for steam service. 24 Bali: 150 psig WSP, bronze or brass body, stainless steel ball and stem, screwed, Teflon seat and 25 seal. Provide stem extension for use in insulated piping, Milwaukee BA -3005. 26 Needle (Gage): Trerice No. 735 -3 or approved brass needle valve, 1000 psig working pressure at 27 300 F, 1/4 inch NPT. 28 29 Valves, 2 -1/2 Inches and Larger 30 31 Gate: MSS SP70, 125 psig cast iron, flanged, OS &Y, bolted bonnet, solid bronze disc and seat 32 rings, brass stem; valves 4 inches and larger may have cast iron discs and bronze disc rings, 33 Milwaukee F -2885. 34 Globe and Angle: MSS SP85, 125 psig cast iron, flanged, bolted bonnet, OS &Y, renewable bronze 35 seat and disc, brass stem, Milwaukee F -2981. 36 Check: MSS SP71, 125 psig cast iron, flanged, bolted cap, swing pattern, renewable bronze disc 37 and seat except valves 4 inches and larger may be furnished with iron disc to ASTM A 126, 38 Milwaukee F -2974. 39 Check valves, non -slam: 125 psig cast iron, wafer type, bronze disc, stainless steel spring. Mount 40 with Class 125 flanges, Jenkins Fig. 777, CPV, Mission or approved substitute. 41 Butterfly: tapped lug or grooved end style, ductile iron body, EPDM coated ductile iron or aluminum 42 bronze disc; with memory stop if indicated. 200 psig, Milwaukee ML132 or ML133. 43 Valves 4 Inches and Smaller: Provide notched plate and handle. 44 Valves 6 Inches and Larger: Provide worm gear operator with handwheel. 45 46 Valve Manufacturer: 47 48 All bronze gate, globe, angle and check valves shall be of one manufacturer. 49 All iron gate, globe, angle and check valves shall be of one manufacturer. 50 Gate, globe, angle and check valves shall be Milwaukee, Model number as listed, or equivalent of 51 Crane, Jenkins, Kennedy, Nibco, Powell, Stockham or Walworth, or approved substitute. 52 All ball valves shall be of one manufacturer, manufacturers listed in (3) or Apollo. 53 All butterfly valves shall be of one manufacturer, manufacturers listed in (3) or De Zurik. 54 55 15100 -4 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 9511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DRAIN VALVES 2 3 Hose end bronze body, angle pattern, composition seat, 125 psig WOG, 3/4" hose thread outlet. 4 5 Manufacturer: Nibco 74, threaded inlet, or Nibco 72, solder inlet, or equivalent. 6 7 PRESSURE GAGES 8 9 4 -1/2 inch size, stem mounting with cast metal case without back flange with cast metal threaded ring. 10 Range approximately twice normal operating pressure, with uniformly spaced graduations. 11 12 Connect through 1/2 inch nipple with a gage valve and reducer. Provide "pigtail" for steam service; snubber 13 for all other services. 14 15 Manufacturer: Lonergan C -16, Marsh PCSR, Crosby No. 1 or Ashcroft or Trerice equivalent. 16 17 THERMOMETERS 18 19 Mercury thermometers for piping shall be industrial grade, 7" scale, adjustable angle, cast aluminum case 20 with clear acrylic plastic window, separable socket, aluminum stem. Trerice Series A001. 21 22 Mercury thermometers for air ducts shall be industrial grade, 7" scale, adjustable angle, cast aluminum 23 case with clear acrylic plastic window, flange for attachment to duct, aluminum stem with perforated 24 aluminum guard. Trerice Series A013. 25 26 Dial thermometers shall be liquid filled industrial grade, 4 -1/2" diameter, cast aluminum case with glass 27 window, brass bulb. Trerice No. 80700 with adjustable angle bulb, Trerice No. L80300 with copper 28 capillary. Bottom or back connection, case style and capillary length to suit the installation. 29 30 Treace model numbers as listed or Ashcroft, Palmer, Marshaltown or Weksler equivalent or approved 31 substitute. Scale, socket lengths, extension neck length, and capillary length to suit installation. 32 33 THERMOMETER WELLS 34 35 Brass, matched to thermometers, with insertion length and extension neck length to suit installation. 36 37 ESCUTCHEON PLATES 38 39 Beaton and Cadwell Series 10 or approved substitute, chrome plated; spring clip type at ceilings. 40 41 Provide 2 inch deep escutcheons for lavatory drains where required. 42 43 PART 3 EXECUTION 44 45 GENERAL 46 47 Headroom 48 49 Maintain the maximum possible headroom. Employ careful planning and proper fittings to give the 50 best results coordinated with all other trades. If excessive space is taken, remove and replace the 51 work in a proper manner. 52 In ways of egress, pedestrian walkways, etc., maintain a minimum headroom of 6'8" from the floor 53 to the bottom of an obstruction. 54 55 Diagram: Diagrams showing pipe connections are schematic only. Do not use for calculating piping 56 lengths or numbers and types of fittings. 57 95112 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 15100 5 1 Connections to Equipment, Control Valves, Globe Valves, Balancing Valves, and Pressure Reducing 2 Valves: Provide unions or flanges to allow local disassembly. 3 4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND VALVES, 5 6 General 7 8 Install all piping promptly, capping or plugging all open ends and making pipe generally level and 9 plumb, free from traps, and in a manner to conserve space for other work. 10 Inspect each piece of pipe, tubing, fittings, and equipment for defects and obstructions; promptly 11 remove all defective material from the jobsite. 12 Install pipes to clear all beams and obstructions; do not cut into or reduce the size of load carrying 13 members. 14 Use long radius elbows wherever possible. 15 Install all piping in accordance with ASME 831.9 "Building Services Piping" and as specified herein. 16 17 Location of Pipe: Piping layout as shown is diagrammatic, indicating general arrangement. Determine 18 measurements at jobsite, accurately cutting pipe to suit. Piping shall be installed so as to allow for 19 expansion and contraction. Locate piping to avoid interference with building structural members, 20 equipment, and building openings; provide access for operation, service, disconnection, removal and 21 replacement of valves, fixtures, and equipment. Within buildings, conceal all piping in walls and above 22 ceiling except where indicated to remain exposed. Provide separate trenches for water and sewer lines. 23 24 Cleaning: Clean interior of piping before making joints and placing in position by blowing clean with steam 25 or compressed air. Maintain cleanliness of piping throughout installation; provide caps or plugs on open 26 ends of cleaned piping. 27 28 Unions and Fittings: Provide unions or flanges at valves, fixtures and equipment if a means of 29 disconnection is not otherwise provided. Provide reducing fittings for all changes in pipe size; bushings are 30 not acceptable. Use fittings for all changes in direction of piping. 31 32 Routing: Run parallel to column lines and perpendicular to the floor unless shown otherwise on drawings. 33 34 Leaks: Correct immediately, using new materials; leak- sealing compounds not permitted. 35 36 Valve Installation: 37 38 Install all gate valves and globe valves with stems horizontal or above horizontal. 39 Install chain wheel operators for all valves installed more than seven feet above the floor. 40 All valves shall be accessible. 41 42 Concealed Piping: Install all piping as concealed work in all finished areas, unless indicated otherwise. Do 43 not cover up or enclose work until properly and completely inspected and reviewed. Should work be 44 covered up or enclosed prior to inspections and reviews, uncover work as required an, after completely 45 inspected and reviewed, make repairs and replacements with materials as necessary and at no additional 46 cost to Owner. 47 48 Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions or flanges at each joint between dissimilar metals, except that 49 bronze valves and fittings may be used without dielectric couplings for ferrous -to- ferrous or non- ferrous -to- 50 non ferrous connections. 51 52 Hose End Drain Valves: Provide at low points of all systems and as indicated. 53 54 Pipe Supports and Seismic Bracing: Provide in accordance with Section 15140, "Mechanical Supporting 55 Devices 56 57 15100 -6 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 95112 1 1 INSULATION SADDLES AND INSERTS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 Piping 6 Inches and Larger: Provide saddles between hangers and bottom quadrant of pipe; weld to the 4 pipe. 5 6 All Other Insulated Piping: Factory fabricated insulation inserts with split metal jacket. Install inserts prior to 7 installing insulation. 8 9 JOINTS 10 11 Screwed: Conform threads of iron and steel pipes, fittings and couplings conforming to ANSI 831.1. 12 Produce sufficient lengths of perfect threads to insure full metal -to -metal contacts when screwed home in 13 fittings; countersink, ream and clean ends of pipes of chips and burrs after threading. 14 Make up full connections with not more than three full threads exposed, by such method that will not 15 subject pipes or fittings to twisting or cross strains; lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant. 16 17 Brazed and Soldered: Cut ends square and remove all fins and burrs. Replace all dents and damaged 18 tubing with new tubing. Remove all grease and oil from all joints by wiping with clean cloth saturated with a 19 suitable chemical solvent and then clean with emery cloth. After cleaning apply non corrosive flux, apply 20 heat and solder and hold joint rigidly until solder has hardened. Wipe excess solder from exterior of joint 21 before hardening. Before soldering, remove stems and washers of solder joint valves. 22 23 Welded: Conform welding to requirements of paragraph titled "Welding of Piping Branch connections 24 may be made as follows: 25 26 Straight Tees: Use welding tees 27 Branch One Size Smaller than Main: Use reducing tees 28 Branch Two or More Sized Smaller than Main: Use weldolets, thredolets or sockolets as required 29 30 Grooved Joint Couplings 31 32 Check pipe to be certain it is sufficiently free of indentations, projections, grooves, weld seams, or 33 roll marks on the exterior of the pipe over the entire gasket seating area to assure a leak -tight seat 34 for the gasket. Check that pipe ends are square cut and that penetration is in accordance with 35 Victaulic or equivalent manufacturer's standards. 36 Provide gaskets of the central cavity pressure responsive design. Gasket style and grade shall be 37 checked to be certain gasket supplied is suited for the intended service. 38 Provide lubrication for proper coupling /fitting assembly as follows: 39 Lubricate gasket exterior including the lips and /or pipe ends and housing interiors, to 40 prevent pinching the gasket and for proper gasket seating and alignment during 41 installation. 42 Use Victaulic lubricant for installation. Other compatible materials such as silicone and 43 others may be used, however, petroleum based lubricants must not be used on Grade "E" 44 or "M" gaskets. 45 Apply a thin, uniform coat of lubricant as follows: 46 Brush lubricant on the gasket lips (ID) and the entire exterior of the gasket. 47 Brush lubricant on the pipe ends around the entire pipe circumference and inside 48 the coupling housing. 49 50 WELDING OF PIPING 51 52 All welding shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9. 53 54 Unless stated otherwise, weld black steel piping 2 -1/2 inch size and larger. 55 56 95112 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 15100 7 1 Skilled Welders: Employ only welders who hold one of the following certificates dated within the preceding 2 12 months: 3 4 Certificate of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. 5 Certificate from a recognized testing laboratory indicating acceptable welding test results in 6 accordance with the American Petroleum Institute "Standard for Field Welding of Pipe Lines" or 7 ASME Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications If in the 8 opinion of the A/E the work of any welder creates a reasonable doubt as to their skill, additional 9 tests may be ordered by the A/E at the Contractor's expense. 10 11 Beveling: Do field bevels and shop bevels by mechanical means or by flame cutting. Where beveling is 12 done by flame cutting, thoroughly clean surfaces of scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Conform all 13 beveling to recognized standards. 14 15 Alignment: Maintain true alignment for joints on all pipes 2-1/2 inches and larger; provide complete weld 16 penetration; prevent weld spatter from reaching the interior of the pipe; the use of split backing rings is 17 optional. 18 19 Erection: Do not split, bend, flatten or otherwise deform piping before, during or after installation. During 20 erection, take care to remove all dirt, scale and other foreign matter from inside the piping by use of a pipe 21 swab or pipe "pig" before tying in sections, valves, equipment or fittings. Where the pipe temperature falls 22 to 32 F or lower, heat the pipe to approximately 100 F for a distance of 1 foot each side of the weld before 23 welding, and finish the weld before the pipe cools to 32 F. 24 25 Defects: Replace and reinspect defective welds at no additional cost to the Owner. Repairing defective 26 welds by adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. 27 28 Electrodes: Store electrodes in a dry heated area, and deep free of moisture and dampness during 29 fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating. 30 31 ESCUTCHEON PLATES 32 33 Provide where exposed piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings of finished rooms. Omit plates where 34 sleeves project above the floor. 35 36 BALANCING MEASURING VALVES 37 38 Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation. Use extreme care in installing units with correct 39 flow direction. Install with ports horizontal. 40 41 TESTING OF PIPING 42 43 General 44 45 Test all piping systems and connected equipment. Test after the lines have been cleaned and 46 prior to insulation. 47 Isolate from existing systems by the closest valve or valves to the existing system. 48 Furnish all test equipment. Install a calibrated test pressure gage in the system being tested. 49 Prior to testing, remove or valve -off gages, traps and other apparatus which may be damaged by 50 testing. 51 Make test in presence of the Engineer. 52 Rectify all defects which develop during testing and retest until approved by Engineer at no 53 additional charge to the Owner. 54 55 15100 -8 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 95112 1 Test Requirements 2 3 Pressure: 1 -1/2 times design working pressure or 150 psig, whichever is greater. 4 Time: Hold pressure to inspect all joints and connections. 5 Test all joints in air tested systems by brushing with a soapy water solution. 6 Water test all piping with water less than 100 F. 7 8 9 ***END OF SECTION*** 10 95112 PIPE, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 151 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15140 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 2 3 PART1- GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Included in this Section are pipe hangers, pipe supports, seismic restraints, vibration isolators and structural 12 attachments for piping, ductwork and equipment. 13 14 REGULATORY AGENCIES 15 16 All work shall be in conformance with the requirements of the applicable codes. 17 18 All fire protection system supports and restraints shall be in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 19 Pamphlet #13 and the Authorities having jurisdiction. 20 21 SEISMIC ZONE 22 23 This project is located in Seismic Zone 3. 24 25 26 REFERENCE STANDARDS 27 28 The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 29 30 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 31 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 32 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 33 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 34 American Welding Society (AWS) 35 Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS) 36 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 37 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 38 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 39 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 40 41 SUBMITTALS 42 43 Product Data: 44 45 Pipe hangers and supports 46 Structural attachments 47 Vibration mounts and hangers 48 Seismic restraints 49 Sway bracing 50 51 EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS 52 53 Where the Contractor furnishes and installs equipment other than that which is specified or scheduled, the 54 specified or scheduled vibration isolation devices shall be modified as required to compensate for changes 55 in equipment size, configuration, weight, or speed of rotation. 56 57 95112 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 15140 -1 1 Where no vibration isolation devices are specified or scheduled for the specified mechanical equipment, 2 suitable vibration isolation devices shall be provided for substitute mechanical equipment if required 3 because of size, configuration, weight, or speed of rotation changes from the specified equipment. 4 5 PART 2- PRODUCTS 6 7 PIPE ATTACHMENTS 8 9 General 10 11 Products shall be in accordance with MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69. 12 13 Materials 14 15 Hanger material: Match piping material at point of contact with piping. 16 17 Black steel pipe Carbon steel, cast iron or malleable iron. 18 Galvanized steel pipe Carbon steel, cast iron or malleable with zinc coating. 19 Copper tubing Carbon steel or malleable iron, plastic coated. 20 Cast iron pipe Carbon steel, cast iron or malleable iron. 21 22 All pipe hangers and hanger rods exposed to the weather shall be galvanized. 23 24 Size 25 26 Hangers shall be sized to suit the pipe. 27 28 Hangers on insulated pipe shall be sized to fit over the insulation. 29 30 Manufacturer 31 32 Hangers shall be Grinnell, model numbers as listed, or B -Line, Michigan Hanger, PHD or Grabler 33 equivalent, or approved substitute. 34 35 Pipe Rings 36 37 Steel Pipe: Adjustable wrought clevis, Grinnell Fig. 260. 38 39 Copper Pipe: Light weight adjustable wrought clevis copper plated, Grinnell Fig. CT-65. 40 41 Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Adjustable wrought clevis, Grinnell Fig. 260. 42 43 Application: Use only on piping systems where axial movement from thermal expansion is less 44 than 1/2" 45 46 Pipe Clamps 47 48 Vertical Piping: Unistrut P -1000 channel and Unistrut P -1100 series pipe clamps. Copper pipe 49 clamps for copper pipe. 50 51 Horizontal Racked Piping: Unistrut P -2024 series clamps for Unistrut channel pipe racks. 52 53 Grinnell Fig. 127 U -bolts or Grinnell Fig. CT -124 Tube Straps for structural steel pipe. 54 55 15140 -2 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 95112 1 1 1 Insulation Saddles and Inserts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 Saddles: Grinnell Figure 186 -188, size to match insulation thickness. 4 5 Inserts: Factory fabricated split type shield with galvanized steel jacket and calcium silicate insert: 6 Mechanical Pipe Shields, Mfg. 7 8 INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS 9 10 Hanger Rods 11 12 Continuous threaded rod shall be used except where otherwise noted. No chain, wire or perforated 13 strap shall be used. 14 15 Hot rolled steel rod, ASTM A 36; size to "Code for Pressure Piping ANSI 831.1, with safety factor 16 of 5. 17 18 Hanger Rod Size and Maximum Load: 19 20 Rod Diameter Pipe Size Load at 650 F 21 finches) (Inches) (Pounds) 22 23 3/8 2 and smaller 610 24 1/2 2 -1/2 and 3 -1/2 1,130 25 5/8 4 and 5 1,810 26 3/4 6 2,710 27 28 Trapeze Pipe Racks 29 30 Fabricate from structural angles or channels or Unistrut channels to suit weight of piping to be 31 supported. Size for minimum safety factor of 5. 32 33 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS 34 35 Steel Structure Clamps 36 37 Beam clamps, channel clamps and bar joist clips, Grinnell or equivalent. Select to suit structural 38 system and meet loading recommendations of manufacturer. 39 40 Ceiling Inserts 41 42 3" and smaller pipe, Grinnell Fig. 285. 43 3 -1/2" and larger pipe, Grinnell Fig. 281. 44 Multiple pipes on trapeze, Grinnell Fig. 285 or Fig. 281, selected for maximum weight of piping. 45 46 Wall Inserts 47 48 Unistruts P -3200 series inserts for concrete walls. 49 Unistruts P -1800 series inserts for brick walls. 50 Unistrut P -1000 channels with P -1045 and P -1047 fittings for frame and block walls. 51 52 Where Unistrut model numbers are listed, equivalent products of Powerstrut, Superstrut or O- strut, or 53 approved substitute, may be used. 54 55 56 57 95112 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 15140 3 1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS 2 3 Vibration isolators shall be as scheduled on the drawings by reference to the isolator and base types listed 4 in paragraphs B and C. Model numbers shown are Amber/Booth Company. Equivalent products 5 manufactured by Mason, Consolidated Kinetics Company, Korfund Company, Vibration Eliminator 6 Company or Vibration Mountings and Controls are acceptable. 7 8 Vibration Isolator Types 9 10 V1. ape SW An adjustable, free standing, open -spring mounting with combination leveling 11 bolt and equipment fastening bolt. The spring shall be rigidly attached to the spring 12 mounting base plate and compression plate. The isolator shall be designed for a 13 minimum Kx/Ky (Horizontal -to- Vertical spring rate) of 1.0. A Neoprene pad having a 14 minimum thickness of 1/4" shall be bonded to the base plate. 15 16 V2. _Type XL An aluminum- housed, adjustable, spring mounting having telescoping top and 17 bottom sections separated by resilient inserts of Neoprene to limit horizontal motion. Steel 18 or cast iron housing may be used if they are hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. A 19 Neoprene pad having a minimum thickness of 1/4" shall be bonded to the base plate. 20 21 V3. Type RVD An elastomeric mounting having a steel base plate with mounting holes and a 22 threaded insert at top of the mounting for attaching equipment. All metal parts shall be 23 completely embedded in the elastomeric material. The elastomer shall be Neoprene or 24 high quality synthetic rubber with anti-ozone and anti- oxidant additives. Mountings shall be 25 designated for approximately 1/4" deflection and loaded so that deflection does not exceed 26 15% of the free height of the mounting. 27 28 V4. Tvoe SP -NR Style A A pad- mounting consisting of two layers of 3/8" thick ribbed or 29 waffled Neoprene pads bonded to a 16 gauge galvanized steel separator plate. Pads shall 30 be sized for approximately 20 to 40 psi Toad and a deflection of 0.12" to 0.16 31 32 V5. Type BS A spring hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring 33 retainers, Neoprene impregnated fabric washer, and steel washer. 34 35 Base Types 36 37 B1. Type RTIR A pre- fabricated extruded aluminum rail base for roof top air conditioning 38 units, consisting of a pair of weatherproofed aluminum rails for fastening to the equipment 39 and to the roof curb. Rails shall incorporate wind restraints and a continuous air and water 40 seal which is protected from accidental puncture and direct sunlight by an aluminum 41 weather shield. Rails shall incorporate Type SW spring mounts with 2" deflection, properly 42 spaced around the perimeter of the unit. Where not limited by shipping size restraints, 43 units shall be factory assembled and shipped as a one -piece unit. 44 45 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 46 47 Anchorage And Bracing of Mechanical Systems: Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the 48 lateral and vertical support of piping, ductwork and mechanical equipment as required by UBC Chapter 16 49 and SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual for Seismic Hazard Level (SHL) A. 50 51 Coordinate seismic restraints with equipment to be furnished. 52 53 Seismic restraints for suspended piping which is suspended from spring hangers shall be cable type, to 54 avoid short circuiting the vibration mounts. Cable connector brackets shall have neoprene grommets. 55 Connectors shall be Mason, Amber -Booth or approved substitute. 56 57 15140 -4 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 All piping, ductwork and suspended equipment shall have seismic restraints, except for the following: 2 3 Piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms Tess than 1 -1/4 inches inside diameter. 4 5 All other piping Tess than 2 -1/2 inches inside diameter. 6 7 All piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of pipe to the 8 bottom of the supporting structural member where the hanger is attached. 9 10 Ducts smaller than those listed in the appropriate SMACNA table for duct bracing. 11 12 Water heaters, air compressor receivers, expansion tanks, water storage tanks and similar vertical tanks 13 which are 48" high or taller, shall have seismic restraints, consisting of eye bolts securely fastened into the 14 wall framing with a 1/4" diameter stainless steel cable with a tightening turnbuckle around the tank. Seismic 15 restraints shall be in accordance with Section 304.4 of the Uniform Mechanical Code. Adequate blocking 16 or other reinforcing shall be installed in the wall. 17 18 Where the tanks are not adjacent to walls, provide aircraft cable restraints in all four directions, secured to 19 the structure. 20 21 Materials and Equipment 22 23 Bolts and Nuts: Squarehead bolts and heavy hexagon nuts, ASME B18.2.1 and ASME B18.2.2, 24 and ASTM A 307 or ASTM A576. 25 26 Sway Brace: Material used for members listed in "SCHEDULES" of this specification, except for 27 pipes, shall be structural steel conforming with ASTM A 36. Steel pipes shall conform to ASTM A 28 501. 29 30 Sway Bracing Cable: Galvanized steel 7 x 19 strand aircraft cable, with electro galvanized steel 31 swivel anchor fittings and galvanized steel cable clamps. 32 33 PART 3 EXECUTION 34 35 INSTALLATION 36 37 All piping supports and hangers shall provide a means of adjustment for leveling, grading of piping and cold 38 spring movements. 39 40 All hanger rod lengths shall be sufficient to limit rod displacement from thermal expansion to 4 degrees 41 from vertical. 42 43 Pipe rings and clamps shall be sized to pass around the outside of the piping insulation. 44 45 Install vertical piping supports to allow for pipe movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. 46 47 Piping shall not be hung from other piping. 48 49 All elements of the support system shall be suitable for the system and shall have a safety factor of not less 50 than 4.0 51 52 Supporting elements not specifically specified shall be provided in accordance with SMACNA and NFPA 53 standards. Piping and heavy equipment supports, not otherwise detailed, shall conform to applicable 54 provision of MSS SP -58 and MSS SP-69. 55 56 95112 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 15140 5 1 Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members or where structural 2 members are used in lieu of commercially manufactured supports, such supplementary steel shall be 3 provided in accordance with the AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural 4 Steel for Buildings. 5 6 Welding of structural members, where approved, shall be in accordance with AWS D.1.1. 7 8 HANGER SPACING FOR HORIZONTAL PIPING 9 10 Steel Pipe: 11 12 Maximum hanger spacing and minimum hanger rod diameters as follows: 13 14 1/2", 3/4 pipe 6 ft. span 3/8" rod 15 1", 1 pipe 7 ft. span 3/8" rod 16 1 -1/2" pipe 9 ft. span 3/8" rod 17 2" pipe 10 ft. span 3/8" rod 18 2 -1/2 3" pipe 12 ft. span 1/2" rod 19 4" pipe 14 ft. span 5/8" rod 20 6" pipe 17 ft. span 3/4" rod 21 22 Copper Pipe: 23 24 Maximum hanger spacing and minimum hanger rod diameters as follows: 25 26 1/2 3/4" pipe 5 ft. span 3/8" rod 27 1" pipe 7 ft. span 3/8" rod .28 1 -1/4 1 -1/2" pipe 8 ft. span 3/8" rod 29 2 2 pipe 9 ft. span 1/2" rod 30 3 4" pipe 10 ft. span 1/2" rod 31 32 Cast Iron Soil Pipe: 33 34 One hanger for each pipe section, close to hub, maximum hanger spacing of 5 feet. 35 36 Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as valves, when required. 37 38 VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORTS 39 40 Support piping at each floor line with steel pipe clamps. 41 42 Install intermediate supports as required to prevent excessive pipe movement. 43 44 PIPING ANCHORS. GUIDES AND SUPPORTS 45 46 Anchor and support all piping to route expansion and contraction in the required direction. 47 48 Use flexible connectors to prevent vibrations and eliminate undue strain on equipment. 49 50 Use hangers for supporting pipe 2 inches and larger that are fabricated to permit adjustment after erection 51 while still supporting its load. 52 53 Use wall brackets where pipes are adjacent to walls or other vertical surfaces which may be used for 54 support. 55 56 Install supports to adequately carry the Toad and still maintain proper alignment. 57 15140 -6 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 95112 1 1 1 Set inserts and sleeves for supports in concrete where necessary before the concrete is poured. 2 I 3 Riser clamps shall not be supported on floor sleeves. Provide means to support riser clamps from the floor 4 slab. 5 6 INSULATION SADDLES AND INSERTS I 7 8 Piping 6 Inches and Larger: Provide saddles between hangers and bottom quadrant of pipe; weld to the 9 pipe. I 10 11 All Other Insulated Piping: Factory fabricated insulation inserts with split metal jacket. Install inserts prior to 12 installing insulation. I '3 14 EQUIPMENT. PIPING AND DUCTWORK SEISMIC RESTRAINTS, 15 16 General: I 17 18 All ductwork and piping shall be provided with seismic restraints in accordance with Seismic Hazard 19 Level (SHL) A of the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 20 dated 1991. I 21 22 Coordinate with shop drawings of major mechanical equipment items indicated. 23 I 24 25 Seismic Restraints: For suspended equipment, piping and ductwork, prefabricated seismic restraint systems approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development 26 shall be used. Manufacturer: B -Line, Superstrut or approved equivalent. 27 I 28 SWAY BRACES 29 30 General: 31 32 Sway braces shall be installed on piping to preclude damage during seismic activity. All bracing 33 shall conform to the arrangements shown on the drawings. Piping grouped for support on trapeze 34 type hangers shall be braced at the same intervals as determined by the smallest diameter pipe of I 35 the group. Do not fasten sway braces to two dissimilar parts of a building that may respond in a 36 different mode during an earthquake; for example, a wall and a roof. 37 I 38 No trapeze -type hanger shall be secured with Tess than two 1/2 -inch bolts. Bracing rigidly attached 39 to pipe flanges, or similar, shall not be used where it would interfere with thermal expansion of 40 piping. 41 I 42 43 Types of Braces: 44 Transverse Sway Bracing: Transverse sway bracing for steel pipe shall be provided at intervals not I 45 to exceed those given in schedule "Maximum Span for Transverse Sway Brace in Seismic Zone 4 46 47 Longitudinal Sway Bracing: Longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided at 40 -foot intervals except 48 when the location of sway braces are shown on the drawings for the particular piping systems, in I 49 50 which case, the braces shall be located as indicated. All sway braces shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings. Branch pipes, walls, or floors shall not be used as sway braces. 51 52 Vertical Runs: Vertical runs of piping shall be braced at not more than 10 -foot vertical intervals. 1 53 For tubing, bracing shall be provided at no more than 4 -foot spacing. Vertical braces shall be 54 above the center of gravity of the span being braced. All sway braces shall be constructed in 55 accordance with the drawings. Branch pipes, walls, or floors shall not be used as sway braces. 1 56 1 95112 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 15140 7 1 Fasteners: 2 3 Anchor Rods, Angles, and Bars: Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall be bolted to either pipe 4 clamps or pipe flanges at one end and cast -in -place concrete or masonry insert or clip angles 5 bolted to the steel structure on the other end. Rods shall be solid metal or pipe as specified below. 6 Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall not exceed lengths given in schedule "Maximum Length for 7 Anchor Braces." 8 9 Clamps and Hangers: Clamps or hangers on uninsulated pipes shall be applied directly to pipe. 10 11 Bolts: Bolts used for attachment of anchors to pipe and structure shall be not less than 1/2 -inch 12 diameter. 13 14 SPREADERS 15 16 Spreaders shall be provided between adjacent piping runs to prevent contact during seismic activity 17 whenever pipe or insulated pipe surfaces are less than 4 inches apart. Spreaders shall be applied at same 18 interval as sway braces, at an equal distance between the sway braces. If rack type hangers are used 19 where the pipes are restrained from contact by mounting to the rack, spreaders are not required for pipes 20 mounted in the rack. Spreaders shall be applied to the surface of bare pipe and over insulation on 21 insulated pipes utilizing high density inserts and pipe protection shields. 22 23 ANCHOR BOLTS 24 25 All floor or pad mounted equipment shall be installed with cast -in -place anchor bolts. Two nuts shall be 26 provided on each bolt. If the size and number of the anchor bolts are not shown on the drawings then 27 anchor bolts shall conform to schedule "Minimum Bolt Sizes, Cast -In -Place Anchor Bolts" for the various 28 equipment weights or the manufacturer's installation recommendations, whichever is the most stringent. 29 Anchor bolts that exceed normal depth of equipment foundation piers or pads shall either extend into 30 concrete floors or the foundation shall be increased in depth to accommodate bolt lengths. Expansion 31 anchors shall not be used to resist seismic or vibratory Toads unless test data are provided to verify the 32 adequacy of the specific anchor and application. In no case shall the expansion anchor size be less than 33 that required for bolts in the aforementioned schedule. 34 35 EQUIPMENT SWAY BRACING 36 37 Equipment sway bracing shall be provided for all items supported from overhead floor or roof structures. 38 Braces shall consist of angles, rods, bars or pipes arranged as shown and secured at both ends with not 39 less than 1/2 -inch bolts. Braces shall conform to schedule "Maximum Length for Anchor Braces." 40 Sufficient braces shall be provided for equipment to resist a horizontal force equal to 113 percent of the 41 weight of equipment without exceeding safe working stress of bracing components. Details of all 42 equipment bracing shall be submitted. In lieu of bracing with vertical supports, these items may be 43 supported with hangers inclined at 45 degrees directed up and radially away from equipment and oriented 44 symmetrically in 90- degree intervals on the horizontal plane, bisecting the angles of each corner of the 45 equipment, provided that supporting members are properly sized to support operating weight of equipment 46 when hangers are inclined at a 45- degree angle. 47 48 15140 -8 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 95112 2 4 5 I 6 7 8 9 I 10 11 12 I 13 14 15 16 I 17 18 19 I 20 21 22 23 I 24 25 26 27 I 28 29 30 I 31 32 33 34 I 35 36 37 I 38 39 40 41 I 42 43 44 I 45 46 47 48 I 49 50 51 I 52 53 54 55 I 1 SCHEDULES Maximum Span for Transverse Sway Braces in Seismic Zone 4 Pipe Std. Wgt. Steel Ex. Strong Steel Copper Tube Diameter Pipe 40S Pipe 80S Type L (in.) `L(ft.) "F(Ibs.) *L(ft.) "Vbs.) *L(ft.) "F(Ibs.) 1 22 70 22 80 11 17 1-1/2 25 140 26 180 12 35 2 29 220 30 290 14 70 2-1\2 32 380 33 460 15 110 3 34 550 35 710 17 150 3-1/2 36 730 38 930 18 220 4 39 960 40 1,200 19 300 5 41 1,440 44 1,900 20 470 6 45 2,120 46 2,750 22 730 *L- Maximum span between lateral supports multiplied by 1.1 for Zones 2b and 3. *F Horizontal force on the brace multiplied by 0.8 for Zone 3, and by 0.7 for Zone 2b. NOTE: Bracing shall consist of at least one vertical angle 2 x 2 x 16 gauge and one diagonal angle of the same size. Maximum Length for Anchor Braces Maximum Allowable length' Loads* Type Size (Inches) (Feet/Inches) (kips) Angles 1 -1/2 x 1 -1/2 x 1/4 4 -10 5.7 2 x 2 x1/4 6-6 7.8 2 -1/2 x 1 -1/2 x 1/4 8 -0 9.8 3x2 1/2 x1/4 8 -10 10.8 3x3x1/4 9 -10 11.9 Rods 3/4 3 -1 3.7 7/8 3 -8 5.0 Flat 1 -1/2 x 1/4 1 -2 3.1 Bars 2 x 1/4 1 -2 4.1 2 x 3/8 1 -9 6.2 Pipes 1 7 -0 4.1 (40S) 1 -1/4 9 -0 5.5 1 -1/2 10-4 6.6 2 13 -1 8.9 Based on the slenderness ratio of 1/r 200 and ASTM A 36 steel. 95112 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 15140 -9 1 Minimum Bolt Sizes, Cast -In -Place Anchor Bolts 2 3 Maximum Equipment Minimum Bolt Sizes (Inches) 4 Weight (Pounds) Zone 3 5 6 500 5/8 7 1,000 5/8 8 5,000 5/8 9 10,000 5/8 0 20,000 518 1 30,000 3/4 2 3 Based on four bolts per item, a minimum embedment of 12 bolt diameters, a minimum bolt 4 spacing of 16 bolt diameters and a minimum edge distance of 12 bolt diameters. Use 5 equivalent total cross sectional area when more than four bolts per item are provided. 6 Anchor bolts must conform to ASTM A 307. Anchor bolts shall have an embedded straight 7 length equal to at least twelve times nominal diameter of the bolt. 8 9 VIBRATION ISOLATORS 20 21 Corrosion Protection 22 23 All vibration isolators shall be designed or treated for resistance to corrosion. 24 25 Steel components shall be PVC coated, or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. All 26 nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly 27 cleaned of welding slag and primed with zinc chromate or metal etching primer. A finish coat of 28 industrial enamel shall be applied over the primer. 29 30 All isolators exposed to the weather shall have steel parts PVC coated, hot -dip galvanized or zinc 31 electroplated plus coating of Neoprene or Bitumastic paint. Aluminum components for outdoor 32 installation shall be etched and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts and washers may be 33 zinc electroplated. 34 35 Design Requirements 36 37 Required spring deflections for isolators supporting various items of equipment are shown on the 38 Plans or tabulated elsewhere in these specifications. The springs shall be capable of 30% over travel 39 before becoming solid. 40 41 All isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall be selected for approximately equal spring 42 deflection. 43 44 Isolators for equipment installed out -of -doors shall be designed to provide adequate restraint due to 45 normal wind conditions and to withstand wind Toads of 30 /sq. ft. applied to any exposed surface of 46 the equipment without failure. 47 48 49 50 "'END OF SECTION*** 51 52 53 15140 -10 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 2 3 PART 1 GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Included in this Section is insulation and accessories for piping, ductwork and mechanical equipment 12 13 REGULATORY AGENCIES 14 15 All work shall be in conformance with the requirements of the applicable codes, including Energy codes. 16 17 REFERENCE STANDARDS 18 19 The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 20 21 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 22 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 23 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 24 Midwest Insulation Contractors Association (MICA) Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards 25 26 FIRE RESISTANCE 27 28 Insulation: Flame spread and smoke developed ratings per NFPA 255, ASTM E84 and UL 723 testing 29 requirements; not more than 25/50. 30 31 Tape, adhesives, vapor barrier materials and jackets: Flame spread ratings not to exceed 25. 32 Exempt Items/Materials: The following are exempt from the fire resistance ratings: 33 Nylon duct insulation anchors 34 Treated wood insulation inserts 35 PVC fittings and valve covers 36 37 DEFINITIONS 38 39 Exposed is defined as work exposed to the view of occupants in normally occupied areas and in equipment 40 rooms. 41 42 Concealed is defined as work located in ceiling spaces, chases and other locations not exposed to view. 43 44 PART 2 PRODUCTS 45 46 PIPE INSULATION 47 48 Fiber Glass: Suitable for pipe temperature from -60 F to 500 F; one piece type with only one longitudinal 49 joint; thermal conductivity not greater than 0.24 Btu /sq. ft./F/hrfn. at 75 F mean temperature. Provide 50 factory applied all- service jacket. Owens Corning, Manville, Certainteed, Pittsburgh Corning, Knauf or 51 approved substitute, and as otherwise listed. 52 53 54 Polyolefin (Polyethylene) Foam Insulation: Suitable for pipe temperature from -40 F to 200 F; one piece 55 type, either pre- formed or with one longitudinal joint with edges pre coated with adhesive; thermal 56 conductivity not greater than 0.24 Btu /sq. ft./F/hr /in. at 75 F mean temperature. Jacketing not required. 57 Manufacturer: Imcoa Imcolock and Imcoshield. 95112 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 -1 1 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 2 3 Fiberglass Flexible Insulation: Suitable for temperatures to 1000 F; thermal conductivity not greater than 4 0.4 Btu/hr /sq. ft. /in. at 200 F mean temperature. 5 6 Polyolefin (Polyethylene) Foam Insulation: Sheet or roll insulation, thermal conductivity not greater than 7 0.24 Btu /hr /sq. ft. /F!n at 75 F mean temperature. Manufacturer: Imcoa Imcolock. 8 9 Owens- Corning, Manville, Certainteed, Pittsburgh Corning, Knauf or approved substitute, and as otherwise 10 listed. 11 12 DUCTWORK INSULATION 13 14 Exposed Ductwork: Fiberglass rigid or flexible insulation with all- purpose facing consisting of white fire 15 retardant kraft paper reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to aluminum foil with a fire 16 retardant adhesive. Density 3 pounds per cubic foot; thermal conductivity not greater than 0.24 Btu/hr/sq. 17 ft. /F /in. of thickness at a mean temperature of 75 F. 18 19 Concealed Ductwork: Fiberglass flexible blanket with foil scrim -kraft facing. Density 0.75 pounds per cubic 20 foot; thermal conductivity not greater than 0.30 Btu /hr /sq. ft./F/in. at a mean temperature of 75 F. 21 22 Owens Corning, Manville, Certainteed, Pittsburgh Corning, Knauf or approved substitute, and as otherwise 23 listed. 24 25 JACKETS FOR PIPE INSULATION 26 27 Factory Applied AII- service Jacket (Fiberglass Insulation): White kraft paper outer surface bonded to 28 aluminum foil vapor barrier, suitable for painting. Kraft paper permanently treated for fire and smoke safety 29 and to prevent corrosion of the foil. Factory applied pressure sensitive closure system for permanent seal 30 of laps and butt strips. 31 32 JACKETS FOR FITTINGS. VALVES AND DEVICES 33 34 AII service Jacket: Factory premolded one -piece PVC fitting covers, 25/50 rated, .020" thickness for piping 35 up to 10" diameter, .030" thickness for piping greater than 10" diameter. PVC jacketing for outdoor 36 installation shall be U.V. resistant. Proto LoSMOKE or approved substitute. 37 38 JACKETS FOR EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK 39 40 Jacketing for indoor equipment shall be a metal jacket or .030" thick PVC jacket, 25/50 rated, Proto 41 LoSMOKE or approved substitute. PVC jacketing shall be used only for installations where the temperature 42 of the equipment or duct is Tess than 110 degrees F. 43 44 INSULATION SPECIALTIES 45 46 Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced, aluminum foil and kraft paper laminate with vapor barrier characteristics 47 comparable to insulation facing. 48 49 Finishing Cement: Hydraulic setting, low shrinkage insulating and finishing cement for one coat finish, 50 suitable for painting with water base paint, Johns Manville No. 375, Ryders, Eagle, Pabco or approved 51 substitute. 52 53 Insulating Cement: Mineral fiber cement suitable for application on metal in single layers up to 4 inch thick, 54 Johns Manville No. 460 Cement or approved substitute. 55 56 Vapor Barrier Adhesive: Vapor barrier lap sealing adhesive, Foster 85 -20 or approved substitute. 15250 -2 MECHANICAL INSULATION 95112 1 1 1 Lagging Adhesive: Foster 30 -36, Miracle LA69, Arabol or approved substitute. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 Insulation Pin Fasteners: Zinc coated steel, 2" x 2" perforated plate with spindle and washer. Spindle 4 length to suit insulation thickness. 5 6 Insulation Pin Adhesive: Contact cement suitable for fastening insulation pins to metal surfaces, Miracle 7 Adhesive HT4620, Foster 82 -11, Tuf -Bond all- purpose or approved substitute. 8 9 Mastic: Foster CI oil base or HI water base. 10 11 Inserts: Provided under Section 15100, "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 12 13 Adhesive for Polyolefin Insulation: Adhesive shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer, 14 thermoplastic Fuse Seal sticks to be applied with a butane torch. 15 16 PART 3 EXECUTION 17 18 GENERAL 19 20 Insulate all surfaces of hot and cold piping and equipment. 21 22 Install with all joints tightly butted. Tuck and tuft all edges of insulation. Maintain vapor barrier when butting 23 insulation to inserts. 24 25 Install insulation to allow easy access to equipment for inspection and repairs. 26 27 Carefully bevel and seal insulation around equipment nameplates. Seal all raw edges of insulation at 28 unions, flanges, etc. 29 30 Remove all loose dirt, rust, all other loose foreign material, moisture and frost from surfaces prior to 31 installing insulation. 32 33 Apply insulation only after piping has been tested. 34 35 INSTALLATION (PIPING) 36 37 General 38 39 Provide all insulation continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. 40 Apply insulation on all cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used with a continuous, 41 unbroken vapor seal. Adequately insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports and anchors that are 42 secured directly to cold surfaces to prevent condensation. 43 Apply specific adhesives, mastics and coatings at the manufacturers recommended minimum 44 coverage per gallon. 45 Sleeves and Wall Chases: Where penetrating interior walls, extend a metal jacket 2 inches out on 46 either side of the wall and secure on each end with a band. Where penetrating floors, extend a 47 metal jacket from a point below the back -up material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one 48 band at the floor and one not more than one inch from end of metal jacket. Where penetrating 49 exterior walls, extend the metal jackets through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior 50 surface of the wall. 51 Provide insulation in the space between the pipe and the pipe saddle. 52 Inserts: Overlap adjacent insulation jacket a minimum of 1 inch on insulation inserts and securely 53 cement in place. 54 55 All- service Jacketed Fiberglass Insulation: Apply insulation over clean, dry pipe with all joints butted firmly 56 together. Smoothly secure longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips according to manufacturer's 57 recommendations. 95112 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 3 1 Polyolefin Insulation 2 3 Where the piping is to be insulated prior to testing, the insulation shall be seamless lmcoshield. 4 Where the piping is to be insulated after testing, the insulation shall be Imcolock, with a single 5 longitudinal seam with factory installed adhesive and release liners. 6 Fitting insulation shall be field cut and mitered to fit. All seams in mitered joints shall be sealed with 7 thermoplastic rods heated with a special butane torch. Insulation over valve bonnets and similar 8 fittings shall be formed from pipe insulation and sheet insulation, to fit snugly and without gaps. All 9 seams shall be sealed. 10 At outside carrying hanger locations, where the insulation must resist compression, supporting 11 devices such as short wood dowels or woodblocks shall be used in combination with galvanized 12 sheet metal hanger shields. The wood supporting devices shall be the same thickness as the 13 insulation and sealed into the insulation with adhesive. 14 15 INSTALLATION (EQUIPMENT\ 16 17 Installation (General) 18 19 Form or fabricate insulation to fit the equipment. Groove or score as required to closely conform to 20 round surfaces; to insure tight fit, bevel edges and tightly butt and stagger joints. 21 Secure insulation in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer 22 but not more than 12 inch centers. Protect insulation corners under wires and bands with suitable 23 corner angles. 24 Set insulation in a coating of mastic, and seal joints with insulating cement. 25 Install insulation on equipment with ribs over 6 inches high using 12 gage welded wire fabric which 26 has been spot welded to the equipment over the ribs. Secure insulation to the fabric with J -hooks 27 and 2" x 2" washers. 28 Apply a smooth coat of insulating cement over irregular surface. 29 Upon completion of installation of the insulation, apply two coats of vapor barrier adhesive with a 30 layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats; provide 1/32 inch dry finish thickness. 31 Roof Drain Bodies: Flexible fiberglass, covered with 8 ounce canvas and vapor barrier cement. 32 Polyolefin: Adhere polyolefin sheet to clean, oil -free metal surfaces by compression fit method and 33 seal all joints and seams with adhesive. Seal butt joints with same adhesive. Comply with 34 manufacturer's written instructions. 35 36 INSTALLATION (DUCTWORK) 37 38 Rigid Insulation: Secure to ductwork by impaling over pins located not more than 3 inches from the edge of 39 insulation pieces and spaced not more than 12 inches on center. Apply insulation with all joints tightly 40 butted. Fill all joints, breaks, punctures and voids with vapor barrier mastic and cover with tape to match 41 insulation facing. 42 43 Flexible Insulation: Apply to ductwork with Foster 85 -20 mastic applied in 4 inch wide strips on 12 inch 44 centers; secure with edges tightly stitched with staples. Insulate on the bottom of rectangular horizontal 45 ducts over 24 inches wide by impaling over pins as specified for rigid insulation in addition to mastic; 46 sagging of flexible duct insulation will not be permitted. Seal all punctures and voids with vapor barrier. 47 48 Seal all seams with 4 inch wide pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape to match insulation facing. 49 50 The edges of duct insulation at fire damper access doors, other duct access doors, and volume damper 51 quadrants shall be neatly trimmed and taped to allow the access door to be opened, or the damper 52 quadrant to be moved, without damage to the insulation. 53 54 15250 -4 MECHANICAL INSULATION 95112 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 I 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 I 32 33 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 34 1 Ductwork exposed to outside weather conditions, whether directly exposed to rain and snow or insulated as specified for indoor ductwork except that the duct thickness shall be as scheduled "INSULATION THICKNESS" and the experior duct surface shall be finished with weatherproof glass cloth, metal or PVC jacketing. Joints in jacketing material shall be located so as to shed minimum 3" overlap and completely weather sealed. ITEMS TO BE INSULATED Piping Cold Piping: Condensate drain piping, domestic cold water piping, rainleaders. Refrigerant vapor piping. Hot Piping: Domestic hot water supply and circulating piping. Piping Below Accessible Lavatoriesand Sinks: Drain, including trap Hot and cold water piping including stops except handwheels Equipment Roof drain bodies HVAC Systems All supply ductwork from air handling units to room outlets. ITEMS NOT TO BE INSULATED Piping Valve stems, handwheels and operators. Unions on domestic hot water and domestic cold water piping. Domestic cold water piping from the trap primers to trap. 95112 MECHANICAL INSULATION not, shall be under mastic and water with a 15250 5 1 INSULATION TYPE AND THICKNESS 2 3 Pipe: See the following pipe insulation table: 4 5 Thickness for Pipe Sizes Shown (Inches) 6 Insulation 7 Service Type To 1 1.25 -2 2.5-4 5-6 8 9 10 Domestic Hot Water FG, P 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 11 Domestic Hot Water 12 Circulating 100 F to 120 F 13 14 Domestic Cold FG, P 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 15 Water 40 F to 70 F 16 17 Rainleaders Same as Domestic Cold Water 18 Overflow Rainleaders 19 Indirect (Cold) Drains 32 F to 70 F 20 21 Equipment 22 23 Service Temperature Type Thickness (Inches) 24 25 40 F to 56 F Fiberglass 1.0 26 27 60 F to 140 F Fiberglass 1.5 ,28 29 140 F to 200 F Fiberglass 2.0 30 31 Ductwork: 2 inch thick, minimum; 3 inches on outdoor installations. 32 33 Hot and cold water and drain piping below handicapped lavatories; insulated drain kit; Brocar Products, 34 "Trap Wrap 35 36 Abbreviations: FG Fiberglass 37 P Polyolefin 38 39 40 41 42 ***END OF SECTION 43 15250 -6 MECHANICAL INSULATION 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 2 3 PART1- GENERAL 4 5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Work in this section includes automatic sprinkler systems. 12 13 Early completion of the systems in order to receive temporary occupancy permits or partial occupancy 14 permits, is a contract requirement. 15 16 REFERENCE STANDARDS 17 18 The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 19 20 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 21 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 22 Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) 23 24 SUBMITTALS 25 26 Product Data 27 28 All Equipment 29 30 Shop Drawings 31 32 Complete shop drawings of the fire protection systems. 33 34 APPROVALS 35 36 Four sets of design drawings, including the locations of supply connections, control valves, fire department 37 connections, and all other equipment to be installed, shall be submitted for approval to the Authorities 38 Having Jurisdiction. Design and installation of systems which meet the approval of the Authorities Having 39 Jurisdiction. Design and installation of system which meet the approval of the Authorities Having 40 Jurisdiction is a requirement of the Contract. 41 42 For purposes of Code compliance, "the Authorities Having Jurisdiction" shall be the City Fire Marshal. 43 44 For insurance purposes the Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be the the Insuring Agency, if any, 45 designated by the Owner. 46 47 After receiving stamped approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, submit shop drawings to the A/E for 48 approval. Submit complete brochures giving names of manufacturers and catalog figure numbers, trade 49 names, technical data and dimensional information of each item to be furnished. 50 51 Shop drawings, material lists, and brochures shall be prepared and submitted to the A/E for review within 52 thirty days after the award of the contract. No work shall be started until they have been reviewed by the 53 NE. 54 55 Submit a reflected ceiling plan showing the location of all sprinkler heads for the NE review. Sprinklers 56 shall be centered in the ceiling tiles and other patterned ceiling elements, and between light fixtures; this 57 symmetrical pattern will require additional sprinklers as compared to NFPA requirements. 95112 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15300 -1 1 SYSTEM DESIGN 2 3 Provide complete hydraulically calculated wet pipe and /or dry pipe sprinkler systems as specified and as 4 required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Where there is a conflict between local authority 5 requirements or other standards, agency recommendations, and these drawings and specifications, 6 conform with recommendations of standards, agencies and requirements of local authorities. Design and 7 install all systems in accordance with NFPA 13 and all applicable codes, standards, and regulations. 8 Multiple alarm valves shall be provided if required. 9 10 Sprinklers shall be installed in all rooms, all crawl spaces, all blind spaces, all canopies, over -hangs and 11 covered walkways. 12 13 Hazard Class: Ordinary hazard or as otherwise classified and required by the Fire Marshal or the Insuring 14 Authority. 15 16 Where sprinkler components, sprinkler piping or sprinklers are indicated on the Contract Drawings, they are 17 shown in order to indicate preferred locations for the components or sprinklers. These representations are 18 not to be construed as a partial design of the sprinkler systems or as an indication of the mandatory location 19 or quantity of sprinkler components. All system design is the responsibility of the Contractor. The system 20 shall be designed to meet all requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 21 22 Piping shall be designed and installed in coordination with the work of all other trades and to be as 23 inconspicuous as possible. In general, all piping is to be concealed. Piping offsets and required auxiliary 24 drains shall be included in the design. 25 26 Systems shall designed for 88 psi static pressure, 85 psi residual pressure and 5007 gpm available water 27 flow. Fire flow test information shall be verified by the contractor prior to designing the system. 28 29 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30 31 The Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall be licensed in the State of Washington and regularly engaged in the 32 installation of automatic sprinkler equipment as listed by Underwriter Laboratories, Inc., or other nationally 33 recognized testing laboratories. 34 35 Drawings and calculations shall be prepared and signed by a National Institute for Certification in 36 engineering Technologies Certified Sprinkler Technician Level III or higher. 37 38 All underground piping to the sprinkler system shall be installed by a licensed Fire Protection contractor as 39 defined by R.C.W. 18.160. 40 41 PART 2 PRODUCTS 42 43 MATERIAL 44 45 All devices and equipment, including supply, shall be of the current make and type listed for the use 46 intended by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or approved by The Factory Mutual Testing Laboratories. 47 48 All manufacturer's part numbers specified are for descriptive purposes only and are not to be construed as 49 exclusive. 50 51 PIPING 52 53 Piping shall be as specified in Section 15100. 54 55 15300 -2 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pipe above ground and within the buildings shall be black, Schedule 40 or Schedule 10 steel pipe. Piping 2 for dry pipe systems may be galvanized steel. Underground pipe shall be coated, cement lined, ductile iron 3 bell- and spigot pipe, Class 52, with cast iron mechanical joint fittings. Screw jointed fittings shall be 125 Ib. 4 cast iron. At Contractor's option, above ground piping may have UL- approved coupling for grooved end 5 pipe, and malleable iron grooved end fittings, provided all such fittings and couplings are UL- approved. 6 Cast iron fittings shall be cement lined. Joints of shop fabricated piping may be welded. 7 8 Piping to water motor alarms shall be galvanized steel, Schedule 40, screwed. 9 10 VALVES 11 12 Valves shall be Kennedy, Mueller, Walworth or approved substitutes. 13 14 Gate Valves, underground: Non rising stem, iron body, bronze fitted, end type to suit piping. Operating nut 15 for buried valves and valves in valve boxes, and hand wheel for valves in utility vaults. 16 17 Gate Valves, above grade, over 3 -inch: Iron body with brass trim, Underwriter's pattern, 175 pound, wedge 18 gate, O.S. Y., flanged ends. 19 20 Gate Valves, 3 inch and under: Bronze body, threaded ends for sizes less than 2 inch; flanged for larger 21 sizes. 22 23 Check Valve, over 3 inch: Iron body, brass seat and disc, Class 175, flanged ends. 24 25 Angle, Check, and Globe Valves, 3 inch and under: Bronze body, threaded ends for sizes less than 2 inch; 26 flanged for larger sizes. 27 28 Butterfly Valves: UL listed and FM approved wafer or lug style; 175 psi working pressure. 29 30 ALARM VALVES 31 32 Wet Pipe System: Listed alarm check valves with trim, pressure gages, pressure switch, retard chamber, 33 and drain and system test valves. 34 35 Dry Pipe System: Valves complete with accessories and appurtenances. Provision shall be made to 36 prevent excessive water columning. Provide an approved quick- opening device for each dry pipe valve 37 controlling a system having a capacity greater than 500 gallons. 38 39 Alarm valves shall be Viking, star, Central, Gem or approved substitute. All alarm valves shall be from the 40 same manufacturer. 41 42 ALARM BELLS 43 44 Alarm bell shall be UL approved 10 inch water motor alarm bell, complete with identification sign. 45 46 Electric alarm bell shall be UL listed electric bell, weatherproofed, listed for outdoor use. 47 48 SPRINKLERS 49 50 Sprinklers shall be UL approved for use intended, Viking, Star, Grinnell or approved substitute, pendant, 51 upright and sidewall types. Sprinklers shall be bronze. 52 53 Location and Finish 54 55 Pendant sprinklers shall be installed in all interior areas with suspended ceilings. Sprinklers shall 56 be chrome plated interior and installed with recessed chrome plated escutcheons. 57 95112 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15300 3 1 Upright sprinklers shall be installed in all areas without suspended ceilings. 2 Sprinklers shall be corrosion resistant when installed in corrosive locations. 3 Provide dry pendant or dry sidewall in unheated areas subject to freezing. 4 Sprinklers shall be 160 degree rated except for sprinklers installed in locations with elevated 5 temperatures, which shall be selected for the required temperature rating. 6 7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 8 9 Metal pipe supports„ sway braces, hangers, clamps, etc., and all other accessories, shall be of an 10 approved pattern placed to conform to the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 13. 11 12 Flexible connections of an approved design shall be placed above and below each valve assembly. 13 Additional flexible connections and bracing shall be provided in conformance with NFPA Standard No. 13 14 for installations in areas subject to earthquakes. 15 16 Flexible couplings, if used, shall be the bolted sleeve or clamp type for use with grooved -end pipe and shall 17 have rubber rings for sealing. 18 19 Double check valve back flow assembly, same as pipe size, Febco Model 805 YD or Ames, Beeco, Lawler 20 or Watts equivalent, or approved substitute. Provide with drain assembly. 21 22 Drum drips shall be installed in accordance with NFPA No. 13. The installation shall be so made that the 23 sprinkler system is not impaired while condensate is being removed from the piping. 24 25 Valve position supervisory limit switches shall be furnished to supervise all manual isolating valves on the 26 fire protection system water lines. The switches shall be tamper -proof (alarms when cover is removed) and 27 shall alarm during the first two revolutions of the valve stem in the closing direction. 28 29 A sprinkler cabinet, with approved number of sprinkler heads of all types and ratings installed, a sprinkler 30 wrench, and a pair of sprinkler tongs shall be provided for the system and installed where directed. 31 32 Sprinkler guards shall be a formed wire or forged metal type for use with either an upright or pendant 33 sprinkler. Guards shall be of a type that can be installed or removed without disturbing the sprinkler. 34 Guards shall be installed on all sprinklers mounted at a height of 6'-6" or less above the floor, in Storage 35 Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Covered Walkways and as required by Code. 36 37 Pressure gages: UL approved 3 -1/2 inch dial type, Marsh or equivalent with a maximum limit of not Tess 38 than twice the normal w.p. 39 40 Identification Signs: Drain valves, test valves, alarm bells, control valves and alarm valves shall be fitted 41 with approved enameled signs indicating their use. 42 43 Inspectors' Test Connection: Test connections shall be provided 6 feet above the floor for each sprinkler 44 system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device and shall be located at the 45 hydraulically most remote part of each system. Test connection shall be piped to a location where the 46 discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without damage. 47 48 Main Drains: Drains shall be piped to discharge at safe points outside each building or to sight cones 49 attached to drains of adequate size to readily care for the full flow from each sprinkler drain under 50 maximum pressure. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13, 51 52 Miscellaneous connection and fittings, drains, inspectors test, discharge outlets, flushing connection, sway 53 bracing and flexible joints shall be installed as required by NFPA 13. 54 55 15300 -4 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AIR COMPRESSOR 2 3 Provide approved, automatic type, tank mounted air compressor including pressure switch, air piping, and 4 tank. 5 6 Compressor shall have a minimum capacity capable of charging the complete sprinkler system to normal 7 system air pressure within 30 minutes and within 15 minutes for the preaction system pneumatic detection 8 system. Provide an approved automatic air maintenance device for each system. 9 10 Belt driven compressors shall have belt guards. 11 12 DRY PIPE SYSTEMS 13 14 Air piping and valves between the compressor and the Air Maintenance Device shall be the same as 15 specified for sprinkler piping. suitable drips with automatic drain valves shall be provided on the low points 16 of the compressed air mains. compressed air mains shall pitch not less than 1/8 inch per foot towards the 17 drips. 18 19 Air maintenance devices in the compressed air piping to the dry-pipe system shall have a 4 to 45 psi 20 downstream pressure setting with supply, check, relief and drain valves per NFPA 13. 21 22 Systems shall be limited to 750 gallon volume unless the system is designed to deliver water to the system 23 test connection in 60 seconds or less. System in excess of 500 gallons shall have listed accelerators and 24 exhausters as required. 25 26 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INTERFACE 27 28 Operation of the fire protection systems is intended to be integrated into the building Fire Alarm System, 29 furnished under Division 16, Electrical. 30 31 Wet pipe system shall be provided with approved vane type water flow alarm switch. Alarm switch shall 32 incorporate adjustable time delay feature (20 to 90 seconds) to prevent nuisance trips and false alarms 33 triggered by pressure surges in the water supply system. 34 35 Dry Pipe System valves shall be complete with pressure switch. 36 37 Provide supervisory switches for all exterior water service valves. 38 39 Connection of all switches shall be made under Division 16. 40 41 Switches shall be UL listed and conform to NFPA 71. 42 43 PART 3 EXECUTION 44 45 PIPING INSTALLATION 46 47 Hangers, supports and seismic bracing: As required by NFPA pamphlet 13. 48 49 Provide all necessary clamps and rods for properly supporting sprinkler risers and underground piping, all 50 in strict accordance with requirements of NFPA Pamphlet Nos. 13 and 24. 51 52 Provide test connections as required by code. 53 54 Automatic ball drip piping shall drain to nearest floor drain. 55 56 95112 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15300 5 1 Rubber gasketed, grooved end pipe fittings (Victaulic) shall be assembled to pipe grooved with tools 2 approved by the fitting manufacturer. Groove dimensions and tightening torque values shall be within 3 tolerances published by the fitting manufacturer. 4 5 Reduction in pipe sizes shall be made with one -piece reducing fittings. Bushings will not be acceptable. 6 7 Provide chrome plated escutcheons on all exposed pipes passing through walls, floors and ceilings. 8 9 All piping shall be run concealed unless noted otherwise. All piping shall be inspected, tested and 10 approved before being concealed. Fittings shall be provided for changes in direction of piping and for all 11 connections. Jointing compound for pipe thread shall be pipe cement and oil, or graphite and oil. Short 12 pipe nipples shall be extra strong. 13 14 Sprinkler piping shall be coordinated with other trades. When piping is installed without regard to other 15 work to be installed, the piping shall be moved as required. Auxiliary drains shall be installed as required. 16 17 Flow switches in horizontal piping shall be installed on the top of the pipe and downstream as far as 18 possible on each zone to prevent false annunciation. 19 20 Where "Fire Protection" valves, switches, or other controlling or monitoring devices are concealed, provide 21 access door labeled for quick location and recognition of concealed device. Doors to match those installed 22 under Specification Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 24 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 25 26 Provide flexible connections at top and bottom of each riser assembly and any other locations 27 recommended or required by NFPA 13. 28 29 INSPECTORS TEST CONNECTION 30 31 Valves shall be supplied from the highest and most hydraulically remote part of the system in relation to the 32 riser assembly. Test valves shall be conveniently accessible from the floor. 33 34 CLEANING 35 36 Painting of sprinkler piping is not included in this section, however the sprinkler piping shall be left in a clean 37 condition ready for paint application. 38 39 FLUSHING AND TESTING 40 41 Underground feed mains shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 13. 42 43 Test piping at 200 pounds per square inch, for a two -hour continuous period, with not more than 2 pounds 44 pressure loss during this period, in any part of the system. Any defects due to materials or workmanship 45 occurring during this test shall be immediately and properly corrected. Fire Marshal shall be present for all 46 tests. 47 48 Copies of completed Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for hydrostatic testing and flushing shall be 49 sent to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 50 51 OPENINGS. CUTTING AND PATCHING, 52 53 Openings: Provide the structural fabricator with locations and sizes for any penetrations through the 54 building structural members. Cutting of structural members in the field will not be allowed. Should any 55 additional openings or holes be required the cost will be an obligation of this section. 56 57 15300 -6 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 95112 1 1 1 Location: Prior to beginning work, verify openings as shown on the Architectural and Structural drawings. If 2 the work requires additional openings submit requirements to the A/E for approval. 3 4 Cutting and Patching: Provide and pay for all costs of additional cutting, patching and reinforcement, 5 subject to approval of the Architect. I6 7 8 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES 9 Complete drawings and specifications of all trades will be furnished or will be available for inspection in the I 10 construction office at the job site; carefully check these drawings and specifications before installing any 11 work. In all cases consider the work of all other trades, and coordinate this work with that of the Sheet 12 Metal, Piping, Plumbing, Electrical and Sitework Contractors so that the best arrangement of all equipment, I 14 13 piping, conduit, ducts, and other related items can be obtained. 15 Call to the attention of the A/E any points of conflict between fire protection work and that of the other 16 trades, so that the conflict may be properly resolved. Work which interferes with the work of other trades I 17 shall be removed and re- installed at this Contractors expense when so directed by the A/E. It shall be 18 understood that no extras to the Contract will be permitted to accomplish the above results. 19 20 AIR COMPRESSOR INSTALLATION I 21 22 Install the air compressor so as to provide for all required maintenance access. 23 I 24 25 Mount the compressor on vibration absorbing pads, Vibration Isolator Type V-4 as specified in Section 15140, MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES. 26 27 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL I 28 29 Provide all excavation and backfill required both inside and outside the building as indicated or as required. 30 I 31 Refer to Section 15050, "Basic Materials and Methods" 32 33 Piping outside of the building shall be buried below the frost line or to a depth to the top of the pipe of not 34 less than 3' -0" below finish grade, whichever is greater. Coordinate with Sitework Contractor. Do not I 35 36 backfill until after final testing, inspection and approval of pipework. 37 CONCRETE WORK I 38 39 40 Provide anchor and thrust blocks, including reinforcing steel, required for the sprinkler piping installation. 41 Conform to the requirements of Division 3. I 42 43 WATER SUPPLY 44 45 Point of connection to water supply shall be as shown. 1 47 TESTS a 48 I 49 50 The contractor shall furnish all equipment and instruments required to perform the flushing and testing operations described herein. 51 52 New system underground mains and lead -in connections to system risers (upstream of alarm valve) shall I 53 54 be flushed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA No. 24. 55 The new inside sprinkler system piping shall be flushed. Flushing water shall be fed into the systems 156 57 through the alarm valves to provide velocity not less than seven (7) feet per second in the piping being flushed. Flushing water shall be discharged from the ends of each feed main and each cross main. 1 95112 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15300 7 1 Flushing water shall be discharged to the outside of the building to a point at least forty (40) feet from the 2 building or to the sanitary sewer. Flushing operations shall be continued until the effluent runs clear and 3 free of foreign matter for five (5) minutes. 4 5 The sprinkler system piping inside the building shall be subjected to a pneumatic test prior to introduction of 6 water into the lines for flushing or hydrostatic testing. Each riser system shall be tested with air at 25 psig a 7 period of 4 hours. A leakage rate greater than 1 psig per hour shall be considered cause for locating and 8 repairing the Teaks and retesting prior to introduction of any water. 9 10 The sprinkler system, including yard piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA No. 13 11 and No. 24. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be 200 psig. Permissible leakage for outside piping shall 12 not exceed that specified in referenced NFPA 24. Leaks in piping inside the building will not be acceptable. 13 Any damage due to leaks inside the building shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. 14 15 CERTIFICATION 16 17 Certification, in accordance with NFPA No. 13, shall be completed by the Contractor and furnished to the 18 Owner after satisfactory completion of the tests. 19 20 DISINFECTING 21 22 New water piping and existing water piping affected by the Contractor's operation shall be disinfected in 23 accordance with AWWA C601. Piping systems shall be filled with solution containing minimum of 500 parts 24 per million of available chlorine and allowed to stand for a minimum of 24 hours. Solution shall be flushed 25 from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per 26 million. 27 28 Equipment parts subject to damage by the disinfecting solution shall be removed prior to the operation, and 29 disinfected before reinstallation. 30 31 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 32 33 Upon completion and approval of this system, provide an experienced engineer to instruct the Owner's 34 operators in all details of operating and maintaining the system. 35 36 Provide operating and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 15010, "Mechanical Provision 37 38 GUARANTEE 39 40 All materials, apparatus, and equipment provided shall be new and free from all defects. Any defects 41 occurring within one year from date of acceptance of the work, due to faulty material and /or workmanship, 42 shall be corrected by the Contractor without expense to the owner. 43 44 45 ***END OF SECTION*** 46 15300 -8 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING 2 3 PART 1 GENERAL 4 5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Work in this section includes water piping, waste and vent piping, rain leaders and roof drains, plumbing 12 fixtures and associated equipment. 13 14 REGULATORY AGENCIES 15 16 All work shall be in conformance to the Uniform Plumbing Code and with applicable local codes, 17 regulations, standards and ordinances. 18 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS 20 21 The publications of the Organizations listed below form a part of this Section to the extent referenced. 22 23 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 24 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 25 American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 26 American Public Works Association (APWA) 27 Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 28 29 SUBMITTALS 30 31 Product data for the following: 32 33 Pipe, valves and fittings 34 Piping Specialties 35 Drains and cleanouts 36 Hose bibbs and hydrants 37 Water Heaters 38 Plumbing fixtures and trim 39 Fixture Supports 40 41 DEFINITIONS 42 43 "Above ground" as used to define piping materials, means not in contact with, or within 6" of the 44 concrete slab or the ground. 45 46 "Below ground" as used to define piping materials, means in contact with, or within 6" of the 47 concrete slab or the ground. 48 49 Piping in a crawl space, more than 6" above the crawl space slab is considered to be above 50 ground. 51 52 PART 2 PRODUCTS 53 54 PIPING 55 56 Domestic water piping, above ground: Copper tubing, type L, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves 57 and Accessories 95112 PLUMBING 15400 -1 1 Domestic water piping, below ground: Copper tubing, type K, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves 2 and Accessories 3 4 Water Service: 5 6 3" and smaller, copper tube, type K, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 7 4" and larger, ductile iron, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 8 9 Waste Piping, above ground: 10 11 1 -1/2" and smaller, galvanized steel, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 12 2" and larger, cast iron, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 13 14 Waste Pipe, below ground: cast iron, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 15 16 Vent piping, above ground: 17 18 1 -1/2" and smaller, galvanized steel, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 19 2" and larger, cast iron, as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 20 2" pipe may be galvanized steel. 21 22 PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 24 Relief Valves 25 26 ASME rated pressure relief valve with bronze body and stainless steel spring. (Set pressure 75 27 psig) Watts 3L or equivalent. 28 29 Back Flow Preventers 30 31 Reduced pressure type backflow preventers, 3/4 inch to 2 inches; bronze construction with isolating 32 ball valves and strainer and air gap drain fitting, Watts 909 Series, Febco, Wilkins, Beeco, Cla -Val, 33 or equivalent. 34 Reduced pressure type backflow preventers; 2 -1/2 inch and larger, epoxy coated cast iron 35 construction with epoxy coated cast iron strainer and isolating gate valves and with air gap drain 36 fitting; Watts 909 Series, Beeco, Cla -Val, or ITT Lawler equivalent. 37 38 Trap Primers 39 40 Automatic trap primer, 1/2 inch connection, air gap type with distribution unit where required. 41 Provide for all floor drains. Precision Plumbing Products, "Prime -Rite" or equivalent. 42 Polished chrome plated cast bronze P -trap with cleanout, and primer tube; Jay R. Smith "Prime 43 Eze" water saver trap primer. 44 Flush valve connected type; Sloan F -72 -A1 or equivalent. 45 46 Water Hammer Arresters 47 48 In -Line, factory- sealed shock arresters with direct action bellows and screwed connections. 49 Provide an isolation valve upstream of each water hammer arrester. 50 51 Expansion Tanks 52 53 Steel diaphragm type expansion tanks for use with domestic water. Tanks shall be complete with 54 rigid polypropylene liner and butyl diaphragm. Amtrol "Therm -X -trot" or Taco equivalent. 55 Expansion tanks shall be ASME stamped when required by Code. 56 57 15400 -2 PLUMBING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Flexible Connections 2 3 Water Heater Connectors: Corrugated seamless copper tubing with dielectric insulator; sweat or 4 threaded connection. 5 6 FLOOR DRAINS 7 8 Floor Drains for Finished Spaces (FD -1): Cast iron body, nickel bronze adjustable strainer, square top, J.R. 9 Smith Fig. 2005 -B. 10 11 Floor Drains for Unfinished Spaces (FD -2): Cast iron body, cast iron grate, cast iron sediment bucket, J.R. 12 Smith Fig. 2210. 13 14 All floor drains shall have trap primer connections. 15 16 Drains shall be J.R. Smith models, listed, or Zurn, Josam or Wade equivalent. 17 18 CLEANOUTS 19 20 Floor Cleanouts: Cast iron body and frame, round adjustable secured nickel bronze top, lead seal, iron 21 plug. Provide carpet clamping top where required. J.R. Smith Fig. 4020. 22 23 Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron cleanout tee, square nickel bronze frame and cover, bronze plug. J.R. Smith 24 Fig. 4553. 25 26 Grade Cleanouts: Cast iron cleanouts with countersunk plugs in a 24 x 24 x 4 inch thick tapered concrete 27 slab with top 1 inch above grade. Locate in center of slab. J.R. Smith Fig. 4241. 28 29 Cleanouts shall be J.R. Smith models listed, or Zurn, Josam or Wade equivalent. 30 31 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER. WH -1 32 33 UL listed electric hot water heater meeting ASHRAE 90A -1980 requirements with glass Tined steel tank 34 designed for 150 psig working pressure. Complete with magnesium anode, medium watt density elements 35 with zinc plated copper sheath, thermostat for each element and high temperature cut -off, foam insulation 36 and steel jacket with baked enamel finish. Complete with ASME rated temperature and pressure relief 37 valve. 38 39 A.O. Smith, model den -52, 52 gallon storage, (2) 3000 watts heating elements wired for non simultaneous 40 operation, factory insulated, factory jacketed, glass Tined. 41 ASME P. T. relief valve, with discharge piped to exterior of the building. 42 Amtrol ST -5 expansion tank, 2.0 gallon capacity, installed in cold water pipe. 43 44 FIXTURE SUPPORTS 45 46 Urinals: Provide concealed carrier, cast iron feet, set on sub floor or cast in sub floor, no topping permitted, 47 or supported by floor -to- ceiling pipe columns, bolted flanges top and bottom. 48 49 Wall Hung Fixtures: Provide other wall hung fixtures with concealed fixture hanger constructed for fixture, 50 cast iron feet set on sub floor or cast in sub floor, no topping permitted, or supported by floor -to- ceiling 51 pipes. Concealed arm fixture supports required where suitable for fixture. Exposed arm supports, white 52 enamel finish where fixture is mounted on plaster walls, vitreous enamel where mounted against ceramic or 53 glazed finish walls. 54 55 Carriers and supports shall be selected to suite the construction and the space available. 56 57 Supports shall be J.R. Smith, Zurn, Josam, or Wade. 95112 PLUMBING 15400 -3 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES 2 3 Where fixtures are scheduled as Kohler, equivalent models of American Standard may be used. Where 4 stainless steel sinks are scheduled as Elkay, equivalent models of Just may be used. 5 6 Flush valves shall have screwdriver stops and vacuum breakers. Flush valves shall be Sloan Royal or 7 Sloan Regal or Zurn. Maximum water consumption shall be 1.6 gallons per flush for water closets and 1.0 8 gallons per flush for urinals. 9 10 Stop valves shall be installed for each water connection to all fixtures, except where the fitting has an 11 integral stop valve. Stops shall be loose key, chrome plated. 12 13 Supplies shall be 3/8" inside diameter, chrome plated tubing or nylon with preformed compression end 14 fitting. 15 16 Faucets shall have vacuum breakers or other acceptable backflow prevention device on all fixtures with the 17 water connection located below the rim of the fixture, and for all fixtures with a threaded spout or serrated 18 spout to which a hose could be attached. 19 20 Drain traps shall be chrome plated, 17 gauge copper alloy, adjustable. 21 22 All fixtures shall be white. 23 24 Install escutcheon plates on all pipes through walls and floors. 25 26 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 27 28 P -1 WATER CLOSET: 29 Kohler #K- 4330 -ET, "Kingston Lite wall hung vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl. 30 Royal Regal Flush valve with vacuum breaker and screwdriver stop, to suit fixture. 31 Kohler #K- 4670 -C solid plastic commercial open front seat, white. 32 J. R. Smith compact floor supported carrier, for 4" no -hub cast iron pipe, to suit construction and 33 space limitations. 34 35 P -1A WATER CLOSET. ACCESSIBLE: 36 Kohler #K- 4330 -ET, "Kingston Lite wall hung vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl. 37 Royal Regal Flush valve with vacuum breaker and screwdriver stop, to suit fixture. 38 Kohler #K- 4670 -C solid plastic commercial open front seat, white. 39 J. R. Smith compact floor supported carrier, for 4" no-hub cast iron pipe, to suit construction and 40 space limitations. 41 Mount with top of rim at 17" above the floor. 42 43 P -2 URINAL: 44 Kohler #K- 4960 -T, "Bardon Lite wall hung, vitreous china, washout, elongated rim. 45 Royal Regal flush valve with vacuum breaker and screwdriver stop, to suit fixture. 46 J.R. Smith carrier to suit construction and space limitations. 47 48 P -3 LAVATORY. COUNTERTOP: 49 Kohler #K -2195, "Pennington 20" x 17 vitreous china countertop lavatory, self rimming. 50 Symmons S- 60 -G -H, metering/ temperature selection faucet with lever handle. 51 Kohler #K -13885 grid strainer and offset tailpiece. 52 Angle supplies with stops. 53 1-1/4" P -trap. 54 Insulate waste and hot water supply with Brocar Products "Trap Wrap 55 56 15400 -4 PLUMBING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 P-4 SINK. KITCHEN: 2 Elkay #LR -2521, 25" x 21" x 8" deep, 18 gauge stainless steel, self rimming. 3 Elkay #LK- 4340 -F -CR single lever swing spout faucet with pull -out hose and chrome finish with 4 LK- 2725 -CR chrome finish escutcheon plate. 5 Elkay #LK -99 strainer with tailpiece. 6 Angle supplies with stops. 7 1-1/2" P -trap. 8 Elkay #LKH- 190 -WH 190 degree hot water dispenser, 775 watts. 9 10 P -4A SINK. MEETING ROOM: 11 Elkay #LFRG -3322, 33" x 22 double compartment, left compartment 10" deep, right compartment 12 8" deep, 18 gauge stainless steel, self- rimming. 13 Elkay #LK- 4124 -F single lever gooseneck swing spout faucet with spray hose. 14 Elkay #LK -99 strainers with tailpieces. 15 Angle supplies with stops. 16 1 -1/2" P -trap. 17 18 P -4B SINK. WORKROOM: 19 Elkay #DRKRC- 2220 -C, 22" x 19 -1/2" x 7 -1/2" deep, 18 gauge stainless steel, self rimming, double 20 ledge. 21 Elkay #LKC -2432 faucet with swing spout. 22 Elkay #LK -1141 bubbler. 23 Elkay #LK -35 strainer with tailpiece. 24 Angle supplies with stops. 25 1 -1/2" P -trap. 26 27 P -5 WATER COOLER. ACCESSIBLE TWO LEVEL: 28 Elkay #ERP2 -8 -C, wall mounted with front pressbar, stainless steel cabinet and stainless steel wall 29 plate. 30 Removable stainless steel ventilation panel and access plate. 31 1/5 Horsepower comressor. 32 Angle supply with stop. 33 1-1/4" P -trap. 34 35 P-6 SERVICE SINK: 36 Kohler #K -6710, "Whitby" 28" x 28" x 13" high floor mounted corner service sink, enameled cast 37 iron. 38 Kohler #K -8940 coated wire rim guard. 39 Kohler #K -8906 faucet, rough chrome plated finish, with pail hook, hose threaded spout, vacuum 40 breaker and loose -key stops. 41 Kohler #K -9146 3" perforated strainer with tailpiece. 42 43 P SHOWER: 44 AquaGlass Model SC 3692 one -piece fiberglass shower stall and receptor, 38" x 41" x 78" high, 45 complete with accessory mounting plates, folding phenolic simulated teak seat, 1" diameter 46 stainless steel curtain rod, white commercial grade shower curtain, and drain. 47 Powers T425 concealed thermostatic mixing valve with lever handle, stainless steel face plate and 48 Type E concealed angle checkstops with strainers, or approved Grohe equivalent. 49 Powers Type 7 hand shower with push button control, 59" long white vinyl hose, 24" chrome plated 50 vertical glide bar, swivel wall connector and Type W in -line vacuum breaker, or approved Grohe 51 equivalent. 52 2" chrome plated drain strainer with tailpiece. 53 Color as selected by the Architect. 54 55 P -8 REFRIGERATOR CONNECTION: 56 Refrigerator by other than Mechanical Contractor. 57 Connect to ice maker, with stop valve in water supply. 96001 PLUMBING 15400 -5 1 P -9 ROOF DRAINS: 2 J. R. Smith Fig. 1010 -ERC, with cast iron body and polyethylene dome. 3 4 P -10 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP: 5 Bell Gossett Model LR -20BF, all bronze, 4 gpm at 11 feet total head, 1/20 HP motor. 6 Control through a reverse -acting immersion aquastat set at 100 F (adjustable), so that the pump 7 runs when the return water temperature is less than the set point. 8 The pump shall be wired through the building time clock, so that the pump is off during the 9 unoccupied cycle. 10 11 P -11 HOSE BIBB EXTERIOR: 12 Woodford Model 65, exposed type, non freeze, chrome finish, 3/4" inlet, 3/4" hose thread outlet, 13 loose key handle, with backflow preventer. 14 15 PART 3 EXECUTION 16 17 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 18 19 General: Install piping and equipment in accordance with Section 15100 and as follows: 20 21 Install piping promptly, capping or plugging open ends and in a manner to conserve space for other 22 work. 23 Provide uniform pitch of 1/4 inch per foot for horizontal waste and rain leader piping within building. 24 Support all piping independently from connected equipment. 25 Inspect each piece of pipe, fittings, and equipment for defects and obstructions; promptly remove 26 defective material from jobsite. 27 Install pipes to clear beams and obstructions; do not cut into or reduce size of load carrying 28 members without the approval of the NE. 29 Provide access doors for concealed valves, water hammer arresters and trap primers. 30 Install unions as required for maintenance. 31 Install dielectric unions at all joints between dissimilar metals. 32 All exposed water piping is to be chrome plated. 33 34 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION 35 36 Pipe Connections 37 38 Install with gate valve, check valve and expansion tank on cold water pipe, and with gate valve on 39 hot water pipe. 40 Install ASME pressure and temperature relief valve for all water heaters. 41 Pipe relief valve discharge to floor drain or other suitable location as indicated, terminating in 42 accordance with code. 43 44 Heater Installation 45 46 Install incompressible R -10 insulating base under electric water heaters, in accordance with Energy 47 Code. 48 Install seismic restraints on water heaters as specified in Section 15140 "Mechanical Supporting 49 Devices 50 51 FIXTURE INSTALLATION 52 53 Locate fixtures where indicated on the drawings. Refer to Architectural drawings for mounting heights Use 54 the type of mountings specified. 55 56 Secure the floor outlet of floor mounted fixtures rigidly to the drainage connections and the floor. 57 15400 -6 PLUMBING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Support wall -hung fixtures rigidly with metal supporting members so no stress is transmitted to connections. 1 2 3 Make all connections gas- and water -tight. 4 5 6 7 8 Provide individual vents for each fixture. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 specified. 19 20 21 quality as elsewhere specified. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 ROOF PENETRATIONS 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 WATERPROOFING 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Use one -piece special molded gaskets for connections between earthenware of fixtures and soil pipe flanges. Do not use bulk material, including putty and plastic, for gaskets. Provide separate traps, where manufacturers do not supply trap for fixture. Provide silicone wall sealer between the top and the sides of plumbing fixtures and adjacent wall surfaces; General Electric No. 1200 or Dow Corning No. 780. Apply per manufacturer's recommendations to form a smooth unobtrusive joint. Install one sample joint on each type of fixture for the A/E to review before proceeding with installation of remainder of this sealant. Install stop valve for each water connection for each fixture including sinks, except where integral stops are Where trim or rough -in is not specified, furnish all necessary for the completion of the job, and of the same Accessible fixtures shall be installed in accordance with all code requirements. Flush valve handles shall be on the wide side of the fixture stall. Water closets and urinals shall be installed at required heights above floor. Flush valves shall be at a height required by code. Lavatories, drinking fountains, water coolers and sinks shall be installed with required clearance under the fixture. Drain traps and hot water supplies shall be insulated on sinks and lavatories. Vent stacks extending through roof shall be flashed with 4 pound sheet lead sleeves. The sleeves shall enclose the stack, be turned down into the outlet, and shall have soldered flanges extending 6 inches all around the pipe to be mopped into the roofing materials to form a watertight connection. Vents 4" and larger shall have vandal -proof caps. Floor Drains in membraned areas and shower drains shall be flashed with 4 pound sheet lead. Lead flashing shall be clamped to the drains and shall extend 6 inches beyond all around the body, and shall be mopped into the membrane materials to form a watertight seal. CONCEALED WORK General: Do not cover up or enclose work until inspected and approved. Noncompliance: Should work be covered up or enclose prior to required inspections, uncover work as required, and, after inspection and approval, make repairs and replacements. TESTING Test all piping as specified in Section 15100 "Pipe, Valves and Accessories 96001 PLUMBING 15400 -7 1 CLEANING UP 2 3 Prior to acceptance of buildings, thoroughly clean exposed portions of plumbing installation, removing 4 labels and traces of foreign substance, using only a cleaning solution approved by manufacturer of 5 plumbing item and being careful to avoid damage to finished surfaces. 6 7 STERILIZATION AND FLUSHING 8 9 After completion of water piping installation, flush system thoroughly. Submit a sample of water to the 10 Water Department to determine compliance with Water Department standards. If sample is not in 11 compliance, sterilization shall be performed as follows: 12 Sterilize all water piping, 8 hour sterilization contact time; 50 parts per million chlorine concentration. After 13 sterilization period open all valves several times; follow by flushing with clean water until residual chlorine is 14 less than 0.2 parts per million. 15 16 17 18 19 20 ***END OF SECTION*** 21 15400 -8 PLUMBING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15780 PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 2 3 PART 1- GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Work in this Section includes packaged air conditioning units, heat pumps, and accessories. 12 13 SUBMITTALS 14 15 Product Data 16 17 Air Conditioning Unit 18 Heat Pumps 19 20 Submittal Detail 21 22 Submittals shall include equipment dimensions, equipment weights, equipment support points, fan 23 performance curves, filter sizes and filter types, coil sizes and capacities, automatic damper sizes, 24 and duct connection sizes and locations. 25 Submittals shall show electrical power characteristics, location, requirements and quantity of power 26 connections. 27 28 REFERENCE STANDARDS 29 30 The publication of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 31 32 American Society of Heating and Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 33 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 34 35 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE 36 37 Heating and cooling equipment shall be provided so that the completed mechanical systems meet the 38 acoustical limitations specified in Section 15990. 39 40 PART 2 PRODUCTS 41 42 SINGLE PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 43 44 Description: Single package direct expansion cooling, unit, specifically constructed for roof -top mounting, 45 completely factory assembled, tested, piped, internally wired, charged with refrigerant, and shipped in one 46 piece. Unit shall be UL approved. 47 48 Casing: External casing panels shall be zinc coated steel, factory finished. Access doors to filters, supply 49 fan and exhaust fan shall be double wall, 18 gauge steel hinged panels. Access to refrigeration 50 components and compressors shall be screwed on panels. Access to controls shall be hinged access 51 panel with quick release latches. All access doors and access panels shall have neoprene gaskets. 52 Casing shall have 112" thick rigid fiberglass insulation. Unit base shall be 14 gauge steel, watertight, with a 53 curb overhang. 54 55 95112 PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 15780 -1 1 Roof Curb: The unit shall be provided with a factory fabricated roof mounting curb, 14 gauge galvanized 2 steel, with a 2" x 4" nailer strip. Openings for supply air and return air shall be gasketed. Mount unit on 3 spring vibration isolators on top of the unit base, as detailed. The number of isloators and isolator spacing 4 shall be as suited to the equipment. Isolators shall be Type B -1, as specified in Section 15140, 5 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES. 6 7 Refrigeration System: Compressors shall be direct drive hermetic, suction gas cooled scroll compressors, 8 with oil sight glass and oil charging valve, high and low pressure cutouts, low oil pressure cutouts, and 9 suction and liquid service valves. Compressor controls shall allow lead/ lag of compressors for even run 10 time. 11 12 Evaporator coil shall be high capacity type, seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins, factory pressure 13 tested and leak tested to 3000 psig. Coils shall be equipped with thermal expansion valves. 14 15 Condenser coils shall be seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins. Condenser coils shall be factory 16 tested at 450 psig air pressure and vacuum dehydrated. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge direct 17 drive fans, with steel blades. Condenser fan motors shall be permanently lubricated ball bearing type, with 18 built n current and thermal overload protection. Motors shall be suited for operation in a roof -top unit. 19 Condenser fans shall have fan guards. 20 21 Air Handling System: The supply fans shall be double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fans mounted on a 22 common shaft with a fixed sheave drive, dynamically balanced at the factory. The fan bearings shall be 23 200,000 hour average life bearings. The fan motors shall be premium efficiency type. Under the Base bid, 24 the fans shall have constant speed drives. Under Alternate bid #2, the fans shall have Variable Frequency 25 Drive, with the drive operation as described under Section 15975, Controls. Fans shall have extended 26 grease tubes into the filter section. Fan and motor shall be mounted on a common steel base with 2" 27 deflection spring mounts. The exhaust fan shall be a 100% modulating exhaust fan with a Variable 28 Frequency Drive and with modulating exhaust dampers. The exhaust fan shall be controlled by the 29 differential static pressure between the building pressure and atmospheric pressure. The exhaust fan type, 30 motor, drive, bearings, base and vibration mounts shall be the same as for the supply fan. 31 32 Filters: Filters shall be 2" deep pleated media type, with a minimum efficiency of 30% based on ASHRAE 33 Standard 52 -76, mounted in a metal filter rack gasketed to prevent filter by -pass. Minimum filter face area 34 shall be as scheduled. A Magnehelic Model 2001 -AF air filter gauge shall be installed across the filters, 35 with the gauge inside the air conditioning unit cabinet. Air pressure differential switch shall be installed 36 across the filters to monitor filter status. 37 38 Controls: Unit shall be factory wired with controls and contractor pressure lugs or terminal blocks for power 39 wiring. Unit shall have a non -fused disconnect switch with external handle. Unit shall have anti-short cycle 40 compressor controls, hot gas bypass valves, piping and controls, and economizer controls with modulating 41 low leakage return air outside air dampers. 42 43 Under Alternate Bid #2, the supply fan and the exhaust fan shall have Variable Frequency Drives, with duct 44 static pressure control for the supply fan and building pressure control for the exhaust fan. The power 45 supply shall be suited to the voltage and phase for the motors. The maximum allowable Voltage Total 46 Harmonic Distortion measured at the secondary of the building systems transformer or at the main service 47 switchboard that provides power to the unit, shall not exceed 5 per cent, and any individual harmonic shall 48 not exceed 3 per cent. Provide the appropriate equipment integral to the motor control system to limit the 49 Current Total Harmonic Distortion to 15 measured at the disconnecting means for the motors. 50 51 Unit shall have all control devices to control DX cooling and economizer dampers through discharge air 52 temperature control. Discharge air temperature is to be adjustable, with temperature reset by the zone 53 requiring the greatest cooling. Warm -up cycle discharge air temperature is to be 70 degrees, adjustable. 54 Occupied cycle discharge air temperature is to be 60 degrees to 65 degrees, adjustable. The unit shall 55 have a 100 percent modulating exhaust fan, with the exhaust discharge dampers controlled by building 56 pressure. The unit controls shall include contact closure for start-up and contact closure for occupied cycle 57 control of minimum outside air percentage. 15780 -2 PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The unit shall have a Generic Building Automation System Module, providing analog inputs for setpoint 2 adjustment and 5 relay outputs for diagnostic reporting. Inputs may use a potentiometer or 0 -5 volt d.c. 3 signal. Analog inputs shall provide 1) discharge air temperature reset, 2) minimum outside air percentage 4 reset, and two spares. The relay outputs shall provide 1) supply fan status, 2) exhaust fan status, 3) filter 5 status, 4) summary alarm, including discharge temperature more than 5 degrees from set point, supply 6 duct pressure more than .10" from set point, and building pressure more than .04" from set point, and 5) 7 DX systems summary alarm. System shall have software timers to prevent false alarms on start -up. 8 9 All control devices furnished with the unit shall be compatible with any of the specified or accepted DDC 10 controls manufacturers control systems. 11 12 Unit shall be Trane, model and capacities as scheduled, or equivalent of LaSalle, McQuay, or approved 13 substitute. 14 15 PACKAGED HEAT PUMPS: 16 17 Single package factory assembled units, with all internal wiring, piping and refrigerant system controls. 18 19 Casings: Exterior casing panels shall be zinc coated, 20 gauge steel, gasketed and insulated. Service 20 access panels shall have lifting handles and be removable be removing not more than three fasteners. 21 Panels shall be water tight and air tight. All maintenance access shall be on one side of the unit. 22 Unit base pan shall have no penetrations within the curb except for duct openings with raised sides to 23 prevent condensate leakage around the ducts. 24 25 Roof Curb: The unit shall be provided with a factory fabricated curb designed to allow field connection of 26 the ducts directly to the curb and to be water tight. Curb to be field assembled and insulated. Curb to 27 conform to NRCA requirements. Openings for supply air and return air shall be gasketed. Mount unit on 28 neoprene pad vibration isolators on top of the unit base, Type B -3 as specified in Section 15140, 29 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES. 30 31 Refrigeration System: Compressors to be direct drive hermetic, suction cooled reciprocating compressors, 32 with centrifugal oil pump, oil sight glass, high end low pressure cutouts, low oil pressure cutout, refrigerant 33 filter drier, and suction and liquid service valves. 34 Evaporator coil and condenser coil shall be serpentine type, seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins, 35 factory leak tested to 200 psig and pressure tested to 400 psig evaporator coil shall have fixed orifice 36 expansion device. 37 Condenser fans shall be direct drive, draw through propeller fans, vertical discharge, with permanently 38 lubricated fan motors and fan guards. 39 40 Supplemental Heating coils: Electric heating coils shall be completely assembled and wired within the unit. 41 Coils shall have heavy duty nickel chromium elements, with maximum circuit capacity of 48 amps or less. 42 Coils shall have automatic reset high limit controls and pressure switches or air flow switches to keep coil 43 de- energized until air flow is proven. 44 45 Air Handling System: Fans shall be centrifugal, direct drive or belt drive as scheduled, with thermal motor 46 protection. 47 48 Relief Air System: Unit shall have barometric relief air dampers with a power exhaust fan, complete with 49 controls. Note: Exhaust fan to be field installed. 50 51 Filters: Filters shall be two -inch deep pleated media type, with a minimum efficiency of 30% based on 52 ASHRAB Standard 52 -76, mounted in a metal filter rack gasketed to prevent filter by -pass. Minimum filter 53 face area shall be as scheduled. A magnehelic Model 2001 -AF filter gauge shall be installed across the 54 filters, with the gauge inside the air conditioning unit cabinet. 55 56 95112 PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 15780 3 1 Controls: Unit shall be factory wired with controls and contractor pressure tugs or terminal blocks for power 2 wiring. Unit shall have anti-short cycling compressor controls, and economizer controls with modulating 3 low leakage return air and outside air dampers. 4 5 Units shall have single point electrical connections for power and controls. 6 7 Unit shall be suited for connection to the Direct Digital Control System in the building for remote reset and 8 monitoring. All control devices furnished with the unit shall be compatible with any of the specified or 9 accepted DDC controls manufacturers control systems. 10 11 Manufacturer: Trane, model, size and capacity as indicated, or McQuay, Lennox or Carrier equivalent or 12 approved substitute. 13 14 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING 15 16 PVC pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM D -1785, with solvent cement type fittings, ASTM D -2466. 17 Solvent cement and cleaner shall meet manufacturer's recommendations. 18 19 PART 3 EXECUTION 20 21 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 22 23 General: Install units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to provide adequate 24 service clearance. 25 26 Plenums and casings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all debris and vacuumed free of all small particles of 27 rubbish and dust before installing and making final duct connections. Equipment shall be wiped clean, with 28 all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed. 29 30 Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction. After construction dirt 31 has been removed from the building, new filters shall be installed. Provide a spare set of filters to the 32 Owner. 33 34 Units shall be level, mounted on 35 36 Connect all unit controls to building control components, and provide all required interlock control wiring. 37 38 CONDENSATE PIPING INSTALLATION 39 40 Condensate drains from air conditioning units and heat pumps shall be constructed of Schedule 40 PVC, 41 built with 2" seal traps, and terminated at least 24" away from the base of the units, adjacent to a roof drain 42 or located so that the condensate will flow away from the units toward roof drains. 43 44 Condensate drains shall be adequately supported, with permanent blocking. Drains shall terminate a 45 minimum of 4" above the roof surface. 46 47 48 *END OF SECTION*** 49 15780 -4 PACKAGED HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 2 3 PART 1- GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Work in this Section includes exhaust fans and accessories. 12 13 SUBMITTALS 14 15 Product Data 16 17 Exhaust Fans 18 19 Submittal Detail 20 21 Submittals shall include equipment dimensions, equipment weights, equipment support points, fan 22 performance curves, automatic damper sizes, and duct connection sizes and locations. 23 Submittals shall show electrical power characteristics, location, requirements and quantity of power 24 connections. 25 26 REFERENCE STANDARDS 27 28 The publication of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 29 30 American Society of Heating and Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 31 Air- Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 32 33 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE 34 35 Heating and cooling equipment shall be provided so that the completed mechanical systems meet the 36 acoustical limitations specified in Section 15990. 37 38 PART 2- PRODUCTS 39 40 CEILING EXHAUST FANS 41 42 AMCA 210 and AMCA seal, forward curved centrifugal exhaust fan with neoprene or spring isolated motor 43 and fan assembly in steel acoustically lined housing with egg -crate type exhaust grille and backdraft 44 damper. 45 46 Fans shall be in -line configuration when so indicated. 47 48 Variable speed switches shall be installed in the fan cabinet, on th exterior of the fan cabinet, or adjacent to 49 the fan cabinet, in an accessible location approved by the A/E, for air balancing. 50 51 Manufacturer: Penn models as indicated or Greenheck, Carnes, Cook or Jenn equivalent or approved 52 substitute. 53 54 95112 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15850 -1 1 ROOF EXHAUST FANS 2 3 Spun aluminum exhaust fans complete with birdscreen, back -draft damper, factory installed and wired 4 disconnect switch, and curb mounted sound attenuator designed to reduce the sone level by a minimum of 5 40 percent. 6 7 Provide factory fabricated roof curbs. 8 9 Manufacturer: Greenheck, Cook, Jenn, Carnes, or Penn or approved substitute 10 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 12 13 INSTALLATION 14 15 Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Section 15050, "Basic Materials 16 and Methods 17 18 Air handling equipment: 19 20 Suspended air handling equipment: Provide hanger rods in accordance with manufacturers 21 recommendations. Vibration hangers shall be Type V5 as specified in Section 15140, 22 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES. 23 24 Install in -line fans with service door on the side for ease of removal. 25 26 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 27 28 Thoroughly clean plenums and casings of all debris and blow free of all small particles of rubbish and dust 29 before installing and making final duct connections. Wipe equipment clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, 30 or paint spots removed. 31 32 Provide temporary filters for all fans that are operated during construction, and after construction dirt has 33 been removed from the building, install new filters. Provide a spare set of filters for all units. Fill 34 manometers with fluid and adjust manometer so it is level. 35 36 Lubricate bearings with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper 37 tension. Adjust control valves and other equipment requiring adjustment to setting indicated or directed. 38 Adjust fans to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions, ready for air balancing. 39 40 41 42 'END OF SECTION 43 15850 -2 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK 2 3 PART 1 GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Work in this Section includes ducts, accessories and other sheet metal work. 12 13 REGULATORY AGENCIES 14 15 All work shall be in conformance with applicable codes and with applicable standards. 16 17 REFERENCE STANDARDS 18 19 The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 20 21 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 22 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 23 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 24 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 25 26 SUBMITTALS 27 28 Shop Drawings: 29 30 Ductwork Layout and Installation: Prepare detailed drawings on tracing material, the same size as 31 Contract Drawings, coordinating sheet metal work with the ceiling plans and the work of other 32 trades so as to make all the parts fit together. These drawings shall be completed in a timely 33 manner and coordinated with the construction schedule. 34 35 Product Data: 36 37 Duct Lining 38 Dampers 39 Flexible Connectors 40 Access Doors and hardware 41 Fire Dampers 42 Sound Attenuators 43 Roof Hoods 44 45 PART 2 PRODUCTS 46 47 DUCT SYSTEMS 48 49 Material: All ductwork, galvanized steel, manufactured in the United States. 50 51 Construction: Duct construction shall be in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction 52 Standards, Metal and Flexible current edition. Ducts upstream of zone terminals shall be constructed for 53 4" w.g. pressure class, Seal class A. Ducts downstream of zone terminals, supply ducts for heat pump 54 systems, return, exhaust and relief air ducts shall be constructed for 2" w.g. pressure class, positive or 55 negative pressure as determined by the relationship of the duct section to the system fan or fans, Seal class 56 C. 57 95112 DUCTWORK 15890 -1 1 Gauges for Steel Ducts: 2 3 Rectangular Ducts: In accordance with SMACNA Tables 1-4 through 1 -9 for appropriate pressure 4 class, depending on duct reinforcement. 5 Round Ducts: In accordance with SMACNA Table 3 -2 for appropriate pressure class and duct 6 construction. Note: All round ducts exposed in finished areas shall be spiral seam construction. 7 8 Joints 9, 10 Longitudinal Joints: Pittsburgh lock, or button punch snap lock. 11 Transverse Joints: 12 Ducts through 24" on larger side: S -slip or pocket for top and bottom; drive slips for sides, 13 No S -slip permitted on vertical ducts. 14 Ducts 25" and up: Pocket. Clip punch to female end of joint about 6" o.c. Bar slip 15 permitted only where insufficient working space to turn over joint. 16 17 Reinforcing 18 19 At Joints: 20 Larger side of duct Angle Size 21 61" through 84" 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/8" 22 85" through 96" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" 23 24 Between Joints: 25 Larger side of duct Angle Size 26 18" and less None required 27 19 through42" 1 "x1 "x1/8 @60" 28 43" through 60" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" 60" 29 61" through 84" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" 30" 30 85" through 96" 1 -1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" 30" 31 32 Installation 33 Reinforcing angles shall be galvanized steel. 34 Rivets, screws, bolts or spotwelds shall be at maximum spacing of 8" centers. 35 36 Stiffening 37 38 Cross break all duct panels over 18" in width, except where the duct is lined or insulated with rigid 39 insulation. 40 Break panels outward for supply ducts; inward for return or exhaust ducts. 41 42 Hangers 43 44 Rectangular Ducts: 45 46 Duct Semi perimeter Hangers 47 30" and Tess 1" x 22 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 10 ga. hangers 48 31" through 72" 1" x 18 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 3/8" rod hangers 49 73" through 96" 1" x 16 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 3/8" rod hangers 50 97" through 120" 1 -12" 16 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 12" rod hangers 51 121" through 168" 1-1/2" 16 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 1/2" rod hangers 52 Alternative hanger spacing and hanger sizes and gauges, hangers for ducts heavier than 16 53 gauge, trapeze sizes and upper and lower hanger attachments shall be in accordance with 54 SMACNA Chapter 4. 55 56 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Round Ducts: 2 Duct Diameters Hangers I 3 10" and smaller 1" x 22 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 1/4" rod hangers 4 11 "through 18" 1" x 22 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 1/4" rod hangers 5 19" through 24" 1" x 22 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 3/8" rod hangers 6 25" through 36" 1" x 20 ga. strap 10' o.c., with 3/8" rod hangers I 7 37" through 50" (2) 1" x 20 ga. strap band, with (2) 3/8" rod hangers 10' o.c. g 51 "through 60" (2) 1" x 18 ga, strap band, with (2) 3/8" rod hangers 10' o.c. 9 61" through 84" (2) 1" x 16 ga. strap band, with (2) 3/8" rod hangers 10' o.c. I 10 11 Exposed Ductwork Hangers: 12 Where ductwork is exposed in finished spaces, the hangers and attachments shall be uniform in 13 spacing, parallel, and otherwise installed with extra care so that the hanger appearance is I 14 symmetrical and neat. In these areas, hanger sizes and gauges, where indicated, may differ from 15 the scheduled hanger sizes above, for reasons of appearance. 16 I 17 Flexible Ducts: 18 Hangers and supports shall limit the maximum sag of the duct to 1/2" per foot of length. 19 20 Attachments: 22 Upper attachments from the hanger rod, strap or angle shall be selected for the load to be 23 supported, with a safety factor of 5. 24 Fasten hangers to the duct with sheetmetat screws for ducts 24" and smaller. Bolt I 25 hangers to side bracing angles or side joints on ducts for ducts 25" and larger. Hangers 26 shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of two fasteners on the side of the duct and 27 one fastener on the bottom of the duct. I 28 Ducts shall be installed so that the ducts and hangers do not touch moving equipment 29 supports, conduit, or piping subject to vibration. 30 31 Ells 32 33 Elbows in round ductwork shall be stamped, segmented, segmented standing seam or pleated 34 construction. 35 Inside radius of sweep ells not less than 3/4 width of duct except where otherwise noted. 36 Use single construction turning vanes for all square ells installed according to SMACNA Standards 37 Fig. 2.3, 2" radius with 1 -1/2" spacing and 3/4" trailing edge. 38 I 39 Transformations 40 41 Make increase in duct width or depth no more abrupt than 1 to 7 unless guide vanes are used, I 42 43 unless otherwise dimensioned. Decrease in duct width or depth no more abrupt than 1 to 4. 44 Where pipe or other obstacles must pass through a duct, increase the duct dimension only if pipe 45 diameter is more than 1/6 of the duct dimension. I 46 Streamline obstacles other than pipes with sheetmetal sleeve of tear-drop section. 47 Caulk and tape around pipes piercing ducts. 48 150 49 Volume Dampers 51 Volume dampers shall be installed as required at all branches in the ductwork. Both the leading 52 and leaving edges shall be hemmed and the side edges flanged 1/2 Place dampers so that the I 53 air strikes the smooth face. Size damper to obstruct approximately 95% of the duct area when in 54 the closed position. 55 1 95112 DUCTWORK 15890 3 1 Damper Blades: 2 For ducts 8" x 10" and smaller: Single plate, 24 gauge. 3 For ducts larger than 8" x 10 maximum blade height 12 Single plate 22 gauge blades 4 up to 12" in length, multiple plate 22 gauge blades over 12" in length. Over 30" in length 5 use a 1/2" square steel rod stem fitted in a V- crease in the blade. Adjacent damper blades 6 shall rotate in opposite directions. Provide intermediate supports on long damper glades 7 as required to prevent sagging. 8 9 Damper Quadrants: 10 Quadrants on accessible ducts shall be Duro -Dyne or approved substitute: 11 #KS -145 for dampers maximum 10" long; 12 #KS -385 for dampers maximum 30" long; 13 #K -7 with bearings for dampers longer than 30 14 Quadrants in finished spaces where dampers in ducts are concealed in finished walls or 15 ceilings shall be provided with Young Regulator Series 270 -301 cable control kit with 16 remote mounted ceiling plates, or equivalent Duro -Dyne or Ventlock concealed damper 17 operators. Ceiling plates shall be installed in ceilings of closets and similar spaces. 18 Damper positions shall be set and locked in the "open" position prior to balancing. 19 20 Flexible Connections 21 22 Install at all duct connections to fan inlets and outlets, minimum clear length of 6 Type to meet 23 requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 90A. 24 Duro -Dyne "Durolon" or approved substitute for low temperature duct systems. Flexible 25 connections for ducts which may have a temperature in excess of 220 degrees shall be Duro -Dyne 26 "Thermafab" or approved substitute. 27 28 Duct Lining 29 30 Supply ducts, for the first twenty feet from the heat pump supply fans and from all zone terminals, 31 and return ducts, for the first fifteen feet from a return grille and the first twenty feet from the return 32 plenum, shall be lined with 1" thick, 1 -1/2 pound density fiberglass duct liner, Owens Corning 33 Fiberglass or approved substitute. Exhaust ducts between the exhaust grille and the exhaust fan 34 inlet, and other ducts where shown on the drawings, shall be lined with the same material 35 All supply and return air plenums shall be Tined with 1" thick, 1 -1/2 pound density fiberglass duct 36 liner, Owens- Corning, or approved substitute. 37 All ducts exposed to outdoor conditions shall be Tined with 2" thick, 1 -1/2 pound density fiberglass 38 duct liner, Owens Corning Fiberglass or approved substitute. Seal all seams of duct watertight with 39 mastic. 40 The duct liner shall be applied to the duct surface with 100% coverage of lagging adhesive. 41 All exposed edges and leading edges of all transverse joints of the duct liner shall be coated with 42 lagging adhesive. 43 For ducts with a larger dimension or 21" or greater, the duct liner on the top and sides of horizontal 44 runs and all sides of vertical runs shall be additionally secured with stick clip mechanical fasteners 45 at 12" o.c. maximum. The stick clips shall be virtually flush with the exposed surfaces of the duct 46 liner. Fasteners shall start within 2" of the leading edge of each duct liner section. 47 48 Counter Balanced Relief Dampers 49 Ruskin Model CBD2 or approved substitute. 50 Extruded aluminum frame, .090" thickness. 51 Formed aluminum blades, .025" thickness, with extruded vinyl edge seals. 52 1/8" x 1/2" aluminum linkage, concealed in frame. 53 Adjustable zinc plated counterbalance on blades. 54 55 Sound Traps 56 Install sound traps in ducts where shown and as scheduled on the drawings. 57 Sound traps shall be factory fabricated, Industrial Acoustics Company models as scheduled, or 58 Koppers Company, Baldwin -Ehret -Hill Inc., or approved substitute. 59 1 2 111 3 4 5 I 6 8 9 I 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 I 17 18 19 al 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 II 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 36 37 I 39 40 41 42 43 44 I 46 47 48 I 49 50 51 52 1 53 54 55 1 56 57 1 Fire Dampers Plenums Fasteners: Spin -In Fittings: Fire dampers shall be curtain type, Ruskin models as listed, or Air Balance, Inc., American Warming and Ventilation Company or Prefco equivalent or approved substitute. Models listed are for static systems. Fire dampers for dynamic systems shall be similar, but as listed for dynamic systems. Type B for rectangular ducts, Ruskin Model IBD 2, Style B. Type C for round ducts, Ruskin Model IBD 2, Style CR (or Style CO for oval ducts). Type B, Ruskin Model IBD10 with integral sleeve and mounting straps for installation in metal stud walls. Dampers installed in horizontal ducts shall be UL approved radiation dampers with UL listed fusible volume adjustment, Ruskin Model CFD2, CFD 3 or CFD4 (depending on the damper size) for rectangular ducts and Models CFDR2 or CFDR3 (depending on the damper size) for round ducts. Install thermal insulating blanket radiation shields where required. Dampers shall meet all requirements of UBC Standard 43 -7, UBC Standard 43 -12 and UL 555, UL 555C, UL 555S, UL 33 and UL 353 as applicable. Dampers shall be for static systems. Mounting and installation shall be in full conformance with UL and UBC requirements. Provide access panels in ducts for access for fusible links. Flexible Ducts Wiremold type WG or approved substitute, insulated. NFPA Pamphlet 90A, class 1 duct. Tape ends of insulation where duct and insulation are cut. Make connections to ducts and equipment with factory fabricated screw -on type cuffs. 18 gauge galvanized steel panels not over 36" wide. 2" x 2" x 3/16" galvanized steel angles for stiffening at joints not over 36" on centers, and at floor, walls, and ceiling for bolting sheetmetal to masonry. Use blind rivets, sheet metal screws, bolted connections, or welding for attachment purposes for sheet metal. Sheet metal screws shall be of the minimum length required for a secure fastening. Where rivets are specifically called for in this Section, sheet metal screws may be used. For all ductwork, grilles and accessories exposed to view in finished rooms, provide finish -type fasteners: Permanent work Blind stainless steel pop rivets; Removable items and grilles Cadmium plated pan head or countersink tapping screws. Collars: Provide wherever an exposed duct passes through a wall, slab, or ceiling. 1 inch wide, 18 gauge angle with mitered corners; installed after building construction is in place. Sheet Metal Connections to Building Construction: Provide steel angles, riveted to the sheet metal and bolted to the building surface using expansion shells or expansion bolts with compressible neoprene gasket under the angle; angles same as for bracing, 1" x 1" x 1/8" minimum. Conical type with volume damper, and quadrant; Flex Master Elgen or equivalent. 95112 DUCTWORK 15890 5 1 For Tined ductwork provide with insulation guard. 2 3 Access Doors and Frames: 4 5 General: Provide access doors wherever access through ducts or plenums as necessary; as a 6 minimum, provide for reaching equipment, motor operated dampers, and control devices; double 7 construction, tight fitting, hinged, with latch, insulation or sound lining equivalent to that of the duct; 8 steel angle frame. 9 Access Door Sizes: As indicated. 10 Latches: Die -cast, Ventfabrics No. 100 for doors 1-0" high or smaller; No. 260 for up to 3' -0" 11 height; No. 310 for larger, and use two. 12 13 Duct Access Panels: Provide for access to fire dampers, motor operated dampers, and control devices; 14 insulated to match duct lining or insulation. Controlled Air Series AD -FL; knob operated or approved. 15 16 Duct Pressure Test Holes: Elgen TH -7 or Ventfabrics 699. 17 18 Roof Hoods: 19 20 Heavy duty hoods constructed of galvanized steel sheets with rolled interlocking seams for 21 reinforcement and reinforced with galvanized angle iron for rigidity; complete with 1 /2 inch mesh 22 galvanized wire birdscreen. Prime coat finish. 23 Manufacturer: Greenheck, Cook, Penn, or Acme. 24 25 Rain Louvers: 26 27 Extruded aluminum drainable blade type with galvanized or aluminum wire mesh bird screen; clear 28 anodized prime coat finish. Box frame. AMCA certified. 29 Manufacturer: Ruskin ELF -375D, or Penn, Greenheck, Carnes or American Warming equivalent 30 or approved substitute. 31 32 PART 3 EXECUTION 33 34 DUCT INSTALLATION 35 36 Ducts shall be installed so that the ducts and hangers do touch moving equipment or equipment supports, 37 conduit, or piping subject to vibration. 38 39 Ducts shall be installed to allow adequate access and maintenance space for equipment. 40 41 All ducts shall be installed with clearance required by Uniform Mechanical Code. 42 43 DUCT TESTING AND LEAKS 44 45 Cut material to exact dimension necessary for airtight seams and joints. Caulk seams and joints as 46 required for the duct seal class of the duct system. 47 48 Duct systems shall be inspected for leaks, and all significant leaks shall be plugged. 49 50 Plug any leaks occurring with caulking compound. Where ducts are exposed in finished spaces, the 51 caulking compound shall be installed so that the finished appearance of the ductwork is uniform, smooth, 52 clean and suitable for painting. 53 54 ACOUSTICAL DUCT ENCLOSURE. ACU -1 The supply duct riser and the first ten feet horizontally from the duct riser to the air conditioning unit, shall be encased in two layers of 5/8" gypsum wall board, with staggered seams. Joints shall be taped. This acoustical enclosure shall be installed on the exterior of the duct insulation. Additional duct supports shall be installed as necessary to support the weight of the enclosure. FLEXIBLE DUCTS Flexible ducts shall be a maximum of six feet in length, and shall be installed without kinks or abrupt changes in direction. End connections to ducts and equipment shall be made with factory fabricated screw -on cuffs. Flexible duct insulation shall cover the connections. Hangers for flexible ducts shall be installed in a manner to avoid compressing the duct. Saddles shall be installed under the duct at hangers, if required. WALL OPENINGS Space around ducts shall be sealed where ducts pass through walls between occupied spaces. Pack void space with dense packed loose fill fiberglass insulation. Space around ducts shall be sealed where ducts pass through fire partitions, fire rated ceilings or slabs, or fire walls. The method used to seal such spaces shall be as required to match the required rating of the construction being penetrated. Duct sleeves and collars shall be installed as specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods FIRE DAMPERS Mounting, frames and installation shall be in full conformance with UL requirements. Provide access panels in ducts for access to fusible links. 'END OF SECTION' 95112 DUCTWORK 15890 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15930 AIR TERMINALS, GRILLES. DIFFUSERS 2 3 PART 1- GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Included in this Section are registers and grilles, diffusers, terminal boxes and electric duct heaters. 12 13 REGULATORY AGENCIES 14 15 All work shall be in conformance with applicable codes and with applicable standards. 16 17 REFERENCE STANDARDS 18 19 The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 20 21 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 22 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 23 American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 24 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 25 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 26 27 SUBMITTALS 28 29 Product Data: 30 31 Grilles 32 Registers 33 Diffusers 34 Zone Terminals 35 36 PART2- PRODUCTS 37 38 SQUARE DIFFUSERS 39 40 Steel, adjustable pattern, round neck, 4 cone, 24" x 24" face. Frame Type 3. Off -white finish. 41 42 Price Model SCD, Titus, Anemostat, Carnes, J. &J. Commercial or Krueger equivalent, or approved 43 substitute. 44 45 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS 46 47 Aluminum with steel pattern controllers providing gradual adjustment of air volume and air pattern. Length, 48 width of slots and number of slots as indicated. Border type 16, with curved flange border, concealed 49 mounting and equalizing grid. Off -white finish with black controllers. 50 51 Price Model SDS, Titus, Anemostat, Carnes, J. &J. Commercial or Krueger equivalent, or approved 52 substitute. 53 95112 AIR TERMINALS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 15930 -1 1 FIRE RATED DIFFUSERS 2 3 Diffusers installed in fire rated ceiling assemblies shall be UL approved and rated equivalent to the rating of 4 the ceiling, with butterfly type fire damper and thermal insulating blanket. Off-white finish. 5 6 The installation shall consist of an approved ceiling damper and thermal insulating blanket, National 7 Controlled Air Model CD -RD -85 (round) or Model CD -S/R (square) with Model CK -2000 thermal blanket, or 8 approved equivalent, on a ceiling diffuser. 9 10 SUPPLY GRILLES 11 12 Steel double deflection adjustable grilles, 3/4" spacing, front bars horizontal. Prime coat finish. 13 14 Price Model 520, Titus, or Anemostat, Carnes, J. &J. Commercial or Krueger equivalent, or approved 15 substitute. 16 17 RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES 18 19 Steel fixed pattern, 3/4" spacing, bars horizontal. Prime coat finish. 20 21 Price Model 535, Titus, Anemostat, Carnes, J. &J. Commercial or Krueger equivalent, or approved 22 substitute. 23 24 EGG CRATE RETURN GRILLES 25 26 Aluminum grid 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2 aluminum frame. Type TB border for lay -in tile ceilings, Type F border for 27 plaster board ceilings. Off -white finish. 28 29 Price Model 80, Titus, Anemostat, Carnes, J. &J. Commercial or Krueger equivalent, or approved substitute. 30 31 VAV TERMINAL BOX 32 33 Variable air volume single duct, pressure independent, variable volume terminal units. Construction: 34 minimum 22 gage galvanized steel, internally lined with 3/4 inch, 1.5 Ib. density coated fiberglass insulation 35 complying with NFPA 90A. Control damper shall have shaft rotating in Delrin self lubricating bearings; 36 damper leakage 4 cfm at 1.5 inches pressure differential. 37 38 Unit complete with: 39 Velocity sensor: Multi- point, multi-axis type. 40 Electric Heater: UL approved heater with control cabinet with hinged door, nickel chrome heating 41 elements, primary automatic reset thermal cutout (one per coil), secondary thermal cutouts (one 42 per element), differential pressure air flow switch, magnetic or safety contactors as required, line 43 and control terminal blocks, non interlocking disconnect switch, and control transformer. 44 Factory installed damper actuator furnished by controls manufacturer. 45 46 Titus Model DESV, or Price, Anemostat, Carnes, J. &J. Commercial or Krueger equivalent, or approved 47 substitute. 48 49 FAN POWERED CONSTANT VOLUME TERMINAL BOX 50 51 Fan powered, pressure independent terminals with constant fan operation, constant volume discharge air, 52 and variable air volume primary air. Control sequence as follows: Control system modulates the primary 53 air actuator from minimum to maximum with fan operating at design air flow and electric heater actuated in 54 stages as indicated. 55 56 15930 -2 AIR TERMINALS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Construction: 20 gage casing with coated fiberglass liner. Primary air damper leakage Tess than 2 percent 2 of maximum cfm at 3 inch w.g. static pressure. All electrical components UL listed and installed in 3 accordance with the National Electrical Code and installed in a unit mounted control panel. 4 5 Unit complete with: 6 Velocity sensor 7 Fan variable speed SCR controller 8 Fan relay 9 Factory installed primary air actuator provided by controls manufacturer 10 Control transformer 11 12 Electric heater: UL approved heater with control cabinet with hinged door, nickel chrome heating 13 elements, primary automatic reset thermal cutout (one per coil), secondary thermal cutouts (one 14 per element), differential pressure air flow switch, magnetic or safety contactors as required, line 15 and control terminal blocks, non interlocking disconnect switch, and control transformer. 16 17 Filters: 1" thick fiberglass, disposable filters. 18 19 Titus Model DTFC or Price, Anemostat, Carnes, Trane or Krueger equivalent, or approved substitute. 20 21 PART 3 EXECUTION 22 23 DIFFUSER AND GRILLE INSTALLATION 24 25 Exact locations shall be coordinated with light fixtures, speaker outlets, clocks, etc., to avoid conflict. Refer 26 to reflected Ceiling Plans and Interior Elevations before installation. 27 28 Registers, grilles and diffusers shall be installed with equal spacing between units, where applicable, and 29 plumb and true with walls, ceiling tile patterns and similar architectural features. 30 31 Units shall be securely fastened to prevent rattles. 32 33 Visible duct surfaces inside grilles and diffusers shall be painted dull black. 34 35 Volume dampers shall be installed in the duct system for all diffusers and grilles, including return grilles 36 and exhaust grilles. Transfer grilles do not require volume dampers. 37 38 ZONE TERMINAL BOX INSTALLATION 39 40 Install to allow required clearance in front of electrical connections, adequate filter access space, and 41 access to all unit service access panels. 42 43 Do not install conduit or piping so as to interfere with accessibility. 44 45 DUCT CONNECTIONS 46 47 Ductwork shall be installed, relative to diffusers, grilles, and zone terminal boxes, to provide straight duct 48 lengths required for uniform air flow, as recommended by the equipment manufacturer, SMACNA and 49 ASHRAE. 50 51 52 53 ***END OF SECTION* 95112 AIR TERMINALS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 15930 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15975 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 2 3 PART 1- GENERAL 4 5 REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of Section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this Section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Included in this Section are direct digital control systems and interconnection to control devices provided as 12 part of the mechanical equipment. 13 14 REGULATORY AGENCIES 15 16 All work shall be in conformance with applicable codes and with applicable standards. 17 18 SUBMITTALS 19 20 Product Data: 21 22 Control Devices 23 Control Panels 24 Computer 25 Printer 26 Modem 27 28 Diagrams and Drawings: 29 30 Control Sequences 31 Graphics Screens Examples 32 Reports, Logs and Alarms Summaries 33 34 MANUFACTURER 35 36 Approved Manufacturers: 37 38 Alerton Technologies 39 Barber Colman 40 Johnson Controls 41 Landis Staefa 42 43 Installers 44 45 The systems listed above shall be installed by representatives of the manufacturer as a recognized 46 agent, a district office of the manufacturer, or a firm specifically engaged in the installation of direct 47 digital control systems with a minimum of five years installation experience. The entire control 48 system shall be installed by qualified electricians and mechanics, properly trained and qualified for 49 their work and directly supervised by the local representative of the manufacturer of the controls 50 components. 51 52 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -1 1 SYSTEM SERVICE 2 3 Following completion and acceptance of the system, submit a warranty for the controls system, including 4 software. Provide all service and materials necessary to maintain the controls system in first class 5 operation during the warranty period. Service shall be provided on the basis of urgency: 6 Preventative maintenance shall be included in the warranty service. Software, data, operating set points 7 and operating sequences shall be revised as necessary to obtain optimum system performance. 8 9 During the warranty period, provide a 24 -hour emergency service telephone number where a qualified 10 representative familiar with the system as installed can be reached. This representative shall have the 11 capability of remotely communicating with the system for troubleshooting and for program alterations. 12 13 Approximately six months and twelve months after the initiation of system operation, the controls contractor 14 shall test, calibrate and adjust the controls. This adjustment shall include adjustment to valves, dampers 15 and similar equipment, as well as to the control programs, control sensors and DDC control components. 16 Submit written reports for each inspection. 17 18 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING PERIODS 19 20 Provide system instruction as required by Section 15010. Provide system training as specified in this 21 Section. 22 23 PART 2 PRODUCTS 24 25 BASIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 26 27 The direct digital control (DDC) system shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package of 28 controls and instrumentation. The system shall include all computer software and hardware, operator 29 input/ output devices, sensors and controls required for complete operation. Provide all devices, materials, 30 wiring, conduit, installation, supervision and labor, including that necessary for calibration, adjustments, 31 operator training and system checkout. 32 33 A telecommunication network shall integrate the DDC system with the controls manufacturers computer, to 34 support diagnostics, software upgrades and remote adjustments. 35 36 OPERATOR WORKSTATION 37 38 Provide a Personal Computer Workstation, installed in Janitorial 140, for command entry, information 39 management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real -time control 40 functions shall be resident in the Stand Alone DDC panels. Workstation shall be a general purpose, 41 commercially available, Personal Computer with sufficient memory and processor capability to perform all 42 functions described in this Section. Provide sufficient hard disk storage to accommodate all fully configured 43 point data bases, all application databases, all graphics databases, all user defined reports, and all 44 historical data archives as described. The system shall be able to support five times the initial point 45 installation without system performance degeneration. A point is defined as an individual line item on the 46 DDC point list. As a minimum, provide the following: 47 48 Operator Workstation (minimums): Provide an IBM compatible Pentium computer with an integral 49 math co- processor, 90 MHz with DOS (latest version), 850 MB hard disk drive, 3.5 inch high density 50 disk drive, 16 MB RAM, 2 serial and 1 parallel ports, keyboard, mouse, and 14 inch diagonal 51 measurement SVGA monitor with color, contrast and brightness controls. 52 Provide power surge protector. 53 54 15975 -2 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: If the provided DDC system requires computer capacities greater than those listed above, the 2 computer system shall be provided adequate to run the DDC programs. 3 4 Printer, dot matrix, 9 pin, 160 cps, wide carriage, Okidata or approved substitute, with an estimated 5 one year supply of ribbons and perforated paper. 6 Telecommunications interface with automatic dial and answer capabilities to allow the control 7 installer to support diagnostics and upgrade software. Provide log -on security screening to prevent 8 unauthorized access. Auto/ answer 9600 minimum baud rate. Hayes or approved substitute. 9 Provide one portable full function operator terminals for operator readout of system variables, 10 override control, servicing, trouble- shooting and adjustment of control parameters. Provide all 11 software and hardware necessary for interface at stand alone DDC panels, air handling unit digital 12 controllers, unitary digital controllers, variable air volume terminal unit controllers, and at space 13 temperature sensors. If a DDC panel, controller or sensor requires a different portable operator 14 terminal for interface, provide one of each type. Portable terminals shall be complete with carrying 15 cases. 16 17 OPERATOR WORKSTATION SOFTWARE 18 19 Command Entry/ Menu Selection: 20 Provide all software for a complete and operational system as described herein. Software shall 21 include the manufacturer's standard, multi- tasking, multi-user operating system for operator 22 consoles and controllers, network communication software for dial -up and hard wired trunk 23 applications, operator man machine interface software, control application software and all other 24 software necessary to provide the functions specified. Th Operator Workstation shall use Microsoft 25 "Windows latest version. Operator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training 26 through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification and industry 27 standard PC application software. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter 28 style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and a "point and click" 29 approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change set points 30 from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. 31 32 Password Protection: 33 Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/ manager to limit 34 workstation control, display and database manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for 35 each user, based on an assigned password. 36 37 Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including portable or panel 38 mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall 39 automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and 40 downloaded to minimize the task of maintaining network security. Users shall not be 41 required to update passwords for DDC panels individually. 42 A minimum of three levels of access shall be supported. 43 A minimum of 16 passwords shall be supported at each DDC panel. 44 Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective 45 passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel 46 mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the level of access of the 47 password used to log -on. 48 User definable, automatic on -off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to 49 prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on -line. 50 51 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -3 1 Operator Commands: 2 The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, 3 the following: 4 5 Start-up or shut -down equipment 6 Adjust set points 7 Add/ Modify/ Delete time programming 8 Enable/ Disable process execution 9 Lock/ Unlock alarm reporting for each point 10 Enable/ Disable Totalization for each point 11 Enable/ Disable Trending for each point 12 Override PID loop set points 13 Enter temporary override schedules 14 Define Holiday schedules 15 Change time and date 16 Enter/ Modify analog alarm limits 17 Enter/ Modify analog warning limits 18 View limits 19 Enable/ Disable Demand Limiting for each meter 20 Enable/ Disable Duty Cycle for each load 21 22 Dynamic Color Graphics Software: 23 System software shall provide user interface through which viewing and command may be done 24 using a "mouse" pointing device. Th operator shall be able to access to any level of desired 25 system information without being required to enter any commands from the keyboard. 26 27 Windowing user interface shall be provided to allow operator the simultaneously view 28 several different types of systems at the same time to analyze system operation (i.e. air 29 handling unit equipment graphic display and several trend graphs of associated space 30 temperatures simultaneously displayed.) The system shall be capable of a graphic display 31 associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress. 32 Dynamic data displays such as temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and 33 status indication shall be shown in their respective locations, area served, and shall 34 automatically update to represent current conditions without operator interface. 35 The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor 36 plans via a graphical penetration schemes, menu selection, or text based commands. 37 Provide a logical penetration of graphical displays from a site plan on down to each level of 38 digital controllers. 39 Graphics generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete 40 system graphic displays. A minimum of 16 colors shall be available for use. Provide a 41 library of pre- engineered screens and symbols depicting standard HVAC components (e.g. 42 fans, coils, filters, dampers, terminal units, heat pumps, circulation pumps, cooling towers, 43 chillers, etc.). 44 45 LOGS AND SUMMARIES 46 47 Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and directed either to CRT displays, printers 48 or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of 49 reports: 50 A general listing of all points in the network. 51 List all points currently in alarm. 52 List of all off -line points. 53 List all points currently in override status. 54 List of all disabled points. 15975 -4 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 List of all points currently locked out. 2 List of all points defined in a "follow -up" file. 3 List all Weekly Schedules. 4 List all Holiday programming. 5 List of limits and dead bands. 6 7 Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user selected group 8 or groups, or for The entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility 9 management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of 10 hardware controllers to obtain system information. 11 12 System Configuration and Definition: 13 All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be 14 definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with 15 normal system operation and control. 16 17 The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an 18 operator to independently perform the following functions: 19 Add/ Delete/ Modify Stand alone DDC panels. 20 Add/ Delete/ Modify Operator Workstations. 21 Add/ Delete/ Modify Application Specific Controllers. 22 Add/ Delete/ Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants. 23 Add/ Delete/ Modify alarm reporting definition for each point. 24 Add/ Delete/ Modify control loops. 25 Add/ Delete/ Modify energy management applications. 26 Add/ Delete/ Modify time- and calendar -based programming. 27 Add/ Delete/ Modify Totalization for every point. 28 Add/ Delete/ Modify Historical Data Trending for every point. 29 Add/ Delete/ Modify custom control processes. 30 Add/ Delete/ Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross reference to point data. 31 Add/ Delete/ Modify dial -up communications definition. 32 Add/ Delete/ Modify all operator passwords. 33 Add/ Delete/ Modify Alarm Messages. 34 35 Programming Description: 36 The system shall permit an operator to create, modify and document all process control 37 sequences, including all DDC application software, energy management software and alarm 38 processes. The manufacturer's latest technology shall be provided, i.e. modified basic, graphical 39 or block programming format. 40 41 Network -Wide Strategy Development: 42 Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single stand alone DDC panel, but 43 shall be able to include data from any stand alone DDC panel to allow the development of 44 network -wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one 45 process as the input to any number of the other processes (cascading). 46 47 System Definition/ Control Sequence Documentation: 48 All portions of system definition shall be documented to provide hard copy printouts of all 49 configuration and application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be 50 provided in logical, graphical or block flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily 51 interpreted and modified at any time in the future. 52 53 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -5 1 Database Save/ Restore/ Back -up: 2 Back -up copies of all stand alone DDC panel databases shall be stored in the Central Operator 3 Workstation. Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel databases shall be provided. 4 In the event that any DDC panel in the network experiences a loss of its database for any reason, 5 the user shall have the ability to manually execute to download a new copy or any portions of the 6 respective database to restore proper operation. 7 8 Third Party Software package: 9 Provide the capability and capacity to run specific third party software packages for work 10 processing, spreadsheets and database management programs and provide for on -line data 11 transfer from the DDC network or from archived historical data. Third party software shall operate 12 concurrently with other tasks such as alarm logging and report data gathering. Provide a software 13 package to analyze trended points in graphic format with measured variables on the y -axis and 14 time variable on the x -axis. 15 16 The system shall be capable of running the following third party software packages: 17 Microsoft Excel 18 19 LOCAL AREA NETWORK 20 21 Operator workstations and stand alone DDC panels shall reside directly on a local area network such that 22 communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between 23 controllers and workstations on a peer to peer basis. All points connected to the network shall be 24 accessible through any operator workstation on the network. Any point on the network shall be available to 25 any controller on the network for control loop processing. 26 27 All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial -up modems, shall have the ability to 28 access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices 29 via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. 30 Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management 31 system. The hardware configuration of the network shall be transparent to the user when accessing data or 32 developing control programs. 33 34 The Controls manufacturer's highest available speed data transfer rates shall be provided for all 35 communications, alarm reporting, quick report generation from controllers, and upload/ download efficiency 36 between network devices. 37 38 Provide synchronization of the real time clocks in all DDC panels. 39 40 Local Area network communication trunk and software shall support a minimum of 25 stand alone panels 41 or operators workstations or any combination of both. 42 43 STAND ALONE DDC PANELS 44 45 General: 46 Stand alone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi- tasking, multi-user, real -time digital 47 control processors. Modular in design and consisting of processor board with programmable RAM 48 memory, power supplies and input/ output modules. 49 50 Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and database, including: 51 Control processes 52 Energy Management Applications 53 Alarm management 54 Historical/ Trend Data for all points 15975 -6 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maintenance Support Applications 2 Custom Processes 3 Operator I/O 4 Dial -Up communications 5 Manual Override monitoring 6 7 Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: 8 Digital Inputs for status/ alarm contacts 9 Digital Outputs for on/ off equipment control 10 Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements 11 Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and speed capacity control of primary 12 equipment 13 Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring 14 Spare points: Provide a minimum of two spare points for each Input/ Output point type (not 15 including pulse inputs). 16 17 Each stand alone DDC panel communication trunk and software shall support a minimum of 90 controllers. 18 Controllers shall consist of any combination of future application specific controllers such as air handling 19 unit digital controllers, variable air volume terminal unit controllers, and unitary controllers. 20 21 Stand alone DDC panels shall be provided with at least two RS -232C serial data communication ports for 22 operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, portable operators terminals or portable lap -top 23 computers. In lieu of this, one RS -232C serial data communication port and a local operator access and 24 display panel shall be provided. 25 26 Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self- diagnostics, communication analysis and diagnosis of all 27 subsidiary equipment. the DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected 28 component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results 29 shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device. 30 31 In the event of loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all stand alone DDC panels to 32 prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non volatile memory shall be incorporated for 33 all critical controller configuration data, and battery back -up shall be provided to support the real -time clock 34 and all RAM memory. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full 35 operation with out manual intervention. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall 36 have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the RS -232C port, or via 37 telephone line dial -in. 38 39 Agency Listing: UL 916 40 41 STAND ALONE DDC PANEL SOFTWARE 42 43 All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be 44 provided. The software programs specified shall be provided as an integral part of The DDC panel and 45 shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. Provide multiple copies and licensing 46 agreements as necessary to support the specified quantity of workstations and portable terminals. 47 48 Pre tested Control Algorithms: 49 The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre- tested control algorithms: 50 Two position Control 51 Proportional Control 52 Proportional plus Integral Control 53 Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control 54 Automatic Control Loop Tuning 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -7 1 Equipment Cycling Protection: 2 The control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of 3 equipment may be cycled within any given time period. The user shall have the ability to change 4 the number of cycles and the time period. 5 6 Heavy Equipment Start-up Delays: 7 The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by 8 automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical 9 Toads. 10 11 Power Failure Motor Restart: 12 Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled 13 equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on and off as 14 necessary to resume normal operation. including start time delays as described above. 15 16 Energy Management Applications: 17 DDC panels shalt have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management 18 routines: 19 Time of Day Scheduling 20 Calendar Based Scheduling 21 Holiday Scheduling 22 Temporary Schedule Overrides 23 Optimal Start 24 Optimal Stop 25 Night Setback Control 26 Enthalpy or Dry Bulb Switch Over (Economizer) 27 Peak Demand Limiting 28 Temperature Compensated Load Rolling 29 Fan Speed/ CFM Control 30 Heating/ Cooling Interlock 31 Hot Water Reset 32 Chilled Water Reset 33 Condenser Water Reset 34 Chiller Sequencing 35 Boiler Sequencing 36 Enthalpy Control 37 Lighting Controls Interface 38 Power Monitoring Interface 39 40 All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall 41 be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment 42 as described in the Sequence of Operation. 43 44 Custom Process Programming Capability: 45 DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job- specific processes defined by the user, to 46 automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 47 48 15975 -8 DOC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Process Inputs and Variables: 2 It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process: 3 Any system- measured point data or status 4 Any calculated data 5 Any results form other processes 6 User defined constants 7 Arithmetic functions square root, exponent, etc.) 8 Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.) 9 On- delay/ Off delay/ One -shot timers 10 11 Process Triggers: 12 Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: 13 Time interval 14 Time of day 15 Date 16 Other processes 17 Time programming 18 Events (e.g., point alarm) 19 20 Dynamic Data Access: 21 A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other 22 DDC panels on the local area network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue 23 commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. 24 25 Advisory/ Message Generation: 26 Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices. A 27 process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a 28 follow -up file, or cause the execution of a dial -up connection to a remote device such as a printer or 29 pager. 30 31 Custom Process Documentation: 32 The custom control programming feature shall be self- documenting. All interrelationships defined 33 by this feature shall be documented via graphics flowcharts and English language descriptors. 34 35 Alarm Management: 36 Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator 37 devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis 38 and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non critical alarms, minimize network traffic, 39 and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panels' ability to report alarms be 40 affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with 41 other panels on the network. 42 43 Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's 44 English language description, and the time and date of occurrence. 45 46 Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms 47 shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical 48 alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically 49 inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the 50 ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define 51 under which conditions point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to 52 follow -up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date. 53 54 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -9 1 Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user defined list of 2 operator devices, or PCs used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be automatically 3 directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off -line. 4 5 Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able 6 to print, display or store an alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct 7 operator response. 8 9 Alarms shall be generated for, but not limited to the following: 10 Motor is commanded on or off but motor status input indicates no change. 11 Room temperature or static pressure strays outside selectable limits. 12 An analog input takes a value indicating sensor failure. 13 A module or node is "dead" to the LAN. 14 A power outage occurs. 15 16 Historical Data and Trend Analysis: 17 A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and 18 display system data in any of the following ways: 19 20 Point Histories: Stand alone DDC panels shall continuously and automatically sample the value of 21 all analog inputs on a user defined time or change of state intervals. 22 23 Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be 24 assignable to user definable trends for the purpose of collection operator specified performance 25 data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals shall be operator selected change of value 26 based or time based. Each stand alone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data. 27 28 Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the stand alone DDC panels, and 29 uploaded to hard disk storage when archiving is desired. Uploads shall occur bases upon either 30 user defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. 31 32 Runtime totalization: 33 Stand alone DDC panels shall have the capability to automatically accumulate and store runtime 34 hours for all binary input and output points. 35 36 The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 37 38 The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for runtime totalization. Unique, user 39 specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. 40 41 Analog/ Pulse Totalization: 42 Stand alone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a 43 daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user selected analog and binary pulse input -type devices. 44 45 Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units 46 (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons, cubic feet, etc.). 47 48 The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 49 50 The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user specified messages shall be 51 generated when the limit is reached. 52 53 15975 -10 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 Event Totalization: Stand alone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a user defined minimum before reset. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. Interlocking: Permit events to occur, based on changing conditions of one or more associated master points. Binary contact, high/ low limit of analog point or computed point shall be capable of being utilized as master. The same master may monitor or command multiple slaves. Operator Commands: Define single master/ multiple master interlock process. Define logic interlock process. Lock/ unlock program. Enable/ disable interlock process. Execute/ terminate interlock process. Request interlock type summary. AIR HANDLING UNIT CONTROLLER (AHU) AHU controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements and for future expansion: Mixed Air Single Path (Constant and Variable Air Volume Systems). Mixed Air Dual Path. 100% Outside Air. AHU controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally stand alone fashion. Provide a minimum of two spare points for each input/ output type. Application programs and parameter data shall be stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). The operator interface to any AHU point data or program shall be through any network- resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network. Provide NEMA rated enclosure suitable for the application. A local disconnect shall be provided at each controller to individually disconnect control power without interruption to any other controller. Agency Listing: UL 916, UL 864. Note: UL 864 is to control unit for Fire Protective Signaling System. 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -11 1 UNITARY CONTROLLERS 2 3 Unitary controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configurations of unitary 4 equipment to address current requirements as described in the sequence of operation, and for future 5 expansion: 6 Unit Ventilators (ASHRAE Cycle I. II, III, or W). 7 Heat Pumps (Air to Air, Air to Water). 8 Packaged Rooftop Units. 9 Fan Coil Units. 10 Cabinet Heaters. 11 12 Unitary controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control 13 sequence in a totally stand alone fashion. Application programs and parameter data shall be stored in 14 nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). 15 16 The modes of operation supported by the unitary controllers shall include, but not be limited to, the 17 following: 18 Day/ Weekly Schedule. 19 Comfort/ Occupancy Mode. 20 Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, etc.). 21 Temporary Override Mode. 22 23 The operator interface to any unitary controller point data or programs shall be through any network 24 resident PC workstation, any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the 25 network, or through any terminal jack at any room temperature sensor. 26 27 Provide NEMA enclosure rated for plenum use. A local disconnect shall be provided at each unitary 28 controller to individually disconnect control power without interruption to any other digital controller. 29 30 Agency Listing: UL 916. 31 32 VARIABLE VOLUME AND CONSTANT VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLERS VAV AND CAV1 33 34 Terminal unit controllers shall be provided to the terminal unit manufacturer for factory installation of 35 controllers. Application programs and parameter data shall be stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). 36 Terminal unit controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configurations of 37 terminal units to address current requirements as described in the sequence of operation and point 38 schedule, and for future expansion: 39 Single Duct Only (Cooling Only, or Cooling with Reheat). 40 Fan Powered (Parallel/ Side Pocket. Series/ On-Off logic). 41 42 Terminal unit controller shall support the following types of input and output points: 43 Proportional Cooling Output. 44 Proportional heating Output. 45 Fan Control Output (On/ Off logic, or Proportional Series Fan Logic). 46 Fan Status Input. 47 Space Temperature Input. 48 Velocity Sensor Input. 49 Auxiliary Temperature Input. 50 Override Push button. 51 52 15975 -12 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The modes of operation supported by the terminal unit controllers shall include, but not be limited to, the 2 following: 3 Day/ Weekly Schedule. 4 Comfort/ Occupancy Mode. 5 Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, Etc.). 6 Temporary Override Mode. 7 8 The operator interface to any controller point data or programs shall be through any network- resident PC 9 workstation, any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network, or through 10 any terminal jack at any room temperature sensor. 11 12 Provide NEMA enclosure rated for plenum use. A local disconnect shall be provided at each VAV 13 controller to individually disconnect control power without interruption to any other digital controller. 14 15 Agency Listing: UL 916, UL 864. Note: UL 864 is to control unit for Fire Protective Signaling System. 16 17 SURGE PROTECTION 18 19 Provide surge and transient protection consisting of devices installed externally to digital controllers and 20 operator workstations. 21 22 Power line surge protection surge suppressors, external to digital controller, shall be installed on all 23 incoming AC power. Surge suppressor shall be rated by UL 1449, and have clamping voltage ratings 24 below the following levels: 25 Normal Mode (Line to Neutral): 350 volts. 26 Common Mode (Line to Ground): 350 volts. 27 28 Telephone and Communication Line Surge Protection: 29 Metal oxide varistor (MOV) protection or equivalent, rated for the application, shall be installed at 30 the equipment. Additional protection, gas tubes rated for the application, shall be installed within 31 three feet of the building cable entrance or within three feet of the telephone company's network 32 interface. 33 34 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection: 35 Controllers shall have sensor and control wiring surge protection with optical isolation, metal oxide 36 varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche devices. Fuses are not permitted for surge protection. 37 38 WIRING 39 40 Provide complete electric wiring for temperature control apparatus, including transformer primaries. 41 Control circuit conductors which run in the same conduit as power circuit conductors shall have the same 42 insulation level as power circuit conductors. 43 44 AC Control Wiring 45 46 Control wiring for 24 volt circuits shall be insulated stranded copper 18 AWG minimum and shall be 47 rated for 300 VAC service. 48 49 Wiring for 120 volt circuits shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 600 VAC service. 50 51 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -13 1 DDC Analog Signal Wiring: 2 3 Analog signal wiring for analog inputs and analog outputs shall be 18 AWG single or multiple 4 twisted pair. Each pair greater than one shall be 100 percent shielded, and have 20 AWG drain 5 wire. An exception is direct connect RTD wiring, which shall be 18 AWG minimum twisted pair, 100 6 percent shielded, and with 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation rated to 300 VAC. 7 Cables shall have an overall aluminum polyester or tinned- copper cable shield tape, overall 20 8 AWG tinned copper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation rated to 300 VAC. 9 10 Plenum Cable: 11 12 Plenum cable shall be UP approved and subjected to prior approval from the local jurisdiction for 13 installation. Plenum cable for use with the DDC system analog, digital, and communications 14 signals shall be permissible only above suspended (accessible) ceilings. 15 16 CONTROL COMPONENTS 17 18 Temperature Sensors: 19 20 Duct or pipe temperature sensors shall be nickel or platinum type RTD's, factory calibrated within 21 plus or minus 0.5 degrees F. 22 23 Use insertion elements in ducts not affected by temperature stratification. Use averaging elements 24 in ducts prone to stratification with the length at least the larger dimension of the duct cross section. 25 26 Insertion elements for liquids shall be stainless steel encased and matched with the temperature 27 wells installed, with a minimum insertion depth of 2-1/2 inches. 28 29 Provide outside air temperature sensors with watertight inlet fitting, shielded from the direct rays of 30 the sun. 31 32 Room Temperature sensors shall be analog or thermistor type complete with mounting bracket 33 and blank vertical locking cover. Each room temperature sensor shall be provided with an integral 34 terminal jack for portable operator's terminal interface. Provide momentary push -button override 35 switches integral with the room temperature sensor and cover. Covers shall be ivory. 36 37 Spans and ranges: 38 Temperature: 39 50 degree F span: Room, chilled water, cooling coil discharge air, return air 40 sensors. 41 100 degree F span: Outside air, hot water, heating coil discharge air, mixed air 42 sensors. 43 200 degree F span: High temperature hot water, heating hot water, chilled/ hot 44 water system sensors. 45 46 Pressure: 47 -0.5 to 0.5 inches of water differential range: Static pressure of rooms. 48 0 to 5 inches of water differential range: Duct static pressure. 49 0 to 60 PSI differential range: Circulating pumps. 50 51 15975 -14 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Differential Static Pressure Sensors/ Transmitters: 2 Provide integral pressure transducer and transmitter. Output of pressure instrument shall be 4 -10 3 mA signal proportional to the pressure span. Accuracy shall be 1 percent. Linearity shall be 0.1 4 percent. Supply voltage shall be 24 V. Unidirectional with range not exceeding 150 percent of 5 maximum expected input. 6 7 Terminal Box Control Components: 8 Actuator: Provide DDC manufacturer's standard DDC system compatible VAVor CAV terminal unit 9 damper actuator for each terminal unit. Terminal unit actuator shall be provided to the terminal box 10 manufacturer for factory installation. 11 12 Air Flow Sensor: Sensor shall be provided by terminal unit manufacturer. 13 14 Differential Pressure Transducer: Provide DDC manufacturer's standard DDC system compatible 15 VAV terminal unit differential pressure transducer for each VAV terminal unit. Terminal unit 16 pressure transducer shall be provided to the terminal box manufacturer for factory installation. The 17 differential pressure transducer shall accept air flow measurement signals from the terminal box air 18 flow sensor. 19 20 Actuators: 21 Provide for all motor operated dampers, valves and AHU Fan Flow Control Devices, of sufficient 22 size and type, matched to the application: 23 24 Electric actuators: Provide analog, current proportional, 2- position or 3 point floating type, 25 suitable for pulse width modulation control with solid state positioner to stop automatically 26 at end of travel. Complete with a permanently lubricated gear train. Provide spring return 27 to normally -open or normally closed on loss of control power as specified in point list. 28 29 Pneumatic actuators: Provide proportional or two position actuators with spring return to 30 normal position on loss of control air. Positive positioning devices shall be provided for 31 sequencing between controlled devices to prevent overlap and/ or for controlled variable 32 stability. 33 34 Control Dampers: 35 Provide low leakage control dampers where dampers are not furnished with package units. 36 Damper leakage rate shall not exceed 0.5 percent of damper size based on 2000 fpm duct velocity 37 when closed against 4.0 inches water gauge static pressure. Complete with extruded aluminum, 38 stainless steel or zinc coated steel blades, with extruded vinyl or rubber edge seals. Blade ends 39 sealed with aluminum or stainless steel "arc" seals. External frame of heavy gauge welded steel 40 with 1/4 -inch plate bearing bars and bronze insert bearings. 41 42 Control Valves: 43 Two -way or three -way proportional type. Valves shall be modulating plug type, with bodies 44 designed for not less than 125 psig working pressure or 150 percent of the system operating 45 pressure, whichever is greater. Bronze body for sizes up to 2 inches. Iron body for sizes 2 -1/2 46 inches and larger. Valves shall provide effective control at any pressure differential to 50 psig. 47 Pressure drop not to exceed 5 psig at maximum flow unless indicated otherwise. Provide with 48 visual stem position indicator. 49 50 Control Panels: 51 Provide for controls and instruments. Panels shall be UL listed, NEMA type rated for the 52 application and location, surface or flush mounted panels as indicated, with key locked door with 53 continuous hinge. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. 54 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -1 1 Differential Pressure Switches: 2 3 Filter Status: Diaphragm operated which actuate a SPDT snap action switch. A field adjustable 4 pressure set point with a range suitable for air flow status applications. The switch voltage and 5 current rating shall be double the load requirements. Provide sensing tubes connected to tips with 6 multiple holes and bulkhead fittings specifically designed for air flow sensing. 7 8 High Limit Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure switches shall incorporate gauge and switch 9 point indicator(s) for continuous indication of applied pressure and switch settings. Diaphragm 10 operated with switching accomplished by photocell controlled relays. Set point adjustment 11 controlled by knobs. Complete with high set point latching circuit and external push -button switch 12 for manual reset. Range 0 -8 inches water gauge. Dwyer Series 3000 or approved substitute. 13 14 Pump Status: Provide with Form -C contacts, automatic reset, screw adjustable trip point. All 15 components non corrosive. Wetted parts shall consist of a Buna -N diaphragm with 0-ring seal. 16 Complete with NEMA rated enclosure suitable for the application and location. Select the 17 operating range to match the function. Provide an instrument gauge valve for each input. 18 19 Current Transmitters: 20 For equipment status. Designed to convert monitored AC current to a proportional DC voltage of 21 0 -5 volts or 4 -20 mA output. Range 1 to 10, 50, 100 Amps as required. Accuracy 2 percent of full 22 scale. Repeatability plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. Response time 100 milliseconds. 23 24 Control Relays: 25 Shall be rated for the application, with a minimum of two sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in a 26 dustproof enclosure. Relay shall be rated for a minimum life of one million operations. Operating 27 time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 milliseconds or less. Relays shall be 28 equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of rated coil 29 voltage. 30 31 Low Limit (Freeze Control) Thermostat: 32 DPDT, incremental bulb type, actuates if any 12 -inch maximum increment is below its setting, 33 adjustable setting, manual reset. Provide capillary element length equaling at least one foot of 34 capillary length for each 2.14 square feet of coil face area. One DPDT contact shall shut down the 35 equipment and the second element shall signal the DDC system. 36 37 Contactors: 38 Single coil electrically operated. Contacts shall be double break silver to silver. Number of 39 contacts and rating shall be selected for the application intended. Operating and release times 40 shall be 100 milliseconds or less. Contactors shall be equipped with coil transient suppression 41 devices to limit transients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage. 42 43 Temperature Indication: 44 Provide bi -metal dial type indicator suitable for duct- mounted air sensing as indicated. If readability 45 is not possible with duct- mounted thermometers, provide remote bulb dial type mounted for easy 46 reading and labeled to identify the duct connected. 3 -inch dial. Range 0 -160 degrees F. 47 Accuracy, 2 percent of full range. 48 49 Pressure Indication: 50 Provide gauge range so normal pressures are approximately equal to the midpoint on the scale, 51 unless otherwise indicated. 4 -1/2 inch dial. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the 52 range. Gauges for differential pressure measurements shall have two sets of pressure taps and 53 zero point adjustment. 54 15975 -16 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Transformer: 2 Provide transformers in conformance to UL 506. Power digital controllers on the primary 3 communication trunk from dedicated circuit breakers. Provide a fuse cutout on the secondary side 4 of the transformer. 5 6 Nameplates: 7 Laminated plastic 1/16-inch thick with neatly cut beveled edges and screwed to panel. Color shall 8 be black with 3/8 -inch white engraved block lettering. 9 10 Duct Smoke Detectors: 11 Provide duct mounted smoke detectors in supply and return air ducts in accordance with NFPA 12 90A and the Uniform Mechanical Code. Design for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the 13 ionization principle, responsive to both invisible and visible particles of combustion, and not 14 susceptible to operation by changes in relative humidity. Provide UL listed or FM approved 15 detectors for duct installation. Provide duct detectors with an approved duct housing, mounted 16 external to the duct, and with perforated sampling tubes extending across the width of the duct. 17 Provide 120 VAC power supply unit integral with duct housing. Detectors shall have test port or test 18 switch. Provide each detector with a visible indicator lamp that lights when the detector is activated. 19 Activation of duct detector shall cause shutdown of the associated air handling unit and signal the 20 DDC system of alarm condition. Reset shall be manual, through a remote mounted push button. 21 22 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT INTERFACE 23 24 The DDC system shall interface with packaged air conditioning units. Provide all hardware, 25 software and wiring required for DDC interface. Coordinate DDC requirements with Section 15780 26 "Packaged Heating and Cooling Equipment". 27 28 ENERGY CONSUMPTION MONITORING 29 30 Electrical Pulse Meter 31 Provide all hardware, software and wiring for DDC interface. Electrical power demand shall be 32 available at the computer screen. Provide electrical demand control and duty cycling program 33 from the EMS to the HVAC equipment. Demand set points shall be adjustable. Provide the 34 interface to the utility meter. Coordinate the DDC requirements with the Electrical Contractor. 35 36 PART 3 EXECUTION 37 38 EXAMINATION 39 40 Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete 41 to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. 42 43 Notify the Owner Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of 44 the work. 45 46 INSTALLATION (GENERAL) 47 48 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 49 50 Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections, installation and programming 51 required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point 52 schedules. 53 54 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -17 1 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS 2 3 Locate and install components for easy accessability. In general, mount 60 inches (panels measured from 4 the top edge) above the floor with a minimum of 3' -0" clear access space in front of units. 5 6 All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from 7 vibration and high temperature. 8 9 Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags to all instruments with point address 10 designation, system reference and description. 11 12 Pipe Sensors: 13 Provide brass wells for pipe sensors suitable for the working pressure and velocity. Locate wells to 14 sense continuous flow conditions. Do not install wells using extension couplings. Where pipe 15 diameters are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in the piping at elbows. Provide 16 thermal transmission material within the well. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal 17 transmission material and allow for easy removal. Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 18 percent of pipe normal flow area. Increase pipe size as required to avoid restriction. 19 20 Control Panels 21 22 Provide for controls and instruments at equipment and in mechanical rooms. 23 Install temperature gauges and pilot lights flush on the cabinet door. Install controllers, switches, 24 timers, transformers, and relays in the interior of the cabinet, mounted on a steel or aluminum 25 subpanel or on the back panel of the cabinet. provide and label control parameters and test points 26 within the panel for total evaluation of system operation. Electrical controls shall be wired to 27 numbered screw type terminal strips. 28 29 Temperature Devices 30 31 Room Sensors: 32 Install approximately where indicated, coordinated with furnishing plans. Include in the 33 contract the cost for relocation of up to six sensors if sensors are found to be in poor 34 sensing locaitons or in conflict with equipment or furnishings. 35 Temperature Indication: 36 Provide temperature indication at each duct temperature sensor, except room sensors, as 37 indicated. 38 Duct Sensors: 39 Locate to accurately sense air temperature. Do not locate sensors in dead air spaces or 40 positions obstructed by equipment. Where an extended surface element is required to 41 sense the average or lowest air temperature, position and securely mount sensor within 42 duct in accordance with sensor manufacturer's recommendations. Temperature sensing 43 elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and supports. Provide separate duct 44 flange for each sensing element. Securely seal ducts where elements or connections 45 penetrate duct. Mount sensor enclosures to allow easy removal and servicing without 46 disturbance or removal of duct insulation. 47 48 Pressure Devices: 49 50 Pressure Indication: 51 Provide pressure indication at each pressure differential sensor, as indicated. 52 Pipe Sensors: 53 Provide with isolation gauge valves for each input. 54 15975 -18 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONTROL WIRING AND CONDUIT 2 3 All control wiring, all conduit for control wiring, and all miscellaneous accessory equipment for control wiring 4 systems shall be provided by the Controls subcontractor as part of the control system. Materials and 5 installation techniques shall conform to NFPA 70 and all local Code requirements. Conduit for control 6 wiring shall be EMT conduit, of the same types, standards and quality as rigid conduit specified in Division 7 16 for rigid power wiring conduit. 8 9 All wire in or through Mechanical Rooms, in finished spaces, on roofs, in walls, below grade and inside 10 equipment (except inside control wiring compartments or control panels) shall be installed in conduit and 11 properly supported. Label wire groups to match corresponding wiring diagrams. 12 13 Plenum Cable: 14 Plenum cable type, installation methods and use shall be subject to City and State Codes and 15 Regulations. Plenum cables shall be used only within accessible ceiling spaces; otherwise, wiring 16 shall be installed in conduit. Within accessible ceiling spaces, support plenum cable directly to the 17 wall or slab on 4 -foot centers, or support from ceiling suspension wires on 4 -foot centers. Do not 18 attach cables to pipes or ducts, or lay on ceilings. 19 20 Instrumentation and communication cable shall not be run in the same conduit as power wiring. 21 22 Communication Cable: 23 Provide all communication wiring between operator workstation and stand alone DDC panels, 24 between stand alone DDC panels and application specific controllers such as AHU, Unitary or VAV 25 digital controllers. All communication cable shall be checked for continuity, grounding, and 26 shielding. Local area network communication wiring between operator workstations and stand 27 alone DDC panels shall be in conduit. 28 29 Grounding: 30 Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground. Grounding of the green AC ground wire, 31 at the breaker panel, alone is not adequate. Run metal conduit from controller panels to adequate 32 building grounds. Ground sensor drain wire shields at controller end. 33 34 Provide all control power requirements for all control components from the nearest adequate electrical 35 panel. Coordinate control power requirements with the Electrical Contractor. 36 37 DDC wiring, cables and conduits shall be identified with a circumferential band (Seton PST 1 or equal) on 38 ten foot centers. The designation shall match those on the shop and installation drawings. 39 40 Unit control wiring interface and pressure sensing piping shall be installed in accordance with the 41 manufacturer's instructions. Provide control wiring interface and piping for the following: 42 Duct and Building Static Pressure Sensor Piping 43 44 DDC POINT SUMMARY 45 46 Provide all database generation. 47 48 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -19 1 Dynamic Color display: 2 Provide all dynamic graphic displays necessary at operator workstation. System graphical displays 3 shall be color coded. Provide outside air temperature indication on all air handling unit displays. 4 As a minimum, the following shall be provided: 5 Site Plan: 6 Overall Site Plan, including identification of all associated buildings. 7 Building Floor Plan: 8 Each floor plan graphic shall contain all graphical displays, equipment with area served, 9 and locations associated with that building floor plan. 10 Detailed dynamic color and data system graphics shall be provided for each piece of mechanical 11 equipment, including air handling units, chilled water system, heating water system, return fans, 12 exhaust fans, domestic water systems, and make -up air units. 13 14 Run Time Totalization: 15 At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan, return fan, 16 exhaust fan, hot water pump, chilled water pump, condenser water pump, and domestic water 17 pump. Warning limits for each point shall be entered with user defined messages. 18 19 Trend Log: 20 All binary and analog points shall be trended. Historical archiving of owner selected points shall be 21 provided at the operator workstation with the capability of transfer to graphic format representation. 22 23 AlarmPoints: 24 All analog inputs (High/ Low Limits) and selected digital inputs alarm points shall be prioritized, 25 printed, routed, (auto -dial) with alarm message as selected by the user. Loss of communication 26 network shall also initiate an alarm. If the numbers are busy, automatic retry until successful. 27 Provide all software timers necessary to prevent false alarms. 28 29 Heavy Equipment Delays and Power Failure Restart Software: 30 Each stand alone DDC panel shall be provided with heavy equipment and power failure restart 31 application software. Each stand alone DDC panel shall start respective equipment in sequence 32 and shall be time based and not dependent on prior system start-up. 33 34 Database Save: 35 Provide back -up database for all stand alone DDC panels at the operator workstation computer 36 hard disk. Provide additional back -up database for each stand alone DDC panel on floppy disk. 37 38 Field Quality Control and Testing: 39 40 Demonstrate compliance of the HVAC control system with the Contract Documents. Calibrate 41 instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using calibrated test equipment. Adjust 42 controls and equipment to maintain conditions indicated, to perform the functions indicated, and to operate 43 in the sequence specified. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to 44 perform calibration and site testing. Ensure that tests are performed by competent employees of the DDC 45 system installer or the DDC system manufacturer regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC 46 systems. Calibrate field equipment and verify equipment and system operation before placing the system 47 on -line. Field testing shall include the following: 48 49 System Inspection: 50 Observe the HVAC system in its shutdown condition. Check dampers and valves for 51 proper normal positions. Document each position for the test report. 52 53 54 15975 -20 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Calibration Accuracy and Operation of Inputs Test: 2 Check for proper calibration and operation of each input instrument. For each sensor, 3 record the reading at the sensor, and using a traceable test instrument, record the reading 4 at the digital controller. Document each reading for the test report. 5 6 Operation of Outputs Test: 7 Check the operation of each output to verify correct operation. Command analog outputs 8 to minimum range, such as 4 mA, and maximum range, such as 20 mA. Measure and 9 record commanded and actual output values. Document each command and result for 10 the test report. 11 12 Actuator Range Adjustment Test: 13 With the digital controller, apply a control signal to each actuator and verify that the 14 actuator operates properly from its normal position to full range of stroke position. Record 15 actual spring ranges and normal positions for all modulating control valves and dampers. 16 Include documentation in the test report. 17 18 Digital Controller Start-up and Memory Test: 19 Demonstrate that programming is not lost after a power failure, and that digital controllers 20 automatically resume proper control after a power failure. 21 22 Surge Protection: 23 Show that surge protection, meeting the requirements of this Section, has been installed 24 on incoming power to the digital controllers and on communication lines. 25 26 Application Software Operating Test: 27 Test compliance of the application for: 28 Ability to communicate with the digital controllers, uploading and downloading of 29 programs. 30 Text editing program: Demonstrate the ability to edit the control program off-line. 31 Reporting of alarm conditions: Cause alarm conditions for each alarm, and 32 ensure that the workstation receives all alarms. 33 Reporting trend and status reports: Demonstrate ability of software to receive and 34 save trend and status reports. 35 Execution of Sequence of Operation: Furnish graphic trends to show the 36 Sequence of Operation is executed in correct order. Demonstrate that the HVAC 37 system operates properly through the complete Sequence of Operation; for 38 example, seasonal, optimal start/ warm -up, and occupied/ unoccupied modes of 39 operation. Demonstrate proper control system response for abnormal conditions 40 for which there is a specified response by simulating these conditions. 41 Demonstrate that hardware interlocks and safeties work. Demonstrate that the 42 control system performs the correct sequence of control after a loss of power. 43 Control loop stability and accuracy: Furnish graph trends of control loops to 44 demonstrate that the control loop is stable and that set points are maintained. 45 Control loop response shall respond to set point changes and stabilize within 1 46 minute. 47 Opposite season test: Testing shall be repeated for each of the two opposite 48 seasons of the year. 49 Document all tests with detailed results. Provide a statement that all corrective action has been taken, that 50 all required adjustments to provide a system which meets the requirements of this Section have been 51 completed, and that re- testing of points and devices has been completed, indicating that all tests meet the 52 specified requirements. Final test results shall all be included in the test report. 53 54 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -21 1 TRAINING 2 3 Upon completion of the work, furnish the services of a competent technician regularly employed by the 4 DDC manufacturer for the instruction of facility personnel in the operation and maintenance of each DDC 5 system. Prior to beginning instruction, the instructor, if not familiar with the project, shall spend sufficient 6 time at the site to thoroughly familiarize himself with the project and to confirm that all systems are 7 complete, adjusted, tested and operating correctly. 8 9 Furnish a written test plan and training schedule for approval 15 days prior to instruction operating 10 personnel, including the following: 11 Recommended training schedule for operators workstation, stand alone DDC controllers, 12 application specific digital controllers and field components. 13 Qualification of instructors. 14 List of all training materials and aids. 15 List of customer training schools offered by the DDC manufacturer. 16 17 Provide all training materials necessary for a minimum of 2 facility personnel, including: 18 Operations and Maintenance Manual for controls. 19 As -Built control diagrams. 20 Detailed description of the system. 21 Complete listing, and graphical logic diagrams of all software programs required to 22 perform the Sequence of Operation. 23 Commands, operating and trouble shooting instruction and routine maintenance 24 procedures. 25 26 Training I: 27 Provide 12 hours of classroom training using training materials. Each attendee should be able, at 28 the conclusion of this training, to perform elementary operations, with guidance, and to describe the 29 general hardware architecture and functionality of the system. This course shall include, but not be 30 limited to, the following: 31 Theory of operations. 32 Hardware architecture. 33 Operation of the system. 34 Operator commands. 35 Control sequence programming. 36 Database entry. 37 Reports and logs. 38 Alarm reports. 39 Diagnostics. 40 41 Training II: 42 Provide training for operator equipment at the project site for a total of 12 hours of instruction. This 43 course shall consist of hands -on training under the constant monitoring of the instructor. Course 44 content should duplicate the Training I course as applied to the installed system. Upon completion 45 of this course, each attendee should be fully proficient in the operation of each system function. 46 This course shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 47 Physical layout of each piece of hardware. 48 Troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures. 49 Repair instructions. 50 Preventative maintenance procedures and schedules. 51 Calibration procedures. 52 53 15975 -22 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 2 3 I 4 5 6 I 7 8 9 10 I 11 12 13 14 I 15 16 17 I 18 19 20 21 1 22 23 24 1 25 26 27 28 I 29 30 31 is 32 33 34 35 1 36 37 38 ii 39 40 41 42 1 43 44 45 46 1 47 48 49 1 50 51 52 53 1 54 1 1 Training III: Provide training for a total of 8 hours between 3 and 6 months following the completion of the initial training sessions. Structure the course to address specific topics that the facility personnel need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of the system. Questions shall be requested from facility personnel two weeks prior to beginning the instruction, so that the instruction can include all areas where questions exist. This instruction shall be held at the facility. Upon completion of this instruction, attendees should be fully proficient in operation of the system and have no unanswered questions regarding operation of the installed system. PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION GENERAL All controls shalt be by the DDC system unless indicated to be by local controls. The DDC system shall schedule each system or zone independently according to the user's operating schedule. All operating schedules shall be confirmed with the user and adjusted as necessary. AIR CONDITIONING UNIT General: The DDC system shall schedule air conditioning unit optimal start/ warm -up, and occupied/ unoccupied modes of operation. The air conditioning unit shall be provided with factory furnished temperature and static pressure controls. The DDC system shall interface ACU through auxiliary contacts for monitoring and control. Optimal Start/ Warm -up Mode: The DDC system shall signal air conditioning unit for optimal start/ warm -up mode based on outdoor and respective zone indoor temperature conditions to establish day temperature set point prior to occupancy. Air conditioning unit shall operate to maintain warm -up discharge air temperature set point. DDC system shall activate CAV terminal unit fans and CAV and VAV teminal unit fans and all zone heating coils and open primary air dampers to 100 percent design cfm. DDC system shall also activate the domestic hot water systems as specified herein. Interlocked exhaust fans shall remain "Off" during the warm -up mode. Occupied Mode: The DDC system shall signal air conditioning unit for occupied mode based on time of-day schedule program. The discharge air temperature shall be reset to the highest temperature that will provide adequate cooling for the warmest zone. Associated exhaust fans shall be started and run continuously during the occupied mode. Minimum Outside Air Ventilation: Air conditioning unit controller shall maintain minimum outside air ventilation rate during the Occupied mode. Outside air dampers shall remain closed during the Warm -up and unoccupied modes. Discharge Air Temperature Controls (Occupied Mode): Air conditioning unit controller with input from the supply air temperature sensor modulates economizer control dampers and cycles DX cooling in sequence to maintain discharge air temperature set point. DDC system shall monitor interior space temperatures and reset discharge air temperature set point in accordance with warmest zone conditions as follows: Warmest Interior Zone Temp. Supply air Temp. 70 F 65 F Maximum 76 F 60 F Minimum 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -23 1 Supply air temperature set point shall be linear between specified warmest interior zone 2 temperature parameters. DDC controller shall limit the supply air temperature set point from 3 dropping below or exceeding the set points indicated. DDC system shall include relays and control 4 devices necessary for the air conditioning unit controller to maintain desired discharge temperature 5 as the outside air temperature changes. Coordinate requirements with ACU controls provided. 6 7 Static Pressure Controls: 8 Air conditioning unit controller shall maintain supply duct and building space static pressure set 9 points. 10 11 Space Temperature Controls: 12 See "Terminal Unit Controls 13 14 Unoccupied Mode: 15 Unoccupied mode shall be based on a time of-day schedule program. DDC system shall signal 16 the air conditioning unit to shut down. Fan powered terminal units shall maintain night setback 17 heating set point as specified herein. 18 19 Temporary Override: 20 Upon activation of override push button at space temperature sensor, air conditioning unit system 21 shall be started in the occupied mode of operation for a period of two hours. The DDC system 22 shall have the capability to independently disable temporary override schedule at each temperature 23 sensor. 24 25 Safeties: 26 Safety device shutdown shall be independent of DDC system controls. 27 Freeze protection thermostat shall shut down air conditioning unit if the coil leaving air 28 temperature drops below 35 degrees F. 29 Duct smoke detectors shut down air conditioning unit upon smoke detection. 30 31 Monitoring: 32 The DDC system shall monitor air conditioning unit as indicated. 33 34 HEAT PUMPS 35 36 General: 37 The Ddc system shall schedule the heat pump operation similar to the air conditioning unit. 38 Occupied mode and Warm -up mode operation shall be the same as the air conditioning unit, 39 except that the heat pumps are single zone, with heating integral to the heat pumps. 40 Unoccupied operation shall be similar to the air conditioning unit, with intermittent operation of the 41 heat pump fan to maintain minimum temperature. 42 43 TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL 44 45 Occupied Mode: 46 Terminal unit fans shall be interlocked to run continuously with air conditioning unit operation. On 47 call for cooling, DDC controller shall modulate primary air damper open to maintain cooling set 48 point of 74 degrees F (range 72 -78 degrees F). On call for heating, primary air damper is 49 modulated to minimum. On further call for heating, electric heating coif modulates on to maintain 50 heating set point of 70 degrees F (range 65 -72 degrees F). 51 52 15975 -24 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unoccupied Mode: 2 DDC controller shall monitor space temperature and upon drop in space temperature to 55 3 degrees F, terminal unit fan shall be activated and electric heating coilis activated. Terminal unit 4 shall continue to operate under the heating mode until the space temperature exceeds 60 degrees 5 F. 6 7 EXHAUST FAN CONTROL 8 9 Toilet Room Exhaust Fans: 10 Toilet Room exhaust fans shall be software interlocked to run continuously during the occupied 11 mode. 12 13 Miscellaneous exhaust fans shall be manually controlled through local wall switches. 14 15 Domestic Hot Water Heating System: 16 17 Optimal Start/ Warm -up: 18 Hot water circulation pump shall be software interlocked to operate continuously with air 19 conditioning unit optimal start/ warm -up, occupied, or temporary override modes of operation. 20 21 Unoccupied Mode: 22 Hot water circulation pump shall be disabled during air conditioning unit unoccupied mode of 23 operation. 24 25 PART 5 DDC POINT LIST 26 27 GENERAL 28 29 As a minimum, provide the following points for monitoring and control. Provide additional points as required 30 to accomplish the Sequence of Operation. 31 32 ABBREVIATIONS 33 34 ACU Air Conditioning Unit 35 Al Analog Input 36 AO Analog Output 37 AUX Auxiliary Device or Contact 38 CR Control Relay 39 CT Current Transmitter 40 DDC Direct Digital Control 41 DI Digital lnput 42 DP Differential Pressure Switch 43 DPS Differential Pressure Sensor/ Transmitter 44 DO Digital Output 45 FPT Freeze Protection Thermostat 46 MOD Modulating Damper 47 NC Normally Closed 48 NO Normally Open 49 OSA Outside Air 50 PB Push Button 51 PS Pressure Sensor/ Transmitter 52 SD Smoke Detector (Duct) 53 T Space Temperature Sensor/ Transmitter 54 TS Temperature Sensor/ Transmitter 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -25 1 TCV Temperature Control Valve 2 VAV Variable Air Volume 3 4 POINT LIST 5 6 Air Conditioning Unit ACU -1 7 8 Description Tvae Device 9 10 ACU -1 Optimal Start/ Warm -up DO AUX 11 ACU -1 Occupied Mode DO AUX 12 Supply Fan Status DI AUX 13 Exhaust Fan Status DI AUX 14 Supply Air Temperature Al TS 15 Supply Air Temperature Set Point Reset AO AUX 16 Minimum Outside Air Position Reset AO AUX 17 ACU -1 Summary Alarm D1 AUX 18 ACU -1 DX Cooling Summary Alarm DI AUX 19 Freeze Protection Thermostat DI FPT 20 Duct Smoke Detectors DI SD 21 Filter Status DI DP 22 23 Typical Heat Pump Control 24 25 Description Type Device 26 27 ACU -1 Optimal Start/ Warm -up DO AUX 28 ACU -1 Occupied Mode DO AUX 29 Supply Fan Status DI AUX 30 Supply Air Temperature Al TS 31 Supply Air Temperature Set Point Reset AO AUX 32 Minimum Outside Air Position Reset AO AUX 33 ACU -1 Summary Alarm DI AUX 34 ACU -1 DX Cooling Summary Alarm DI AUX 35 Freeze Protection Thermostat DI FPT 36 Duct Smoke Detectors DI SD 37 Filter Status DI DP 38 39 40 Typical Terminal Unit Control 41 42 Description Tyne, Device 43 44 Room Temperature Al T 45 Override Mode Switch DI PB 46 Primary Air Damper AO MOD 47 Primary Air Flow (CFM) Al DPS 48 Heating Coil Control Valve AO TCV 49 Terminal Unit Fan DO CR 50 51 15975 -26 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Typical Exhaust Fan 2 3 Description ape Device 4 5 Exhaust Fan Start/ Stop DO CR 6 Exhaust Fan Status Al CT 7 8 Domestic Hot Water 9 10 Description Type Device 11 12 Heating Water Circulation Temperature Al TS 13 Domestic Hot Water Circulation Pump Start/ Stop DO CR 14 Domestic Hot Water Circulation Pump Status Al CT 15 16 Miscellaneous Monitoring Points 17 18 Description Type Device 19 20 Outside Air Temperature Al TS 21 Fire Alarm Panel DI AUX 22 Electrical consumption (KWH) Pulse PM 23 24 25 ***END OF SECTION*** 26 95112 DDC CONTROL SYSTEM 15975 -27 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15990 TESTING. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 2 3 PART1- GENERAL 4 5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6 7 Provisions of this section 15010 "General Mechanical Requirements" apply to this section. 8 9 DESCRIPTION 10 11 Included in this section are air balancing, acoustical testing, and equipment start-up. 12 13 REFERENCE STANDARDS 14 15 The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to extent referred. 16 17 Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) 18 National Air Balancing Council (NEBB) 19 Sheet metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 20 21 PART 2 PRODUCTS 22 23 Not Used 24 25 PART 3- EXECUTION 26 27 AIR BALANCING 28 29 General: The air systems balancing is included in the work under this contract. The work may be 30 performed by the Contractor, if qualified, or by an approved subcontractor. Qualification of the contractor is 31 to be confirmed by acceptance by the A/E. All costs for this work are to be included in the Base Bid, 32 including the following related Contractor Services. 33 34 Before balancing and testing can commence, check all fans, pumps, and other rotating equipment for 35 proper rotation and lubricate in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and operate all fans, 36 pumps, and auxiliary equipment for a minimum of one week. The Air Distribution System shall be checked 37 out to ensure that each outlet is properly connected to the branch duct, a volume damper exists for each 38 outlet (supply, return and exhaust), and is in the wide -open position, and that all other required volume 39 dampers, at branch duct connections and elsewhere, are installed and are functional. 40 41 Allow adequate time, including time for the Controls Contractor, to provide support services for testing, 42 training and balancing: 43 44 Schedule two (2) weeks for the air balancing, which is to be completed prior to Substantial Completion of 45 the Project. 46 47 Test run all equipment and systems a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours prior to testing and balancing. 48 49 Install new air filters in all units after the test run and before the start of testing and balancing. 50 51 Operate heating, cooling, ventilating and control systems continuously during the testing and balancing. 52 53 Confirm in writing that all wiring and controls for mechanical equipment have been installed and tested. 95112 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 -1 1 Provide control system as- builts including program flow charts. Provide four (4) hours of training by control 2 specialist to balancer. 3 4 AIR BALANCING (NEBB) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES, 5 6 General 7 8 The Balancing Contractor shall be a qualified testing agency. Prior to commencing work under this 9 section of the specifications, the testing agency shall have been approved by the engineer and shall 10 be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council or shall have submitted adequate 11 documentation to satisfy the engineer as to his competence. Minimum qualifications for 12 acceptance shall be the General Membership standards of the Associated Air balance Council 13 (AABC) or the National Environmental Air Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 14 15 Procedures: Procedures, in general, will be in accordance with the AABC "National Standards for 16 Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems." 17 18 Instruments: All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for 19 each instrument will be available for examination. Method of application of instrumentation shall be 20 in accordance with the AABC /NEBB Procedure. 21 22 Work Plan 23 24 Prior to beginning work, the contractor shall review the existing drawings and the actual equipment 25 at the site. 26 27 A work plan shall be submitted for review which lists all equipment, terminals and outlets to be 28 balanced, and which lists the proposed procedures and instrumentation to perform the work. Work 29 plans shall include blank copies of all forms to be used in the balancing report and a sample of the 30 report format, binder and labelling. 31 32 The work plan shall be accepted by the engineer prior to beginning the balancing work. Allow 33 adequate time for work plan review. 34 35 Air Balancing 36 37 System shall be balanced with clean filters. Filter replacement will be done by the Contractor, with 38 coordination by the Balancing Contractor. 39 40 System air volume adjustments shall be made by adjustment of fan speed to the greatest extent 41 possible. Motor sheave changes and belt changes shall be included in the contract amount. Motor 42 replacement shall not be included in the contract amount. If motor changes are required, motor 43 changes will be done by the owner, with coordination by the balancing Contractor. 44 45 Air volume adjustments shall be made by adjustment of volume dampers or splitter dampers, with 46 adjustments made in main ducts as much as possible. Provide and install new volume dampers, 47 or repair existing volume dampers if necessary, as required. 48 49 Air volume measurements shall be made with equipment suited for the velocity and pressure in the 50 duct system, as approved as part of the work plan. 51 52 Pitot tube traverse of main ducts shall be used to verify measurements of the air quantities 53 measured at the air terminals and air outlets. 54 15990 -2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 95112 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Air volumes shall be balanced to within 10 percent of design volume. 2 3 Final position of balancing dampers shall be marked on the duct. 4 Instrument test holes shall be drilled in ducts where required for balancing. Test holes shall be 5 plugged with removable plastic plugs. 6 7 Balancing Reports 8 9 Reports shall include small scale reproduction of floor plans which identify each equipment item 10 and air device included in the Balancing Report. Equipment and air devices shall be numbered to 11 match the numbers used in the Balancing Report. 12 13 List of instrumentation used, with manufacturer, model number, serial number, and calibration 14 records shall be included. 15 16 Report shall include the following information for each air balancing equipment item: 17 Equipment identification 18 Manufacturer of each fan, with size, model number, arrangement, discharge arrangement, 19 fan class, and type of volume control device if any. 20 Fan motor manufacturer, model, horsepower, drive, voltage, phase, rpm, service factor 21 and full load amperage. 22 Design capacities: cfm, inlet static pressure, outlet pressure, fan rpm, and motor 23 amperage. 24 Measured capacities: cfm, inlet static pressure,outlet pressure, fan rpm and motor 25 amperage. 26 27 Report shall include the following information, for each air terminal and air outlet: 28 Terminal or outlet identification 29 Manufacture, type, size, configuration and balancing factors. 30 Design cfm and velocity. 31 Measured cfm and velocity for each intermediate measurement and final measurement. 32 33 A preliminary copy of the balancing report shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. After any 34 required corrections have been completed, three copies of the final report shall be furnished. The 35 final reports shall be in suitably sized, hard sided, three -ring binders with the date, project 36 identification and contractor's identification suitably labeled. The final copies of the balancing report 37 shall be certified by the Balancing Contractor. 38 39 ACOUSTICAL LIMITS AND ACOUSTICAL TESTING 40 41 General 42 43 The Acoustical Testing Contractor shall be a qualified acoustical testing agency. The acoustical 44 Testing Contractor may be the same contractor that provided air balancing, if qualified. The 45 Acoustical Testing Contractor shall have been approved by the Engineer, having submitted 46 documentation demonstrating experience and competence. 47 48 Procedures: Acoustical measurements shall be made with the mechanical equipment on and with 49 the mechanical equipment off, to correct for ambient sound levels. 50 51 Instruments: All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for 52 each instrument shall be available for examination. 53 54 95112 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 -3 1 Work plan 2 3 Prior to beginning testing, the contractor shall review the existing drawings and the actual 4 equipment at the site. 5 A work plan shall be submitted for review which lists all equipment, terminals and spaces to be 6 tested and which lists the proposed procedures and instrumentation to perform the work. Work 7 plans shall include blank copies of all forms to be used in the test report and a sample of the report 8 format, binder and labelling. 9 10 The work plan shall be accepted by the Engineer prior to beginning the acoustical testing. Allow 11 adequate time for work plan review. 12 13 Sound Level Testing 14 15 Scope: Tests to demonstrate compliance with sound requirements shall be made at representative 16 locations throughout the building, wherever questionable noise levels are observed during the 17 course of balancing, and where specifically requested by the Engineer. 18 19 Timing: Sound level measurements shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied, or 20 when activity in surrounding areas and background noise levels in areas tested are at a minimum 21 and relatively free from sudden changes in noise levels. 22 23 Measurements shall be taken with all equipment secured except that being tested. 24 25 The required sound levels shall be measured at any point within a room not less than 6 feet from 26 an air terminal or room unit, and not closer than 3 feet from any floor, wall, or ceiling surface. 27 28 Sound levels attributable to heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shall not exceed the 29 following limits for each type of area: 30 31 NC Level 32 Reading Rooms, Check -out, Conference, Multi- Purpose 30 33 General Offices, Toilets, Locker Rooms, Corridors 35 34 Work room, Storage Areas 40 35 36 Test Report 37 38 Reports shall include small scale reproductions of floor plans which identify locations of acoustical 39 tests. Rooms shall be named and numbered. Plans shall indicate the relationship between the 40 test locations and mechanical equipment. 41 42 List of instrumentation used, with manufacturer, model number, serial number, and calibration 43 records shall be included. 44 45 Report shall include the following information for each acoustical test: 46 47 Test: 48 Source of sound and location 49 Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to measuring instrument. 50 "A" scale readings 51 Equipment being tested turned off (ambient) 52 Equipment being tested turned on (operating condition) 53 15990 -4 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 9511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reading at each specified octave band frequency 2 Equipment being tested turned off (ambient) 3 Equipment being tested turned on (operating condition) 4 Graph showing relationship between pressure levels specified and recorded 5 readings. 6 7 The report shall record all sound data, and their locations, after final adjustments of air systems 8 involved. 9 A preliminary copy of the testing report shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. After any 10 required corrections have been completed, three copies of the final report shall be furnished. The 11 final reports shall be in suitably sized, hard sided, three -ring binders with the date, project 12 identification and contractor's identification suitably labeled. The final copies of the acoustical 13 report shall be certified by the Testing Contractor. 14 15 EQUIPMENT START -UP 16 17 The Mechanical Contractor shall start-up all mechanical equipment. Factory trained and factory authorized 18 service personnel shall supervise the equipment start-up as required. Provide all labor, equipment and 19 supplies. 20 21 Start -up procedure will consist of visual inspection and technical, mechanical, chemical, and electrical tests 22 as deemed necessary by the factory service personnel, with concurrence of the A/E. Coordinate the start- 23 up time with the factory trained personnel, the Owner's representative and the A/E representative in 24 accordance with Section 15010, "General Mechanical Provisions The factory technicians will verify that all 25 equipment is fully operational or arrange repairs if any start-up problems are evident. Once start-up and 26 corrections are complete, provide a letter in accordance with Section 15010, "General Mechanical 27 Provisions 28 29 30 31 ***END OF SECTION*** 32 33 34 35 95112 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 -5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16010 -1 ELECTRICAL 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 1 GENERAL 3 Work Included 4 Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services required to complete the work 5 described herein and shown on the drawings. 6 7 The provisions and intent of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SPECIAL CONDITIONS, and 8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS apply to this work as if specified in this section. Visit the job site 9 for familiarization with all features of the building and site which may affect the execution of the 10 work. Make necessary field measurements and assume full responsibility for their accuracy. 11 12 Permits 13 Purchase the necessary permits, licenses, and approvals required for execution of work and include 14 purchase price in the bid. 15 16 Codes And Standards 17 Execute electrical work in strict accordance with the 1996 edition of the National Electric Code; 18 and Washington State Electrical Rules and Regulations, Chapter 296 -46 WAC dated 19 February 1994; and local ordinances and regulations. 20 21 Assure strict conformity of all electrical equipment, materials, construction methods, tests, and 22 definitions with the established standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and National 23 Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 24 25 Reference Documents 26 These specifications and drawings are intended to cover a completed installation of systems. The 27 omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material for the proper execution of the 28 work in accordance with present practice of the trade shall not relieve the contractor from 29 providing such labor and materials. 30 31 Refer to the drawings and shop drawings of other trades for additional details which affect the 32 proper installation of this work. 33 34 Prenaratory Work 35 Discrepancies: Do not proceed with the work in the event of a discrepancy until resolved by the 36 Engineer. 37 38 Substitutions And Submittals 39 Substitutions the equipment specified herein and shown on the drawings indicates the type, 40 appearance, rating and basic quality desired; this equipment will be the basis for comparison of 41 alternative manufacturers 16010 -2 ELECTRICAL 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 2 Submit complete catalog and technical details for approval. Provide samples of proposed 3 substitution if requested. The contractor shall assume responsibility for any deviation in 4 dimensions or physical characteristics. 5 6 Submittals Submit five (5) copies of a list of materials to the Architect within 15 days after 7 signing the contract. Shop drawings or catalog cuts of panelboards, switchboards, control panels, 8 light fixtures, and any special signal or power systems must be included. Two (2) copies showing 9 any changes or comments will be returned to the contractor. 10 11 Final Document 12 Maintain a set of drawings at the job site showing any deviations in the electrical systems from the 13 original design. Minor changes in branch circuit wiring may be omitted. 14 15 Submit a set of electrical drawings, marked in red to indicate the routing of conduit runs, to the 16 engineer for review at the completion of conduit rough -in and prior to cover. 17 18 Qperating and Maintenance Manuals: 19 Provide three (3) complete operation and maintenance manuals in a hard cover 3 -ring binder. 20 Include catalog cuts of all equipment wiring diagrams for special systems, identification of a 21 source for replacement parts, and a copy of the electrical specifications and drawings (folded to 22 81/4"x 11 Clearly label the front and end covers of the binder with project name, date, and name 23 of contractor. 24 25 Guarantee 26 The contractor shall guarantee the work and all components thereof, excluding incandescent and 27 fluorescent lamps for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the installation. 28 Remedy any defects in workmanship and repair or replace faulty equipment which shall appear 29 within the guarantee period without additional cost to the Owner. Lamps and fluorescent tubes 30 shall be cleaned and defective units replaced at the time of final acceptance. 31 32 Miscel1aneoua 33 Perform all excavation and backfill as may be necessary for the proper installation of the electrical 34 work. 35 36 Allowance: 37 The electrical contractor shall include in the bid an allowance of to two thousand ,two hundred fifty 38 dollars ($2.2501 to be used to defray the costs of any extra electrical work arising during the period 39 of construction. Charges against this sum shall be accounted for, itemized, and approved by the 40 Engineer. Extra work shall include only work not called for or implied by the plans and 41 specifications. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16010 -3 ELECTRICAL 16010 GENERAJPROVISIONS 1 2 2- PRODUCTS 3 4 Materials 5 Furnish new materials unless otherwise noted. Furnish materials which are the standard product of 6 manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. Material of the same type 7 or classification and used for the same purpose shall be of the same manufacturer. Materials shall 8 be labeled or listed by approved testing laboratories, approved by inspection authorities, and rated 9 by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended application. 10 11 3 EXECUTION 12 13 Workmanship 14 Install equipment and materials in a neat and workmanlike manner and align, level, and adjust for 15 satisfactory operation. Install equipment so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, 16 operation, maintenance and repair. 17 18 Clean -Up 19 The premises must be kept free of accumulated materials, rubbish, and debris at all times. Surplus 20 material, tools, and equipment must not be stored at the job site. At the completion of the job, all 21 equipment and fixtures shall be left clean and in proper condition for their intended use. 22 23 Cutting And Patching 24 Provide all openings required for electrical work. 25 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 GENERAL 2 3 Materials 4 Make all necessary provisions for storing materials and equipment at the site to insure the quality 5 and condition of the material to be installed. Utilize only new materials which are free of defects 6 and which arrive at the jobsite unopened in the original container. 7 8 Wiring in raceway 9 Install electrical power wiring in a conduit raceway system. 10 11 Coordination 12 Determine the exact electrical requirements of all equipment from the equipment suppliers prior to 13 rough -in wiring. Refer any discrepancy between the plans and equipment requirements to the 14 Engineer for resolution. 15 16 2 PRODUCTS 17 18 Raceway 19 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 20 Hot dipped galvanized steel. Compression type or threaded fittings. 21 22 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 23 Hot dipped galvanized or sherardized steel. Couplings and connectors shall be Steel set screw 24 type by Steel City or equal. 25 26 Flexible Steel Conduit: 27 Interlocking single strip, hot dipped galvanized or sherardized. Provide liquidtight jacket in damp 28 locations. Fittings to be screw wedge type or liquid -tight type depending on application. 29 30 Rigid Non Metallic Conduit: 31 Rigid PVC, Schedule 40. Fittings to be same material as the raceway. 32 33 Wire And Cable 34 Branch Circuit Conductors: #12 A.W.G. copper minimum unless indicated otherwise. 35 36 Conductors #4 A.W.G. and smaller shall be solid or stranded copper with Code grade insulation 37 and a minimum temperature rating of 75° C., (Type THHN/THWN or equal). 38 39 Conductors #2 A.W.G. and larger shall be aluminum with Code grade insulation and a minimum 40 insulation temperature rating of 75° C., (Type THHN /THWN or equal). 41 16100 1 ELECTRICAL 16100 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 16100 2 ELECTRICAL a100 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 1 Boxes 2 Junction boxes, pull boxes, and outlet boxes shall be pressed steel with knockouts as required with 3 size, depth and shape best suited to the location and intended service. Include plaster or tile rings, 4 as required. Manufacturer: Bower, Raco, Steel City or equal. 5 6 Flush floor boxes shall be triple service type for power, data and telephone. Box shall be stamped 7 steel, concrete tight, adjustable height, with carpet insert. Coordinate carpet insert with carpet 8 installer. Manufacturer: 9 Hubbell #3SFBSS box with #3SFBCGY cover, 3SFBRP duplex plate, 10 and 3SFPTP data plate. 11 12 Wiring Devices 13 Ivory colored devices for general use, brown when installed in service areas or in dark finished 14 walls. 15 16 Wall Switches shall be single pole, double pole, three -way, four way, keyed, locking or 17 weatherproof as indicated on the drawings and shall be AC quiet type with screw terminals and 15 18 ampere, 125/277 Volt rating. 19 20 Receptacles shall be 15 Ampere, 120V duplex in NEMA 5 -15R configuration with screw 21 terminals. 22 23 Approved Mfr. Switch Receptacle 24 Commercial Specification Grade 15 Amp Devices (Back Side Wired) 25 G.E. SP112 GCRB15 26 Hubbell CSB 115 CBRF 15 27 Leviton 1201 5252 28 Pass Seymour 15AC1 5252 29 30 Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacles, Orange Face Color 15A, 125 VAC 31 G.E. 5262I0 32 Eagle IG 5262RN 33 Hubbell IG 5262 34 Leviton 5262IG 35 Pass Seymour IG6200 36 37 Special purpose receptacles: Provide special purpose receptacles with NEMA configuration to 38 match circuit voltage, amperage and number of conductors. 39 40 Wiring Device wall plates: Configuration and number of gangs to match installed devices in a 41 common plate unless noted otherwise. On finished walls us indestructible polycorbonate or high 42 strength scratch resistant thermopolastic. Color to match wiring devices. 43 Sierra RP Series 44 Eagle 5134 Series 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16100 3 ELECTRICAL 16100 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 1 Receptacles in bathrooms, on roofs, and outdoors shall be UL Standard #943 Class A ground fault 2 protected. 3 Hubbell GF5252 or equal 4 5 Exterior areas GFI type duplex receptacle with gasketed weatherproof hinged cover. 6 Hubbell 5205, Pass Seymour WPD -8 or equal. 7 8 Magnetic Starters 9 Full voltage, non reversing, NEMA Size 0, (minimum), with 3 -leg overload protection, integral 120 10 Volt control power transformer, HAND -OFF AUTO selector switch, 1 -N 0., and 1 -N C. auxiliary 11 contact. Enclosure to be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. General 12 Electric #CR306, Square D Class 8536, Westinghouse Class A200. 13 14 Provide thermal overload units for each phase -leg, sized for installed per motor nameplate full -load 15 amps Include a list of all motor horsepower, full -load amps, starter size, and thermal overload size 16 in maintenance manual. 17 18 Combination Starter/Disconnect Switches shall include Magnetic Starter and Motor Protector type 19 circuit breaker. Enclosure to be NEMA 1 for indoor and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. 20 21 Safety switches 22 Single phase, 240 or 120 Volt, 1 HP or less. 20 Amp 1 Pole for 120 Volt, 20 Amp 2 Pole for 240 23 Volt, A.C. Toggle Switch. Hubbell #1221/1222 or equal. 24 25 Fusible or No -Fuse Type as shown on the drawings, 2 or 3 poles, voltage, and amperage to match 26 branch circuit rating. NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor, NEMA 3R for outdoor locations. General 27 Duty for 240 Volt, Heavy Duty for 480 Volt. 28 29 Provide engraved phenolic nameplates for all Safety Switches, indicating equipment served, and 30 branch circuit number, i.e. 31 EXHAUST FAN EF -3, 32 CIRCUIT P3 -25. 33 34 3- EXECUTION 35 36 Coordination 37 Determine the exact electrical requirements of all equipment from the equipment suppliers prior to 38 rough -in wiring. Refer any discrepancy between the plans and equipment requirements to the 39 Engineer for resolution. 40 41 Review all architectural elevations and coordinate outlet locations to clear cabinet work, and trim 42 pieces. Verify exact location with Architect after outlet boxes are installed, prior to conduit rough 43 in. ELECTRICAL 16100 I3ASIC MATERIALS METHODS 1 2 Raceway systems 3 Install raceway types and sizes where listed below: 4 5 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Concealed, above grade, up to 4" trade size. 6 7 Flexible conduit non jacketed: Equipment and fixture connections, dry locations. 8 9 Liquidtight flexible metal conduit: Equipment and fixture connections, exterior, wet, and damp 10 locations. 11 12 Rigid non metallic conduit: Below grade and in concrete and for installation of grounding 13 conductors. 14 15 Surface Metal Raceway: Exposed on finished surfaces. 16 17 Raceway Grounding 18 Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all receptacle raceways, sized in accordance with 19 NEC Article 250 -95. This conductor will be in addition to the grounding path provided by the 20 metallic conduit. 21 22 Install raceway parallel or at right angles to members of building. Run raceways as high as 23 possible unless noted otherwise. Carefully form bends to avoid injuring or flattening raceways. 24 25 Wire And Cable 26 Branch circuit splices may be made with Scotch -Lok type connectors up to #8 AWG size. Utilize 27 Crimp type pressure connectors insulated with tape or prefabricated covers on motor connections 28 and splices of wiring #6 AWG and larger. 29 30 Conduitll Table 31 Insulati AWG 4" 32 THHN, THWN #14 6 10 16 33 #12 4 8 13 34 #10 4 6 11 35 36 Conductors shall be color coded throughout the electrical system as follows: 37 208Y/120 480Y/277 38 Phase A Black Brown 39 Phase B Red Orange 40 Phase C Blue Yellow 41 Neutral White Gray 42 Ground Green Green/Yellow Stripe 43 16100 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 16100 5 ELECTRICAL 1E100 100 BASIC MAIERIALS METHODS 1 Support boxes securely and independently. Mount boxes on building surfaces or support with 2 trapeze hanger. Do not use junction boxes unless the number of bends, pulling length or circuit 3 requirement necessitates their installation. Junction or pull box openings must be accessible. Do 4 not use extension rings to provide Code size space within a new junction box. Provide larger 5 junction boxes as required in lieu of extension rings. Do not intermix raceways and wiring at 6 common junction boxes except at terminal equipment connections. 7 8 Mounting height from the device center above finish floor shall be as listed below unless 9 otherwise shown on the electrical plans. 10 11 Receptacles 16" per A.D.A 12 Wall Switches 46" per A.D.A 13 Telephone Wall Mounted 48" per A.D.A 14 15 Wiring Deviceq 16 Install two or more wiring devices shown in one location under a common plate. Install plates 17 with all edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces. Do not install more than one 18 device in a single -gang position. 19 20 Equipment Connections 21 Connect all rotating and air handling equipment with 30" minimum flexible conduit to provide 22 sound and vibration isolation. 23 24 Temperature Control 25 Coordinate with temperature control contractor regarding necessary interconnections to starting 26 equipment. 27 28 END OF SECTION 1 1 ELECTRICAL 16400 DISTRIBUTION 1 2 1 GENERAL 3 4 5 1.01 WORK IN THIS SECTION 6 Provide service entrance and metering equipment, distribution equipment, and overcurrent 7 protective devices as indicated on the electrical drawings. 8 9 1.02 UTILITY COMPANY COORDINATION 10 Contact the Electrical Utility Company and make all arrangements for the installation of 11 primary service and transformer. Utility Company charges will be paid directly by the 12 owner. 13 14 2 PRODUCTS 15 16 2.01 METERING 17 Provide current transformer compartment and meter sockets as required by the Utility 18 Company. CT's furnished by the Utility Company to be installed by the manufacturer. CT 19 compartment cover shall be sealable. 20 21 2.02 PANELBOARDS 22 Flush or surface mounted as indicated on the drawings. Ground bus in each panel. Main 23 overcurrent device requirements, bus size, number of phases, quantity and rating of 24 subfeed and branch circuit protective devices as indicated on panel schedule. Multi -pole 25 breakers shall be internally connected. Include all mounting hardware for spaces for future 26 devices. Branch circuit over current devices must be mounted in order shown on the Panel 27 Schedule and shall have location shown on the equipment submittal. Provide Door -in -door 28 or Hinged Cover Option for all panels rated 400 Amps or less. 29 30 Distribution Panelboard (Circuit Breaker): 31 480 VAC or Less, 600 Amperes or Greater; Minimum AIC Series Rating: 65,000 32 Amperes 33 34 Approved Mfr. Type 35 Challenger PM4B 36 Cutler Hammer PRL4B 37 General Electric Spectra Series 38 Siemens CDP 39 Square D HC Series (I -Line) 40 41 Distribution Panelboard (Circuit Breaker): 42 480 VAC or Less, 400 Amperes or Less; Minimum AIC Rating: 14,000 Amperes 43 44 Approved Mfr. Type 45 Challenger PM2/PM3a 16400 -1 ELECTRICAL 16400 DISTRIBUTION 1 Cutler Hammer PRL2/PRL3 2 General Electric AE 3 Siemens NHB 4 Square D NEHB 5 6 Branch Circuit Panelboards (Plug -in): 7 240 VAC, 400 Amperes or Less, Minimum AIC Series Rating: 22,000 Amperes 8 9 Approved Mfr, Type 10 Challenger PM1/PM3a 11 Cutler Hammer PRL 1 /PRL3 12 GE AL 13 Siemens LPP 14 Square D NQOD 15 16 2.04 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS: 17 Dry Type Transformers shall be General Purpose, single or three phase, indoor or outdoor, 18 as shown on the electrical plan, with (2) full capacity 2 1/2% taps above and (4) 2 1/2% 19 taps below rated voltage. 15 kVA and less to be rated 115 degrees °C temperature rise; 25 20 kVA and larger shall be rated 150 degrees °C temperature rise. 21 22 Approved Mfr, Typ@ 23 Square D Class 7410 24 Challenger DT- 3/DS -3 25 Cutler Hammer EP/DS3 26 27 28 3 EXECUTION 29 30 3.01 NAMEPLATES 31 Main Panelboard: 32 Provide nameplate for main switchboard. Nameplate shall be engraved phenolic with 33 white letters on a dark background with minimum 3/16" or higher letter height and a 34 minimum of 1/8" spacing between lines. 35 "MDP MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL" 36 480Y/277, 3 Phase, 4 Wire 37 800 Amp 38 ENGINEER: Engineered Electrical Systems, Bellevue, WA 39 CONTRACTOR: 40 DATE: 41 42 Main Switchboard Devices: 43 Provide nameplates to each switchboard switch or circuit breaker device. Per one line 16400 -2 1 1 ELECTRICAL 16400 DISTRIBUTION 1 diagram indicated on the drawing. Nameplate shall be engraved phenolic with white letters 2 on a dark background with minimum 3/16" letter height. 3 "PANEL-PI" 4 "Serving" (From Panel Schedule on Drawing) 5 "Location" (From Panel Schedule on Drawing) 6 7 3.02 PANELBOARDS 8 Provide a typed index of circuits, listing each circuit by proper designation, on back of 9 each cabinet door under plastic cover. Spares and spaces to be entered in pencil. 10 11 Provide nameplates for all controls, switchboard devices, and panelboards. Submit a lister 12 titles to the Engineer for approval before engraving. Nameplates shall be engraved 13 phenolic with white letters on a dark background with minimum 3/16" letter height and a 14 minimum 1" overall height. Include device designation, voltage, amperage, phasing, and 15 disconnect location: 16 17 PANEL P 11 18 "SERVING" (From Panel Schedule on Drawings) 19 "DISCONNECT MAIN SERVICE" 20 21 Provide a complete typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard indicating load served 22 and room number. Spare circuits to be identified in pencil and shall be left in the Off 23 position. Submit copies of all panel Schedules to the Engineer for approval before 24 installing in Panels, 25 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 16400 -3 16500 -1 ELECTRICAL 16500 LIGHT FIXTURES I 1 GENERAL 2 3 Description Of Work 4 Provide new lighting fixtures including stems, auxiliary junction boxes, and additional hardware 5 necessary for a complete installation. 6 7 The fixture catalog numbers listed on the drawings indicate the manufacturer, fixture design, 8 appearance, etc., desired. Lighting fixtures specified will be the basis for comparison in the 9 consideration of fixtures of other manufacturers. 10 11 Lamps 12 Provide all lamps and fluorescent tubes as specified. Refer to the lighting fixture schedule on the 13 electrical drawings for the ordering information of lamps. 14 Approved manufacturers are Westinghouse, Sylvania, and G.E. 15 16 Labels 17 All lighting fixtures shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label and shall be approved for 18 installation in the locations indicated. 19 20 2 PRODUCTS 21 22 General 23 Refer to the lighting fixture schedule on the drawings for lighting fixture manufacturer, and model 24 number. 25 26 Light Fixtures 27 Manufacture and/or assemble all fixture component parts at the manufacturing plant for shipment. 28 Include integrally mounted and/or remote mounted ballast's in the shipment from the fixture 29 manufacturer where ballast's are required for the proper operation of the fixture lamps. 30 31 Ballasts 32 Fluorescent ballast's shall be Solid State, energy efficient type, minimum 90% power factor, 33 maximum 10% total harmonic distortion. 34 Approved Manufacturer: Advance, Motorola or equal. 35 36 Exterior Light Fixtures 37 Exterior lighting fixtures shall be sealed and gasketed and be UL listed, suitable for wet locations, 38 where exposed to the weather and suitable for damp locations, where protected by a roof overhang 39 or similar structure. 40 41 Special Accessori 42 Provide accessories such as plastic frames, stems, canopies, cords, toggle bolts, etc., necessary to 43 mount fixture in a proper and approved method. 44 45 ELECTRICAL 16500 LIGHT FIXTURES 1 3 EXECUTION 2 3 Flush Ceiling Mounted Fixtures 4 Installation of flush mounted fixtures in suspended ceiling systems. Verify the exact ceiling 5 system and provide fixtures compatible with same. Equip all fixtures with locking "Earthquake" 6 type clips to secure the fixtures to the ceiling suspension system, and two (2) independent #12 7 AWG minimum support wires from the fixture to the building structure. 8 9 Suspended Ceiling* 10 Verify the ceiling suspension system and coordinate the fixture installation to match the system 11 installation. 12 13 Surface Mounted Fixtures 14 Securely fasten all surface mounted light fixtures to support at least four (4) times the weight of 15 the fixture. Provide wood blocking behind gypboard or tile ceilings; secure fixtures with toggle 16 bolts through wood blocking. 17 18 Mount square and rectangular fixtures sides parallel to building lines and parallel with ceiling 19 lines. 20 21 Install fluorescent fixtures as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact 22 horizontal alignment, preventing horizontal or vertical deflection, or angular jointing of fixtures 23 installed in continuous rows. 24 25 26 END OF SECTION 27 28 29 30 16500 -2 1 1 2 1- GENERAL 3 4 Description Of Work 5 Provide conduit raceway with pull wire, for all telephone and data outlets. Each outlet shall consist 6 of a 4" square outlet box with single gang plaster ring, finish plate, and 3/4" Conduit Only run to an 7 accessible ceiling or the Telephone Terminal board, as shown on the electrical plan. 8 9 Provide conduit only with pull tape (marked with footage), for incoming Telephone Service. 10 11 2 PRODUCTS 12 13 Terminal Board 14 Telephone/Data terminal boards shall be 3/4" type A -D, fire resistant plywood as shown on the 15 electrical plan. 16 17 3 EXECUTION 18 19 Contact the Telephone Co. and coordinate the installation of telephone service cables. 20 21 END OF SECTION 22 16710 -1 ELECTRICAL 16710 TELEPHONE DATA 1 1 1 1 1 1 16720 -1 ELECTRICAL 16720 FIRE ALARM 1 2 1 GENERAL 3 4 1.01 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 5 Provide a supervised, low voltage multiple zone, non -coded single stage automatic fire 6 detection and alarm system with full battery stand -by, including: 7 8 Manual Alarm Initiating Stations 9 Automatic Heat Detectors 10 Smoke/Ionization Detectors 11 Audible/Visual Horn/Strobe Light Alarm Signals 12 Remote Zone Annunciator 13 14 1.02 Comply with all requirements of the local Fire Marshall. Notify the Architect, prior to the 15 bid, of any additional regulatory requirements. 16 17 2 PRODUCTS 18 19 2.01 Main control cabinet shall be wall mounted and contain all power supplies, control 20 equipment, system indicating lights and zone annunciation. Include full standby battery 21 system per NFPA requirements. 22 Simplex #4002 -8001 23 Edwards #EST -1 series 24 25 2.02 Breakglass stations shall be red, with reset switch and alarm contacts. 26 Simplex #2099 -9201 27 Edwards #270 SPO 28 29 2.03 Audible alarms shall be horns with visual strobe light signal. 30 Simplex #2901 -9840 2903 -9101 2905 -9960 2957 -9145 31 Edwards #885 -DAW. Outside #887 -DAW. 32 33 2.04 Smoke detectors shall be adjustable ionization type. 34 Simplex #2098 35 Edwards #6450A/6451 36 37 2.05 Smoke detectors shall be combination Photoelectric and 135' F heat detection with alarm 38 indicator. 39 Simplex #2098 -9636 40 41 2.06 Heat detectors shall be 135 °F fixed temperature rate of rise. 42 Simplex #2098 -9464 43 Edwards #280 Series 44 ELECTRICAL 1_020 FIRE ALARM 1 2.07 Heat detectors shall be 194 °F fixed temperature rate of rise. 2 Simplex #2098 -9404 3 Edwards #280 Series 4 5 2.08 Central Station Connection: 6 Provide communication system equipment necessary to connect to a UL approved Central 7 Station Monitoring Service. 8 9 2.09 Remote Zone Annunciator with remote trouble unit: 10 Edwards #RTU -4ZA 11 12 2.10 Sprinkler System Monitoring: 13 Connect sprinkler system flow switches to one zone of the fire alarm system master panel. 14 Sprinkler valve tamper switches shall be connected to master station trouble alarm. 15 16 2.11 Approved Manufacturers: Simplex, Edwards or approved equal. 17 18 3 EXECUTION 19 20 3.01 All wiring to be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and code 21 requirements. 22 23 3.02 System Zoning: 24 Provide separate zones for each wing of the facility and for sprinkler system tamper or 25 water flow. 26 27 3.03 Provide complete 1/8" scale floor plan and installation drawings showing routing and size 28 of conduits, number and size of conductors, elevation layout of control panels and 29 annunciators, and wiring schematics. Drawings shall be equal to Signal Equipment 30 Company documents. 31 32 Submit installation drawings to Fire Chief for review and approval prior to rough -in 33 wiring. 34 35 END OF SECTION 36 16720 -2 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16770- PUBLIC ADDRESS 1 2 1 GENERAL 3 4 1 01 Provide a complete sound reception /amplification/distribution system mixer /power 5 amplifier, AM/FM tuner, auxiliary input, and speakers. 6 7 2- PRODUCTS 8 9 2 1 Mixer /power amplifier shall be solid state design with four (4) low impedance microphone 10 and one (1) high impedance inputs, with individual volume control, master gain control, 11 bass, and treble control. Power amplifier shall be rated 35 watts RMS, 20- 20,000 Hz at plus 12 or minus 10 dB. Dukane Model #1Aa635 or equal w/ #2A38 dual input module. 13 14 2.2 AM/FM tuner shall be solid state type in a metal cabinet and contain AFC defeat switch, 2 15 audio output jacks, antenna input for 75 ohms unbalanced or 300 ohms balanced, and a hum 16 and noise level of -55 dB. Raymar #822 or equal. 17 18 2.3 Speakers shall be low profile with 4" cone and 10 oz. magnet. Frequency response shall be 19 40-18,000 Hz, with a power rating of 16 watts of program material. Soundolier #B161-4 20 with #198 -4 backbox and T -bar bridge #81 -4 for acoustical tile ceilings. 21 22 3 EXECUTION 23 24 3.1 Wiring shall be identified by room number, segregated and neatly laced and terminated on 25 terminal blocks. 26 27 3.2 Coordinate interconnection to telephone system for paging input. 28 29 3.3 Provide installation drawings showing the location of all devices, cable size and routing. 30 Include catalog cuts and operating and maintenance manuals. 31 32 33 END OF SECTION 34 16770 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 GENERAL 3 4 1 01 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 The television distribution system shall include all outlets and other parts necessary for the 6 reception and distribution of cable TV. 7 8 Provide underground TV service conduit, with pullwire, from the main telephone service 9 terminal board to the service point at the property line. Conduit shall be Type DB, PVC, 10 and shall be buried at least 24 inches below finished grade. Accurately mark the as -built 11 drawings, with dimensions from landmarks, to indicate the actual route of the conduit. 12 13 2 PRODUCTS 14 15 2.01 Each outlet shall consist of a 4" square outlet box with single gang plaster ring, finish plate, 16 and 3/4" Conduit Only run to an accessible ceiling or the Telephone Terminal board, as 17 shown on the electrical plan. 18 19 TV outlets to be provided by Cable TV Company. 20 21 22 3 EXECUTION 23 24 3 01 Coordinate installation of cable TV service and distribution equipment with Cable TV 25 Company. 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 29 16780 -1 ELECTRICAL 16780 TELEVISION SYSTEM